Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division

go-math-grade-3-chapter-6-understand-division-answer-key

Are you looking everywhere to learn about Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division? This Answer Key includes topics like related multiplication and division facts, repeated subtraction, number of equal groups, and so on. Those who are preparing for the Grade 3 Ch 6 will find the HMH Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division extremely helpful. You can identify your knowledge gap by solving the Questions from 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division

Before you begin your preparation learn the topics included in Grade 3 Go Math Answer Key Chapter Understand Division. You can always look up to Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 6 Key as a reference to clear all your queries. Practice the problems in 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Ch 6 Understand Division and understand the concepts easily.

Lesson 1: Problem Solving • Model Division

Lesson 2: Size of Equal Groups

Lesson 3: Number of Equal Groups

Lesson 4: Model with Bar Models

Lesson 5: Algebra • Relate Subtraction and Division

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 6: Investigate • Model with Arrays

Lesson 7: Algebra • Relate Multiplication and Division

Lesson 8: Algebra • Write Related Facts

Lesson 9: Algebra • Division Rules for 1 and 0

Chapter 6 Review/Test

Model Division Page No 305

Question 1.
Six customers at a toy store bought 18 jump ropes. Each customer bought the same number of jump ropes. How many jump ropes did each customer buy?
__________

Answer: 3 jump ropes

Explanation:

Given that there are Six customers at a toy store bought 18 jump ropes
Each customer bought the same number of jump ropes
To know the number of jump roses that each customer bought
You must place each jump ropes until all the jump ropes are used.
That means 18 jump ropes to all 6 customers
= 18 ÷ 6 = 3
Therefore each customer bought 3 jump ropes

Question 2.
Hiro has 36 pictures of his summer trip. He wants to put them in an album. Each page of the album holds 4 pictures. How many pages will Hiro need for his pictures?
__________

Answer: 9 pages

Explanation:

Hiro has 36 pictures of his summer trip. He wants to put them in an album
Each page of the album holds 4 pictures
Make it into equal groups and put 4 pictures in each page
= 36 ÷ 4 = 9
Thus Hiro need 9 pages for his pictures

Question 3.
Katia has 42 crayons in a box. She buys a storage bin that has 6 sections. She puts the same number of crayons in each section. How many crayons does Katia put in each section of the storage bin?
__________

Answer: 7 crayons

Explanation:

Katia has 42 crayons in a box
She buys a storage bin that has 6 sections
Make 42 crayons as a group and place 1 crayon in each section. Then you get 7 crayons in each section
42 ÷ 6 = 42/6 = 7
Therefore 7 crayons do Katia put in each section of the storage bin

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 305 Q4

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 305 Q5

Model Division Page No 306

Question 1.
Maria buys 15 apples at the store and places them into bags. She puts 5 apples into each bag. How many bags does Maria use for all the apples?
Options:
a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 10

Answer: 3

Explanation:

Maria buys 15 apples at the store and places them into bags
She puts 5 apples into each bag
That means each bag contains 5 apples
Now, Divide the apples into equal groups and place them in each bag
15 ÷ 5 = 3
Therefore Maria uses 3 bags to put 15 apples.

Question 2.
Tom’s neighbor is fixing a section of his walkway. He has 32 bricks that he is placing in 8 equal rows. How many bricks will Tom’s neighbor place in each row?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer: 4

Explanation:

Given: Tom’s neighbor is fixing a section of his walkway
He has 32 bricks that he is placing in 8 equal rows
Now place each brick in all 8 rows  equally and repeat until the bricks are over
32 ÷ 8 = 4
So, you get 4 bricks in each row
Thus the correct answer is option B

Question 3.
Find the unknown factor.
7 × _ = 56
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: 8

Explanation:

Let the unknown factor be x
7 × x = 56
Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 6 Answer Key Division Method img_1

So, the correct answer is option C

Question 4.
How many students practiced the piano more than 3 hours a week?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model Division img 1
Options:
a. 2
b. 6
c. 8
d. 10

Answer: 6

Explanation:

3 students practiced the piano for 4 hours
2 students practiced the piano for 5 hours and
1 student practiced the piano for 6 hours
= 3 + 2 + 1 = 6
The above line plot shows that 6 students practiced the piano for more than 3 hours

Question 5.
Count equal groups to find how many there are.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model Division img 2
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 12
d. 16

Answer: 12

Explanation:

The above figure shows that there are 4 circles and each circle is divided into 3 equal groups
So, multiply number of circles with equal groups
= 4 × 3 = 12
Thus the correct answer is option C

Question 6.
Which is another way to group the factors?
(3 × 2) × 5
Options:
a. (3 + 2) + 5
b. (3 × 2) + 5
c. 3 × (2 + 5)
d. 3 × (2 × 5)

Answer: 3 × (2 × 5)

Explanation:

The another way to group (3 × 2) × 5 is 3 × (2 × 5)
Because there is no change in the symbol and number
So, the correct answer is option D

Size of Equal Groups Page No 311

Use counters or draw a quick picture. Make equal groups. Complete the table.

Question 1.

Counters Number of Equal Groups Number in Each Group
1. 15 3 __________
2. 21 7 __________
3. 28 7 __________
4. 32 4 __________
5. 9 3 __________
6. 18 3 __________
7. 20 5 __________
8. 16 8 __________
9. 35 5 __________
10. 24 3 __________

Answer:

Counters Number of Equal Groups Number in Each Group
1. 15 3 5
2. 21 7 3
3. 28 7 4
4. 32 4 8
5. 9 3 3
6. 18 3 6
7. 20 5 4
8. 16 8 2
9. 35 5 7
10. 24 3 8

Explanation:

1. No. of counters = 15
Number of equal groups = 3
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 5 in each group

2. No. of counters = 21
Number of equal groups = 7
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 3 in each group

3. No. of counters = 28
Number of equal groups = 7
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 4 in each group

4. No. of counters = 32
Number of equal groups = 4
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 8 in each group

5. No. of counters = 9
Number of equal groups = 3
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 3 in each group

6. No. of counters = 18
Number of equal groups = 3
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 6 in each group

7. No. of counters = 20
Number of equal groups = 5
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 4 in each group

8. No. of counters = 16
Number of equal groups = 8
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 2 in each group

9. No. of counters = 35
Number of equal groups = 5
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 7 in each group

10. No. of counters = 24
Number of equal groups = 3
Place 1 counter to each group, you get 8 in each group

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 311 Q11
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 311 Q11.1

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 311 Q12

Size of Equal Groups Page No 312

Question 1.
Ryan has 21 pencils. He wants to put the same number of pencils in each of 3 pencil holders. How many pencils will he put in each pencil holder?
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Ryan has 21 pencils
He wants to put the same number of pencils in each of 3 pencil holders
Split it into 3 groups and share each pencil to each group
You get 7 pencils for each of 3 groups
21/3 = 7
Thus the correct answer is option B

Question 2.
Corrine is setting out 24 plates on 6 tables for a dinner. She sets the same number of plates on each table. How many plates does Corrine set on each table?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer: 4

Explanation:

Given,
Corrine is setting out 24 plates on 6 tables for a dinner
She sets the same number of plates on each table
Make a group of 6 tables and place 1 plate for each group
You get 4 plates for each table
24/6 = 4 plates
So, the correct answer is Option B

Question 3.
Each table has 4 legs. How many legs do 4 tables have?
Options:
a. 1
b. 8
c. 16
d. 20

Answer: 16

Explanation:

Given that Each table has 4 legs
4 tables have x number of legs
x = 4 × 4 = 16
Therefore 4 tables have 16 legs

Question 4.
Tina has 3 stacks of 5 CDs on each of 3 shelves. How many CDs does she have in all?
Options:
a. 14
b. 30
c. 35
d. 45

Answer: 45

Given,
Tina has 3 stacks of 5 CDs on each of 3 shelves
How many CDs does she have in all = x
To know the number of CDs in all we have to multiply no. of stacks, no. of CDs on each of 3 shelves
x = 3 × 5 × 3 = 15 × 3 = 45
So, the answer is option D

Question 5.
What is the unknown factor?
7 × _= 35
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: 5

Explanation:

Let the unknown factor be x
7 × x = 35
x = 35/7 = 5
Therefore the correct answer is option B

Question 6.
Which of the following describes a pattern in the table?

Number of packs 1 2 3 4 5
Number of yo-yos 3 6 9 12 ?

Options:
a. Add 2.
b. Multiply by 2.
c. Multiply by 3.
d. Add 12.

Answer: Multiply by 3.

Explanation:

Add 3 yo-yos for each pack and multiply no. of pans by 3

Number of Equal Groups Page No 317

Draw counters on your MathBoard. Then circle equal groups. Complete the table.

Question 1.

Counters Number of Equal Groups Number in Each Group
1. 24 3 8
2. 35 __________ 7
3. 30 __________ 5
4. 16 __________ 4
5. 12 __________ 6
6. 36 __________ 9
7. 18 __________ 3
8. 15 __________ 5
9. 28 __________ 4
10. 27 __________ 3

Answer:

Counters Number of Equal Groups Number in Each Group
1. 24 3 8
2. 35 5 7
3. 30 6 5
4. 16 4 4
5. 12 2 6
6. 36 4 9
7. 18 6 3
8. 15 3 5
9. 28 7 4
10. 27 9 3

Explanation:

1. No. of counters = 24
Number in each group = 8
24/8 = 3
So, the number of equal groups = 3

2. No. of counters = 35
Number in each group = 7
35/7 = 5
So, the number of equal groups = 5

3. No. of counters = 30
Number in each group = 5
30/5 = 6
So, the number of equal groups = 6

4. No. of counters = 16
Number in each group = 4
16/4 = 4
So, the number of equal groups = 4

5. No. of counters = 12
Number in each group = 6
12/6 = 2
So, the number of equal groups = 2

6. No. of counters = 36
Number in each group = 9
36/9 = 4
So, the number of equal groups = 4

7. No. of counters = 18
Number in each group = 3
18/3 = 6
So, the number of equal groups = 6

8. No. of counters = 15
Number in each group = 5
15/5 = 3
So, the number of equal groups = 3

9. No. of counters = 28
Number in each group = 4
28/4 = 7
So, the number of equal groups = 7

10. No. of counters = 27
Number in each group = 3
27/3 = 9
So, the number of equal groups = 9

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 317 Q11

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 317 Q12

Number of Equal Groups Page No 318

Question 1.
Ramon works at a clothing store. He puts 24 pairs of jeans into stacks of 8. How many stacks does Ramon make?
Options:
a. 5
b. 4
c. 3
d. 2

Answer: 3

Explanation:

Ramon puts 24 pairs of jeans into stacks of 8
Split the pair of jeans to 8 groups of the stack
You get 3 pair of jeans for each stack
24/8 = 3
Therefore the correct answer is option C

Question 2.
There are 36 people waiting in line for a hayride. Only 6 people can ride on each wagon. If each wagon is full, how many wagons are needed for all 36 people?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 6

Explanation:

There are 36 people waiting in line for a hayride.
Only 6 people can ride on each wagon
Split 36 people into 6 groups
That means 36/6 = 6 Wagons
So, the correct answer is option B

Question 3.
Which multiplication sentence does the array show?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Number of Equal Groups img 3
Options:
a. 4 × 5 = 20
b. 4 × 6 = 24
c. 4 × 7 = 28
d. 4 × 8 = 32

Answer: 4 × 7 = 28

Explanation:

There are 4 rows and 7 columns
rows × columns = 4 × 7 = 28
Thus the answer is option C

Question 4.
Austin buys 4 boxes of nails for his project. There are 30 nails in each box. How many nails does Austin buy in all?
Options:
a. 12
b. 34
c. 70
d. 120

Answer: 120

Explanation:

Given,
Austin buys 4 boxes of nails for his project
There are 30 nails in each box
No. of nails does Austin buy in all = 30 + 30 + 30 + 30
4 × 30 = 120
So, the correct answer is option D

Question 5.
Which describes the number sentence?
8 + 0 + 8
Options:
a. odd + odd = odd
b. Identity Property of Addition
c. even + even = even
d. Commutative Property of Addition

Answer: Identity Property of Addition

Explanation:

In math, identity is a number, n, that when added to other numbers, gives the same number, n. The additive identity is always zero. This brings us to the identity property of addition, which simply states that when you add zero to any number, it equals the number itself.

Question 6.
Each month for 6 months, Kelsey completes 5 paintings. How many more paintings does she need to complete before she has completed 38 paintings?
Options:
a. 2
b. 6
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: 8

Explanation:

Each month for 6 months
Kelsey completes 5 paintings
x no. of paintings she need to complete before she has completed 38 paintings
6 × 5 = 30 paintings
x + 30 = 38
x = 38 – 30
x = 8
So, the correct answer is option C

Model with Bar Models Page No 323

Write a division equation for the picture.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Bar Models img 4

Answer: 27 ÷ 3 = 9 or 27 ÷ 9 = 3

Explanation:

There are 27 counters and each circle has 9 groups. There are 3 groups of 9 counters.
27 ÷ 3 = 27/3 = 9
27 ÷ 9 = 27/9 = 3

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Bar Models img 5
Type below:
___________

Answer: 16 ÷ 8 = 2 or 16 ÷ 2 = 8

Explanation:

The total number of counters is 16 and circle a group of 2 counters. Continue circling groups of 2 until all 16 counters are in the group.
So, Divide Total number of counters by number of equal groups
16 ÷ 8 = 16/8 = 2
Next, Divide total number of counters by no. of counters in each group.
16 ÷ 2 = 16/2 = 8

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Bar Models img 6
Type below:
___________

Answer: 16 ÷ 4 = 4

Explanation:

The total number of counters is 16 and circle a group of 4 counters. Continue circling groups of 4 until all 16 counters are in the group
Divide No. of counters by no. of equal groups = 16 ÷ 4 = 4
And then divide no. of counters by no. of counters in each group = 16 ÷ 4 = 4

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Bar Models img 7
Type below:
___________

Answer: 18 ÷ 3 = 6 or 18 ÷ 6 = 3

Explanation:

Number of counters = 18
Number of Equal groups = 3
Number of counters in each group = 6
Divide No. of counters by no. of equal groups
18 ÷ 3 = 18/3 = 6
Divide No. of counters by no. of counters in each group
18 ÷ 6 = 18/6 = 3

Complete the bar model to solve. Then write a division equation for the bar model.

Question 5.
There are 15 postcards in 3 equal stacks. How many postcards are in each stack?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Bar Models img 8
________ postcards

Answer: 5 postcards, 15 ÷ 3 = 5

Explanation:

Total number of postcards = 15
Number of equal stacks = 3
Number of postcards in each stack = x
x = No. of postcards/ No. of equal stacks
x = 15/3
x = 5
Thus each stack contains 5 postcards

Question 6.
There are 21 key rings. How many groups of 3 key rings can you make?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Bar Models img 9
________ groups

Answer: 7 groups, 21 ÷ 3 = 7

Explanation:

Divide the 21 key rings into 7 to make 7 groups with 3 key rings each group
21 ÷ 3 = 21/3 = 7 groups

There are 7 groups of 3 key rings.

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 323 Q7

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 323 Q8
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 323 Q8.1

Model with Bar Models Page No 324

Question 1.
Jack and his little sister are stacking 24 blocks. They put the blocks in 3 equal stacks. How many blocks are in each stack?
Options:
a. 4
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 8

Explanation:

Total number of blocks = 24
They put the blocks in 3 equal stacks
To know the blocks in each stack, we have to divide no. of blocks by number of equal stacks
24 ÷ 3 = 24/3 = 8 blocks
There are 8 blocks in each stack
So, the correct answer is option D

Question 2.
Melissa made 45 greeting cards. She put them in 5 equal piles. How many cards did she put in each pile?
Options:
a. 9
b. 8
c. 7
d. 6

Answer: 9

Explanation:

Given,
Melissa made 45 greeting cards
She put them in 5 equal piles
To know the number of cards she put in each pile
We have to divide number of cards by no. of equal piles
= 45 ÷ 5 = 45/5 = 9 cards
Thus there are 9 cards in each pile
So, the correct answer is option A

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Angie puts 1 stamp on each envelope. She puts stamps on 7 envelopes. How many stamps does Angie use?
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Angie puts 1 stamp on each envelope
She puts stamps on 7 envelopes
To find Number of stamps Angie use, we have to divide no. of stamps on envelopes by no. of stamps on each envelope
= 7 ÷ 1 = 7

Question 4.
A carnival ride has 8 cars. Each car holds 4 people. How many people are on the ride if all the cars are full?
Options:
a. 34
b. 32
c. 28
d. 24

Answer: 32

Explanation:

Given,
A carnival ride has 8 cars
Each car holds 4 people
1 car = 4 people
8 cars = x
x × 1 = 4 × 8
x = 32
32 people are on the ride if all the cars are full

Use the line plot for 5–6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Bar Models img 10

Question 5.
How many families have 1 computer at home?
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: 6

Explanation:

The line plot shows that 6 families have 1 computer at home

Question 6.
How many families have more than 1 computer at home?
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 8

Explanation:

Number of Families have 2 computers at home = 3
Number of Families have 3 computers at home = 4
Number of Families have 4 computers at home = 1
Number of Families have more than 1 computer at home = 3 + 4 + 1 = 8

Relate Subtraction and Division Page No 329

Write a division equation.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Subtraction and Division img 11

Answer: 16 ÷ 4 = 4

Explanation:

Step 1:

Start with 16

Step 2:

Subtract with 4 until you get 0

Step 3:

Count the number of times you subtract 4

Since you subtract 4 times
There are 4 groups 4 in 16
So 16 ÷ 4 = 4
Sixteen divided by four equals four

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Subtraction and Division img 12
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 12 ÷ 3 = 4

Explanation:

Step 1:

Start at 12

Step 2:

Count back by 3s as many times as you can.

Step 3:

Count the number of times you jumped back 3.

You jumped back 3 four times
There are 4 groups of 3 in 12
12 ÷ 3 = 4

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Subtraction and Division img 13
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 10 ÷ 2 = 5

Explanation:

Step 1:

Start at 10

Step 2:

Count back by 2s as many times as you can.

Step 3:

Count the number of times you jumped back 2.

You jumped back 2 five times
There are 5 groups of 2 in 10
10 ÷ 2 = 5

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Subtraction and Division img 14
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 20 ÷ 5 = 4

Explanation:

Step 1:

Start at 20

Step 2:

Subtract with 5 until you get 0

Step 3:

Count the number of times you subtract with 5

Since you subtract 4 times
There are 4 groups of 5 in 20
So 20 ÷ 5 = 4
Twenty divided by five equals four

Use repeated subtraction or a number line to solve.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 329 Q5

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 329 Q6

Question 7.
8)\( \bar{ 4 0 }\)
________

Answer: 5

HMH Go Math solution Key Grade 3 Chapter Division image_2

Explanation:

Since you subtract 5 times
There are 5 groups of 8 in 40
40 divided by 8 equals 5

Question 8.
9)\( \bar{ 3 6 }\)
________

Answer: 4

Go Math Chapter 6 Answer Key Grade 3 Division image_1

Explanation:

You subtract 36 and 9 by 4 times
There are 4 groups of 9 in 36
So, 36 divided by 9 equals 4

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 329 Q9

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 329 Q10

Relate Subtraction and Division Page No 330

Question 1.
Which division equation is shown?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Subtraction and Division img 15
Options:
a. 3 × 4 = 12
b. 12 ÷ 6 = 2
c. 12 ÷ 3 = 4
d. 12 ÷ 4 = 3

Answer: 12 ÷ 6 = 2

Explanation:

Step 1:

The count starts at 12

Step 2:

Count back by 6s as many times as you can until you get 0

Step 3:

Count the number of times you jumped back
You jumped back 2 times
There are 2 jumps from 12 to 0
So the correct answer is option B

Question 2.
Isabella has 35 cups of dog food. She feeds her dogs 5 cups of food each day. For how many days will the dog food last?
Options:
a. 6 days
b. 7 days
c. 8 days
d. 9 days

Answer: 7 days

Explanation:

Given that,

Isabella has 35 cups of dog food
She feeds her dogs 5 cups of food each day
To find the number of days will the dog food last
We have to divide the number of cups by the number of cups of food each day
= 35 ÷ 5 = 35/5 = 7
So, the correct answer is option B

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Ellen buys 4 bags of oranges. There are 6 oranges in each bag. How many oranges does Ellen buy?
Options:
a. 10
b. 12
c. 24
d. 30

Answer: 24

Explanation:

Given:
Ellen buys 4 bags of oranges
There are 6 oranges in each bag
Total number of oranges = no. of bags × no. of oranges in each bag
= 4 × 6 = 24
Therefore the correct answer is option B

Question 4.
Each month for 7 months, Samuel mows 3 lawns. How many more lawns does he need to mow before he has mowed 29 lawns?
Options:
a. 1
b. 3
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 8

Explanation:

Each month for 7 months, Samuel mows 3 lawns
For one month Samuel mows 3 lawns
For 7 months Samuel mows = x
x = 7 × 3 = 21
Now, we need to know how many more lawns he needs to mow before he has mowed 29 lawns
Subtract 21 from 29
= 29 – 21 = 8
So the answer is option D

Use the graph for 5–6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Subtraction and Division img 16

Question 5.
How many hours did Eli volunteer?
Options:
a. 4 hours
b. 8 hours
c. 9 hours
d. 10 hours

Answer: 9 hours

Explanation:

The bar graph shows that Eli volunteered 9 hours
So, the correct answer is option C

Question 6.
Madi volunteered 2 hours less than Jill. At what number should the bar for Madi end?
Options:
a. 3
b. 6
c. 8
d. 12

Answer: 8

Explanation:

The figure shows that Jill has volunteered 10 hours
If Madi has volunteered 2 hours less than Jill
= 10 – 2 = 8 hours
Thus the correct answer is option C

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Page No 331

Vocabulary

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 17
Question 1.
You _________ when you separate into equal groups.
_________

Answer: Divide

When you divide, you separate into equal groups.

Concepts and Skills

Use counters or draw a quick picture on your MathBoard.
Make or circle equal groups. Complete the table.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 18
Type below:
___________

Answer:

2. Number of counters = 6
Number of equal groups = 2
Number in each group =  __
= 6/2 = 3

3. Number of counters = 30
Number of equal groups = __
Number in each group = 5
= 30/5 = 6

4. Number of counters = 28
Number of equal groups = 7
Number in each group = __
= 28/7 = 4

Write a division equation for the picture.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 19
Type below:
___________

Answer: 8 ÷ 4 = 2 or 8 ÷ 2 = 4

Explanation:

The number of counters is 8 and a circle group of 4 counters.
Continue circling group of 4 until all the 8 counters are in the group
Divide Number of counters by Number of equal groups
= 8 ÷ 2 = 4
Divide Number of counters by number in each group
8 ÷ 4 = 2

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 20
Type below:
___________

Answer: 15 ÷ 3 = 5 or 15 ÷ 5 = 3

Explanation:

Number of counters = 15
Number of groups = 3
Number in each group = 5
Divide Number of counters by number of groups
= 15 ÷ 3 = 5
Divide number of counters by number in each group
= 15 ÷ 5 = 3

Write a division equation.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 21
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 36 ÷ 9 = 4

Explanation:

Step 1:

Starts at 36

Step 2:

Subtract with 9 until you get 0

Step 3:

Count the number of times you subtract with 9

You subtract 4 times
There are 4 groups of 9 with 36
So, 36 ÷ 9 = 4

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 22
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 21 ÷ 3 = 7

Explanation:

Step 1:

Starts at 21

Step 2:

Count back by 3s as many times as you can

Step 3:

Count the number of times you jumped back 3.
You jumped back by 21 seven times
There are 7 jumps of 3 in 21

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Page No 332

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 332 Q9

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 332 Q10

Question 11.
Jayden modeled a division equation with some counters. What division equation could Jayden have modeled?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 23
Type below:
___________

Answer: 14 ÷ 2 = 7 or 14 ÷ 7 = 2

Explanation:

Number of counter = 14
Number in each group = 7
Number of equal groups = 2
So, the division equation is the number of counters by number of equal groups = 14 ÷ 2 = 7
Or, Number of counters by number in each group = 14 ÷ 7 = 2

Question 12.
Lillian bought 24 cans of cat food. There were 4 cans in each pack. How many packs of cat food did Lillian buy?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 24
_________ packs

Answer: 6 packs

Explanation:

Lillian bought 24 cans of cat food
There were 4 cans in each pack
Number of packs of cat food did Lillian buy
24 ÷ 4 = 6 packs

Model with Arrays Page No 337

Use square tiles to make an array. Solve

Question 1.
How many rows of 4 are in 12?
______ rows

Answer: 3 rows

■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■

Explanation:

Step 1:

Total number of tiles are 12

Step 2:
Make a row of 4 tiles

Step 3:

Continue to make as many rows of 4 tiles as you can
We get 4 tiles in each row
3 rows of 4 are in 12

Question 2.
How many rows of 3 are in 21?
______ rows

Answer: 7 rows

■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■

Explanation:

Step 1:

Total number of tiles are 21

Step 2:

Make a row of 3 tiles

Step 3:

Continue to make as many rows of 3 tiles as you can
We get 3 tiles in each row
So, 7 rows of 3 are in 21

Question 3.
How many rows of 6 are in 30?
______ rows

Answer: 5 rows

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Explanation:

Step 1:

First of all the count number of tiles = 30

Step 2:

Make a row of 6 tiles

Step 3:

Continue to make as many rows of 6 tiles as you can
We get 6 tiles in each row
So, there are 5 rows of 6 in 30

Question 4.
How many rows of 9 are in 18?
______ rows

Answer: 2 rows

Make an array. Then write a division equation.

Question 5.
20 tiles in 5 rows
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 20 ÷ 5 = 4

■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■

Explanation:

Total number of tiles = 20
Make a row of 4 tiles
Continue to make as many rows of 4 tiles as you can
We get 4 tiles in each row
So, the division equation is 20 ÷ 5 = 4

Question 6.
28 tiles in 7 rows
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 28 ÷ 7 = 4

■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■

Explanation:

Total number of tiles = 28
Make a row of 4 tiles
Continue to make as many rows of 4 tiles as you can
We get 4 tiles in each row
For 28 tiles we get 7 rows
So, the division equation is 28 ÷ 7 = 4

Question 7.
18 tiles in 9 rows
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 18 ÷ 9 = 2

■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■

Explanation:

Number of tiles = 18
Number of rows = 9
Now we have to make a row of 2 tiles until we complete 18 tiles
So, you get 2 tiles in 9 rows
18 ÷ 9 = 2 tiles

Question 8.
36 tiles in 6 rows
______ ÷ ______ = ______

Answer: 36 ÷ 6 = 6

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Explanation:

Total number of tiles = 36
Number of rows = 6
Now you have to make a row of 36 tiles in 6 rows
You get 6 tiles in each row
That means there are 6 tiles each in a row
So, the division equation is 36 ÷ 6 = 6

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 337 Q9

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 337 Q10

Model with Arrays Page No 338

Question 1.
Mr. Canton places 24 desks in 6 equal rows. How many desks are in each row?
Options:
a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 5

Answer: 4

Explanation:

Mr. Canton places 24 desks in 6 equal rows
Each row has x number of desks
Divide the number of desks by number of equal rows
24 ÷ 6 = 4
So, the correct answer is option C

Question 2.
Which division equation is shown by the array?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Arrays img 25
Options:
a. 12 ÷ 6 = 2
b. 12 ÷ 3 = 4
c. 12 ÷ 2 = 6
d. 12 ÷ 1 = 12

Answer: 12 ÷ 3 = 4

Explanation:

Number of counters is 12 and the number of rows are 3
To know number counters in each row
We have to divide number of counters by number of rows
= 12 ÷ 3 = 4
Thus the answer is option B

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Amy has 2 rows of 4 sports trophies on each of her 3 shelves. How many sports trophies does Amy have in all?
Options:
a. 8
b. 9
c. 12
d. 24

Answer: 24

Explanation:

Amy has 2 rows of 4 sports trophies on each of her 3 shelves
To know the total sports trophies does Amy have in all 3 shelves
We have to multiple number 2 × 4 × 3 = 24
So, the correct answer is option D

Question 4.
What is the unknown factor?
9 × p = 45
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: 5

Explanation:

The unknown factor is p
9 × p = 45
p = 45/9 = 5
Therefore p = 5
Thus the answer is option B

Question 5.
Sam has 7 stacks with 4 quarters each. How many quarters does Sam have?
Options:
a. 11
b. 12
c. 24
d. 28

Answer: 28

Explanation:

Sam has 7 stacks with 4 quarters each
Each stack has 4 quarters
So, 7 stacks has 7 × 4 = 28
Thus 7 stacks have 28 quarters

Question 6.
How can you skip count to find how many counters in all?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Model with Arrays img 26
Options:
a. 3 groups of 2
b. 3 groups of 3
c. 9 groups of 2
d. 18 groups of 2

Answer: 9 groups of 2

Explanation:

Total number of Counters = 18
Number of equal groups = 9
Number in each group = 2
So, there are 9 groups of 2s
Thus the correct answer is option C

Relate Multiplication and Division Page No 343

Complete the equations.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Multiplication and Division img 27

Answer:

5 rows of 4 = 20
5 × 4  = 20
20 ÷ 5 = 4

Explanation:

The above figure shows that there are 5 rows of 4 circles
Total number of circles = 20
The related facts of 20, 5, and 4 are
5 × 4 = 20; 5 rows of 4 = 20; 20 ÷ 5 = 4

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Multiplication and Division img 28
4 rows of ______ = 24
4 × ______ = 24
24 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer:

4 rows of 6 = 24
4 × 6 = 24
24 ÷ 4 = 6

Explanation:

Number of counters = 24
Number of equal rows = 4
24 ÷ 4 = 6
The related facts of 24, 6 and 4 are 24 ÷ 4 = 6; 4 × 6 = 24

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Multiplication and Division img 29
3 rows of ______ = 24
3 × ______ = 24
24 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer:

3 rows of 8 = 24
3 × 8 = 24
24 ÷ 3 = 8

Explanation:

Total number of counters = 24
Number of equal rows = 3
Divide number of counters by number of equal rows
24 ÷ 3 = 8
Thus the related multiplication and division facts of 24, 3 , 8 are 3 × 8 = 24; 24 ÷ 3 = 8

Complete the equations.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 343 Q4

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 343 Q5

Question 6.
5 × ______ = 35    35 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 7, 5

Explanation:

X represents the unknown factor
5 × x = 35
x = 35/5 = 7
Therefore the related multiplication and division facts 35, 5 and 7 are 5 × 7 = 35; 35 ÷ 7 = 5

Question 7.
7 × ______ = 21  21 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 3, 3

Explanation:

7 × x = 21
x = 21/7 = 3
So, the related multiplication and division facts of 7, 21 are 7 × 3 = 21; 21÷ 7 = 3

Question 8.
9 × ______ = 27  27 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 3, 3

Explanation:

27 ÷ 9 = 3
The related multiplication and division facts of 27 and 9 are 9 × 3 = 27 and 27 ÷ 9 = 3

Question 9.
2 × ______ = 16  16 ÷ 2 = ______

Answer: 8, 8

Explanation:

16 ÷ 2 = 8
The related multiplication and division facts of 16 and 2 are 2 × 8 = 16; 16 ÷ 2 = 8

Question 10.
4 × ______ = 36 36 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 9, 9

Explanation:

36 ÷ 4 = 9
So, the related multiplication and division facts of 36 and 4 are 4 × 9 = 36; 36 ÷ 4 = 9

Question 11.
8 × ______ = 40 40 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 5, 5

Explanation:

Let x be the unknown factor
8 × x = 40
x = 40/8 = 5
The related facts of 40 and 8 are 8 × 5 = 40; 40 ÷ 8 = 5

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 343 Q12

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 343 Q13

Relate Multiplication and Division Page No 344

Question 1.
Which number will complete the equations?
6 × □ = 24
24 ÷ 6 = □
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer: 4

Explanation:

24 ÷ 6 = 4
The related multiplication and division facts of 6 and 24 is 6 × 4 = 24; 24 ÷ 6 = 4
So, the correct answer is option B

Question 2.
Alice has 14 seashells. She divides them equally between her 2 sisters. How many seashells does each sister get?
Options:
a. 7
b. 8
c. 12
d. 16

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Alice has 14 seashells
She divides them equally between her 2 sisters
To know the number of seashells each sister get
We have to divide number of seashells by the number of sisters
= 14 ÷ 2 = 7
Thus the answer is option A

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Sam and Jesse can each wash 5 cars in an hour. They both work for 7 hours over 2 days. How many cars did Sam and Jesse wash?
Options:
a. 70
b. 35
c. 24
d. 14

Answer: 70

Explanation:

Sam and Jesse can each wash 5 cars in an hour
They both work for 7 hours over 2 days
To find the total number of cars they washed
we need to multiply 5 × 7 × 2 = 35 × 2 = 70
So, the answer is option A

Question 4.
Keisha skip-counted to find how many counters in all. How many equal groups are there?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Multiplication and Division img 30
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 20

Answer: 4

Explanation:

By seeing the above figure we can say that there are 4 groups.
So, the answer is option B

Question 5.
The key for a picture graph showing the number of books students read is: Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Multiplication and Division img 31 = 2 books. How many books did Nancy read if she has Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Multiplication and Division img 32 by her name?
Options:
a. 2
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer: 5

Explanation:

Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Relate Multiplication and Division img 31 = 2 books
There are 2 and half books = 2 + 2 + 1 = 5
Thus the answer is 5 i.e., option C

Question 6.
Jan surveyed her friends to find their favorite season. She recorded IIII III for summer. How many people chose summer as their favorite season?
Options:
a. 5
b. 8
c. 9
d. 13

Answer: 8

Explanation:

IIII = 5
III = 3
IIII III = 5 + 3 = 8
So, the people who chose summer as their favorite season are 8
Option B is the correct answer

Write Related Facts Page No 349

Write the related facts for the array.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Write Related Facts img 33

Answer:

2 × 6 = 12
6 × 2 = 12
12 ÷ 2 = 6
12 ÷ 6 = 2

Explanation:

Total number of counters = 12
Number of rows = 2
Number of counters in each row = 6
So, the related facts of 6, 2 and 12 are 2 × 6 = 12, 6 × 2 = 12, 12 ÷ 2 = 6 and 12 ÷ 6 = 2

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Write Related Facts img 34
Type below:
_________

Answer:

5× 3 = 15
3×5 = 15
15 ÷ 3 = 5
15÷ 5 = 3

Explanation:

Total number of counters = 15
Number of rows = 5
Number of counters in each row = 3
The related facts of 5, 3 and 15 are 5× 3 = 15, 3×5 = 15, 15 ÷ 3 = 5 and 15÷ 5 = 3

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Write Related Facts img 35
Type below:
_________

Answer:

2 × 4 = 8
4× 2 = 8
8 ÷ 2 = 4
8 ÷ 4 = 2

Explanation:

Total number of counters = 8
Number of rows = 2
Number of counters in each row = 4
The related facts of 8, 2, 4 are 2 × 4 = 8, 4× 2 = 8, 8 ÷ 2 = 4 and 8 ÷ 4 = 2

Write the related facts for the set of numbers.

Question 4.
3, 7, 21
Type below:
_________

Answer:

3 × 7 = 21
7 × 3 = 21
21 ÷ 3 = 7
21 ÷ 7 = 3

Explanation:

Total number of counters = 21
The related facts of 3, 7, 21 are 3 × 7 = 21, 7 × 3 = 21, 21 ÷ 3 = 7 and 21 ÷ 7 = 3

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 349 Q5

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 349 Q6

Complete the related facts.

Question 7.
4 × 9 = _______
9 × _______ = 36
36 ÷ _______ = 4
_______ ÷ 4 = 9

Answer: The related facts of 4, 9 and 36 are given below

4 × 9 = 36
9 × 4 = 36
36 ÷ 9 = 4
36 ÷ 4 = 9

Question 8.
_______ × 7 = 35
_______ × 5 = 35
_______ ÷ 7 = 5
35 ÷ 5 _______

Answer:

5 × 7 = 35
7 × 5 = 35
35 ÷ 7 = 5
35 ÷ 5= 7

Explanation:

Let the unknown factor be x
x × 7 = 35
x = 35/7 = 5
5 × 7 = 35

x × 5 = 35
x = 35/5 = 7
7 × 5 = 35

x ÷ 7 = 5
x = 5 × 7 = 35
35 ÷ 7 = 5

35 ÷ 5 = x
x = 35/5 = 7
35 ÷ 5= 7

Question 9.
6 × _______ = 18
3 × 6 _______
18 ÷ _______ = 3
_______ ÷ 3 = 6

Answer:

6 × 3 = 18
3 × 6 = 18
18 ÷ 6 = 3
18 ÷ 3 = 6

Explanation:

Let the unknown factor be x
6 × x = 18
x = 18/6 = 3
6 × 3 = 18

3 × 6 = x
x = 18
3 × 6 = 18

18 ÷ x = 3
x = 18/3 = 6
18 ÷ 6 = 3

x ÷ 3 = 6
x = 6 × 3 = 18
18 ÷ 3 = 6

Problem Solving 

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 349 Q10

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 349 Q11

Write Related Facts Page No 350

Question 1.
Which number completes the set of related facts?
5 × □ = 40  40 ÷ □ = 5
□ × 5 = 40  40 ÷ 5 = □
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: 8

Explanation:

i. 5 × □ = 40
□ = 40/5 = 8
ii. 40 ÷ □ = 5
□ = 40/5 = 8
iii. □ × 5 = 40
□ = 40/5 = 8
iv. 40 ÷ 5 = □
40/5 = □
□ = 8
So, the answer is 8

Question 2.
Which equation is not in the same set of related facts as 4 × 7 = 28?
Options:
a. 7 × 4 = 28
b. 4 + 7 = 11
c. 28 ÷ 4 = 7
d. 28 ÷ 7 = 4

Answer: 4 + 7 = 11

Explanation:

The related facts of 4, 7 and 28 are 4 × 7 = 28, 7 × 4 = 28, 28 ÷ 4 = 7, 28 ÷ 7 = 4
But 4 + 7 = 11 is not set of related multiplication and division equations.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Beth runs 20 miles each week for 8 weeks. How many miles does Beth run in 8 weeks?
Options:
a. 16 miles
b. 28 miles
c. 100 miles
d. 160 miles

Answer: 160 miles

Explanation:

Beth runs 20 miles each week for 8 weeks
Each week Beth runs 20 miles
For 8 weeks = x miles
x = 8 × 20
x = 160 miles
So, the answer is 160 miles

Question 4.
Find the product.
5 × 0
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 5
d. 10

Answer: 0

Explanation:

Any number multiplied by 0 is always 0.
So, the answer is option A.

Question 5.
Uri’s bookcase has 5 shelves. There are 9 books on each shelf. How many books in all are in Uri’s bookcase?
Options:
a. 14
b. 36
c. 45
d. 54

Answer: 45

Explanation:

Uri’s bookcase has 5 shelves
There are 9 books on each shelf
Number of books on 5 shelves = y
y = 9 × 5 = 45
Thus the answer is option C

Question 6.
There are 6 batteries in one package. How many batteries will 6 packages have?
Options:
a. 12
b. 18
c. 24
d. 36

Answer: 36

Explanation:

There are 6 batteries in one package
Number of batteries in 6 packages = x
x = 6 × 6 = 36
Thus the number of batteries in 6 packages = 36

Division Rules for 1 and 0 Page No 355

Find the quotient.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Division Rules for 1 and 0 img 36

Answer: 3

Explanation:

Any number divided by 1 equals that number. The quotient is the number
So, 3/1 = 3 is the quotient

Question 2.
8 ÷ 8 = ________

Answer: 1

Explanation:

Any number divided by the same number other than 0 equals 1. The quotient is always 1
8/8 = 1
So, the quotient is 1

Question 3.
________ = 0 ÷ 6

Answer: 0

Explanation:

Zero divided by any number is always 0. The quotient is 0.
0/6 = 0
Thus the quotient is 0

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 355 Q4

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 355 Q5

Question 6.
0 ÷ 2 = ________

Answer: 0

0 divided by any number is always 0.
0/2 = 0
So, the quotient is 0

Question 7.
0 ÷ 3 = ________

Answer: 0

Explanation:

0 divided by any number is always 0.
0/3 = 0
So, the quotient is 0

Question 8.
________ = 0 ÷ 4

Answer: 0

Explanation:

0 divided by any number is 0
0/4 = 0
Thus the quotient is 0

Question 9.
7)\( \bar{ 7  }\)
________

Answer: 1

Explanation:

Any number divided by the same number is always 1.
7/7 = 1
So, the quotient is 1

Question 10.
1)\( \bar{ 6  }\)
________

Answer: 6

Explanation:

Any number divided by 1 is the same number.
6/1 = 6
So, the quotient is 6

Question 11.
9)\( \bar{  0 }\)
________

Answer: 0

Explanation:

0 divided by any number remains 0.
0/9 = 0
Thus the quotient is 0

Question 12.
1)\( \bar{ 5  }\)
________

Answer: 5

Explanation:

Any number divided by 1 gives the same number as a quotient
5/1 = 5
Therefore the quotient is 5

Question 13.
1)\( \bar{  0 }\)
________

Answer: 0

Explanation:

0 divided by anything is 0
0/1 = 0
So, the quotient is 0

Question 14.
4)\( \bar{ 4  }\)
________

Answer: 1

Explanation:

Any number divided by the same number gives the quotient as 1.
4/4 = 1
So, the quotient is 1

Question 15.
1)\( \bar{ 10 }\)
________

Answer: 10

The number which is divided by 1 gives the same number as a quotient.
10/1 = 10
Thus the quotient is 10

Question 16.
2)\( \bar{ 2  }\)
________

Answer: 1

Explanation:

Any number divided by the same number is 1.
2/2 = 1
Thus the quotient is 1

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 355 Q17

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 355 Q18

Division Rules for 1 and 0 Page No 356

Question 1.
Candace has 6 pairs of jeans. She places each pair on its hanger. How many hangers does Candace use?
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 6
d. 12

Answer: 6

Explanation:

Given,
Candace has 6 pairs of jeans
She places each pair on its own hanger
That means one pair of jeans for one hanger
To find the number of hangers we need to divide the total number of hangers by each pair
6 ÷ 1 = 6
So, option C is the correct answer

Question 2.
There are 0 birds and 4 bird cages. Which division equation describes how many birds are in each cage?
Options:
a. 0 ÷ 4 = 0
b. 4 ÷ 4 = 1
c. 4 ÷ 1 = 4
d. 0 × 4 = 0

Answer: 0 ÷ 4 = 0

Explanation:

There are no birds so nothing to divide. Zero divided by anything is 0.
So, the answer is 0 ÷ 4 = 0

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There are 7 plates on the table. There are 0 sandwiches on each plate. How many sandwiches are on the plates in all?
7 × 0
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 7
d. 70

Answer: 0

Explanation:

There are 7 plates on the table
There are 0 sandwiches on each plate
Any number multiplied with 0 is always 0.
So, the answer is option A.

Question 4.
Which shows a way to break apart the array to find the product?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Division Rules for 1 and 0 img 37
Options:
a. (3 × 5) + (3 × 2)
b. (2 × 8) + (1 × 8)
c. (4 × 7) + (1 × 7)
d. (3 × 6) + (3 × 3)

Answer: (3 × 5) + (3 × 2)

Explanation:

There are 3 rows and 7 columns
The columns are divided into 2 parts 5 and 2.
By using the distributive property we can write it as (3 × 5) + (3 × 2)
Thus the answer is option A

Question 5.
Which of the following describes a pattern in the table?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Division Rules for 1 and 0 img 38
Options:
a. Add 5.
b. Multiply by 2.
c. Subtract 1.
d. Multiply by 6.

Answer:

Multiply by 6.

Explanation:

Multiple 6 with several vans.
By seeing the above table we can say that it is the multiple of 6.
So, the answer is option D

Question 6.
Use the graph.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Division Rules for 1 and 0 img 39
How many more cans did Sam bring in than Lee?
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 7
d. 9

Answer: 9

Explanation:

Number of cans sam brings = 18
Number of cans Lee bring = 9
To know number of cans Sam bring in than Lee we have to subtract
Number of cans of Lee from Number of cans of Sam = 18 – 9 = 9
By using the above graph we can say that number of cans Sam bring in than Lee is 9.
Thus the correct answer is option D

Review/Test Page No 361

Question 1.
For numbers 1a–1d, select True or False for each equation.
a. 3 ÷ 1 = 1
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

Any number divided by 1 is always the same number. The quotient is 1.
So, the above equation is false.

Question 1.
b. 0 ÷ 4 = 0
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

0 divided by any number is always 0. So, the above statement is true.

Question 1.
c. 7 ÷ 7 = 1
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

Any number divided by the same number remains 1. So, the given statement is true.

Question 1.
d. 6 ÷ 1 = 6
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

Any number divided by 1 will be the same number. Thus the statement given above is true.

Question 2.
Elizabeth has 12 horses on her farm. She puts an equal number of horses in each of 3 pens. How many horses are in each pen?
Circle a number that makes the sentence true.
There are Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 40 horses in each pen.
_________

Answer: 12 ÷ 3 = 4

There are HMH Go Math Chapter 6 Grade 3 Answer Key Review solution img_6 horses in each pan

Question 3.
Chris plants 25 pumpkins seeds in 5 equal rows. How many seeds does Chris plant in each row?
Make an array to represent the problem. Then solve the problem.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 41
_______ seeds
Explain:
_________

Answer: 5 seeds

Go Math Grade 3 Key Chapter 6 Review solution image_1

Explanation:

Total number of seeds = 25
Number of equal rows = 5
25 ÷ 5 = 5 seeds

Page No. 358

Question 4.
Becca spent 24 minutes walking around a track. It took her 3 minutes to walk each time around the track. How many times did Becca walk around the track?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 42
Make equal groups to model the problem. Then explain how you solved the problem.
_______ times

Answer: 24 ÷ 3 = 8 times

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 6 key review solution image_7

Question 5.
There are 7 cars in an amusement park ride. There are 42 people divided equally among the 7 cars. An equal number of people ride in each car. How many people ride in one car?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 43
_______people

Answer: 6 people

Explanation:

Number of cars = 7
There are 42 people divided equally among the 7 cars
Divide the total number of people by the number of cars
You get, 42 ÷ 7 = 6 people

Question 6.
Select the equations that represent the array. Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 44
Options:
a. 3 × 5 = ■
b. 2 × ■ = 12
c. ■ ÷ 3 = 5
d. 5 × ■ = 15
e. 12 ÷ 3 = ■
f. 15 ÷ 5 = ■

Answer: 3 × 5 = ■; ■ ÷ 3 = 5; 5 × ■ = 15; 15 ÷ 5 = ■

Explanation:

Related facts are a set of related multiplication and division equations.

Number of rows = 3
Number of blocks in each row = 5
Total Number of blocks = 15
So, the relation between these 3 numbers are 3 × 5 = ■; ■ ÷ 3 = 5; 5 × ■ = 15; 15 ÷ 5 = ■

Review/Test Page No 359

Question 7.
Eduardo visited his cousin for 28 days over the summer. There are 7 days in each week. How long, in weeks, was Eduardo’s visit?
Part A
Draw jumps on the number line to model the problem.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 45
Type below:
___________

Answer:

HMH Go math grade 3 chapter 6 answer key review solution image_2

Starts at 0
Count by 7 as many times as you can
Count the number of times you jumped back 7
You have jumped 4 times
So, there are 4 groups of 7 in 28
28 ÷ 7 = 4

Question 7.
Part B
Write a division equation to represent the model.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 28 ÷ 7 = 4

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 359 Q8

Question 9.
There are 56 apples packed in 7 baskets with the same number of apples in each basket. How many apples are in each basket?
For numbers, 9a–9d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the equation represents the problem.
a. 56 + 7 = ■
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

56 + 7 = 63 ≠ 8
So, the answer is no

Question 9.
b. 7 × ■ = 56
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

7 × ■ = 56
■ = 56/7 = 8
So, the answer is yes

Question 9.
c. 56 ÷ ■ = 8
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

56 ÷ ■ = 8
■ = 56/8 = 7
So, the answer is yes

Question 9.
d. 56 − ■ = 8
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

56 − ■ = 8
■ = 64 ≠ 7
So, the answer is no

Question 10.
Stefan has 24 photos to display on some posters. Select a way that he could display the photos in equal groups on the posters. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 6 photos on each of 4 posters
b. 7 photos on each of 3 posters
c. 4 photos on each of 6 posters
d. 5 photos on each of 5 posters
e. 3 photos on each of 8 posters
f. 7 photos on each of 4 posters

Answer: A, C, E

A. 6 photos on each of 4 posters
6 x 4 = 24 photos ✓

B. 7 photos on each of 3 posters
7 x 3 = 21 ≠ 24 photos

C. 4 photos on each of 6 posters
4 x 6 = 24 photos ✓

D. 5 photos on each of 5 posters
5 x 5 = 25 ≠ 24 photos

E. 3 photos on each of 8 posters
3 x 8 = 24 photos ✓

F. 7 photos on each of 4 posters
7 x 4 = 28 ≠ 24 photos

Review/Test Page No 360

Question 11.
Debbie made this array to model a division equation. Which equation did Debbie model? Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 46
Options:
a. 14 ÷ 7 = 2
b. 28 ÷ 4 = 7
c. 28 ÷ 7 = 4
d. 14 ÷ 2 = 7

Answer: 28 ÷ 4 = 7

Explanation:

Total Number shaded blocks = 28
Number of equal rows = 4
To write the division equation
we have to divide number of blocks by number of equal rows
28 ÷ 7 = 7
So, the correct answer is option B

Question 12.
Mrs. Edwards made a total of 40 fingers on some gloves she knitted. How many gloves did Mrs. Edwards knit?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 47
__________ gloves

Answer: 40 ÷ 5 = 8

Explanation:

Mrs. Edwards made a total of 40 fingers on some gloves she knitted
Number in each group = 5
Divide Number of fingers by number in each group
= 40 ÷ 5 = 8
Number of equal groups = 8

Question 13.
Make true equations. Select a number to complete the equation.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 48
7 ÷ 7 = ________
7 ÷ 1 = ________
0 ÷ 7 = ________

Answer:

7 ÷ 7 = 1
7 ÷ 1 = 7
0 ÷ 7 = 0

Explanation:

7 ÷ 7 = 1
Any number divided by the same numbers is always 1. So the quotient is 1
7 ÷ 1 = 7
Any number divided by 1 gives the same number as the quotient.
0 ÷ 7 = 0
Zero divided by any number is always 0. So, the quotient is 0.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Page 360 Q14

Review/Test Page No 361

Question 15.
Write a division equation to represent the repeated subtraction.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 49
Type below:
________

Answer: 32 ÷ 8 = 4

Explanation:

Step 1:

Start at 32

Step 2:

Subtract with 8 until you get 0

Step 3:

Count the number of times you subtract with 8
Since you subtract 4 times
There are 4 groups of 8 in 32
32 ÷ 8 = 4
Thirty two divided by eight equals four

Question 16.
Write related facts for the array. Explain why there are not more related facts.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 50
Type below:
________

Answer:

There are 6 rows of 6 squares.
The related facts are:
6 x 6 = 36; 36 ÷ 6 = 6
An array represents multiplication because it has rows and columns and the total number of cells is the product of its rows and columns.
Also, division is related to multiplication.
So, the only related facts are multiplication and division.

Question 17.
Darius bakes 18 muffins for his friends. He gives each of his friends an equal number of muffins and has none left over.
Part A
Draw a picture to show how Darius divided the muffins and complete the sentence.
Darius gave muffins to ________ friends.
Type below:
________

Answer:

If one muffin for 18 friends

18 = 1 × 18

Go math grade 3 key chapter 6 understand division review solution image _ 3a

If 2 muffins for 9 friends

18 = 2 × 9

Chapter 6 Go Math Answer Key Grade 3 review solution image_3b

If 3 muffins for 6 friends

18 = 3 × 6

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 6 answer key review solution image_3c

Six muffins for 3 friends

18 = 6 × 3

If 9 muffins for 2 friends

Answer key for HMH Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 6 Review solution image_3d

So, Darius gave muffins to 2, 3, 6, 9, 18 friends

Question 17.
Part B
Could Darius have given all of his muffins equally to 4 of his friends? Explain why or why not.
Type below:
________

Answer: No

No, because if he divides 18 muffins to 4 people, then they get 4 muffins each, and two are not given.
4 × 4 + 2 = 18

Review/Test Page No 362

Question 18.
Circle numbers to complete the related facts.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 51 × 8 = 72   72 ÷ Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 52 = 8
______                                              _______

Answer: 9 × 8 = 72; 72 ÷ 9 = 8

Grade 3 Go Math Answer Key Chapter 6 Review solution img_5a × 8 = 72; 72 ÷ Chapter 6 Go Math HMH Answer Key Grade 3 Review solution img_5b = 8

Question 19.
Use the numbers to write related multiplication and division facts.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 53
Type below:
__________

Answer: 45 ÷ 9 = 5; 45 ÷ 5 = 9

Explanation:

The multiplication and division facts for 45, 9 and 5 are
45 ÷ 5 = 9
45 ÷ 9 = 5
9 × 5 = 45

Question 20.
Tyrone took 16 pennies from his bank and put them in 4 equal stacks. How many pennies did Tyrone put in each stack? Show your work.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Review/Test img 54
__________ pennies

Answer: 4 pennies

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 6 Key Review solution image_4

16 ÷ 4 = 4 pennies

Explanation:

Total number of pennies = 16
Number of equal stacks = 4
Divided number of pennies by number of equal stacks to know the pennies in each stack
16 ÷ 4 = 4

Try to solve exercise questions and cross check your answers from Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division Extra Practice. This way you can assess your strengths and weaknesses and concentrate on the areas you are lagging.

Detailed Solutions are provided in the 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 6 Understand Division making it easy for you to understand.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000

go-math-grade-3-chapter-1-addition-and-subtraction-within-1-000-answer-key

Become a master in maths taking the help of Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1000. Begin your preparation and learn all the fundamental topics in it. Solve all the Problems in Chapter 1 easily from here and understand the concept behind them. Download Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 free of cost and learn the fundamentals easily.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000

You can make the most out of the Grade 3 Go Math Solutions Key Chapter 1 through the quick links available. Simply tap on the topic you want and learn various questions involved in it easily. There are different models in addition and subtraction. We have listed all of them by considering enough examples and explained every problem step by step.

Lesson 1: Number Patterns 

Lesson 2: Round to the Nearest Ten

Lesson 3: Estimate Sums

Lesson 4: Mental Math Strategies for Addition

Lesson 5: Use Properties to Add

Lesson 6: Use the Break Apart Strategy to Add

Lesson 7: Use Place Value to Add

Mid Chapter Check Point

Lesson 8: Estimate Differences

Lesson 9: Mental Math Strategies for Subtraction

Lesson 10: Use Place Value to Subtract

Lesson 11: Combine Place Values to Subtract

Lesson 12: Problem Solving • Model Addition and Subtraction

Review/Test

Number Patterns – Page No. 9

Find the sum. Then use the Commutative Property of Addition to write the related addition sentence.
Question 1:
9 + 2 =  11 

Answer:

What is the commutative property of addition?
To “commute” means to move around or travel.
According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
if you are adding nine and two together, the commutative property of addition says that you will get the same answer whether you are adding
9 + 2 or 2 + 9.
2 + 9 =  11 

Question 2:
4 + 7 = 
    +      =  11

Answer:

If you are adding four and seven together, the commutative property of addition says that you will get the same answer whether you are adding 4 + 7 or 7 + 4.
4 + 7 =  11
7  +  4  =  11

Question 3:
3 + 6 =
     +      =  11

Answer:

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
There will be no change in the sum whether you add 3 + 6 or 6 + 3.
3 + 6 =  9
 6  +  3  =  9

Question 4:
3 + 10 =
     +      =  11

Answer:

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
There will be no change in the sum whether you add 3 + 10 or 10 + 3 = 13.
3 + 10 =  13
 10  +  3  =  13

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 9 Q5

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 9 Q6

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 9 Q7

Question 8:
0 + 4 =
     +      =  4

Answer:

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
0 + 4 =  4
 4  +  0  =  4

Question 9:
9 + 6 =
     +      =  15

Answer:

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
There will be no change in the sum whether you add 9 + 6 or 6 + 9 = 15
9 + 6 =  15
 6  +  9  =  15

Is the sum even or odd? Write even or odd.

Even Numbers:

Any integer that can be divided exactly by 2 is an even number. The last digit is 0, 2, 4, 6 or 8
Example: −24, 0, 6 and 38 are all even numbers

Odd Numbers:

Any integer that cannot be divided exactly by 2 is an odd number. The last digit is 1, 3, 5, 7 or 9
Example: −3, 1, 7 and 35 are all odd numbers
Odd numbers are in between the even numbers.

Question 10:
5 + 2

Answer:

The sum of two odd numbers is an odd number.
5 + 2 = 7.
∴ 7 is an odd number.

Question 11:
6 + 4

Answer:

The sum of two even numbers is always an even number.
6 + 4 = 10.
∴ 10 is an even number.

Question 12:
1 + 0

Answer:
The Sum of any number with zero is always the same number.
1 + 0 = 1.
∴ 1 is an odd number.

Question 13:
5 + 5

Answer:
Any integer that can be divided exactly by 2 is an even number.
5 + 5 = 10.
∴ 10 is an even number.

Question 14:
3 + 8

Answer:

The sum of an even and odd number is an odd number.
3 + 8 = 11.
∴ 11 is an odd number.

Question 15:
7 + 7

Answer:

7 + 7 = 14.
∴ 14 is an even number.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 9 Q16

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 9 Q17

Number Patterns Lesson Check Page No 10

Question 1
Marvella says that the sum of her addends is odd. Which of the following could be Marvella’s addiction problem?

Options:
(a) 5 + 3
(b) 9 + 7
(c) 2 + 8
(d) 5 + 6

Answer:

(a) 5 + 3 = 8 (Even Number)
(b) 9 + 7 = 16 (Even Number)
(c) 2 + 8 = 10 (Even Number)
(d) 5 + 6 = 11 (Odd Number)

Option (d) is Correct.

Question 2
Which number sentence shows the Commutative Property of Addition?
3 + 9 = 12

(a) 12 – 9 = 3
(b) 12 = 8 + 4
(c) 9 + 3 = 12
(d) 12 – 3 = 9

Answer:

3 + 9 = 12 and 9 + 3 = 12 are commutative.
Option (c) is correct.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Amber has 2 quarters, a dime, and 3 pennies. How much money does Amber have?

(a) 53 ¢
(b) 58 ¢
(c) 63 ¢
(d) 68 ¢

Answer:

Amber has
2 quarters = 2 x 25 = 50 ¢
1 dime = 10 ¢
3 pennies = 3 ¢
∴ Money does Amber have = 2 quarters + 1 dime + 3 pennies
= 50 ¢ + 10 ¢ + 3 ¢ = 63 ¢
Option (c) is correct.

Question 4
Josh estimates the height of his desk. Which is the best estimate?

(a) 1 foot
(b) 2 feet
(c) 5 feet
(d) 9 feet

Answer:

So, from the given choices, 2 feet or approximately 24 inches would be the most viable answer because most standard desks have a height around 28 inches to 30 inches. 1 foot is too low, while 5 feet and 9 feet are too high. Therefore, 3 to 4 feet would be the most perfect answer but since we have a limited number of options, the nearest reasonable estimate value would be 2 feet. The original numbers from a problem does not exceed in a reasonable estimate.

Option (b) is correct.

Use the bar graph for 5–6.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Number Patterns Page 10

Question 5
Who read the most books?

(a) Alicia
(b) Bob
(c) Juan
(d) Maria

Answer:

The number of Books Read:
Juan – 6
Bob – 2
Maria – 4
Alicia – 5
Juan Read most books.
Option (c) is correct.

Question 6
Who read 3 more books than Bob?

(a) Alicia
(b) Juan
(c) Maria
(d) no one

Answer:

Alicia read 3 books.
Option (a) is correct.

Lesson 2: Round to the Nearest Ten Page 15

Round to the Nearest Ten or Hundred

Locate and label 739 on the number line.
Round to the nearest hundred.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Round to the Nearest Ten or Hundred Page 15 Answer Key

Question 1

(i) 739 is between __ and __

Answer:

739 is between 700 and 800.

Question 2

739 is closer to       than it is to      .

Answer:

739 is closer to  700 than it is to  800.

Round to the nearest ten and hundred.

Round to the nearest ten

Rounding Numbers to the nearest 10 means finding which 10 they are nearest to. For example, 68 rounded to the nearest 10 is 70.

Rule for rounding to the nearest 10

Look at the number in the one’s place and…

Rule for rounding to the nearest 10

Work through the examples below that show rounding to the nearest 10.

Rounding numbers to the nearest 10

Round to the nearest hundred

Rounding numbers to the nearest 100 means finding which 100 they are nearest to. For example, 680 rounded to the nearest 100 is 700.

Rule for rounding to the nearest 100

Look at the number in the tens’ place and…

Rule for rounding to the nearest 10

Work through the examples below that show rounding to the nearest 100.

Rounding numbers to the nearest 100

Question 3
739 rounded to the nearest hundred is

Answer:

Let’s round 739 to the nearest 100.
The nearest 100’s on both sides of 739 are 700 and 800.
700 is the nearest 100 to 739.
∴ 739 rounded to the nearest hundred is ‘700’

Question 4
363
Round to nearest ten: 
Round to nearest hundred:      

Answer:

(i) Let’s round 363 to the nearest 10.

The nearest 10’s on both sides of 363 are 360 and 370.
360 is the nearest 10 to 363.
∴ 363 rounded to the nearest ten is ‘360’
Round to nearest ten: 360

(ii) Let’s round 363 to the nearest 100.

The nearest 100’s on both sides of 363 are 300 and 400.
400 is the nearest 100 to 363.
∴ 363 rounded to the nearest hundred is ‘400’
Round to nearest hundred: 400

Question 5
829
Round to nearest ten:     
Round to nearest hundred:      

Answer:

(i) Lets round 829 to the nearest 10.
The nearest 10’s on both sides of 829 is 820 and 830.
Round to nearest ten: 830

(ii) Let’s round 829 to the nearest 100
The nearest 100’s on both sides of 829 is 800 and 900.
The number rounded to 829 nearest to 100 is 800.
Round to nearest hundred: 800

Question 6
572
Round to nearest ten:     
Round to nearest hundred:      

Answer:

(i) Lets round 572 to the nearest 10.
The nearest 10’s on both sides of 572 is 560 and 570.
The number rounded to 572 is 570.
Round to nearest ten: 570

(ii) Let’s round 572 to the nearest 100
The nearest 100’s on both sides of 572 is 500 and 600.
The number rounded to 572 nearest to 100
Round to nearest hundred: 600

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 15 Q7

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 15 Q8

Question 9
949
Round to nearest ten: 
Round to nearest hundred:      

Answer:

(i) Lets round 949 to the nearest 10.
The nearest 10’s on both sides of 949 is 940 and 950.
Round to nearest ten: 950

(ii) Let’s round 949 to the nearest 100
The nearest 100’s on both sides of 949 are 900 and 1000.
The number rounded to 949 nearest to 100 is 900.
Round to nearest hundred: 900

Question 10
762
Round to nearest ten: 
Round to nearest hundred:      

Answer:

(i) Lets round 762 to the nearest 10.
The nearest 10’s on both sides of 762 is 760 and 770.
Round to nearest ten:  760

(ii) Let’s round 762 to the nearest 100
The nearest 100’s on both sides of 762 are 700 and 800.
The number rounded to 762 nearest to 100 is 800.
Round to nearest hundred:  800 

Question 11
399
Round to nearest ten: 
Round to nearest hundred:      

Answer:

(i) Lets round 399 to the nearest 10.
The nearest 10’s on both sides of 399 is 390 and 400.
Round to nearest ten: 400

(ii) Let’s round 399 to the nearest 100
The nearest 100’s on both sides of 399 are 300 and 400.
The number rounded to 399 nearest to 100 is 400
Round to nearest hundred: 400

Question 12
402
Round to nearest ten: 
Round to nearest hundred:      

Answer:

(i) Lets round 402 to the nearest 10.
The nearest 10’s on both sides of 402 is 400 and 410.
Round to nearest ten: 400

(ii) Let’s round 402 to the nearest 100
The nearest 100’s on both sides of 402 are 400 and 500.
The number rounded to 402 nearest to 100 is 400.
Round to nearest hundred: 400

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 15 Q13

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 15 Q14

Lesson 2: Round to the Nearest Ten Lesson Check Page No 16

Lesson Check

Question 1
One day, 758 people visited the Monkey House at the zoo. What is 758 rounded to the nearest hundred?

(a) 700
(b) 760
(c) 800
(d) 860

Answer:
Let’s round 758 to the nearest hundred.
The nearest hundred on both sides is 700 and 800.
∴ 758 rounded to the nearest hundred is 800.
So, the answer is option C.

Question 2
Sami ordered 132 dresses for her store. What is 132 rounded to the nearest ten?

(a) 100
(b) 130
(c) 140
(d) 200

Answer:
Let’s round 132 to the nearest 10.
The nearest 10’s on both sides of 132 are 130 and 140.
∴ 132 rounded to the nearest ten is ‘130’
132 rounded to the nearest ten: 130
Option B is the correct answer.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Which describes the number sentence?
6 + 0 = 6

(a) Commutative Property of Addition
(b) Identity Property of Addition
(c) even + odd = odd
(d) odd + odd = odd

Answer:
The Identity Property of Zero, also called the Additive Identity Property, states that if you add 0 to any number, the result will be that number. Likewise, if you subtract 0 from any number, the result will be that number.
6 + 0 = 6
∴ Option B is the correct answer.

Question 4
Which has an even sum?

(a) 7 + 4
(b) 2 + 6
(c) 5 + 4
(d) 3 + 2

Answer:
The sum of even numbers is always even.
(a) 7 + 4 = 11 is odd number
(b) 2 + 6 = 8 is even number
(c) 5 + 4 = 9 is odd number
(d) 3 + 2 = 5 is odd number
So, the answer is option (b)

Question 5
What name describes this shape?

HMH Go Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 image_1

(a) cone
(b) cube
(c) rectangle
(d) triangle

Answer: Triangle
∴ Option D is the correct answer.

Question 6
What word describes the equal shares of the shape?

Go Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 image_2

(a) wholes
(b) thirds
(c) halves
(d) fourths

Answer:
The rectangle is divided into 4 equal rectangles.
So, the name for the equal shapes is fourths.
∴ The answer is option D.

Estimate Sums Page No – 21

Compatible Numbers:

Compatible numbers are numbers that are easy to compute mentally and are close to real numbers.

Use rounding or compatible numbers to estimate the sum.

Question 1
198 + 727 =         

Answer:

200 +725 = 925

Explanation:

Step 1:
First round 198 to the nearest hundred.
The number rounded to 198 nearest hundred is 200.
Write zeros for the tens and ones digit.

Step 2:
Write the number closer to 727.
The number closer to 727 is 725.

Step 3:
Now find the sum of the rounded numbers.
200 + 725 = 925

Question 2
87 + 34

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 90 + 30 = 120

Explanation:

Step 1:
First round 87 to the nearest ten.
The number rounded to 87 nearest ten is 90.
Write zeros for the ones digit.

Step 2:
Write the number closer to 34.
The number closer to 34 is 30.

Step 3:
Now find the sum of the rounded numbers.
90 + 30 = 120

Question 3
222 + 203

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 200 +200 = 400

Explanation:

Step 1:
First round 222 to the nearest hundred.
The number rounded to 222 nearest hundred is 200.
Write zeros for the tens and ones digit.

Step 2:
Write the number closer to 203.
The number closer to 203 is 200.

Step 3:
Now find the sum of the rounded numbers.
200 + 200 = 400
The estimated sum of 222 + 203 is 400.

Question 4
52 + 39

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 50 + 40 = 90

Explanation:

Step 1:
First round 52 to the nearest ten.
The number rounded to 52 nearest ten is 50.
Write zeros for the ones digit.

Step 2:
Write the number closer to 39.
The number closer to 39 is 40.

Step 3:
Now find the sum of the rounded numbers.
50 + 40 = 90

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 21 Q5
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 21 Q5.1

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 21 Q6

Question 7
519 + 124

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 500 + 100 = 600

Explanation:

Step 1:
First round 519 to the nearest hundred.
The number rounded to 519 nearest hundred is 500.
Write zeros for the tens and ones digit.

Step 2:
Write the number closer to 124.
The number closer to 124 is 100.

Step 3:
Now find the sum of the rounded numbers.
500 + 100 = 600
The estimated sum is 600.

Question 8
790 + 112

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 800 + 100 = 900

Explanation:

Step 1:
First round 790 to the nearest hundred.
The number rounded to 790 nearest hundred is 800.
Write zeros for the tens and ones digit.

Step 2:
Write the number closer to 112.
The number closer to 112 is 100.

Step 3:
Now find the sum of the rounded numbers.
800 + 100 = 900
The estimated sum of 790 + 112 is 900.

Question 9
547 + 326

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 550 + 325 = 875

Explanation:

Step 1:
First round 547 to the nearest ten.
The number rounded to 547 nearest ten is 550.
Write zeros for the ones digit.

Step 2:
Write the number closer to 326.
The number closer to 326 is 325.

Step 3:
Now find the sum of the rounded numbers.
550 + 325 = 875

Question 10
325 + 458

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 325 + 500 = 825

Explanation:

First round 458 to the nearest hundred.
The number rounded to 458 nearest hundred is 500.
Write zeros for the tens and ones digit.
Now add 325 and 500,
You get, 325 + 500 = 825

Question 11
620 + 107

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer: 600 + 100 = 700

Explanation:

The number closer to 620 is 600.
And the number closer to 107 is 100.
600 + 100 = 700
Now the estimated sum of 620 + 107 = 700

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 21 Q12

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 21 Q13

Estimate Sums Lesson Check – Page No – 22

Lesson Check
Question 1
The McBrides drove 317 miles on one day and 289 on the next day. What is the best estimate of the number of miles the McBrides drove in all during the two days?

(a) 100
(b) 400
(c) 500
(d) 600

Answer: 600

Explanation:

The McBrides drove 317 miles on one day and 289 on the next day.
First, round 317 to the nearest hundred.
The number rounded to 317 nearest hundred is 300.
Write zeros for the tens and ones digit.
Next round 289 to the nearest hundred.
The number rounded to 289 nearest hundred is 300.
Write zeros for the tens and ones digit.
300 +300 = 600.
Option D is the correct answer.

Question 2
Ryan counted 63 birds in his backyard last week. This week, he counted 71 birds in his backyard. About how many birds did Ryan count in all?

(a) about 70
(b) about 100
(c) about 130
(d) about 200

Answer: about 130

Explanation:

Ryan counted 63 birds in his backyard last week. This week, he counted 71 birds in his backyard.
The number closer to 63 is 60.
The number closer to 71 is 70.
Now add 60 and 70 we get 130.
Therefore Ryan count about 130 birds.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review
Question 3
What name describes this shape?

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Round to the Nearest Ten or Hundred Page 22 What name describes this shape

(a) cone
(b) cube
(c) quadrilateral
(d) square

Answer: cube

A cube is a three-dimensional solid object bounded by six square faces, facets or sides, with three meeting at each vertex. The cube is the only regular hexahedron and is one of the five Platonic solids. It has 6 faces, 12 edges, and 8 vertices.

Question 4
Which has an odd sum?

(a) 9 + 9
(b) 5 + 3
(c) 6 + 7
(d) 2 + 8

Answer: 6 + 7

Explanation:

(a) 9 + 9 = 18 even number
(b) 5 + 3 = 8 even number
(c) 6 + 7 = 13 odd number
(d) 2 + 8 = 10 even number
So, the answer is option C.

Question 5
What is 503 rounded to the nearest hundred?

(a) 500
(b) 510
(c) 600
(d) 610

Answer: 500

The number 503 rounded to the nearest hundred is 500.
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 6
What is 645 rounded to the nearest ten?

(a) 600
(b) 640
(c) 650
(d) 700

Answer: 650

645 rounded to the nearest ten is 650.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Mental Math Strategies for Addition Page No – 27

Count by tens and ones to find the sum.

Use the number line to show your thinking.

Question 1

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Count by tens and ones to find the sum Question 1

Answer: 29 + 14 = 43

Question 2

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Count by tens and ones to find the sum Question 2

36 + 28 =

Answer: 36 + 28 = 64

Question 3

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Count by tens and ones to find the sum Question 2

45 + 26 =

Answer: 45 + 26 = 71

Question 4

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Count by tens and ones to find the sum Question 2

52 + 34 =

Answer: 52 + 34 = 86

Use mental math to find the sum.

Draw or describe the strategy you use.

Question 5
52 + 19 =

Answer: 52 + 19 = 71

I Used friendly numbers.
Subtract 2 from 52.
52 – 2 = 50
Then add 2 to 19.
19 + 2 = 21
Add 50 and 21
50 + 21 = 71

Question 6
122 + 306 =

Answer: 122 + 306 = 428

I Used compatible numbers
122 = 120 + 2
306 = 300 + 6
120 + 300 = 420
2 + 6 = 8
420 + 8 = 428

Problem Solving

Question 7
Shelley spent 17 minutes washing the dishes. She spent 38 minutes cleaning her room. Explain how you can use mental math to find how long Shelley spent on the two tasks

        minutes

Answer: 20 + 35 = 55 minutes

Explanation:

Shelley spent 17 minutes washing the dishes.
She spent 38 minutes cleaning her room.
First, make friendly numbers.
Add 3 to 17 to make it easy for addition
17 + 3 = 20
Next, subtract 3 from 38.
38 – 3 = 35
Now add both, 35 + 20 = 55
Shelly spent 55 minutes on the two tasks.

Question 8
It took Marty 42 minutes to write a book report. Then he spent 18 minutes correcting his report. Explain how you can use mental math to find how long Marty spent on his book report.

        minutes

Answer: 50 + 10 = 60 minutes

Explanation:

It took Marty 42 minutes to write a book report.
Then he spent 18 minutes correcting his report.
Make a friendly number
Subtract 2 from 42
42 – 2 = 40 minutes
Now add 2 to 18 minutes
18 + 2 = 20 minutes
Now add both, 20 + 40 = 60 minutes
Therefore Marty spent 60 minutes on his book report

Mental Math Strategies for Addition Page No – 28

Lesson Check
Question 1
Sylvia spent 36¢ for a pencil and 55¢ for a notepad. Use mental math to find how much she spent in all.

(a) 80¢
(b) 81¢
(c) 90¢
(d) 91¢

Answer: 91¢

Explanation:

Sylvia spent 36¢ for a pencil and 55¢ for a notepad.
Step 1:
Make a friendly number
Add 36¢ and 55¢
36¢ + 55¢ = 91¢
So, the correct answer is option D.

Question 2
Will spent 24 minutes putting together a model plane. Then he spent 48 minutes painting the model. How long did Will spend working on the model plane?

(a) 62 minutes
(b) 68 minutes
(c) 72 minutes
(d) 81 minutes

Answer: 72 minutes

Explanation:

Will spent 24 minutes putting together a model plane. Then he spent 48 minutes painting the model.
Add 24 and 48
24 + 48 = 72 minutes
Option C is the correct answer.

Spiral Review

Question 3
What name describes this shape?

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 What name describes this shape

(a) hexagon
(b) pentagon
(c) quadrilateral
(d) triangle

Answer: pentagon

Explanation:

From the figure, we can observe that there are 5 sides. A pentagon is a 5-sided Polygon
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 4
What word describes the equal shares of the shape?

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 What word describes the equal shares of the shape

(a) fourths
(b) halves
(c) sixths
(d) thirds

Answer: fourths

Explanation:

The circle is divided into 4 equal parts. The name for the equal shares of circle is fourths.

Question 5
Tammy wrote an addition problem that has an odd sum. Which could be Tammy’s addition problem?

(a) 2 + 6
(b) 3 + 5
(c) 5 + 6
(d) 7 + 7

Answer: 5 + 6

Explanation:

(a) 2 + 6 = 8 even number
(b) 3 + 5 = 8 even number
(c) 5 + 6 = 11 odd number
(d) 7 + 7 = 14 even number
11 is an odd number. So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 6
Greg counted 83 cars and 38 trucks in the mall parking lot. Which is the best estimate of the total number of cars and trucks Greg counted?

(a) 100
(b) 110
(c) 120
(d) 130

Answer: 120

Explanation:

Greg counted 83 cars and 38 trucks in the mall parking lot.
The number closer to 83 is 80.
And the number closer to 38 is 40.
80 + 40 = 120.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Use Properties to Add Page No 33

Use addition properties and strategies to find the sum.

Question 1
Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Use Properties of Add Question 1

Question 2
27 + 68 + 43 =

Answer: 138

Explanation:

Step 1:
Line up the numbers by place value.
27
68
+43

Step 2:
Group the ones to make them easy to add.
Make a 10
27
68
+43

7 + 3 = 10
1 will be carried to tens place.
8 will be in the ones place.

Step 3:
Group the tens to make them easy to add.
27
68
+43
6 + 4 = 10
10 + 3 = 13

27 + 68 + 43 = 138

Question 3
42 + 36 + 18 =

Answer: 96

Explanation:

Step 1:
Line up the numbers by place value.

42
36
+18

8 + 2 = 10
1 will be carried to the tens place
6 will be in the ones place.

Step 2:
Group the ones to make them easy to add.
Make a 10
42
36
+18

40 + 30 + 10 + 10 = 90

Step 3:
Group the tens to make them easy to add.
90 + 6 = 96

Question 4
74 + 35 + 16 + 45 =

Answer: 170

Explanation:

Step 1:
Line up the numbers by place value.
74
35
16
+45

Step 2:
Group the ones to make them easy to add.
Make a 10
74
35
16
+45

6 + 4 = 10
5 + 5 = 10
10 + 10 = 20
2 will be carried to tens place
0 will be in the ones place.

Step 3:
Group the tens to make them easy to add.
70 + 30 + 10 + 40 +20 = 170

Question 5
41 + 26 + 149 =

Answer: 216

Explanation:

Step 1:
Line up the numbers by place value.

149
41
+26

Step 2:
Group the ones to make them easy to add.
Make a 10

149
41
+26

9 + 1 = 10
1 will be carried to tens place.
6 will be in the ones place.

Step 3:
Group the tens to make them easy to add.
140 + 40 + 20 + 10 = 210
210 + 6 = 216

Question 6
52 + 64 + 28 + 44 =

Answer: 188

Explanation:

Step 1:
Line up the numbers by place value.
52
64
28
+44

Step 2:
Group the ones to make them easy to add.
Make a 10

52
64
28
+44

8 + 2 = 10
4 + 4 = 8
1 will be carried to the tens place.
8 will be in the ones place.

Step 3:
Group the tens to make them easy to add.
50 + 60 + 20 + 40 + 10 = 180
180 + 8 = 188

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 33 Q7

Question 8
The pet shelter bought 85 pounds of dog food, 50 pounds of cat food, and 15 pounds of gerbil food. How many pounds of animal food did the pet shelter buy?

        pounds

Answer: 150 pounds

Explanation:

Step 1:
Line up the numbers by place value.

85
50
+15

Step 2:
Group the ones to make them easy to add.
Make a 10

85
50
+15

5 + 5 = 10

Step 3:
Group the tens to make them easy to add.
80 + 50 + 10 + 10 = 150

Use Properties to Add Page No 34

Lesson Check
Question 1
At summer camp there are 52 boys, 47 girls, and 18 adults. How many people are at summer camp?

(a) 97
(b) 107
(c) 117
(d) 127

Answer: 117

Explanation:

At summer camp there are 52 boys, 47 girls, and 18 adults.
57
47
+18

52 + 47 + 18 = 117
Therefore 117 people are at summer camp.
The correct answer is option C.

Question 2
At camp, 32 children are swimming, 25 are fishing, and 28 are canoeing. How many children are swimming, fishing, or canoeing?

(a) 75
(b) 85
(c) 95
(d) 105

Answer: 85

Explanation:

At camp, 32 children are swimming, 25 are fishing, and 28 are canoeing.
32
25
+28

Make a group of 10.

32
25
+28

8 + 2 = 10
1 will be carried to the tens place.
5 will be in the ones place.
30 + 20 + 20 + 10 = 80
80 + 5 = 85
The correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Four students estimated the width of the door to their classroom. Who made the best estimate?

(a) Ted: 1 foot
(b) Hank: 3 feet
(c) Ann: 10 feet
(d) Maria: 15 feet

Answer: Hank: 3 feet

Question 4
Four students estimated the height of the door to their classroom. Who made the best estimate?

(a) Larry: 1 meter
(b) Garth: 2 meters
(c) Ida: 14 meters
(d) Jill: 20 meters

Answer: Garth: 2 meters

Question 5
Jeff’s dog weighs 76 pounds. What is the dog’s weight rounded to the nearest ten pounds?

(a) 70 pounds
(b) 80 pounds
(c) 90 pounds
(d) 100 pounds

Answer: 80 pounds

Explanation:

Jeff’s dog weighs 76 pounds.
76 rounded to the nearest ten is 80.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 6
Ms. Kirk drove 164 miles in the morning and 219 miles in the afternoon. Which is the best estimate of the total number of miles she drove that day?

(a) 100 miles
(b) 200 miles
(c) 400 miles
(d) 500 miles

Answer: 400 miles

Explanation:

Ms. Kirk drove 164 miles in the morning and 219 miles in the afternoon.
The number closer to 164 is 200.
The number closer to 219 is 200.
Now add the total number of mile
200 + 200 = 400 miles.
The correct answer is option C.

Use the Break Apart Strategy to Add Page No 39

Estimate. Then use the break apart strategy to find the sum.

Question 1

Question 2
518 + 372

Estimate: 900

Sum:
518 = 500 + 10 + 8
+372 = 300 + 70 + 2
890     800 + 80 + 10

Question 3
473 + 123

Estimate: 600

Sum:
473 = 400 + 70 + 3
123 = 100 + 20 + 3
596 = 500 + 90 + 6

Question 4
208 + 569

Estimate: 800

Sum:
208 = 200 + 00 + 8
569 = 500 + 60 + 9
777 = 700 + 70 + 7

Question 5
731 + 207

Estimate: 900

Sum:
731 = 700 + 30 + 1
207 = 200 + 00 + 7
938 = 900 + 30 + 8

Question 6
495 + 254

Estimate: 800

Sum:
495 = 400 + 90 + 5
254 = 200 + 50 + 4
749 = 700 + 40 + 9

Problem Solving
Use the table for 7–8.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Problem Solving

Question 7
Laura is making a building using Set A and Set C. How many blocks can she use in her building?

        blocks

Answer: 410 blocks

Add set A and Set C
165 + 245 = 410 blocks

165 = 100 + 60 +5
245 = 200 + 40 + 5
410 = 300 + 100 + 10
She can use 410 blocks in her building.

Question 8
Clark is making a building using Set B and Set C. How many blocks can he use in his building?

        blocks

Answer: 433 blocks

Add Set B and Set C
188 + 245 =

188 = 100 + 80 + 8
245 = 200 + 40 + 5
433 = 300 + 120 + 13
He can use 433 blocks in his building.

Use the Break Apart Strategy to Add Page No 40

Lesson Check
Question 1
Arthur read two books last week. One book has 216 pages. The other book has 327 pages. Altogether, how many pages are in the two books?

(a) 533
(b) 543
(c) 633
(d) 643

Answer: 543

Explanation:

Add 216 and 327
216 = 200 + 10 + 6
327 = 300 + 20 + 7
543 = 500 + 30 + 13

So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 2
One skeleton in a museum has 189 bones. Another skeleton has 232 bones. How many bones in all are in the two skeletons?

(a) 311
(b) 312
(c) 411
(d) 421

Answer: 421

Explanation:

Add 189 and 232
189 = 100 + 80 + 9
232 = 200 + 30 + 2
421 = 300 + 110 + 11
Thus the answer is option D.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Culver has 1 quarter, 3 dimes, and a penny. How much money does he have?

(a) 41¢
(b) 55¢
(c) 56¢
(d) 86¢

Answer: 56¢

Explanation:

1 quarter = $0.25
1 dime = $0.10
3 dimes = $0.10 × 3 = $0.30
1 penny = $0.01
Add $0.25 + $0.30 + $0.01 = $0.56 = 56 cents
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4
Felicia has 34 quarters, 25 dimes, and 36 pennies. How many coins does Felicia have?

(a) 75
(b) 85
(c) 95
(d) 105

Answer: 95

Explanation:

1 quarter = $0.25
34 quarters = $0.25 × 34 = $8.5
25 dimes = $0.10 × 25 = $2.5
36 pennies = $0.01 × 36 = 0.36
Option C is the correct answer.

Question 5
Jonas wrote 9 + 8 = 17. Which number sentence shows the Commutative Property of Addition?

(a) 9 + 0 = 9
(b) 8 + 9 = 17
(c) 17 – 9 = 8
(d) 17 – 8 = 9

Answer: 8 + 9 = 17

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 6
At Kennedy School there are 37 girls and 36 boys in the third grade. How many students are in the third grade at Kennedy School?

(a) 63
(b) 73
(c) 81
(d) 91

Answer: 73

Explanation:

Given that,
At Kennedy School there are 37 girls and 36 boys in the third grade.
Add number of girls and boys = 37 + 36 = 73
Therefore the correct answer is option B.

Use Place Value to Add Page No 45

Estimate. Then find the sum.

Question 1
Estimate: 600

324 + 285 = 609

324
285
609

Question 2
519  + 347

Estimate: 500 + 300 = 800

Sum: 519 + 347
519
347
866

Question 3
323 + 151

Estimate: 323 + 151 = 325 + 150= 475

Sum:

323
151
474

Question 4
169 + 354

Estimate: 150 + 350 = 500

Sum:

169
354
523

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 45 Q5

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 45 Q6

Question 7
275 + 116

Estimate: 275 + 100 = 375

Sum:

275
116
391

Question 8
157 + 141

Estimate: 150 + 150 = 300

Sum:

157
141
298

Question 9
127 + 290

Estimate: 100 + 300 = 400

Sum:

127
290
417

Question 10
258 + 565

Estimate: 250 + 550 = 800

Sum:

258
565
823

Question 11
311 + 298

Estimate: 300 + 300 = 600

Sum:

311
298
609

Question 12
534 + 256

Estimate: 550 + 250 = 800

Sum:

534
256
790

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 45 Q13

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 45 Q14

Lesson Check Page No 46

Question 1
There are 167 students in the third grade. The same number of students is in the fourth grade. How many third graders and fourth graders are there in all?

(a) 224
(b) 234
(c) 324
(d) 334

Answer: 334

Explanation:

Given that there are 167 students in the third grade.
The same number of students is in the fourth grade.
That means there are 167 students in the fourth grade.
To find the total number of students in third grade and fourth grade
You need to add 167 and 167
167 + 167 = 334.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 2
Jamal read a book with 128 pages. Then he read a book with 179 pages. How many pages did Jamal read in all?

(a) 397
(b) 307
(c) 297
(d) 207

Answer: 307

Explanation:

Jamal read a book with 128 pages. Then he read a book with 179 pages.
128 + 179 = 307
So, the answer is option B.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Adam travels 248 miles on Monday. He travels 167 miles on Tuesday. Which is the best estimate for the total number of miles Adam travels?

(a) 200
(b) 300
(c) 400
(d) 500

Answer: 400

Explanation:

Adam travels 248 miles on Monday. He travels 167 miles on Tuesday.
The number closer to 248 is 200
And the number closer to 167 is 200.
200 + 200 = 400
Thus the estimated number of miles Adam travels is 400.

Question 4
Wes made $14, $62, $40, and $36 mowing lawns. How much did he make in all mowing lawns?

(a) $116
(b) $152
(c) $166
(d) $188

Answer: $152

Explanation:

Add
14
62
40
+36
152
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5
There are 24 students in Mrs. Cole’s class and 19 students in Mr. Garmen’s class. How many students in all are in the two classes?

(a) 43
(b) 40
(c) 33
(d) 5

Answer: 43

Add 24 and 19
24 + 19 = 43
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 6
There were 475 children at the baseball game on Sunday. What is 475 rounded to the nearest ten?

(a) 400
(b) 470
(c) 480
(d) 500

Answer: 480

Explanation:

There were 475 children at the baseball game on Sunday.
475 rounded to the nearest ten is 480.
So, the answer is option C.

Mid Chapter Check Point – Vocabulary Page No 47

Choose the best term from the box.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Choose the best term from the box.

Question 1
A ________ is an ordered set of numbers or objects in which the order helps you predict what comes next.

Answer: Pattern is an ordered set of numbers or objects in which the order helps you predict what comes next.

Question 2
The _________ states that when you add zero to any number, the sum is that number.

Answer: Identity property of Addition states that when you add zero to any number, the sum is that number

Concepts and Skills
Is the sum even or odd? Write even or odd.

Question 3
8 + 3

Answer: 8 + 3 = 11 is an odd number.

Question 4
9 + 7

Answer: 9 + 7 = 16 is an even number

Question 5
4 + 6

Answer: 4 + 6 = 10 is an even number

Use rounding or compatible numbers to estimate the sum.

Question 6
56+32

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer:
The number which is compatible to 56 is 50.
The number compatible to 32 is 25
50
25
75

50 + 25 = 75

Question 7
271+425

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer:

The number close to 271 is 275
425 will be the same.

275
425
700
425 + 275 = 700

Question 8
328+127

Estimate:

         +         =        

Answer:

The number closer to 328 is 325
The number closer to 127 is 125
325 + 125 = 450

Use mental math to find the sum.

Question 9
46 + 14 =

Answer: 60

Explanation:

Break apart the addends to make them compatible
46 = 40 + 6
14 = 10 + 4
Now add both
40 + 6
10 + 4
50 + 10 = 60
46 + 14 = 60

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 47 Q10

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 47 Q11

Estimate. Then find the sum.

Question 12
356+442
Estimate: 800
Sum: 798

Answer:

356
442
798
The sum of 356 and 442 is 798
The number close to 798 is 800.
Therefore the estimated sum is 800.

Question 13
164+230
Estimate: 400
Sum: 394

Answer:

230
164
394

The sum of 230 and 164 is 394
The number 394 rounded to the nearest hundred is 400.
Thus the estimated sum is 400.

Question 14
545+139
Estimate: 700
Sum: 684

Answer:

545
139
684

The sum of 545 and 139 is 684.
684 rounded to the nearest hundred is 700.
So, the estimated difference is 700.

Question 15
437+184
Estimate: 600
Sum: 621

Answer:

437
184
621

The sum of 437 and 184 is 621
621 rounded to the nearest hundred is 600.
The estimated sum is 600.

Mid Chapter Check Point – Vocabulary Page No 48

Question 16
Nancy planted 77 daisies, 48 roses, and 39 tulips. About how many roses and tulips did she plant?

about         roses and tulips

Answer: 90 roses and tulips

Explanation:

Given that, Nancy planted 77 daisies, 48 roses, and 39 tulips.
To know how many roses and tulips did she plant
We have to add a number of roses and a number of tulips.
48 and 39.
The number closer to 48 is 50.
And the number closer to 39 is 40.
So, the estimated sum is 90.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 48 Q17

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 48 Q18

Question 19
Monday’s art group made 25 paper models. Tuesday’s group made 32 paper models. Wednesday’s group made 15 paper models. How many paper models did the groups make?

        paper models

Answer: 72 paper models

Explanation:

Monday’s art group made 25 paper models.
Tuesday’s group made 32 paper models.
Wednesday’s group made 15 paper models.
Add 25, 32 and 15
25
32
15
72

Estimate Differences Page No 53

Use rounding or compatible numbers to estimate the difference.

Question 1
40 – 13 = 
40 – 10
Estimate: 30

Question 2
762 – 332

Estimate:

         –          =        

Estimate: 500

The number closer to 762 is 800
The number closer to 332 is 300
The difference between 800 and 300 is 500

Question 3
823 – 242

Estimate:

         –          =        

Estimate: 550

The number 823 rounded to the nearest hundred is 800.
The number closer to 242 is 250
800
-250
550

Question 4
98 – 49

Estimate:

         –          =        

Estimate: 50

The number closer to 98 is 100
The round number of 49 is 50.
100
-50
50

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 53 Q5

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 53 Q6

Question 7
68 – 31

Estimate:

         –          =        

Estimate: 40
The round number of 68 is 70
The number closer to 31 is 30
70
-30
40

Question 8
476 – 155

Estimate:

         –          =        

Estimate: 325

The number closer to 476 is 475
The number closer to 155 is 150
475
-150
325

Question 9
622 – 307

Estimate:

         –          =        

Estimate: 300

622 nearest to the hundred is 600
307 nearest to the hundred is 300
600
-300
300

Question 10
771 – 531

Estimate:

         +         =        

Estimate: 225

The number closer to 771 is 775
531 nearest to ten is 550
775
550
225

Question 11
299 – 61

Estimate:

         +         =        

Estimate: 240

The number closer to 299 is 300
The number closer to 61 is 60
300
-60
240

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 53 Q12

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 53 Q13

Lesson Check Page No 54

Question 1
Jorge has 708 baseball cards and 394 basketball cards. About how many more baseball cards than basketball cards does Jorge have?

(a) about 200
(b) about 300
(c) about 400
(d) about 500

Answer: about 300

Explanation:

Jorge has 708 baseball cards and 394 basketball cards.
The number closer to 708 is 700.
The number closer to 394 is 400
700
-400
300
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 2
Danika is making necklaces. She has 512 silver beads and 278 blue beads. About how many more silver than blue beads does Danika have?

(a) about 200
(b) about 300
(c) about 400
(d) about 800

Answer: about 200

Explanation:

Danika is making necklaces. She has 512 silver beads and 278 blue beads.
The number closer to 512 is 500
278 to the nearest hundred is 300
The difference between 500 and 300 is 200.
Therefore Danika has about 200 more silver than blue beads.
So, the correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review
Question 3
A store manager ordered 402 baseball caps and 122 ski caps. Which is the best estimate of the total number of caps the manager ordered?

(a) 300
(b) 500
(c) 600
(d) 700

Answer: 500

Explanation:

A store manager ordered 402 baseball caps and 122 ski caps.
To find the best estimate of the total number of caps the manager ordered
We have to add baseball caps and ski caps.
The number closer to 402 is 400
The number closer to 122 is 100.
400 + 100 = 500
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 4
Autumn collected 129 seashells at the beach. What is 129 rounded to the nearest ten?

(a) 100
(b) 120
(c) 130
(d) 200

Answer: 130

Explanation:

Autumn collected 129 seashells at the beach.
129 rounded to the nearest ten is 130
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 5
Find the sum.

585 + 346

(a) 239
(b) 821
(c) 900
(d) 931

Answer: 931

585
+346
931
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6
Julie made $22, $55, $38, and $25 babysitting. How much did she make in all babysitting?

(a) $102
(b) $115
(c) $140
(d) $165

Answer: $140

Explanation:

Julie made $22, $55, $38, and $25 babysitting.
Put all the numbers in the order
22
55
38
+25
140
So, the correct answer is option C.

Mental Math Strategies for Subtraction Page No – 59

Use mental math to find the difference.
Draw or describe the strategy you use.
Question 1:
74 – 39 = 35

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Mental Math Strategies for Subtraction

Question 2
93 – 28 =

Answer: 65

I use friendly numbers.
Add 2 to the 93.
93 + 2 = 95
Add 2 to 28
28 + 2 = 30
95 – 30 = 65

Question 3
51 – 9 =

Answer: 42
I used friendly numbers to subtract 9 from 51.
Now add 1 to 9
9 + 1 = 10
Now subtract 10 from 51
51 – 10 = 41
Now add 1 to 41
41 + 1 = 42

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 59 Q4

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 59 Q5

Question 6
285 – 99 =

Answer:

I used friendly numbers.
The number close to 99 is 100
285 – 100 = 185
Now add 1 to 185
185 + 1 = 186
285 – 99 = 186

Problem Solving

Question 7
Ruby has 78 books. Thirty-one of the books are on shelves. The rest are still packed in boxes. How many of Ruby’s books are still in boxes?

        books

Answer: 47 books

Explanation:

Ruby has 78 books. Thirty-one of the books are on shelves. The rest are still packed in boxes.
To know the remaining books in the boxes.
Subtract 31 from 78.
78 – 31
70 – 30 = 40
8 – 1 = 7
40 + 7 = 47 books
Therefore 47 of Ruby’s books are still in boxes.

Question 8
Kyle has 130 pins in his collection. He has 76 of the pins displayed on his wall. The rest are in a drawer. How many of Kyle’s pins are in a drawer?

        pins

Answer: 54 pins

Explanation:

Kyle has 130 pins in his collection.
He has 76 of the pins displayed on his wall. The rest are in a drawer.
130 – 76 = 54
Thus there are 54 pins in a drawer.

Lesson Check Page No – 60

Question 1
One day, a baker made 54 fruit pies. At the end of the day, only 9 of the pies were NOT sold. How many pies were sold that day?

(a) 43
(b) 45
(c) 63
(d) 65

Answer: 45

Explanation:

Given,
One day, a baker made 54 fruit pies.
At the end of the day, only 9 of the pies were NOT sold.
Number of pies sold that day = x
x + 9 = 54
x = 54 – 9 = 45
x = 45
Therefore the number of pies sold that day = 45
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 2
George’s father bought a 50-pound bag of wild bird seed. At the end of two weeks, 36 pounds of seed were left in the bag. How many pounds of seed had been used?

(a) 14 pounds
(b) 24 pounds
(c) 26 pounds
(d) 86 pounds

Answer: 14 pounds

Explanation:

George’s father bought a 50-pound bag of wild bird seed.
At the end of two weeks, 36 pounds of seed were left in the bag.
Number of pounds used = x
x + 36 = 50
x = 50 – 36
x = 14
Therefore George’s father used 14 pounds.
The correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review
Question 3
For a party, Shaun blew up 36 red balloons, 28 white balloons, and 24 blue balloons. How many balloons did he blow up in all?

(a) 78
(b) 81
(c) 87
(d) 88

Answer: 88

Explanation:

For a party, Shaun blew up 36 red balloons, 28 white balloons, and 24 blue balloons.
Total number of balloons = 36 + 28 + 24
36
28
+24
88
So, the answer is option D.

Question 4
Tiffany has read 115 pages of her book. She has 152 pages left to read. How many pages are in the book?

(a) 37
(b) 267
(c) 277
(d) 367

Answer: 267

Explanation:;

Tiffany has read 115 pages of her book.
She has 152 pages left to read.
Total number of pages = 152 + 115
152
+115
267

Question 5
The flower shop had 568 flowers on Monday. By Tuesday, the shop had 159 flowers left. About how many flowers had been sold?

(a) about 200
(b) about 300
(c) about 400
(d) about 500

Answer: about 400

Explanation:

The flower shop had 568 flowers on Monday.
By Tuesday, the shop had 159 flowers left.
The number closer to 568 is 600.
The number closer to 159 is 200
Subtract 200 from 600.
600 – 200 = 400
The correct answer is option C.

Question 6
There are 383 books in one section of the school library. Of the books, 165 are fiction books. Which is the best estimate of the number of books in that section that are NOT fiction?

(a) about 200
(b) about 300
(c) about 400
(d) about 500

Answer: about 200

Explanation:

There are 383 books in one section of the school library.
Of the books, 165 are fiction books.
383 to the nearest hundred is 400.
165 to the nearest hundred is 200
400 – 200 = 200
So, the correct answer is option A.

Use Place Value to Subtract Page No 65

Estimate. Then find the difference.

Question 1
Estimate: 500

585 – 119

Subtract 119 from 585

585
119
466
585 – 119 = 466

Question 2
738 – 227

Estimate: 500

Difference: 511

Subtract 227 from 738
738
227
511
The estimated difference of 511 is 500.
738 – 227 = 511

Question 3
651 – 376
Estimate: 300
Difference: 275

Subtract 376 from 651
651
376
275
651 – 376 = 275
The estimated difference is 300

Question 4
815 – 281
Estimate: 500 
Difference: 534

Subtract 281 from 815

815
281
534
815 – 281 = 534
The estimated difference is 500

Question 5
487 – 290

Estimate: 200
Difference: 197

487
290
197
487 – 290 = 197
The estimated difference is 200.

Question 6
936 – 329

Estimate: 600
Difference: 607

936
329
607
936 – 329 = 607
The estimated difference is 600.

Question 7
270 – 128

Estimate: 140
Difference: 142

Subtract 128 from 270
270
128
142
270 – 128 = 142
The estimated difference is 140.

Question 8
364 – 177

Estimate: 200
Difference: 187

Subtract 177 from 364
364
177
187
364 – 177 = 187
The estimated difference is 200.

Question 9
627 – 253

Estimate: 400
Difference: 374

Subtract 253 from 627
627
253
374
627 – 253 = 374
The estimated difference is 374

Question 10
862 – 419

Estimate: 450
Difference: 443

Subtract 419 from 862
862
419
443
862 – 419 = 443
The estimated difference is 450.

Question 11
726 – 148

Estimate: 550
Difference: 578

Subtract 148 from 726
726
148
578
726 – 148 = 578
The estimated difference is 550.

Question 12
543 – 358

Estimate: 200
Difference: 185

Subtract 358 from 543
543
358
185
543 – 358 = 185
The estimated difference is 200.

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 65 Q13

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 65 Q14

Use Place Value to Subtract Page No 66

Question 1
On Saturday, 453 people go to a school play. On Sunday, 294 people go to the play. How many more people go to the play on Saturday?

(a) 159
(b) 169
(c) 259
(d) 747

Answer: 159

Explanation:

On Saturday, 453 people go to a school play. On Sunday, 294 people go to the play.
To find how many more people go to the play on Saturday
We need to subtract number of people go to the play on Sunday from the number of people go to the play on Saturday
= 453 – 294 = 159
159 more people go to the play on Saturday.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 2
Corey has 510 marbles. He fills one jar with 165 marbles. How many of Corey’s marbles are NOT in the jar?

(a) 675
(b) 455
(c) 350
(d) 345

Answer: 345

Explanation:

Corey has 510 marbles.
He fills one jar with 165 marbles.
Let the number of Corey’s marbles are NOT in the jar be x
x + 165 = 510
x = 510 – 165
x = 345
Therefore 345 marbles are NOT in the jar.
The correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Pattie brought 64 peppers to sell at the farmers’ market. There were 12 peppers left at the end of the day. How many peppers did Pattie sell?

(a) 50
(b) 52
(c) 62
(d) 78

Answer: 52

Explanation:

Pattie brought 64 peppers to sell at the farmers’ market.
There were 12 peppers left at the end of the day.
To find number of peppers did Pattie sell
Subtract 12 from 64
64 – 12 = 52
The correct answer is option B.

Question 4
An airplane flies 617 miles in the morning. Then it flies 385 miles in the afternoon. About how many more miles does the airplane fly in the morning?

(a) about 100 miles
(b) about 200 miles
(c) about 300 miles
(d) about 900 miles

Answer: about 200 miles

Explanation:

An airplane flies 617 miles in the morning.
Then it flies 385 miles in the afternoon.
Here we have to use the concept of estimated difference.
The number closer to 617 is 600
The number closer to 385 is 400
600 – 400 = 200
About 200 miles airplane fly in the morning.
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 5
What is the unknown number?

(■ + 4) + 59 = 70

(a) 4
(b) 6
(c) 7
(d) 8

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Let ■ be the unknown number
(■ + 4) + 59 = 70
(■ + 4) = 70 – 59
(■ + 4) = 11
(■ = 11 – 4
■ = 7
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6
Dexter has 128 shells. He needs 283 more shells for his art project. How many shells will Dexter use for his art project?

(a) 155
(b) 165
(c) 401
(d) 411

Answer: 411

Explanation:

Dexter has 128 shells. He needs 283 more shells for his art project.
To know the total number of shells that Dexter used for his art project
you need to add 128 and 283
283 + 128 = 411
So, the correct answer is option D.

Combine Place Values to Subtract Page No – 71

Estimate. Then find the difference.

Question 1
Estimate: 200

476 – 269

476
-269
207
The estimated difference is 200.

Question 2
615 – 342

Estimate: 300
Difference: 273

615
-342
273
The difference between 615 and 342 is 273
The estimated difference is 300.

Question 3
508 – 113

Estimate: 400
Difference: 395

508
-113
395
The difference between 508 and 113 is 395
The estimated difference is 400

Question 4
716 – 229

Estimate: 500
Difference: 487

716
229
487
The number closer to 487 is 500.
The difference is 487.

Question 5
700 – 326

Estimate: 400
Difference: 374

700
326
374
The number closer to 374 is 400.
The difference is 374.

Question 6
325 – 179

Estimate: 100
Difference: 146

325
179
146
The number closer to 146 is 100
The difference is 146.

Question 7
935 – 813

Estimate: 100
Difference: 122

935
813
122
The number closer to 122 is 100.
The difference is 122.

Question 8
358 – 292

Estimate: 50
Difference: 66

358
292
66
The number closer to 66 is 50.
The difference is 66.

Question 9
826 – 617

Estimate: 200
Difference: 209

826
617
209
The number closer to 209 is 200.
The difference is 209.

Question 10
900 – 158

Estimate: 750
Difference: 742

900
158
742
The number closer to 742 is 750.
The difference is 742

Question 11
607 – 568

Estimate: 40
Difference: 39

607
568
39
The number closer to 39 is 40.
The difference is 40.

Question 12
973 – 869

Estimate: 100

Difference: 104

973
869
104
The number closer to 104 is 100.
The difference is 104.

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 71 Q13

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 71 Q14

Lesson 11: Combine Place Values to Subtract Page No 72

Question 1
A television program lasts for 120 minutes. Of that time, 36 minutes are taken up by commercials. What is the length of the actual program without the commercials?

(a) 84 minutes
(b) 94 minutes
(c) 104 minutes
(d) 156 minutes

Answer: 84 minutes

Explanation:

A television program lasts for 120 minutes.
Of that time, 36 minutes are taken up by commercials.
To find the length of the actual program without the commercials
Subtract 36 minutes from 120 minutes
120
-36
84
Thus the length of the actual program without the commercials is 84 minutes.
The correct answer is option A.

Question 2
Syd spent 215 minutes at the library. Of that time, he spent 120 minutes on the computer. How much of his time at the library did Sid NOT spend on the computer?

(a) 85 minutes
(b) 95 minutes
(c) 105 minutes
(d) 335 minutes

Answer: 95 minutes

Explanation:

Syd spent 215 minutes at the library.
Of that time, he spent 120 minutes on the computer.
To find How much of his time at the library did Sid NOT spend on the computer
We have to subtract the time he spent on the computer from the total time he spent at the library.
i.e., 215 – 120 = 95 minutes
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Xavier’s older brother has 568 songs on his music player. To the nearest hundred, about how many songs are on the music player?

(a) 500
(b) 600
(c) 700
(d) 800

Answer: 600

Explanation:

Xavier’s older brother has 568 songs on his music player.
568 to the nearest hundred is 600.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4
The students traveled to the zoo in 3 buses. One bus had 47 students. The second bus had 38 students. The third bus had 43 students. How many students in all were on the three buses?

(a) 108
(b) 118
(c) 128
(d) 138

Answer: 128

Explanation:

The students traveled to the zoo in 3 buses.
One bus had 47 students.
The second bus had 38 students.
The third bus had 43 students.
Total number of students in all three buses = x
x = 47 + 38 + 43
x = 128 students.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 5
Callie has 83 postcards in her collection. Of the postcards, 24 are from Canada. The rest of the postcards are from the United States. How many of the postcards are from the United States?

(a) 58
(b) 59
(c) 61
(d) 69

Answer: 59

Explanation:

Callie has 83 postcards in her collection.
Of the postcards, 24 are from Canada.
The rest of the postcards are from the United States.
Subtract 24 from 83 we get the number of postcards is from the United States.
83 – 24 = 59
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 6
There were 475 seats set up for the school play. At one performance, 189 of the seats were empty. How many seats were filled at that performance?

(a) 286
(b) 296
(c) 314
(d) 396

Answer: 286

Explanation:

There were 475 seats set up for the school play.
At one performance, 189 of the seats were empty.
Let the Number of seats were filled at that performance = x
x + 189 = 475
x = 475 – 189
x = 286
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Problem Solving • Model Addition and Subtraction Page No – 77

Use the bar model to solve the problem.

Question 1
Elena went bowling. Elena’s score in the first game was 127. She scored 16 more points in the second game than in the first game. What was her total score?

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Model Addition and Substraction Problem Solving Question 1

Question 2
Mike’s Music sold 287 CDs on the first day of a 2-day sale. The store sold 96 more CDs on the second day than on the first day. How many CDs in all were sold during the 2-day sale?

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Model Addition and Substraction Problem Solving Question 2

      CDs

Answer: 670 CDs

Explanation:

Mike’s Music sold 287 CDs on the first day of a 2-day sale.
The store sold 96 more CDs on the second day than on the first day.
The means Mike’s music sold CDs on the second day = 287 + 96 = 383.
★ = 283 CDs
Total CDs were sold during the 2-day sale = 383 + 287
♦ = 383 + 287 = 670 CDs

Lesson Check Page No – 78

Question 1
Ms. Hinely picked 46 tomatoes from her garden on Friday. On Saturday, she picked 17 tomatoes. How many tomatoes did she pick in all?

(a) 109
(b) 63
(c) 53
(d) 29

Answer: 63

Explanation:

Ms. Hinely picked 46 tomatoes from her garden on Friday.
On Saturday, she picked 17 tomatoes.
First, find how many tomatoes did she pick in all.
46 + 17 = ★
★ = 63
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 2
Rosa read 57 pages of a book in the morning. She read 13 fewer pages in the afternoon. How many pages did Rosa read in the afternoon?

(a) 44
(b) 60
(c) 70
(d) 83

Answer: 44

Explanation:

Rosa read 57 pages of a book in the morning.
She read 13 fewer pages in the afternoon.
57 – 13 = ♦
♦ = 57 – 13
♦ = 44
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review
Question 3
Mike has 57 action figures. Alex has 186 action figures. Which is the best estimate of the number of action figures Mike and Alex have altogether?

(a) 150
(b) 250
(c) 350
(d) 400

Answer: 250

Explanation:

Mike has 57 action figures.
Alex has 186 action figures.
186 – 57 = ★
★ = 186 – 57
★ = 129
Now Add Mike and Alex action figures
♦ = 186 + 57 = 243
The estimated figure of 243 is 250.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4
There are 500 sheets of paper in the pack Hannah bought. She has used 137 sheets already. How many sheets of paper does Hannah have left?

(a) 363
(b) 463
(c) 400
(d) 637

Answer: 363

Explanation:

There are 500 sheets of paper in the pack Hannah bought. She has used 137 sheets already.
To find how many sheets of paper does Hannah have left
We have to subtract the number of sheets used from the total number of sheets.
500 – 137 = ★
★ = 500 – 137
★ = 363
Therefore 343 sheets are left.
The correct answer is option A.

Question 5
There were 378 visitors to the science museum on Friday. There were 409 visitors on Saturday. How many more people visited the museum on Saturday?

(a) 25
(b) 31
(c) 171
(d) 787

Answer: 31

Explanation:

There were 378 visitors to the science museum on Friday.
There were 409 visitors on Saturday.
To find how many more people visited the museum on Saturday.
Subtract the number of visitors on Friday from the number of visitors on Saturday.
409 – 378 = 31
31 people visited more the museum on Saturday.
So the correct answer is option B.

Question 6
Ravi scores 247 points in a video game. How many more points does he need to score a total of 650?

(a) 897
(b) 430
(c) 417
(d) 403

Answer: 403

Explanation:

Ravi scores 247 points in a video game.
Let x be the points he needs to score a total of 650
x + 247 = 650
x = 650 – 247
x = 403
Thus he needs 403 points to make a score of 650.
The correct answer is option D.

Review/Test – Page No 79

Question 1

For numbers 1a–1d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the sum is even.

a. 5 + 8

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: No

Explanation:

5 + 8 = 13 is an odd number.
So, the answer is no.

Question 1
b. 9 + 3

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

9 + 3 = 12 is an even number.
So, the answer is yes.

Question 1
c. 6 + 7

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: No

Explanation:

6 + 7 = 13 is an odd number.
So, the answer is no.

Question 1
d. 9 + 5

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

9 + 5 = 14 is an even number.
So, the answer is yes.

Question 2
Select the number sentences that show the Commutative Property of Addition. Mark all that apply.

(a) 14 + 8 = 22
(b) 8 + 14 = 14 + 8
(c) 8 + (13 + 1) = (8 + 13) + 1
(d) (5 + 9) + 8 = (9 + 5) + 8

Answer: 8 + 14 = 14 + 8

Explanation:

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
So, the answer is option B.

Question 3
Select the numbers that round to 300 when rounded to the nearest hundred. Mark all that apply.

(a) 238
(b) 250
(c) 283
(d) 342
(e) 359

Answer: 283

Explanation:
283 rounded to the nearest hundred is 300.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 4
There are 486 books in the classroom library. Complete the chart to show 486 rounded to the nearest 10.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Model Addition and Substraction Problem Solving Question 4

Answer:

Hundreds Tens Ones
400 90 0

486 rounded to the nearest ten is 490.

Review/Test – Page No – 80

Question 5
Write each number sentence in the box below the better estimate of the sum.

393+225=■ 481+215=■

352+328=■ 309+335=■

Write each number sentence in the box below the better estimate of the sum

Answer:

600 700
393+225 = 618
The estimated sum is 600.309+335= 644
The estimated sum is 600.
481+215= 696
The estimated sum is 700.352+328= 680
The estimated sum is 700.

Explanation:

393+225=■
■ = 618
The number closer to 618 is 600

481+215=■
■ = 696
The number closer to 696 is 700

352+328=■
■ = 680
The number closer to 680 is 700.

309+335=■
■ = 644
The number closer to 644 is 600.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 80 Q6

Question 7
The table shows how many books each class read.

Go Math Grade 3 The table shows how many books each class read

For numbers 7a–7d, select True or False for each statement.

a. Ms. Martin’s class read about 100 more books than Mr. Lopez’s class.

(i) True
(ii) False

Answer: True

Explanation:

Number of books that Mr. Lopez’s class read = 273
Number of books that Ms. Martin’s class read = 402
402
– 273
129
So, the statement Ms. Martin’s class read about 100 more books than Mr. Lopez’s class is true.

Question 7
b. The 3 classes read over 900 books altogether.

(i) True
(ii) False

Answer: True

Explanation:

Number of books that Mr. Lopez’s class read = 273
Number of books that Ms. Martin’s class read = 402
Number of books that Mrs. Wang read = 247
273
402
274
949
Therefore the statement the 3 classes read over 900 books altogether is true.

Question 7
c. Mrs. Wang’s class read about 50 fewer books than Mr. Lopez’s class.

(i) True
(ii) False

Answer: False

Explanation:

Number of books that Mrs. Wang read = 247
Number of books that Mr. Lopez’s class read = 273
273
– 247
26
Thus the statement Mrs. Wang’s class read about 50 fewer books than Mr. Lopez’s class is false.

Question 7
d. Ms. Martin’s and Mrs. Wang’s class read about 700 books.

(i) True
(ii) False

Answer: False

Explanation:

Number of books that Ms. Martin’s class read = 402
Number of books that Mrs. Wang read = 247
402
247
649
Therefore the statement Ms. Martin’s and Mrs. Wang’s class read about 700 books is false.

Review/Test – Page No – 81

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 81 Q8

Question 9
Choose the property that makes the statement true.

The Go Math grade 3 Chapter 1 answer key review image_1 Property of addition states that you can group addends in different ways and get the same sum.

Answer: The Associative Property of addition states that you can group addends in different ways and get the same sum.

Use the table for 10–12.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Problem Solving Use the table for 10–12

Question 10
The table shows the number of sweaters sold online in three months. How many sweaters were sold in January and February?

        sweaters

Answer: 700 sweaters

Explanation:

The number of sweets sold in the month of January = 402
The number of sweets sold in the month of February = 298
First, make the friendly numbers to make the addition easy.|
Subtract 2 from 402 = 402 – 2 = 400
Next add 2 to 298 = 298 + 2 = 300
Now add both
400 + 300 = 700
Therefore 700 sweaters were sold in January and February.

Question 11
How many more sweaters were sold in January than March?

        sweaters

Answer: 231 sweaters

Explanation:

The number of sweets sold in the month of January = 402
The number of sweets sold in the month of March = 171
To find how many more sweaters were sold in January than March, we have subtracted the number of sweaters sold in the march from January
402 – 171 = 231
231 more sweaters were sold in January than March.

Question 12

How many more sweaters were sold in February and March than in January?

        sweaters

Answer: 67 sweaters

Explanation:

The number of sweets sold in the month of January = 402
The number of sweets sold in the month of February = 298
The number of sweets sold in the month of March = 171
Total number of sweaters sold in February and March = 298 + 171 = 469
Now subtract 402 from 469
469 – 402 = 67 sweaters
67 more sweaters were sold in February and March than in January.

Review/Test – Page No – 82

Question 13
Help Dana find the sum.

346 + 421 + 152
For numbers 13a–13d, select Yes or No to tell Dana when to regroup.

a. Regroup the ones.

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: Yes

Question 13
b. Add the regrouped ten.

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: No

Question 13
c. Regroup the tens.

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: Yes

Question 13
d. Add the regrouped hundred.

(a) yes
(b) no

Answer: Yes

Question 14
Alexandra has 78 emails in her inbox. She deletes 47 emails. How many emails are left in her inbox? Draw jumps and label the number line to show your thinking.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Alexandra has 78 emails in her inbox. She deletes 47 emails

        emails

Answer: 31 emails

Explanation:

Alexandra has 78 emails in her inbox.
She deletes 47 emails.
Let x be the number of emails left in her inbox
x + 47 = 78
x = 78 – 47
x = 31
Therefore, 31 emails are left in her inbox.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 82 Q15

Review/Test – Page No – 83

Question 16
Luke solves this problem. He says the difference is 214. Explain the mistake Luke made. What is the correct difference?

352−148 =        

Answer: 204

Explanation:

Make friendly numbers to make the subtraction easy.
First subtract 2 from 352 = 350
350
148
202
1 will be borrowed from tens place. So 0 becomes 10.
10 – 8 = 2
4 – 4 = 0
300 – 100 = 200
200 + 2 = 202
Now add 2 to 202 you get 204.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Page 83 Q17

Question 18
There are 318 fiction books in the class library. The number of nonfiction books is 47 less than the number of fiction books.

Part A

About how many nonfiction books are there in the class library? Explain.

About         nonfiction books

Answer: About 270 nonfiction books

Explanation:

Given that,
There are 318 fiction books in the class library.
The number of nonfiction books is 47 less than the number of fiction books.
Number of non fictions books = x
x + 47 = 318
x = 318 – 47
x = 271
The number closer to 271 is 270.
So, there are about 270 nonfiction books.

Question 18
Part B

How many fiction and nonfiction books are there in the class library altogether? Show your work.

        total books

Answer: 589

Explanation:

Number of fiction books = 318
Number of nonfiction books = 271
To find the total number of books we need to add both fiction and nonfiction books
= 318 + 271 = 589
There are 589 books in the class library.

Review/Test – Page No – 84

Question 19
Alia used 67 + 38 = 105 to check her subtraction. Which math problem could she be checking? Mark all that apply.

67−38=■
105−67=■
105+38=■
105−38=■

Answer: 105−67= 38; 105−38=67
She can use option B and Option D to check her subtraction.

Question 20
Alex and Erika collect shells. The tables show the kinds of shells they collected.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 1 Problem Solving Alex and Erika collect shells. The tables show the kinds of shells they collected.

Part A

Who collected more shells? How many did she collect? About how many more is that? Explain how you solved the problem.

       

Answer: Alex

Alxe’s Shells:
Number of Scallop = 36
Number of Jingle shells = 95
Number of Clam = 115
Now add all the three shells = 36 + 95 + 115 = 246 shells

Erika’s shells:

Number of Scallop = 82
Number of Whelk shells = 28
Number of Clam = 108
Now add all the three shells = 82 + 28 + 108 = 218 shells
Alex collected about 250 shells.

Question 20
Part B

Alex and Erika have the greatest number of what kind of shell? How many shells of that kind do they have? Show your work.

Answer: Clam

The greatest number of shells that Alex and Erika collected are Clam.

Conclusion

In addition to the exercise and homework problems we also provide the solutions for the Extra Practice. So, the students are advised to go through the Go Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Extra Practice to test your math skills in this chapter. You can also your friends to improve their math skills by sharing this link.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data

go-math-grade-3-chapter-2-represent-and-interpret-data-answer-key

Are you looking everywhere to find Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data? You have come the right way and we have covered different questions on the topic Represent and Interpret Data. Enhance your subject knowledge by taking the help of the 3rd Grade Go Math Chapter 2 Answer Key. Practice HMH Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data and answer the questions from the chapter with confidence. The detailed explanation provided helps you understand the topics easily.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data

We advise you to go through the topics in the Chapter Represent and Interpret Data. You need to work hard right from the beginning in order to have strong fundamentals. Become champ in the subject by referring to our Go Math 3rd Grade Solution Key. Assess your preparation standard by solving the 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data on your own and then verify with the solutions.

Lesson 1: Problem Solving • Organize Data

Lesson 2: Use Picture Graphs

Lesson 3: Make Picture Graphs

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 4: Use Bar Graphs

Lesson 5: Make Bar Graphs

Lesson 6: Solve Problems Using Data

Lesson 7: Use and Make Line Plots

Chapter 2 Review/Test

Organize Data Page No 91

Problem Solving Organize Data

Use the Favorite School Subject tables for 1–4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Organize Data img 1

Question 1.
The students in two third-grade classes recorded their favorite school subject. The data are in the tally table. How many fewer students chose science than chose social studies as their favorite school subject?
Think: Use the data in the tally table to record the data in the frequency table. Then solve the problem.
social studies: 12 students
science: 5 students
12 – 5 = 7
So, 7 fewer students chose science.

Subject Number
Math ____________
Science 5
Language Arts ____________
Reading ____________
Social Studies 12

Answer:

Subject Number
Math 11
Science 5
Language Arts 7
Reading 9
Social Studies 12

Question 2.
What subject did the least number of students choose?
___________

Answer: Science

Explanation:

We can answer the question by using the above tally table. The table shows the least number of students is 5. Thus the answer is Science.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 91 Q3

Question 4.
Suppose 3 students changed their vote from math to science. Describe how the frequency table would change.

Type below:
__________

Answer: There would be an equal number of students who chose math and who chose science

Explanation:

If we look at the graph there are 11 students who voted for Math and 5 students who voted for Science
If 3 students changed their vote from math to science then the new graph will be

11- 3= 8
i.e., Actual No. of Science Students + New Students who changed from Math to Science
= 5 + 3
= 8

Organize Data Lesson Check Page No 92

Question 1.
The tally table shows the cards in Kyle’s sports card collection.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Organize Data img 2
How many hockey and football cards does Kyle have combined?
Options:
a. 5
b. 8
c. 12
d. 13

Answer: 13

Explanation:

Given,
Kyle has 5 hockey cards and 8 football cards
To know total no. of hockey and football cards does Kyle have combined
We have to add 5 + 8 = 13
Therefore the total no. of cards that Kyle have combined is 13

Spiral Review

Question 2.
There are 472 people in the concert hall. What is 472 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 400
b. 470
c. 500
d. 600

Answer: 500

If the digit to the right is more or greater than 5, then the digit in the rounding place will be increased to 1.
472 is greater than 450
So, 472 rounded to the nearest hundred is 500
So the answer is option c.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 92 Q3

Question 4.
Judy has 573 baseball cards in her collection. Todd has 489 baseball cards in his collection. How many fewer cards does Todd have than Judy?
Options:
a. 84
b. 94
c. 116
d. 184

Answer: 84

Explanation:

Given,
Judy has 573 baseball cards in her collection
Todd has 489 baseball cards in his collection
To find how many fewer cards does Todd have than Judy
We have to find the difference between Judy and Todd baseball cards
= 573 – 489 = 84

Question 5.
Ms. Westin drove 542 miles last week and 378 miles this week on business. How many miles in all did she drive on business during the two weeks?
Options:
a. 810 miles
b. 820 miles
c. 910 miles
d. 920 miles

Answer: 920 miles

Explanation:

We observe that Ms. Westin drove 542 miles last week and 378 miles this week on business
Total number of miles in all did she drive on business during the two weeks is?
542 + 378 = 920 miles
Thus the answer to the above question is option d.

Use Picture Graphs Page No 97

Use the Math Test Scores picture graph for 1–7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 3

Question 1.
How many students scored 100? How can you find the answer?

Answer: To find the number of students who scored 100, count each star as 4 students. So, 20 students scored 100.

Question 2.
What does Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 4 stand for?
________ students

Answer: It represents 2 students.

Explanation:

The full star stands for 4 students
That means the half star is equal to two stars.

Question 3.
How many students in all scored 100 or 95?
________ students

Answer: 32 Students

Explanation:

No. of students who scored 100 = 5 stars
Each star = 4 students
i.e., 5 × 4 = 20 students
No. of students who scored 95 = 3
Each star = 4 students
That means 3 × 4 = 12
Total No. of students in all scored 100 or 95
12 + 20 = 32
Thus the answer is 32 students

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 97 Q4

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 97 Q5

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Suppose the students who scored 85 and 90 on the math test take the test again and score 95. How many stars would you have to add to the picture graph next to 95?
Type below:
__________

Answer: 4 Stars and half of a star

Explanation:

Students who scored 90 = 3 and a half star
Students who score 85 = 1 star
That means students scored 90 than 85 = 4 and a half star
Thus 4 and a half star stars would you have to add to the picture graph next to 95

Question 7.
If 2 more students took the math test and both made a score of 80, what would the picture graph look like?
Type below:
__________

Answer: There would be another row below 85. There would be half of a star next to 80.

Explanation:

There would be 5 lines and the 5th line will contain a half star

Use Picture Graphs Lesson Check Page No 98

Question 1.
Karen asked her friends to name their favorite type of dog.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 5
How many people chose poodles?
Options:
a. 10
b. 6
c. 4
d. 3

Answer: 6

Explanation:

If we look at the graph, there are three bones for poodles.
Each bone represents 2 people, which means 3 bones represent 6 people.
2 + 2 + 2 = 6 people chose poodles

Question 2.
Henry made a picture graph to show what topping people like on their pizza. This is his key.
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 6 = 6 people.
What does Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 7 stand for?
Options:
a. 2 people
b. 6 people
c. 9 people
d. 12 people

Answer: 12 people

Explanation:

By seeing the picture graph we can say that
Each pizza = 6 people
Then 2 pizzas = 6 + 6
= 12 people
S, the correct answer is option D

Spiral Review

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 98 Q3
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 98 Q3.1

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 98 Q4

Question 5.
What is 871 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 900
b. 880
c. 870
d. 800

Answer: 870

Explanation:

If the digit is less than 5 then the number will be decreased by 1
So, the number 871 rounded to the nearest ten is 870

Question 6.
What is 473 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 400
b. 470
c. 500
d. 570

Answer: 500

Explanation:

473 is greater than 450 so it must be increased
473 rounded to the nearest hundred is 500
So, the correct answer is option (C)

Make Picture Graphs Page No 103

Ben asked his classmates about their favorite kind of TV show. He recorded their responses in a frequency table. Use the data in the table to make a picture graph.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Picture Graph img 8
Follow the steps to make a picture graph.
Step 1 Write the title at the top of the graph.
Step 2 Look at the numbers in the table. Tell how many students each picture represents for the key.
Step 3 Draw the correct number of pictures for each type of show.
Use your picture graph for 1–5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Picture Graph img 9

Question 1.
What title did you give the graph?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Favorite TV Show

Question 2.
What key did you use?
________

Answer: Each ■ = 3 students

Question 3.
How many pictures did you use to represent sports?
_______ pictures

Answer: 2 pictures

Problem Solving

Question 4.
How many pictures would you draw if 12 students chose game shows as their favorite kind of TV show?
________ pictures

Answer: 4 pictures

Question 5.
What key would you use if 10 students chose cartoons?
■ = ______ students

Answer: ■ = 2 students

Explanation:

If 10 student chose cartoons, we can use a key that is a factor of 10
■■■■■ = 10
and each ■ = 2 students

Make Picture Graphs Lesson Check Page No 104

Question 1.
Sandy made a picture graph to show the sports her classmates like o play. How many fewer students chose baseball than chose soccer?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Picture Graph img 10
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Students chose Soccer = 9 and a half ball
Students chose Baseball = 6 balls
Given each ball = 2 students
So, students chose soccer = 2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2+1
=19 students
Students chose baseball = 2+2+2+2+2+2
= 12 students
students chose baseball than chose soccer = 19 – 12
= 7 students

Question 2.
Tommy is making a picture graph to show his friends’ favorite kind of music. He plans to use one musical note to represent 2 people. How many notes will he use to represent that 4 people chose country music?
Options:
a. 2
b. 4
c. 6
d. 8

Answer: 2

Explanation:

Given, Tommy is making a picture graph to show his friends’ favorite kind of music
One musical note = 2 people
For 4 people =?
2 + 2 people = 2 musical notes

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Find the sum.
4 9 0
+ 2 3 4
———
Options:
a. 256
b. 624
c. 664
d. 724

Answer: 724

Addition of 490 and 234 = 724

Question 4.
Sophie wrote odd numbers on her paper. Which number was NOT a number that Sophie wrote?
Options:
a. 5
b. 11
c. 13
d. 20

Answer: 20

Explanation:

Examples of odd numbers are 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15….
20 is an even number
So, the number was NOT a number that Sophie wrote is 20
Thus the correct answer is 20

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 104 Q5
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 104 Q5.1

Question 6.
Estimate the difference.
4 2 2
– 2 8 4
——–
Options:
a. 100
b. 180
c. 200
d. 700

Answer: 100

Explanation:

The subtraction of 422 and 284 is 138
138 is less than 150, so the estimated difference of 422 and 284 is 100.
Thus the correct answer is option (A)

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Page No 105

Vocabulary

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 11

Question 1.
A __________ uses numbers to record data.
_________

Answer: Frequency table

Question 2.
A __________ uses small pictures or symbols to show and compare information.
_________

Answer: Picture Graph

Concepts and Skills

Use the Favorite Season table for 3-6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 12

Question 3.
Which season got the most votes?
_________

Answer: Summer

From the above table, we can say that the highest number of votes is for Summer i.e., 28

Question 4.
Which season got 3 fewer votes than winter?
_________

Answer: Spring

Explanation:

Number of votes for Winter = 22
Number of votes for Spring = 19
22 – 19 = 3
So, Spring season got 3 fewer votes than winter

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 105 Q5

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 105 Q6

Use the Our Pets picture graph for 7-9.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 13

Question 7.
How many students have cats as pets?
________ students

Answer: 10 students

Explanation:

Number of paws for cats = 5
Each paw = 2 students
2+2+2+2+2 = 10 students

Question 8.
Five more students have dogs than which other pet?
__________

Answer: Bird

Explanation:

Number of paws for dogs = 6 and a half paw
Each paw = 2 students
2+2+2+2+2+2+1 = 13 students
Number of paws for bird = 4
2+2+2+2 = 8 students
13 – 8 = 5 students
Thus the answer is bird

Question 9.
How many pets in all do students have?
_________ students

Answer: 37 students

Explanation:

Number of paws for dogs = 6 and a half paw = 2+2+2+2+2+2+1 = 13 students
Number of paws for bird = 4 = 2+2+2+2 = 8 students
Number of paws for cats = 5 = 2+2+2+2+2 = 10 students
Number of paws for fish = 3 = 2+2+2 = 6 students
Total pets in all do students have = 13+8+10+6
= 37 students

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Lesson Check Page No 106

Use the Favorite Summer Activity picture graph for 10-14.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 14

Question 10.
Some students in Brooke’s school chose their favorite summer activity. The results are in the picture graph at the right. How many students chose camping?
________ students

Answer: 50 students

Explanation:

Total students chose camping = 5
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 10 students
10+10+10+10+10 = 50

Question 11.
How many more students chose swimming than canoeing?
_______ students

Answer: 30 students

Explanation:

Total students chose swimming = 6 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 10 students
= 10+10+10+10+10+10 = 60 students
Total students chose canoeing = 3 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
= 10+10+10 = 30 students
Total students chose swimming than canoeing = 60 – 30
= 30 students

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 106 Q12

Question 13.
How many pictures would you draw for biking if each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 5 students?
_______

Answer: 7 pictures

Explanation:

You would draw 7 pictures
If you look at the graph there are 35 students who chose biking
So, to represent 35 students when each picture represents 5 students, we will need 7 pictures
i.e., 5+5+5+5+5+5+5 = 35 students

Question 14.
How many more students choose swimming and camping combined than biking and canoeing?
_________ students

Answer: 45 students

Explanation:

First of all, we need to find how many students chose swimming and camping combined
Total students chose swimming = 6 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 10 students
= 10+10+10+10+10+10 = 60 students
Total students chose camping = 5
10+10+10+10+10 = 50 students
60+50 = 110 students
Next, we need to find how many students chose biking and canoeing
Total students chose canoeing = 3 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
= 10+10+10 = 30 students
Total students chose biking = 3 and a half picture
10+10+10+5 = 35
Add both, and we get
30+35 = 65 students
Then, we need to subtract
110 – 65 = 45 students
Therefore the students choose swimming and camping combined than biking and canoeing = 45 students

Use Bar Graphs Page No 111

Use the After-Dinner Activities bar graph for 1–6.

The third-grade students at Case Elementary School were asked what they spent the most time doing last week after dinner. The results are shown in the bar graph at the right.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Bar Graphs img 16

Question 1.
How many students spent the most time watching TV after dinner?
3 students

Answer: 3 students

Explanation:

From the above bar graph, we can see the activities of the students after dinner
Students spent the most time watching TV after dinner is between 2 and 4 i.e., 3 students

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 111 Q2

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 111 Q3
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 111 Q3.1

Question 4.
How many fewer students read than did homework?
__________ students

Answer: 6 fewer students

Explanation:

Students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
Students who spent the most time doing homework after dinner = 12
To find the students read than did homework = 12 – 6
= 6 students

Question 5.
How many more students read than watched TV?
________ students

Answer: 3 more students

Explanation:

Students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
Students who spent the most time watching TV after dinner = 3
To find the students read than watched TV = 6 – 3
= 3 students

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Suppose 3 students changed their answers to reading instead of doing homework. Where would the bar for reading end?
It would end at _________

Answer: Halfway between 8 and 10

Grade 3 Go Math Answer key Chapter 2 bar graph solution image_1

Explanation:

According to the graph, Students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
If 3 more students changed their answers to reading instead of doing homework, the total students would be 9 i.e., 6 + 3

Use Bar Graphs Lesson Check Page No 112

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Bar Graphs img 17
The bar graph shows the number of sandwiches sold at Lisa’s sandwich cart yesterday. How many tuna sandwiches were sold?
Options:
a. 12
b. 16
c. 18
d. 20

Answer: 18

Explanation:

According to the bar graph, tuna sandwiches sold at Lisa’s sandwich cart are between 16 to 20
The no. of tuna sandwiches were sold at Lisa’s sandwich cart = 18
So, the correct answer is option (C)

Spiral Review

Question 2.
What is 582 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 500
b. 580
c. 590
d. 600

Answer: 580

Explanation:

If the digit is less than 5 then the digit will be increased by 1.
582, 8 is rounded here.
2 < 5 so 582 rounded to the nearest ten is 580

Question 3.
Savannah read 178 minutes last week. What is 178 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 400
b. 280
c. 200
d. 180

Answer: 200

Explanation:

Savannah read 178 minutes last week
178 is greater than 150, so the number 178 rounded to the nearest hundred is 200

Question 4.
Estimate the difference.
3 7 1
– 9 9
——-
Options:
a. 500
b. 400
c. 300
d. 200

Answer: 300

Explanation:

The difference between 371 and 99 is 272
272 is near to 300. Because 272 is greater than 250.
So, the estimated difference between 371 and 99 is 300

Question 5.
Estimate the difference.
6 2 5
– 2 4 8
———
Options:
a. 800
b. 500
c. 400
d. 300

Answer: 400

Explanation:

The difference between 625 and 248 is 377
377 rounded to the nearest hundred is 400
Therefore the estimated difference between 625 and 248 is 400.

Make Bar Graphs Page No 117

Ben asked some friends to name their favorite breakfast food. He recorded their choices in the frequency table at the right.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Bar Graphs img 18

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph by using Ben’s data.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Bar Graphs img 19

Answer:

Pancakes = 12 votes
Oatmeal = 4

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Solution Key Bar Graph image_1

Use your bar graph for 2–5.

Question 2.
Which food did most people choose as their favorite breakfast food?
__________

Answer: Cereal

Explanation:

From the above bar graph, we can say that most of people chose Cereals as their favorite food.
Number of votes for cereals = 14

Question 3.
How many people chose waffles as their favorite breakfast food?
_________ people

Answer: 8 people

Explanation:

The bar graph shows that the number of people who chose Waffles as their favorite breakfast food is 8.

Question 4.
How did you know how high to draw the bar for pancakes?
Type below:
__________

Answer:

Since 12 people chose pancakes, I made the top of the bar end at the line for 12

Question 5.
Suppose 6 people chose oatmeal as their favorite breakfast food. How would you change the bar graph?
Type below:
___________

Answer: I would make the bar for oatmeal end halfway between 4 and 8.

Solution key for Go math Grade 3 Chapter 2 bar graph img_2

Make Bar Graphs Lesson Check Page No 118

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Bar Graphs img 20

Question 1.
Gary asked his friends to name their favorite pizza topping. He recorded the results in a bar graph. How many people chose pepperoni?
Options:
a. 6
b. 5
c. 4
d. 1

Answer: 6

Explanation:

The bar graph shows that the number of people who chose pepperoni is 6
So, the correct answer is option (a)

Question 2.
Suppose 3 more friends chose mushrooms. Where would the bar for mushrooms end?
Options:
a. 2
b. 4
c. 6
d. 8

Answer: 4

Explanation:

We notice that the vertical bar for mushrooms ends at 1
1 person chose mushrooms
If 3 more friends chose mushrooms, the bar would end at 4
Then the answer is 1 + 3 = 4

Spiral Review

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 118 Q3

Question 4.
Matt added 14 + 0. What is the correct sum?
Options:
a. 140
b. 14
c. 1
d. 0

Answer: 14

Explanation:

Any number added by 0 is itself. So the sum of 14 + 0 = 14
The correct answer is Option B

Question 5.
There are 682 runners registered for an upcoming race. What is 682 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 600
b. 680
c. 700
d. 780

Answer: 700

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal to 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
So, 682 rounded to the nearest hundred 700

The correct answer is option C

Question 6.
There are 187 new students this year at Maple Elementary. What is 187 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 100
b. 180
c. 190
d. 200

Answer: 190

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal to 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
So, the number 187 rounded to the nearest ten is 190
Thus the correct answer is Option C

Solve Problems Using Data Page No 123

Use the Favorite Hot Lunch bar graph for 1–3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Solve Problems Using Data img 21

Question 1.
How many more students chose pizza than chose grilled cheese?
Think: Subtract the number of students who chose grilled cheese, 2, from the number of students who chose pizza, 11.
11 – 2 = 9

Answer: 9 more students

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 123 Q2

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 123 Q3

Use the Ways to Get to School bar graph for 4–7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Solve Problems Using Data img 22
Question 4.
How many more students walk than ride in a car to get to school?
________ more students

Answer: 3 more students

Explanation:

No. of students walk to get to school = 7
No. of students ride in a car to get to school = 4
Now, subtract the no. of students walk from no. of students ride in a car
We get, 7 – 4 = 3

Question 5.
How many students walk and ride a bike combined?
________ students

Answer: 10 students

Explanation:

Number of students walk to get to school = 7
Number of students ride a bike to get to school = 3
To know how many students walk and ride a bike combined
We have to add Number of students walk and ride a bike
= 7 + 3 = 10

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 123 Q6

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 123 Q7

Solve Problems Using Data Lesson Check Page No 124

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Solve Problems Using Data img 23

Question 1.
How many fewer votes were for bench repair than for food drive?
Options:
a. 9
b. 10
c. 16
d. 11

Answer: 10

Explanation:

Number of votes for food drive = 13
Number of votes for bench repair = 3
To find votes were for bench repair than for food drive
We need to subtract Number of votes for bench repair from Number of votes for food drive
i.e., 13 – 3 = 10

Question 2.
How many votes were there in all?
Options:
a. 14
b. 4
c. 32
d. 34

Answer: 32

Explanation:

Number of votes for food drive = 13
Number of votes for bench repair = 3
Number of votes for Wall Mural = 10
Number of votes for Park Pick up = 6
Total no. of votes = 13 + 10 + 3 + 6 = 32

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Find the difference.
6 5 0
– 1 8 9
——–
Options:
a. 461
b. 479
c. 539
d. 571

Answer: 461

Explanation:

Here we have to subtract 650 from 189
650 – 189 = 461

Question 4.
Greyson has 75 basketball cards. What is 75 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 60
b. 70
c. 80
d. 90

Answer: 80

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
So, 75 rounded to the nearest ten is 80

Question 5.
Sue spent $18 on a shirt, $39 on a jacket, and $12 on a hat. How much did she spend in all?
Options:
a. $79
b. $69
c. $57
d. $51

Answer: $69

Explanation:

Given
Sue spent $18 on a shirt
Sue spent $39 on a jacket and $12 on a hat
Total amount she spent in all = 18 + 39 + 12
= $69
Thus the correct answer is option B

Question 6.
There are 219 adults and 174 children at the ballet. How many people are at the ballet in all?
Options:
a. 45
b. 293
c. 383
d. 393

Answer: 393

Explanation:

Given that there are 219 adults and 174 children in a ballet
To know how many people are at the ballet
We have to add no. of adults with no. of children
That means 219 + 174 = 393
Thus the correct answer is Option D

Use and Make Line Plots Page No 129

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use and Make Line Plots img 24

Question 1.
How many shirts sold for $12?
4 shirts

Answer: 4 shirts

Explanation:

From the above table, we can say that the no. of shirts sold for $12 is 4

Question 2.
At which price were the most shirts sold?
$ ________

Answer: $13

Explanation:

The table shows that the most number of shirts sold for $13

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 129 Q3

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 129 Q4
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 129 Q4.1

Problem Solving

Use the line plot above for 5–6.

Question 5.
Were more shirts sold for less than $13 or more than $13? Explain.
________

Answer: more than $13; 6 > 5

Explanation:

No. of shirts sold for less than $13 = 5
No. of shirts sold for more than $13 = 6
More shirts are sold for more than $13

Question 6.
Is there any price for which there are no data? Explain.
$ ________

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

There are no Xs above $15, there were no shirts sold for $15

Use and Make Line Plots Lesson Check Page No 130

Question 1.
Pedro made a line plot to show the heights of the plants in his garden. How many plants are less than 3 inches tall?
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 10
d. 16

Answer: 10

Explanation:

Number of plants of 1 inch = 6
Number of plants of 2 inches = 4
So, the number of plants less than 3 inches tall = 6 + 4
= 10 plants
So, the correct answer is option C

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use and Make Line Plots img 25

Question 2.
Find the sum.
6 4 2
+ 2 5 9
———
Options:
a. 383
b. 801
c. 891
d. 901

Answer: 901

Explanation:

Sum of 642 and 259 is 901
Thus the correct answer is option D

Question 3.
Find the difference.
4 6 0
– 3 0 9
———
Options:
a. 61
b. 151
c. 161
d. 169

Answer: 151

Explanation:

To get the answer we have to subtract 309 from 460
460 – 309 = 151
Thus the correct answer is option B

Question 4.
There were 262 hamburgers cooked for the school fair. What is 262 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 200
b. 260
c. 270
d. 300

Answer: 300

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
262 rounded to the nearest hundred is 300

Question 5.
Makenzie has 517 stickers in her collection. What is 517 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 500
b. 510
c. 520
d. 600

Answer: 520

Explanation:

Makenzie has 517 stickers in her collection
If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
517 rounded to the nearest ten is 520

Review/Test Page No 131

Question 1.
Mia made a tally table to record the different types of birds she saw at the bird feeder in the garden.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 26
For numbers 1a–1c, select True or False for each statement.
a. Mia saw twice as many sparrows as blackbirds.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

Use the tally provided in the above table
No. of Sparrows = 12
No. of Blackbird = 6
By this, we can say that the sparrows are twice as blackbirds
So, the answer is true

Question 1.
b. Mia saw 8 finches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

The above tally table shows that the number of finches = 8
So, the answer is true

Question 1.
c. Mia saw 4 fewer jays than blackbirds.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

No. of Blackbirds = 6
No. of Jays = 4
To know whether the question is true or false
We have to subtract 4 from 6
6 – 4 = 2
So, the answer is false

Question 2.
Jake asked 25 students in his class how close they live to school. The frequency table shows the results.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 27
Part A
Complete the table and explain how you found the answer.

Answer: 7 boys

Explanation:

Total Number of students = 25
Now we have to add the number of students from the table
4 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 2 = 18 students
Next, subtract 18 from the total number of students, 25, to find x
25 – 18 = 7
Therefore, the missing number x is 7

Question 2.
Part B
How many more students live about 2 miles or less from school than students who live about 3 miles from school? Show your work.
________ students

Answer: 13 students

Explanation:

Number of students who live about 1 mile = 4 boys + 5 girls = 9 students
Students who live about 2  miles = 4 students
Students who live about 3 miles = 3 boys + 2 girls = 5 students
Next, we have to add total students who live about 2 miles or less = 9 + 4 = 13 students

Review/Test Page No 132

Use the picture graph for 3–6.

Students at Barnes School are performing in a play. The picture graph shows the number of tickets each class has sold so far.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 28

Question 3.
How many tickets were sold altogether? Explain how you found the total.
________ tickets

Answer: 100 tickets

Explanation:

Number of tickets sold in Ms. Brown’s Class = 9 ✓
Each tick = 5 tickets
5+5+5+5+5+5+5+5+5 = 45 tickets
Number of tickets sold in Mrs. Gold’s Class = 5 ✓
5+5+5+5+5 = 25 tickets
Number of ticks sold in Mr. Castro’s Class = 6 ✓
Each tick = 5 tickets
5+5+5+5+5+5 = 30
Now, we have to add the total number of tickets sold = 45 + 25 + 30 = 100 tickets

Question 4.
Choose the name from each box that makes the sentence true.
Five fewer tickets were sold by Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 29 class than Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 30 class.
Type below:
________

Answer: Mrs. Gold’s Class than Mr. Castro’s Class

Explanation:

Number of tickets sold in Mrs. Gold’s Class = 5 ✓
5+5+5+5+5 = 25 tickets
Number of ticks sold in Mr. Castro’s Class = 6 ✓
Each tick = 5 tickets
5+5+5+5+5+5 = 30
Subtract Number of tickets sold in Mrs. Gold’s from Mr. Castro’s Class
We get 30 – 25 = 5 tickets

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 132 Q5

Question 6.
What if Mrs. Gold’s class sold 20 more tickets? Draw a picture to show how the graph would change.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 20 tickets mean 5 + 5 + 5 + 5, or 4 ✓

Chapter 2 Answer Key for Go Math Grade 3 Review solution image_1

So we would add 4 more ticks to Mrs. Gold’s Class

Review/Test Page No 133

Use the frequency table for 7–8.

Question 7.
The Pet Shop keeps track of the number of fish it has for sale. The frequency table shows how many fish are in three tanks.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 31
Part A
Use the data in the table to complete the picture graph.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 32
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Given each circle= 2 fishes
Tank 1:
Tank 1 contains 16 fishes
That means 2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2 = 8 circle
Tank 2:
Tank 2 contains 9 fishes
= 2+2+2+2+1 = 4 and a half circle
Tank 3:
Tank 3 contains 12 fishes = 2+2+2+2+2+2 = 6 circle

Solution key for Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Review solution image_2

Question 7.
Part B
How many pictures did you draw for Tank 2? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer: 4 and a half circle

Explanation:

Tank 2 contains 9 fishes
Each circulet= 2 fishes
2+2+2+2+1
Therefore the answer is 4 and a half circle

Question 8.
Each tank can hold up to 20 fish. How many more fish can the Pet Shop put in the three tanks?
Options:
a. 60 fish
b. 23 fish
c. 20 fish
d. 33 fish

Answer: 23 fishes

Explanation:

Given that each tank can hold up to 20 fishes
Total number of tanks = 3
20+20+20 = 60 fishes
From the above table, we observe that
Tank 1 contains 16 fishes
Tank 2 contains 9 fishes
Tank 3 contains 12 fishes
Total number of fishes that all tanks contain = 12+16+9 = 37 fishes
Now, we have to subtract the number of fishes that all tanks contain from the number of fishes pet shop put in the three tanks
= 60 – 37 = 23 fishes

Review/Test Page No 134

Use the bar graph for 9–12.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 33

Question 9.
Three more students play the piano than which other instrument?
__________

Answer: Flute

Explanation:

The above bar graph shows the number of students who play musical instruments
From the graph, we observe that the number of students who play the flute is 6
And the number of students who play the piano is 9
Subtract Number of students play flute from piano
We get,
9 – 6 = 3
Thus the answer is Flute

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 134 Q10
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 134 Q10.1

Question 11.
For numbers 11a–11d, select True or False for each statement.
a. Ten more students play guitar than play flute.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

No. of students who play guitar = 10
No. of students who play flute = 6
The statement is not correct
So, the answer is false

Question 11.
b. Nine students play piano.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

The bar graph given in above shows that the number of students who play piano is 9. So, the answer is true.

Question 11.
c. Six fewer students play flute and piano combined than play drums and guitar combined.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

No. of students who play guitar = 10
No. of students who play drums = 10
No. of students who play flute = 6
No. of students who play piano = 9
Now, add the number of students who play flute and piano = 6+9 = 15
Next, add the No. of students who play drums and guitar = 10+10 = 20
The difference between them is 5, not 6
So, the answer is false

Question 11.
d. Nine more students play piano and guitar combined than play drums.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

No. of students who play piano = 9
No. of students who play guitar = 10
Total = 10+9 = 19 students
No. of students who play drums = 10
Subtract No. of students who play drums from total number of students who play piano and guitar combined
That means 19 – 10 = 9
Therefore the  answer is true

Question 12.
There are more students who play the trumpet than play the flute, but fewer students who play the guitar. Explain how you would change the bar graph to show the number of students who play the trumpet.
Type below:
________

Answer:

There are 6 students who play the flute and 10 students who play guitar
The no. of students who play trumpet must be between 6 and 10 i.e., 7, 8, or 9 students.

Key for Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Review solution image_5

In the above example, we show the number of students who play the trumpet is 8

Review/Test Page No 135

Use the frequency table for 13–14.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 34

Question 13.
Part A
Use the data in the table to complete the bar graph.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 35

Answer:

Chapter 2 Key for Go Math Grade 3 Review image_3

Question 13.
Part B
How do you know how long to make the bars on your graph? How did you show 15 votes for broccoli? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

By reading Karen’s frequency table we can see the number of votes for each favorite vegetable.
15 lies between 10 and 20. So, the bar should be drawn all the way to the midpoint between 10 and 20.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Page 135 Q14

Review/Test Page No 136

Use the line plot for 15–16.

The line plot shows the number of goals the players on Scot’s team scored.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 36

Question 15.
For numbers 15a–15d, select True or False for each statement.
a. Three players scored 2 goals.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

One player scored 2 goals, one player scored 4 goals and one player scored 3 goals
So, the answer is true

Question 15.
b. Six players scored fewer than 2 goals.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

From the figure, we can say that 4 players scored 1 goal and 2 players scored 0
4+2 =6
So, the answer is true

Question 15 (request help)
c. There are 8 players on the team.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

We need to count all X = 11

Question 15
d. Five players scored more than 1 goal.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

More than 1 goal means 2, 3, or 4 goals
We observe that 3 players scored 2 goals, 1 player scored 3 goals, and 1 player scored 4 goals
Now we have to add the players who scored more than 1 goal
3+1+1 = 5
Therefore 5 players scored more than 1 goal

Question 16.
What if two more people played and each scored 3 goals? Describe what the line plot would look like.
Type below:
__________

Answer: We have to add two more X on line plot 3

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Solution Key Review solution Image_4

Use the line plot for 17–18.

Robin collected shells during her vacation. She measured the length of each shell to the nearest inch and recorded the data in a line plot.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 37

Question 17.
How many shells were 6 inches long or longer?
_________ shells

Answer: 11 shells

Explanation:

5 shells were 6 inches long
2 shells were 7 inches long
1 shell was 8 inches long
3 shells were 9 inches long
Total = 5+2+1+3 = shells
Thus the answer is 11 shells

Question 18.
How many more shells did Robin collect that were 5 inches long than 8 inches long?
________ shells

Answer: 2 shells

Explanation:

Robin collects 3 shells which were 5 inches long and 1 shell was 8 inches long.
To know how many shells did Robin collect that were 5 inches long than 8 inches long
We have to subtract the number of shells was 8 inches long from the number of shells were 5 inches long
i.e., 3 – 1 = 2 shells

In this chapter, you can the bar graphs, picture graphs, and line plots. These are graphs that are the most interesting and easiest part of this chapter. A brief explanation of the topics is discussed in the Solution Key of Grade 3 Go Math Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data.

Here we have provided the exercise questions along with the answers to help in practicing the chapter. You can find the different and simple methods of solving the problems in Go Math 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Extra Practice. Hence make use of all the links and score well in the exams. If you any queries you can leave comments in the comment section below and we will respond as early as possible.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units

go-math-grade-4-chapter-12-relative-sizes-of-measurement-units-answer-key

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Pdf download links are provided here for free od cost.  Do refer to them during the preparation time and learn the concepts easily. All the students who are hunting for the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units can download them here. So, take the help of these available pdf links and download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 pdf to understand & learn the concepts of Relative Sizes of Measurement Units in a simplistic manner.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units

Go through the below-provided links and get the Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Answer Key for better preparation and score good marks in the exams. The provided solutions to all the questions asked from Relative Sizes of Measurement Units concepts will help you in real-time calculations also. Hence, utilize these lesson-wise links and solve each and every concept related questions covered in this chapter.

Lesson 1:

Lesson 2:

Common Core

Lesson 3:

Common Core

Lesson 4:

Common Core

Lesson 5:

Common Core

Mid Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 6:

Common Core

Lesson 7:

Common Core

Lesson 8:

Common Core

Lesson 9: Problem Solving • Elapsed Time

Common Core

Chapter 12: Page No. 699

Chapter 12: Page No. 700

Lesson 10:

Lesson 11: Algebra • Patterns in Measurement Units

Common Core

Chapter 12: Review/Test

Common Core – New – Page No. 645

Measurement Benchmarks

Use benchmarks to choose the customary unit you would use to measure each.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 1

Question 1.
height of a computer
foot

Question 2.
weight of a table
________

Answer: Pound

The customary unit to measure the weight of the table is Pound.

Question 3.
length of a semi-truck
________

Answer: Yard

The unit to measure the length of a semi-truck is the yard.

Question 4.
the amount of liquid a bathtub holds
________

Answer: Gallon

The customary unit to measure the amount of liquid a bathtub holds is Gallon.

Use benchmarks to choose the metric unit you would use to measure each.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 2

Question 5.
mass of a grasshopper
________

Answer: Gram

The metric unit to measure the mass of a grasshopper is the gram.

Question 6.
the amount of liquid a water bottle holds
________

Answer: Liter

The metric unit to measure the amount of liquid a water bottle holds is Liter.

Question 7.
length of a soccer field
________

Answer: Meter

The metric unit to measure the length of a soccer field is meter.

Question 8.
length of a pencil
________

Answer: Centimeter

The metric unit to measure the length of a pencil is Centimeter.

Circle the better estimate.

Question 9.
mass of a chicken egg
a. 50 grams
b. 50 kilograms

Answer: 50 grams

The better estimate to measure the mass of a chicken egg is 50 grams.

Question 10.
length of a car
a. 12 miles
b. 12 feet

Answer: 12 feet

The better estimate to measure the length of a car is 12 feet.

Question 11.
amount of liquid a drinking glass holds
a. 8 ounces
b. 8 quarts

Answer: 8 ounces

The better estimate to measure the amount of liquid a drinking glass holds is 8 ounces.

Complete the sentence. Write more or less.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 645 Q12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 645 Q13

Problem Solving

Question 14.
What is the better estimate for the mass of a textbook, 1 gram or 1 kilogram?
1 ________

Answer: 1 kilogram

The weight of a book will be more than a gram. So, the better estimate for the mass of a textbook is 1 kilogram.

Question 15.
What is the better estimate for the height of a desk, 1 meter or 1 kilometer?
1 ________

Answer: 1 meter

The kilometer is not suitable to measure the height of the desk. So, the better estimate for the height of a desk is 1 meter.

Common Core – New – Page No. 646

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which is the best estimate for the weight of a stapler?
Options:
a. 4 ounces
b. 4 pounds
c. 4 inches
d. 4 feet

Answer: 4 ounces

The best estimate for the weight of a stapler is 4 ounces
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
Which is the best estimate for the length of a car?
Options:
a. 4 kilometers
b. 4 tons
c. 4 kilograms
d. 4 meters

Answer: 4 meters

The unit to measure the length of the car is meters.
Thus the answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bart practices his trumpet 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours each day. How many hours will he practice in 6 days?
Options:
a. 8 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours
b. 7 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours
c. 7 hours
d. 6 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours

Answer: 7 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours

Explanation:

Bart practices his trumpet 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours each day.
The normal fraction for 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
In order to calculate the number of hours for 6 days, we need to multiply the fraction by 6.
6 × \(\frac{5}{4}\) = \(\frac{30}{4}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{30}{4}\) is 7 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours
So, the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Millie collected 100 stamps from different countries. Thirty-two of the stamps are from countries in Africa. What is \(\frac{32}{100}\) written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 32
b. 3.2
c. 0.32
d. 0.032

Answer: 0.32

The decimal for the fraction is \(\frac{32}{100}\) = 0.32
Thus the answer is option C.

Question 5.
Diedre drew a quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides of the same length. What kind of polygon did Diedre draw?
Options:
a. square
b. trapezoid
c. hexagon
d. pentagon

Answer: square

Explanation:

A square has got 4 sides of equal length and 4 right angles (right angle = 90 degrees).
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a circle?
Options:
a. 60°
b. 90°
c. 120°
d. 180°

Answer: 180°

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 360°
360°/2 = 180°
So, the correct answer is option D.

Page No. 649

Question 1.
Compare the size of a yard to the size of a foot.
Use a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 4
1 yard is ____ times as long as ____ foot.
____              ____

Answer: 1 yard is three times as long as one feet.

Complete.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 649 Q2

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 649 Q3

Question 4.
7 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 21 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feets
7 yards = 3 × 7 = 21 feets
Therefore 7 yards = 21 feets

Question 5.
4 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 12 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
4 yards = 4 × 3 feets = 12 feets
4 yards = 12 feets

Question 6.
10 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 30 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feets
10 yards = 10 × 3 feets = 30 feets
10 yards = 30 feets

Question 7.
7 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 84 inches

Explanation:

1 feet = 12 inches
7 feets = 7 × 12 = 84 inches

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 649 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 649 Q9

Question 10.
6 feet ____ 60 inches

Answer: 6 feet > 60 inches

Explanation:

1 feet = 12 inches
6 feets = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches
72 inches is greater than 60 inches
So, 6 feet > 60 inches

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 649 Q11

Question 12.
Select the measures that are equal. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 4 feet
b. 12 yards
c. 36 feet
d. 480 inches
e. 15 feet
f. 432 inches

Answer: B = C = F

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
12 yards = 12 × 3 = 36 feet
So, B = C

1 feet = 12 inches
36 feet = 12 × 36 inches = 432 inches
C = F
Therefore B = C = F

Page No. 650

Question 13.
Jasmine and Luke used fraction strips to compare the size of a foot to the size of an inch using fractions. They drew models to show their answers. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Jasmine’s Work
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 5
1 inch is \(\frac{1}{12}\) of a foot.
Luke’s Work
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 6
1 inch is \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a foot.
_______ ‘s answer makes sense

Answer: Jasmine’s answer makes sense

Question 13.
a. Apply For the answer that is nonsense, write an answer that makes sense.
Type below:
________

Answer: Luke’s answer is nonsense and Jasmine’s answer makes sense.
Because 1 foot = 12 inches. The fraction of 1 inch = \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a foot.

Question 13.
b. Look back at Luke’s model. Which two units could you compare using his model? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer: Luke’s model will be suitable to compare the size of a foot to the size of a yard using fractions.

1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 36 inches
36 inches = 1 yard
So, 1 yard = \(\frac{12}{36}\)
1 yard = \(\frac{1}{3}\) feet

Common Core – New – Page No. 651

Customary Units of Length

Complete.

Question 1.
3 feet = 36 inches
Think: 1 foot = 12 inches,
so 3 feet = 3 × 12 inches or 36 inches

Question 2.
2 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 6

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
2 yards = 2 × 3 = 6 feets

Question 3.
8 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 96 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
8 feet = 12 × 8 = 96 inches
So, 8 feet = 96 inches

Question 4.
7 yards = ____ feet

Answer:21 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
7 yards = 7 × 3 feet = 21 feets
So, 7 yards = 21 feets

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 651 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 651 Q6

Question 7.
10 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 120 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
10 feet = 10 × 12 inches
10 feet = 120 inches

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
3 yards ____ 10 feet

Answer: 3 yards < 10 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 3 × 3 feet = 9 feet
9 feet is less than 10 feet
So, 3 yards < 10 feet

Question 9.
5 feet ____ 60 inches

Answer: 5 feet = 60 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 inches = 60 inches
So, 5 feet = 60 inches

Question 10.
8 yards ____ 20 feet

Answer: 8 yards > 20 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
8 yards = 8 × 3 feet = 24 feet
24 feet is greater than 20 feet
So, 8 yards > 20 feet

Question 11.
3 feet ____ 10 inches

Answer: 3 feet > 10 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
3 feet = 3 × 12 inches = 36 inches
36 inches is greater than 10 inches
So, 3 feet > 10 inches

Question 12.
3 yards ____ 21 feet

Answer: 3 yards < 21 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 3 × 3 feet = 9 feet
9 feet is less than 21 feet
So, 3 yards < 21 feet

Question 13.
6 feet ____ 72 inches

Answer: 6 feet = 72 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
6 feet = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches
6 feet = 72 inches

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 651 Q14

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 651 Q15

Common Core – New – Page No. 652

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marta has 14 feet of wire to use to make necklaces. She needs to know the length in inches so she can determine how many necklaces to make. How many inches of wire does Marta have?
Options:
a. 42 inches
b. 84 inches
c. 168 inches
d. 504 inches

Answer: 168 inches

Explanation:

Marta has 14 feet of wire to use to make necklaces.
1 feet = 12 inches
14 feet = 14 × 12 inches
14 feet = 168 inches
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Jarod bought 8 yards of ribbon. He needs 200 inches to use to make curtains. How many inches of ribbon does he have?
Options:
a. 8 inches
b. 80 inches
c. 96 inches
d. 288 inches

Answer: 288 inches

Explanation:

Jarod bought 8 yards of ribbon. He needs 200 inches to use to make curtains.
1 yard = 36 inches
8 yards = 288 inches
Thus he has 288 inches of ribbon.
So, the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which describes the turn shown below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 7
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn counterclockwise

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise

By seeing the above figure we can say that the circle turn \(\frac{1}{4}\) in a counterclockwise direction.

Question 4.
Which decimal represents the shaded part of the model below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 8
Options:
a. 0.03
b. 0.3
c. 0.33
d. 0.7

Answer: 0.3

Explanation:

The square is divided into 10 parts. Among them, 3 parts are shaded.
The fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{3}{10}\)
The decimal that represents the above figure is 0.3
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Three sisters shared $3.60 equally. How much did each sister get?
Options:
a. $1.00
b. $1.20
c. $1.80
d. $10.80

Answer: $1.20

Explanation:

Three sisters shared $3.60 equally.
The amount that each sister get = x
x × 3 = $3.60
x = $3.60/3 = $1.20
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Which is the best estimate for the width of your index finger?
Options:
a. 1 millimeter
b. 1 gram
c. 1 centimeter
d. 1 liter

Answer: 1 centimeter

The unit to measure the width of your index finger is 1 centimeter
The answer is option C.

Page No. 655

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 9
Question 1.
4 tons = ______ pounds

Answer: 8000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
4 tons = 8000 pounds

Complete.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 655 Q2

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 655 Q3

Question 4.
7 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 112 ounces

1 pound = 16 ounces
7 pounds = 7 × 16 ounces
7 pounds = 112 ounces

Question 5.
6 tons = ______ pounds

Answer:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
6 tons = 6 × 2000 pounds
6 tons = 12,000 pounds

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using >, <, or =.

Question 6.
1 pound ______ 15 pounds

Answer: 1 pound < 15 pounds
1 is greater than 15.
So, 1 pound < 15 pounds

Question 7.
2 tons ______ 2 pounds

Answer: 2 tons > 2 pounds
1 ton is greater than 1 pound.
So, 2 tons > 2 pounds

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 655 Q8

Question 9.
If you could draw a number line that shows the relationship between tons and pounds, what would it look like? Explain.

Answer:
Since 1 ton = 2000 pounds, the number line would show tick marks for every whole number from 0 to 2000. Each tick mark from 0 to 2000 would represent 1 pound. The tick mark in 2000 would represent 1 ton.

Question 10.
Write the symbol that compares the weights correctly.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 10
160 ounces ______ 10 pounds

Answer: 160 ounces = 10 pounds
1 pound = 16 ounces
16 pounds = 10 × 16 ounces = 160 ounces
160 ounces = 10 pounds

Question 10.
600 pounds ______ 1 ton

Answer: 600 pounds < 1 ton
1 ton = 2000 pounds
600 pounds is less than 2000 pounds
600 pounds < 1 ton

Page No. 656

Question 11.
Alexis bought \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of grapes. How many ounces of grapes did she buy?
Dan drew the number line below to solve the problem. He says his model shows that there are 5 ounces in \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound. What is his error?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 11
Look at the way Dan solved the problem.
Draw a correct number line and solve the problem.
Find and describe his error.
So, Alexis bought ______ ounces of grapes.
Type below:
________

1 pound = 16 ounces
\(\frac{1}{2}\) pound = 8 ounces
The error of Dan is he must draw the mark till 8 but he drew till 5 ounces.

Question 11.
Look back at the number line you drew. How many ounces are in \(\frac{1}{4}\) pound? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer: There are 4 ounces in \(\frac{1}{4}\) pound.

Common Core – New – Page No. 657

Customary Units of Weight

Complete.

Question 1.
5 pounds = 80 ounces
Think: 1 pound = 16 ounces, so
5 pounds = 5 × 16 ounces, or 80 ounces

Question 2.
7 tons = _____ pounds

Answer: 14,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
7 tons = 7 × 2000 pounds = 14000 pounds
7 tons = 14000 pounds

Question 3.
2 pounds = _____ ounces

Answer: 32 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces
2 pounds = 32 ounces

Question 4.
3 tons = _____ pounds

Answer: 6,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
3 tons = 3 × 2000 pounds = 6000 pounds
3 tons = 6000 pounds

Question 5.
10 pounds = _____ ounces

Answer: 160 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
10 pounds = 10 × 16 ounces = 160 ounces
10 pounds = 160 ounces

Question 6.
5 tons = _____ pounds

Answer: 10,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
5 tons = 5 × 2000 pounds = 10000 pounds
5 tons = 10000 pounds

Question 7.
7 pounds = _____ ounces

Answer: 112 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
7 pounds = 7 × 16 ounces = 112 ounces
7 pounds = 112 ounces

Compare using <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 657 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 657 Q9

Question 10.
3 pounds _____ 50 ounces

Answer: 3 pounds < 50 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces
3 pounds = 48 ounces
3 pounds < 50 ounces

Question 11.
5 tons _____ 1,000 pounds

Answer: 5 tons > 1,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
5 tons = 5 × 2000 pounds = 10000 pounds
10000 pounds is greater than 1000 pounds
5 tons > 1,000 pounds

Question 12.
16 pounds _____ 256 ounces

Answer: 16 pounds = 256 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
16 pounds = 16 × 16 ounces = 256 ounces
16 pounds = 256 ounces

Question 13.
8 tons _____ 16,000 pounds

Answer: 8 tons = 16,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
8 tons = 8 × 2000 pounds = 16,000 pounds
8 tons = 16,000 pounds

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 657 Q14

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 657 Q15

Common Core – New – Page No. 658

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Ann bought 2 pounds of cheese to make lasagna. The recipe gives the amount of cheese needed in ounces. How many ounces of cheese did she buy?
Options:
a. 20 ounces
b. 32 ounces
c. 40 ounces
d. 64 ounces

Answer: 32 ounces

Explanation:

Ann bought 2 pounds of cheese to make lasagna.
1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces
So, the answer is option B.

Question 2.
A school bus weighs 7 tons. The weight limit for a bridge is given in pounds. What is the weight of the bus in pounds?
Options:
a. 700 pounds
b. 1,400 pounds
c. 7,000 pounds
d. 14,000 pounds

Answer: 14,000 pounds

Explanation:

A school bus weighs 7 tons. The weight limit for a bridge is given in pounds.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
7 tons = 7 × 2000 pounds
7 tons = 14000 pounds
So, the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is the measure of m∠EHG?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 12
Options:
a. 60°
b. 100°
c. 120°
d. 130°

Answer: 120°

Explanation:

m∠EHG = m∠EHF + m∠FHG
m∠EHG = 90° + 30° = 120°
m∠EHG = 120°
The correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
How many lines of symmetry does the square below have?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 13
Options:
a. 0
b. 2
c. 4
d. 6

Answer: 4

Explanation:

A square contains 4 right angles.
So, the answer is option C.

Question 5.
To make dough, Reba needs 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour. How much flour does she need to make 5 batches of dough?
Options:
a. 14 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
b. 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
c. 11 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
d. 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Answer: 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Explanation:

To make dough, Reba needs 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour.
5 × 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
She need 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour to make dough.
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Judi’s father is 6 feet tall. The minimum height to ride a rollercoaster is given in inches. How many inches tall is Judi’s father?
Options:
a. 60 inches
b. 66 inches
c. 72 inches
d. 216 inches

Answer: 72 inches

Explanation:

Judi’s father is 6 feet tall. The minimum height to ride a rollercoaster is given in inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
6 feet = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Page No. 661

Question 1.
Compare the size of a quart to the size of a pint.
Use a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 14
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 15
1 quart is ____ times as much as _____ pint.

Answer: 1 quart is 2 times as much as 1 pint.

Complete.

Question 2.
2 pints = _____ cups

Answer: 4 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
2 pints = 2 × 2 cups = 4 cups
2 pints = 4 cups

Question 3.
3 gallons = _____ quarts

Answer: 12 quarts

Explanation:

1 gallon = 4 quarts
3 gallons = 3 × 4 quarts = 12 quarts
3 gallons = 12 quarts

Question 4.
6 quarts = _____ cups

Answer: 24 cups

Explanation:

1 quart = 4 cups
6 quarts = 6 × 4 cups = 24 cups
6 quarts = 24 cups

Use a model or Tools to complete.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 661 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 661 Q6

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using >, <, or =.

Question 7.
2 gallons _____ 32 cups

Answer: 2 gallons = 32 cups

Explanation:

1 gallon = 16 cups
2 gallons = 2 × 16 cups = 32 cups
2 gallons = 32 cups

Question 8.
4 pints _____ 6 cups

Answer: 4 pints > 6 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
4 pints = 4 × 2 cups = 8 cups
So, 4 pints > 6 cups

Question 9.
5 quarts _____ 11 pints

Answer: 5 quarts < 11 pints

Explanation:

1 quart = 2 pints
5 quarts = 5 × 2 pints = 10 pints
10 is less than 11 pints
So, 5 quarts < 11 pints

Question 10.
A soccer team has 25 players. The team’s thermos holds 4 gallons of water. If the thermos is full, is there enough water for each player to have 2 cups? Explain. Make a table to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 16
________

Answer: Enough water

Gallons Cups
1 16
2 32
3 48
4 64

Page No. 662

Question 11.
Verify the Reasoning of Others Whose statement makes sense? Whose statement is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 17
_______ ’s statement makes sense.

Answer: Angela’s Statement is true. A gallon is 8 times as much as a pint, so 1 pint is 1/8 of a gallon.
Zach’s statement is nonsense. There are 8 pints in a gallon, not 4, so a pint cannot be 1/4 of a gallon.

Question 12.
Peter’s glasses each hold 8 fluid ounces. How many glasses of juice can Peter pour from a bottle that holds 2 quarts?
_____ glasses

Answer: 8 glasses

Explanation:

Peter’s glasses each hold 8 fluid ounces.
There is 32oz per quart. 8 goes into 32 a total of four times. So since there are two quarts, Peter can pour 8 glasses.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 662 Q13

Common Core – New – Page No. 663

Customary Units of Liquid Volume

Complete.

Question 1.
6 gallons = 24 quarts
Think: 1 gallon = 4 quarts,
so 6 gallons = 6 × 4 quarts, or 24 quarts

Question 2.
12 quarts = _____ pints

Answer: 24 pints

Explanation:

1 quart = 2 pints
12 quarts = 12 × 2 pints
12 pints = 24 pints

Question 3.
6 cups = _____ fluid ounces

Answer: 48 fluid ounces

Explanation:

1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
6 cups = 6 × 8 fluid ounces = 48 fluid ounces
So, 6 cups = 48 fluid ounces

Question 4.
9 pints = _____ cups

Answer: 18 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
9 pints = 9 × 2 cups = 18 cups
9 pints = 18 cups

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 663 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 663 Q6

Question 7.
3 gallons = _____ cups

Answer: 48 cups

Explanation:

1 gallon = 16 cups
3 gallons = 3 × 16 cups = 48 cups
Therefore 3 gallons = 48 cups

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
6 pints _____ 60 fluid ounces

Answer: 6 pints > 60 fluid ounces

Explanation:

1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
6 pints = 6 × 16 fluid ounces = 96 fluid ounces
96 fluid ounces is greater than 60 fluid ounces
So, 6 pints > 60 fluid ounces

Question 9.
3 gallons _____ 30 quarts

Answer: 3 gallons < 30 quarts

Explanation:

1 gallon = 4 quarts
3 gallons = 3 × 4 quarts = 12 quarts
12 is less than 30
So, 3 gallons < 30 quarts

Question 10.
5 quarts _____ 20 cups

Answer: 5 quarts = 20 cups

Explanation:

1 quart = 4 cups
5 quarts = 5 × 4 cups = 20 cups
5 quarts = 20 cups

Question 11.
6 cups _____ 12 pints

Answer: 6 cups < 12 pints

Explanation:

1 cup = \(\frac{1}{2}\) pint
6 cups = 6 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) pint = 3 pints
3 is less than 12.
So, 6 cups < 12 pints

Question 12.
8 quarts _____ 16 pints

Answer: 8 quarts = 16 pints

Explanation:

1 quart = 2 pints
8 quarts = 8 × 2 pints = 16 pints
8 quarts = 16 pints

Question 13.
6 gallons _____ 96 pints

Answer: 6 gallons < 96 pints

Explanation:

1 gallon = 8 pints
6 gallons = 6 × 8 pints = 48 pints
48 is less than 96 pints
So, 6 gallons < 96 pints

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 663 Q14

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 663 Q15
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 663 Q15.1

Common Core – New – Page No. 664

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Joshua drinks 8 cups of water a day. The recommended daily amount is given in fluid ounces. How many fluid ounces of water does he drink each day?
Options:
a. 16 fluid ounces
b. 32 fluid ounces
c. 64 fluid ounces
d. 128 fluid ounces

Answer: 64 fluid ounces

Explanation:

1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
8 cups = 8 × 8 fluid ounces = 64 fluid ounces
8 cups = 64 fluid ounces
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
A cafeteria used 5 gallons of milk in preparing lunch. How many 1-quart containers of milk did the cafeteria use?
Options:
a. 10
b. 20
c. 40
d. 80

Answer: 20

Explanation:

A cafeteria used 5 gallons of milk in preparing lunch.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
5 gallons = 5 × 4 quarts = 20 quarts
5 gallons = 20 quarts
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Roy uses \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of batter for each muffin. Which list shows the amounts of batter he will use depending on the number of muffins he makes?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{5}, \frac{1}{6}, \frac{1}{7}, \frac{1}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{3}{12}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{5}{20}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{6}{24}, \frac{8}{32}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}\)

Explanation:

Given that, Roy uses \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of batter for each muffin.
The amounts of batter he will use depending on the number of muffins he makes is \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}\)
The correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Beth has \(\frac{7}{100}\) of a dollar. Which shows the amount of money Beth has?
Options:
a. $7.00
b. $0.70
c. $0.07
d. $0.007

Answer: $0.07

Explanation:

Beth has \(\frac{7}{100}\) of a dollar.
The decimal of \(\frac{7}{100}\) = 0.07
The amount of money Beth has is $0.07
So, the answer is option C.

Question 5.
Name the figure that Enrico drew below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 18
Options:
a. a ray
b. a line
c. a line segment
d. an octagon

Answer: a ray

Explanation:

A part of a line with a start point but no endpoint is called a ray.
The above figure has no endpoint.
So, the answer is option A.

Question 6.
A hippopotamus weighs 4 tons. Feeding instructions are given for weights in pounds. How many pounds does the hippopotamus weigh?
Options:
a. 4,000 pounds
b. 6,000 pounds
c. 8,000 pounds
d. 12,000 pounds

Answer: 8,000 pounds

Explanation:

A hippopotamus weighs 4 tons. Feeding instructions are given for weights in pounds.
We know that 1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
Thus the answer is option C.

Page No. 667

Question 1.
A food critic collected data on the lengths of time customers waited for their food. Order the data from least to greatest time. Make a tally table and a line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 19
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 20
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 21
Type below:
________

Answer:

Tally Table:

Time Customers waited for Food
Time (in hour) Tally
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ||
\(\frac{1}{4}\) |||
\(\frac{3}{4}\) |
1 |

Line plot:

Go Math Solution Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 solution image_2

Use your line plot for 2 and 3.

Question 2.
On how many customers did the food critic collect data?
________

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Number of customers waited for half an hour = 2
Number of customers waited for an hour = 1
Number of customers waited for \(\frac{3}{4}\) of an hour = 1
Number of customers waited for \(\frac{1}{4}\) of an hour = 3
Total number of customers = 2 + 1 + 1 + 3 = 7
The food critic collects data from 7 customers.

Question 3.
What is the difference between the longest time and the shortest time that customers waited?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

The longest time is 1 hour
And the shortest time is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
1 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 4.
Use Models The data show the lengths of the ribbons Mia used to wrap packages. Make a tally table and a line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 22
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 23
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 24
Type below:
________

Answer:

Ribbon used to Wrap Packages
Length (in yards) Tally
\(\frac{1}{6}\) |
\(\frac{2}{6}\) |||
\(\frac{5}{6}\) |
\(\frac{6}{6}\) |
\(\frac{3}{6}\) ||

Line plot:

Go math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 12 solution image_3

Question 5.
What is the difference in length between the longest ribbon and the shortest ribbon Mia used?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) yard

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) yard

Explanation:

The longest ribbon is \(\frac{6}{6}\) yard
The shortest ribbon is \(\frac{1}{6}\) yard
To find the difference of both the ribbons we have to subtract the shortest ribbon from the longest ribbon
\(\frac{6}{6}\) – \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Page No. 668

Question 6.
The line plot shows the distances the students in Mr. Boren’s class ran at the track in miles. Altogether, did the students run more or less than 5 miles?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 25
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
________

Answer: If the students ran more or less than 5 miles together.

Question 6.
b. What information do you need to use?
Type below:
________

Answer: I need the information about the distance each student ran.

Question 6.
c. How will the line plot help you solve the problem?
Type below:
________

Answer: With the help of the line plot I can know how far each student ran.

Question 6.
d. What operation will you use to solve the problem?
Type below:
________

Answer: I use addition to solve the problem.

Question 6.
e. Show the steps to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{3}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\) + \(\frac{5}{5}\) = \(\frac{22}{5}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{22}{5}\) is 4 \(\frac{2}{5}\).

Question 6.
Complete the sentences.
The students ran a total of ____ miles.
The distance is ____ than 5 miles. Altogether the students ran ____ than 5 miles.
Type below:
________

Answer: the students ran a total of 4 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles.
The distance is less than 5 miles. Altogether the students ran less than 5 miles.

Question 7.
Lena collects antique spoons. The line plot shows the lengths of the spoons in her collection. If she lines up all of her spoons in order of size, what is the size of the middle spoon? Explain.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 26
\(\frac{□}{□}\) feet spoon

Answer: \(\frac{4}{4}\) feet
I ordered the data from the least to the greatest value and found the middle value.

Question 8.
A hiking group recorded the distances they hiked. Complete the line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 27
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 28
Type below:
________

Answer:

Go Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 solution image_6

Common Core – New – Page No. 669

Line Plots

Question 1.
Some students compared the time they spend riding the school bus. Complete the tally table and line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 29
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 30

Time Spent on School Bus
Time (in hour) Tally
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ||
\(\frac{2}{6}\) |
\(\frac{3}{6}\) ||||
\(\frac{4}{6}\) |

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 solution image_1

Use your line plot for 2 and 3.

Question 2.
How many students compared times?
______ students

Answer: 8

Explanation:

Number of students spent \(\frac{1}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 2
Number of students spent \(\frac{2}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 1
Number of students spent \(\frac{3}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 4
Number of students spent \(\frac{4}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 1
Total number of students = 2 + 1 + 4 + 1 = 8 students

Question 3.
What is the difference between the longest time and shortest time students spent riding the bus?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) hour

Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

Longest time is \(\frac{4}{6}\) and shortest time is \(\frac{1}{6}\)
\(\frac{4}{6}\) – \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{3}{6}\)
Thus the difference between the longest time and shortest time students spent riding the bus is \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Problem Solving

For 4–5, make a tally table on a separate sheet of paper.
Make a line plot in the space below the problem.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 31
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 32

Answer:

HMH Go Math Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 solution image_4

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 33
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 34

Answer:

Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key for chapter 12 solution image_5

Common Core – New – Page No. 670

Lesson Check

Use the line plot for 1 and 2.

Question 1.
How many students were reading during study time?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 35
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 8

Explanation:

By seeing the above line plot we can say that the number of students reading during study time is 8.
So, the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
What is the difference between the longest time and the shortest time spent reading?
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{8}\) hour
b. \(\frac{3}{8}\) hour
c. \(\frac{2}{8}\) hour
d. \(\frac{1}{8}\) hour

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\) hour

Explanation:

The line plot shows that the shortest time is \(\frac{1}{8}\) hour and the longest time is \(\frac{4}{8}\) hour.
The difference of between the longest time and shortest time spent reading is \(\frac{4}{8}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\) hour
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bridget is allowed to play online games for \(\frac{75}{100}\) of an hour each day. Which shows that fraction as a decimal?
Options:
a. 75.0
b. 7.50
c. 0.75
d. 0.075

Answer: 0.75

Explanation:

The decimal form of the fraction \(\frac{75}{100}\) is 0.75.
So, the answer is option C.

Question 4.
Bobby’s collection of sports cards has \(\frac{3}{10}\) baseball cards and \(\frac{39}{100}\) football cards. The rest are soccer cards. What fraction of Bobby’s sports cards are baseball or football cards?
Options:
a. \(\frac{9}{100}\)
b. \(\frac{42}{100}\)
c. \(\frac{52}{100}\)
d. \(\frac{69}{100}\)

Answer: \(\frac{69}{100}\)

Explanation:

The way the question is written, there are other possibilities, but it seems to me the simplest possibility is that Bobby has 100 sports cards. If 3/10 are baseball, that’s 30. He has 39 football cards. So for baseball and football together it’s 69 cards.
So, the fraction is of Bobby’s sports cards are baseball or football cards is \(\frac{69}{100}\)
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Jeremy gives his horse 12 gallons of water each day. How many 1-quart pails of water is that?
Options:
a. 24
b. 48
c. 72
d. 96

Answer: 48

Explanation:

Jeremy gives his horse 12 gallons of water each day.
For 1 quart he needs 12 × 4 = 48 gallons of water
So, the answer is option B.

Question 6.
An iguana at a pet store is 5 feet long. Measurements for iguana cages are given in inches. How many inches long is the iguana?
Options:
a. 45 inches
b. 50 inches
c. 60 inches
d. 72 inches

Answer: 60 inches

Explanation:

An iguana at a pet store is 5 feet long. Measurements for iguana cages are given in inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 inches = 60 inches
Thus the answer is option C.

Page No. 671

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 36

Question 1.
A _______ is a customary unit used to measure weight.
_______

Answer: Pound

Question 2.
The cup and the _____ are both customary units for measuring liquid volume.
_______

Answer: Pint

Complete the sentence. Write more or less.

Question 3.
A cat weighs _______ than one ounce
____

Answer: more

Explanation:
Pound, unit of avoirdupois weight, equal to 16 ounces
The weigh of the cat is measured in pounds. So, the cat weighs more than one ounce

Question 4.
Serena’s shoe is ______ than one yard long.
____

Answer: Less

The length of the shoe is less when compared to the yard.
So, Serena’s shoe is less than one yard long.

Complete.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 671 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 671 Q6

Question 7.
4 cups = ____ pints

Answer: 2 pints

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
4 cups = 4 × 1/2 pint = 2 pints
Thus 4 cups = 2 pints

Question 8.
Mrs. Byrne’s class went raspberry picking. The data show the weights of the cartons of raspberries the students picked. Make a tally table and a line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 37
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 38
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 39
Type below:
_________

Line plot:

Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 12 Answer Key image_6

Tally Marks:

Cartons of Raspberries picked
Weight (in pounds) Tally
\(\frac{1}{4}\) |||
\(\frac{2}{4}\) ||
\(\frac{3}{4}\) |||
\(\frac{4}{4}\) |

Use your line plot for 9 and 10.

Question 9.
What is the difference in weight between the heaviest carton and the lightest carton of raspberries?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) pound

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound

Explanation:

The heaviest carton of raspberries is \(\frac{4}{4}\)
The lightest carton of raspberries is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
The difference in weight between the heaviest carton and the lightest carton of raspberries = \(\frac{4}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds.

Question 10.
How many pounds of raspberries did Mrs. Byrne’s class pick in all?
______ pounds

Answer: 5 pounds

Explanation:

Add total weight of carton of raspberries picked
= \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{4}{4}\) = 5
Therefore Mrs. Byrne’s class picked 5 pounds of raspberries in all.

Page No. 672

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 672 Q11

Question 14.
The watering can that Carlos uses in his vegetable garden holds 5 of a certain unit of liquid volume. When full, how much water is in the watering can?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 40
5 ______ of water

Answer: 5 gallons of water
The unit to measure the liquid volume is the gallon. So, the watering can holds 5 gallons of water.

Page No. 675

Complete.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 41

Question 1.
2 meters = _____ centimeters

Answer: 200 centimeters

Explanation:

Convert meters into centimeters
1 meter = 100 centimeters
2 meters = 2 × 100 centimeters = 200 centimeters

Question 2.
3 centimeters = _____ millimeters

Answer: 30 millimeters

Explanation:

Convert the centimeters into millimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
3 centimeters = 3 × 10 millimeters = 30 millimeters
3 centimeters = 30 millimeters

Question 3.
5 decimeters = _____ centimeters

Answer: 50 centimeters

Explanation:

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
5 decimeters = 5 × 10 centimeters = 50 centimeters
5 decimeters = 50 centimeters

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 675 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 675 Q5

Question 6.
6 decimeters _____ 65 centimeters

Answer: 6 decimeters < 65 centimeters

Explanation:

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
6 decimeters = 6 × 10 centimeters = 60 centimeters
60 is less than 65 centimeters
6 decimeters < 65 centimeters

Question 7.
7 meters _____ 700 millimeters

Answer: 7 meters > 700 millimeters

Explanation:

1 meter = 1000 millimeters
7 meters = 7 × 1000 millimeters = 7000 millimeters
7000 is greater than 700
So, 7 meters > 700 millimeters

Describe the length in meters. Write your answer as a fraction and as a decimal.

Question 8.
65 centimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{65}{100}\) or 0.65 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 65 centimeters is \(\frac{65}{100}\) and the decimal form of the fraction is 0.65 meter

Question 9.
47 centimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{47}{100}\) or 0.47 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 47 centimeters is \(\frac{47}{100}\) and the decimal is 0.47 meter.

Question 10.
9 decimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{9}{10}\) or 0.9 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 9 decimeters is \(\frac{9}{10}\) and the decimal for the fraction is 0.9 meter.

Question 11.
2 decimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{10}\) or 0.2 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 2 decimeters is \(\frac{2}{10}\) and the decimal for the fraction is 0.2 meter.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 675 Q12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 675 Q13

Page No. 676

Question 14.
Julianne’s desk is 75 centimeters long. She says her desk is 7.5 meters long. Describe her error.
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{75}{100}\) or 0.75 meter

The fraction form of 75 centimeters is \(\frac{75}{100}\). The decimation for the fraction is 0.75 meter

Question 15.
Write the equivalent measurements in each column.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 42
Type below:
_________

Answer:

5 meters 55 centimeters 50 millimeters
5000 millimeters 55/100 meter 500/1000 meter
500 centimeters 0.55 meter 0.500 meter
50 decimeters 550 millimeters 50 centimeters

Question 16.
Aruna was writing a report on pecan trees. She made the table of information to the right. Write a problem that can be solved by using the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 43
Type below:
_________

Answer: The height of the tree is 21m to 30m. How many centimeters is the height of the tree?

Question 16.
Describe how you could change the problem by changing a unit in the problem. Then solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Convert meters into centimeters.
Given that the height of the height is 21 to 30m
1 meter = 100 centimeters
21 meters = 2100 centimeters, 30 meters = 3000 centimeters
So, the height of the tree in centimeters is 2100 to 3000 centimeters.

Common Core – New – Page No. 677

Metric Units of Length

Complete.

Question 1.
4 meters = 400 centimeters
Think: 1 meter = 100 centimeters,
so 4 meters = 4 × 100 centimeters, or 400 centimeters

Question 2.
8 centimeters = ______ millimeters

Answer: 80 millimeters

Explanation:

1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
8 centimeters = 8 × 10 millimeters = 80 millimeters
8 centimeters = 80 millimeters

Question 3.
5 meters = ______ decimeters

Answer: 50 decimeters

Explanation:

We have to convert meters into decimeters
1 meter = 10 decimeters
5 meters = 5 × 10 decimeters = 50 decimeters
5 meters = 50 decimeters

Question 4.
9 meters = ______ millimeters

Answer: 9000 millimeters

Explanation:

You need to convert meters into millimeters
1 meter = 1000 millimeters
9 meters = 9 × 1000 millimeters = 9000 millimeters
9 meters = 9000 millimeters

Question 5.
7 meters = ______ centimeters

Answer: 700 centimeters

Explanation:

Convert meters into centimeters
1 meter = 100 centimeters
7 meters = 7 × 100 centimeters = 700 centimeters
7 meters = 700 centimeters

Compare using <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 677 Q6

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 677 Q7

Question 8.
4 meters ______ 450 centimeters

Answer: 4 meters < 450 centimeters

Explanation:

1 meter = 100 centimeters
4 meters = 400 centimeters
400 centimeters < 450 centimeters
So, 4 meters < 450 centimeters

Question 9.
90 centimeters ______ 9 millimeters

Answer: 90 centimeters > 9 millimeters

Explanation:

1 millimeter = 1/10 centimeters
9 millimeters = 1/90 centimeters
So, 90 centimeters > 9 millimeters

Describe the length in meters. Write your answer as a fraction and as a decimal.

Question 10.
43 centimeters =
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{43}{100}\), 0.43

Explanation:

The fraction of 43 centimeters is \(\frac{43}{100}\). the decimal form of \(\frac{43}{100}\) is 0.43

Question 11.
6 decimeters =
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{6}{10}\), 0.6

Explanation:

The fraction form of 6 decimeters is \(\frac{6}{10}\) and the decimal for the fraction is 0.6

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 677 Q12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 677 Q13

Problem Solving

Question 14.
A flagpole is 4 meters tall. How many centimeters tall is the flagpole?
_____ centimeters

Answer: 400 centimeters

Explanation:

A flagpole is 4 meters tall.
Now we have to convert the meters into centimeters.
We know that
1 meter = 100 centimeters
4 meters = 4 × 100 centimeters = 400 centimeters
Thus the height of the flagpole is 400 centimeters

Question 15.
A new building is 25 meters tall. How many decimeters tall is the building?
_____ decimeters

Answer: 250 decimeters

Explanation:

A new building is 25 meters tall.
We know that 1 meter = 10 decimeters
25 meters = 25 × 10 decimeters = 250 decimeters
The height of the building is 250 decimeters.

Common Core – New – Page No. 678

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A pencil is 15 centimeters long. How many millimeters long is that pencil?
Options:
a. 1.5 millimeters
b. 15 millimeters
c. 150 millimeters
d. 1,500 millimeters

Answer: 150 millimeters

Explanation:

A pencil is 15 centimeters long
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
15 centimeters = 15 × 10 millimeters = 150 millimeters
15 centimeters = 150 millimeters
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
John’s father is 2 meters tall. How many centimeters tall is John’s father?
Options:
a. 2,000 centimeters
b. 200 centimeters
c. 20 centimeters
d. 2 centimeters

Answer: 200 centimeters

Explanation:

John’s father is 2 meters tall.
Convert meters to centimeters.
1 meter = 100 centimeters
2 meters = 2 × 100 centimeters = 200 centimeters
The correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bruce reads for \(\frac{3}{4}\) hour each night. How long will he read in 4 nights?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{16}\)hours
b. \(\frac{7}{4}\) hours
c. \(\frac{9}{4}\) hours
d. \(\frac{12}{4}\) hours

Answer: \(\frac{12}{4}\) hours

Explanation:

Bruce reads for \(\frac{3}{4}\) hour each night.
Multiply latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] hour with 4 = latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] × 4 = \(\frac{12}{4}\) hours
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Mark jogged 0.6 mile. Caroline jogged 0.49 mile. Which inequality correctly compares the distances they jogged?
Options:
a. 0.6 = 0.49
b. 0.6 > 0.49
c. 0.6 < 0.49
d. 0.6 + 0.49 = 1.09

Answer: 0.6 > 0.49

Explanation:

Mark jogged 0.6 mile. Caroline jogged 0.49 mile.
0.49 miles is less than 0.6 miles
So, the correct answer is option B.

Use the line plot for 5 and 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 44

Question 5.
How many lawns were mowed?
Options:
a. 8
b. 9
c. 10
d. 11

Answer: 11

Explanation:

The line plot shows that the total number lawns = 11
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
What is the difference between the greatest amount and the least amount of gasoline used to mow lawns?
Options:
a. \(\frac{6}{8}\) gallon
b. \(\frac{5}{8}\) gallon
c. \(\frac{4}{8}\) gallon
d. \(\frac{3}{8}\) gallon

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) gallon

Explanation:

The greatest amount of gasoline used to mow lawns = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
The least amount of gasoline used to mow lawns = \(\frac{1}{8}\)
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\) gallon
The correct answer is option C.

Page No. 680

Question 1.
There are 3 liters of water in a pitcher. How many milliliters of water are in the pitcher?
There are _____ milliliters in 1 liter. Since I am changing from a larger unit to a smaller unit, I can _____ 3 by 1,000 to find the number of milliliters in 3 liters.
So, there are _____ milliliters of water in the pitcher.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 45

Answer: There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter. Since I am changing from a larger unit to a smaller unit, I can multiply 3 by 1,000 to find the number of milliliters in 3 liters.
So, there are 3000 milliliters of water in the pitcher.

Complete.

Question 2.
4 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 4000 milliliters

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
4 liters = 4 × 1000 milliliters = 4000 milliliters
4 liters = 4000 milliliters

Question 3.
6 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 6000 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
6 kilograms = 6000 grams

Complete.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 680 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 680 Q5

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 6.
1 kilogram _____ 900 grams

Answer: 1 kilogram < 900 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
1000 grams is less than 900 grams
1 kilogram < 900 grams

Question 7.
2 liters _____ 2,000 milliliters

Answer: 2 liters = 2,000 milliliters

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 liters
2 liters = 2,000 milliliters

Look for a Pattern Algebra Complete.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 46
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Liters Milliters
1 1,000
2 2 × 1,000 = 2,000
3 3 × 1,000 = 3,000
4 4 × 1,000 = 4,000
5 5 × 1,000 = 5,000
6 6 × 1,000 = 6,000
7 7 × 1,000 = 7,000
8 8 × 1,000 = 8,000
9 9 × 1,000 = 9,000
10 10 × 1,000 = 10,000

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 47
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Kilograms Grams
1 1,000
2 2 × 1,000 = 2,000
3 3 × 1,000 = 3,000
4 4 × 1,000 = 4,000
5 5 × 1,000 = 5,000
6 6 × 1,000 = 6,000
7 7 × 1,000 = 7,000
8 8 × 1,000 = 8,000
9 9 × 1,000 = 9,000
10 10 × 1,000 = 10,000

Page No. 681

Question 10.
Frank wants to fill a fish tank with 8 liters of water. How many milliliters is that?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 48
_____ milliliters

Answer: 8000 milliliters

Explanation:

Frank wants to fill a fish tank with 8 liters of water.
Convert liters into milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
8 liters = 8 × 1000 milliliters = 8000 milliliters

Question 11.
Kim has 3 water bottles. She fills each bottle with 1 liter of water. How many milliliters of water does she have?
_____ milliliters

Answer: 3000 milliliters

Explanation:

Kim has 3 water bottles. She fills each bottle with 1 liter of water.
Convert liters into milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3 × 1000 milliliters = 3,000 milliliters
She has 3000 milliliters of water.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 681 Q12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 681 Q13

Question 14.
A 500-gram bag of granola costs $4, and a 2-kilogram bag of granola costs $15. What is the least expensive way to buy 2,000 grams of granola? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
A 500-gram bag of granola costs $4, and a 2-kilogram bag of granola costs $15.
500-gram bag of granola costs $4
2000 grams = 4 × $4 = $16
2-kilogram bag of granola costs $15.
The Least expensive way to buy 2,000 grams of granola is $15.

Question 15.
Verify the Reasoning of Others The world’s largest apple had a mass of 1,849 grams. Sue said the mass was greater than 2 kilograms. Does Sue’s statement make sense? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

The world’s largest apple had a mass of 1,849 grams.
Sue said the mass was greater than 2 kilograms.
Their statement of Sue doesn’t make sense because 1,849 grams is less than 2 kilograms.

Page No. 682

Question 16.
Lori bought 600 grams of cayenne pepper and 2 kilograms of black pepper. How many grams of pepper did she buy in all?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 49
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I am asked to find How many grams of pepper did Lori buy in all.

Question 16.
b. What information will you use?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Number of grams of black pepper and cayenne pepper.

Question 16.
c. Tell how you might solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: I will solve by adding the weight of both the peppers.

Question 16.
d. Show how you solved the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: I solved the problem by converting the kilograms into grams and then add the weight of both the peppers.

Question 16.
e. Complete the sentences.
Lori bought ______ grams of cayenne pepper.
She bought ______ grams of black pepper.
______ + ______ = ______ grams
So, Lori bought ______ grams of pepper in all.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Lori bought 600 grams of cayenne pepper.
She bought 2000 grams of black pepper.
600 + 2000 = 2600
So, Lori bought 2600 grams of the pepper in all.

Question 17.
Jill has two rocks. One has a mass of 20 grams and the other has a mass of 20 kilograms. Which rock has the greater mass? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Jill has two rocks. One has a mass of 20 grams and the other has a mass of 20 kilograms.
To find the greater mass of both the rocks. We have to compare the mass of two rocks.
20 grams is less than 20 kilograms.
The rock of 20 kilograms is having the greater mass.

Question 18.
For numbers 18a–18c, choose Yes or No to tell whether the measurements are equivalent.
a. 5,000 grams and 5 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
5 kilograms = 5 × 1000 grams = 5000 grams
So, the above statement is true.

Question 18.
b. 300 milliliters and 3 liters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3000 milliliters
So, the above statement is false.

Question 18.
c. 8 grams and 8,000 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
8 kilograms = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
So, the above statement is true.

Common Core – New – Page No. 683

Metric Units of Mass and Liquid Volume

Complete.

Question 1.
5 liters = 5,000 milliliters
Think: 1 liter 5 1,000 milliliters,
so 5 liters 5 5 × 1,000 milliliters, or 5,000 milliliters

Question 2.
3 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 3000 grams

Explanation:

Convert kilograms into grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
3 kilograms = 3 × 1000 grams = 3000 grams
3 kilograms = 3000 grams

Question 3.
8 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 8000 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
8 liters = 8 × 1000 milliliters = 8000 milliliters
8 liters = 8000 milliliters

Question 4.
7 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 7000 grams

Explanation:

Convert kilograms into grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
7 kilograms = 7 × 1000 grams = 7000 grams
7 kilograms = 7000 grams

Question 5.
9 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 9000 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
9 liters = 9 × 1000 milliliters = 9000 milliliters
9 liters = 9000 milliliters

Question 6.
2 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 2000 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters
2 liters = 2000 milliliters

Question 7.
6 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 6000 grams

Explanation:

Convert kilograms into grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
6 kilograms = 6000 grams

Compare using <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 683 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 683 Q9

Question 10.
1 kilogram _____ 1,000 grams

Answer: 1 kilogram = 1,000 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
The symbol the above statement is 1 kilogram = 1,000 grams

Question 11.
5 liters _____ 520 milliliters

Answer: 5 liters > 520 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
5 liters = 5 × 1000 milliliters = 5000 milliliters
5000 milliliters is greater than 520 milliliters
5 liters > 520 milliliters

Problem Solving

Question 12.
Kenny buys four 1-liter bottles of water. How many milliliters of water does Kenny buy?
_____ milliliters

Answer: 4000 milliliters

Explanation:

Kenny buys four 1-liter bottles of water.
4 × 1-liter = 4 liters
Kenny buys 4-liter bottles
Now convert liters into milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
4 liters = 4 × 1000 milliliters = 4000 milliliters
Kenny bought 4000 milliliters of water.

Question 13.
Mrs. Jones bought three 2-kilogram packages of flour. How many grams of flour did she buy?
_____ grams

Answer: 6000 grams

Explanation:

Mrs. Jones bought three 2-kilogram packages of flour.
That means she buys 6 kilograms of flour.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
Mrs. Jones bought 6000 grams of flour.

Question 14.
Colleen bought 8 kilograms of apples and 2.5 kilograms of pears. How many more grams of apples than pears did she buy?
_____ grams

Answer: 5500 grams

Explanation:

Colleen bought 8 kilograms of apples and 2.5 kilograms of pears.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
8 kilograms = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
2.5 kilograms = 2.5 × 1000 grams = 2500 grams
8000 grams – 2500 grams = 5500 grams
That means Collen bought 5500 grams of apples than pears.

Question 15.
Dave uses 500 milliliters of juice for a punch recipe. He mixes it with 2 liters of ginger ale. How many milliliters of punch does he make?
_____ milliliters

Answer: 2500 milliliters

Explanation:

Dave uses 500 milliliters of juice for a punch recipe. He mixes it with 2 liters of ginger ale.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters
Add 2000 milliliters from 500 milliliters
2000 milliliters + 500 milliliters = 2500 milliliters
Dave made 2500 milliliters of punch.

Common Core – New – Page No. 684

Lesson Check

Question 1.
During his hike, Milt drank 1 liter of water and 1 liter of sports drink. How many milliliters of liquid did he drink in all?
Options:
a. 20 milliliters
b. 200 milliliters
c. 2,000 milliliters
d. 20,000 milliliters

Answer: 2,000 milliliters

Explanation:

Given,
During his hike, Milt drank 1 liter of water and 1 liter of sports drink.
we have to convert liters into milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Larinda cooked a 4-kilogram roast. The roast left over after the meal weighed 3 kilograms. How many grams of roast were eaten during that meal?
Options:
a. 7,000 grams
b. 1,000 grams
c. 700 grams
d. 100 grams

Answer: 1,000 grams

Explanation:

Given that,
Larinda cooked a 4-kilogram roast.
The roast leftover after the meal weighed 3 kilograms.
4 kilogram – 3 kilogram = 1kilogram
Convert kilograms into grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Use a protractor to find the angle measure.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 50
Options:
a. 15°
b. 35°
c. 135°
d. 145°

Answer: 145°

Explanation:

By using the protractor we can measure the unknown angle for the above figure.
The angle for the above figure is 145°
The correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Which of the following shows parallel lines?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 51
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 52
c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 53
d.Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 54

Answer: Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 53

Non-intersecting lines are known as parallel lines. From the above figures, we can that option c has nonintersecting lines.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Carly bought 3 pounds of birdseed. How many ounces of birdseed did she buy?
Options:
a. 30 ounces
b. 36 ounces
c. 42 ounces
d. 48 ounces

Answer: 48 ounces

Explanation:

Carly bought 3 pounds of birdseed.
Convert the pounds into ounces.
1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces.
Thus Carly bought 48 ounces of birdseed.
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
A door is 8 decimeters wide. How wide is the door in centimeters?
Options:
a. 8 centimeters
b. 80 centimeters
c. 800 centimeters
d. 8,000 centimeters

Answer: 80 centimeters

Explanation:

A door is 8 decimeters wide.
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
8 decimeters = 8 × 10 centimeters = 80 centimeters
The door is 80 centimeters wide.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Page No. 687

Question 1.
Compare the length of a year to the length of a month.
Use a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 55
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 56
1 year is _____ times as long as _____ month.
Type below:
_______

Answer: 1 year is 12 times as long as 1 month.

Complete.

Question 2.
2 minutes = _____ seconds

Answer: 120 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
2 minutes = 2 × 60 seconds = 120 seconds
2 minutes = 120 seconds

Question 3.
4 years = _____ months

Answer: 48 months

Explanation:

Convert year to months
1 year = 12 months
4 years = 4 × 12 months = 48 months
So, 4 years = 48 months

Complete.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 687 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 687 Q5

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using >, <, or =.

Question 6.
3 years _____ 35 months

Answer: 3 years > 35 months

Explanation:

First of all, you need to convert years to minutes
1 year = 12 months
3 years = 3 × 12 months = 36 months
36 months is greater than 35 months
Thus 3 years > 35 months

Question 7.
2 days _____ 40 hours

Answer: 2 days > 40 hours

Explanation:

Convert days to hours
1 day = 24 hours
2 days = 2 × 24 hours = 48 hours
48 is greater than 40.
So, 2 days > 40 hours

Question 8.
Damien has lived in the apartment building for 5 years. Ken has lived there for 250 weeks. Who has lived in the building longer? Explain. Make a table to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 57
_____

Answer:

Given that, Damien has lived in the apartment building for 5 years. Ken has lived there for 250 weeks.

Year Weeks
1 52
2 104
3 156
4 208
5 260

Damien has lived in the building longer.

Question 9.
How many hours are in a week? Explain.
_____ hours

Answer: 168 hours

Explanation:

Convert week to hours
1 day = 24 hours
1 week = 7 days
7 days = 7 × 24 hours = 168 hours
Therefore there are 168 hours in a week.

Page No. 688

Question 10.
Communicate Explain how you know that 9 minutes is less than 600 seconds.
Type below:
________

Answer:

First, convert minutes to seconds
We know that,
1 minute = 60 seconds
9 minutes = 9 × 60 seconds = 540 seconds.
540 is less than 600 seconds.
Therefore 9 minutes is less than 600 seconds.

Question 11.
Draw lines to match equivalent time intervals. Some intervals might not have a match.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 58
Type below:
________

Answer:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Relative-Sizes-of-Measurement-Units-img-58

One day is the length of time it takes Earth to make one complete rotation. One year is the time it takes Earth to revolve around the sun. To make the calendar match Earth’s orbit time, there are leap years. Leap years add one extra day to the year. A leap day, February 29, is added to the calendar every four years.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 59
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 60

Question 12.
How many days are there in 4 years, if the fourth year is a leap year? Explain. Make a table to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 61
_____ days

Answer:

Year Days
1 365
2 730
3 1095
4 1460
5 1825

Question 13.
Parker was born on February 29, 2008. The second time he is able to celebrate on his actual birthday is in 2016. How many days old will Parker be on February 29, 2016?
_____ days

Answer: 2922 days

Explanation:

Parker was born on February 29, 2008.
The second time he is able to celebrate on his actual birthday is in 2016.
Parker was 8 years old.
There are 2 leap years out of 8 years. There are 366 days in a leap year = 366 × 2 = 732
And multiply 6 years with 365 = 365 × 6 = 2190
2190+ 732 = 2920 days.
Parker will be 2920 days old on February 29, 2016.

Common Core – New – Page No. 689

Units of Time

Complete.

Question 1.
6 minutes = 360 seconds
Think: 1 minute = 60 seconds,
so 6 minutes = 6 × 60 seconds, or 360 seconds

Question 2.
5 weeks = ____ days

Answer: 35 days

Explanation:

1 week = 7 days
5 weeks = 5 × 7 days = 35 days
5 weeks = 35 days

Question 3.
3 years = ____ weeks

Answer: 156 weeks

Explanation:

Convert years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
3 years = 3 × 52 weeks = 156 weeks
3 years = 156 weeks.

Question 4.
9 hours = ____ minutes

Answer: 540 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours into minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
9 hours = 9 × 60 minutes = 540 minutes
9 hours = 540 minutes

Question 5.
9 minutes = ____ seconds

Answer: 540 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
9 minutes = 9 × 60 seconds = 540 seconds
9 minutes = 540 seconds

Question 6.
5 years = ____ months

Answer: 60 months

Explanation:

Convert years to months
1 year = 12 months
5 years = 5 × 12 months = 60 months
5 years = 60 months

Question 7.
7 days = ____ hours

Answer: 168 hours

Explanation:

Convert days to hours.
1 day = 24 hours
7 days = 7 × 24 hours = 168 hours
7 days = 168 hours

Compare using <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 689 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 689 Q9

Question 10.
2 days ____ 48 hours

Answer: 2 days = 48 hours

Explanation:

Convert days to hours
1 day = 24 hours
2 days = 2 × 24 hours = 48 hours
So, 2 days = 48 hours

Question 11.
6 years ____ 300 weeks

Answer: 6 years > 300 weeks

Explanation:

Convert years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
6 years = 6 × 52 weeks = 312 weeks
312 weeks is greater than 300 weeks.
So, 6 years > 300 weeks.

Question 12.
4 hours ____ 400 minutes

Answer: 4 hours < 400 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
4 hours = 4 × 60 minutes = 240 minutes
240 minutes is less than 400 minutes
4 hours < 400 minutes

Question 13.
5 minutes ____ 300 seconds

Answer: 5 minutes = 300 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
5 minutes = 5 × 60 seconds = 300 seconds
5 minutes = 300 seconds

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 689 Q14

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 689 Q15

Common Core – New – Page No. 690

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Glen rode his bike for 2 hours. For how many minutes did Glen ride his bike?
Options:
a. 60 minutes
b. 100 minutes
c. 120 minutes
d. 150 minutes

Answer: 120 minutes

Explanation:

Glen rode his bike for 2 hours.
Convert hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
2 hours = 2 × 60 minutes = 120 minutes.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Tina says that vacation starts in exactly 4 weeks. In how many days does vacation start?
Options:
a. 28 days
b. 35 days
c. 42 days
d. 48 days

Answer: 28 days

Explanation:

Tina says that vacation starts in exactly 4 weeks.
Convert weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
4 weeks = 4 × 7 days = 28 days
So, the correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kayla bought \(\frac{9}{4}\) pounds of apples. What is that weight as a mixed number?
Options:
a. 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds
b. 1 \(\frac{4}{9}\) pounds
c. 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds
d. 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds

Explanation:

Kayla bought \(\frac{9}{4}\) pounds of apples.
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{9}{4}\) is 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Judy, Jeff, and Jim each earned $5.40 raking leaves. How much did they earn in all?
Options:
a. $1.60
b. $10.80
c. $15.20
d. $16.20

Answer: $16.20

Explanation:

Judy, Jeff, and Jim each earned $5.40 raking leaves.
= 3 × $5.40 = $16.20
They earned $16.20 in all.
The correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Melinda rode her bike \(\frac{54}{100}\) mile to the library. Then she rode \(\frac{4}{10}\) mile to the store. How far did Melinda ride her bike in all?
Options:
a. 0.14 mile
b. 0.58 mile
c. 0.94 mile
d. 1.04 miles

Answer: 0.94 mile

Explanation:

Melinda rode her bike \(\frac{54}{100}\) mile to the library.
Then she rode \(\frac{4}{10}\)mile to the store.
The decimal form of \(\frac{54}{100}\) is 0.54 mile
The decimal form of \(\frac{4}{10}\) is 0.40 mile
0.54 + 0.40 = 0.94 mile
Thus the answer is option C.

Question 6.
One day, the students drank 60 quarts of milk at lunch. How many pints of milk did the students drink?
Options:
a. 30 pints
b. 120 pints
c. 240 pints
d. 480 pints

Answer: 120 pints

Explanation:

One day, the students drank 60 quarts of milk at lunch.
1 quart = 2 pints
60 quarts = 60 × 2 pints = 120 pints
The correct answer is option B.

Page No. 693

Question 1.
Evelyn has dance class every Saturday. It lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 12:45 p.m. At what time does Evelyn’s dance class begin?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 62
First, write the problem you need to solve.
Type below:
________

Answer: I need to find when Evelyn’s dance class begins.

Question 1.
Next, draw a time line to show the end time and the elapsed time.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 63
Type below:
________

Answer:

Question 1.
Finally, find the start time.
Evelyn’s dance class begins at _________ .
______ A.M.

Answer: 11:30 A.M.

Explanation:

Evelyn has dance class every Saturday. It lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 12:45 p.m.
12 hr 45 minutes
-1 hr 15 minutes
11 hr 30 minutes

Thus Evelyn dance class starts at 11:30 A.M.

Question 2.
What if Evelyn’s dance class started at 11:00 a.m. and lasted 1 hour and 25 minutes? At what time would her class end? Describe how this problem is different from Problem 1.
Type below:
________

Answer: 12:25 P.M.

Explanation:

If Evelyn’s dance class started at 11:00 a.m. and lasted 1 hour and 25 minutes.
Then the class ends at 12:25 P.M.
11 hours 0 minutes
+1 hour 25 minutes
12 hour 25 minutes

Question 3.
Beth got on the bus at 8:06 a.m. Thirty-five minutes later, she arrived at school. At what time did Beth arrive at school?
______ a.m.

Answer: 8:41 A.M.

Explanation:

Beth got on the bus at 8:06 a.m.
Thirty-five minutes later, she arrived at school.
8 hour 06 minutes
+ 0 hour 35 minutes
8 hour 41 minutes

Beth arrived to school at 8:41 A.M.

Question 4.
Lyle went fishing for 1 hour and 30 minutes until he ran out of bait at 6:40 p.m. At what time did Lyle start fishing?
______ p.m.

Answer: 5:10 P.M.

Explanation:

Lyle went fishing for 1 hour and 30 minutes until he ran out of bait at 6:40 p.m.
Subtract 1 hour and 30 minutes from 6:40 p.m.
6 hour 40 minutes
-1 hour 30 minutes
5 hour 10 minutes

Lyle starts fishing at 5:10 P.M.

Page No. 694

Question 5.
Mike and Jed went skiing at 10:30 a.m. They skied for 1 hour and 55 minutes before stopping for lunch. At what time did Mike and Jed stop for lunch?
______ p.m

Answer: 12:25 P.M.

Explanation:

Mike and Jed went skiing at 10:30 a.m.
They skied for 1 hour and 55 minutes before stopping for lunch.
Add 1 hour and 55 minutes to 10:30 a.m
10 hour 30 minutes
+1 hour 55 minutes
12 hour 25 minutes
= 12:25 P.M.
Mike and Jed stop for lunch at 12:25 P.M.

Question 6.
Mike can run a mile in 12 minutes. He starts his run at 11:30 am. and runs 4 miles. What time does Mike finish his run?
_____ : _____  _____

Answer: 12:18 P.M

Explanation:

Mike can run a mile in 12 minutes. He starts his run at 11:30 am. and runs 4 miles.
1 mile = 12 minutes
4 miles = 4 × 12 minutes = 48 minutes
Add 48 minutes to 11:30 A.M.
11 hour 30 minutes
0 hour 48 minutes
12 hour 18 minutes

Mike finish his run at 12:18 P.M.

Question 7.
Communicate Explain how you can use a diagram to determine the start time when the end time is 9:00 a.m. and the elapsed time is 26 minutes. What is the start time?
______ a.m.

Answer: 8:34 A.M.

Explanation:

End time = 9:00 A.M.
Elapsed time = 26 minutes
Subtract 26 minutes from 9 hours.
9 hour 00 minutes
-0 hour 26 minutes
8 hour 34 minutes
So, the start time is 8:34 A.M.

Question 8.
Bethany finished her math homework at 4:20 p.m. She did 25 multiplication problems in all. If each problem took her 3 minutes to do, at what time did Bethany start her math homework?
______ p.m.

Answer: 3:05 P.M.

Explanation:

Bethany finished her math homework at 4:20 p.m. She did 25 multiplication problems in all.
If she took 3 minutes to solve each problem then multiply 25 with 3
25 × 3 = 75 minutes = 1 hour 15 minutes
Subtract 1 hour 15 minutes from 4:20 P.M.
4 hour 20 minutes
-1 hour 15 minutes
3 hour 05 minutes

Therefore Bethany started her math homework at 3:05 P.M.

Question 9.
Vincent began his weekly chores on Saturday morning at 11:20 a.m. He finished 1 hour and 10 minutes later. Draw a time line to show the end time.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 64
Vincent finished his chores at _______ p.m.
______ p.m.

Answer: 12:30 P.M.

Explanation:

Vincent began his weekly chores on Saturday morning at 11:20 a.m. He finished 1 hour and 10 minutes later.
Add 1 hour 10 minutes to 11:20 A.M.
11 hour 20 minutes
+1 hour 10 minutes
12 hour 30 minutes
Thus the Endtime is 12:30 P.M.

Common Core – New – Page No. 695

Problem Solving Elapsed Time

Read each problem and solve.

Question 1.
Molly started her piano lesson at 3:45 P.M. The lesson lasted 20 minutes. What time did the piano lesson end?
Think: What do I need to find?
How can I draw a diagram to help?
4:05 P.M.

Question 2.
Brendan spent 24 minutes playing a computer game. He stopped playing at 3:55 P.M and went outside to ride his bike. What time did he start playing the computer game?
______ P.M.

Answer: 3:31 P.M

Explanation:

Brendan spent 24 minutes playing a computer game.
He stopped playing at 3:55 P.M and went outside to ride his bike.
You need to subtract 24 minutes from 3:55 P.M. = 3:31 P.M.

Question 3.
Aimee’s karate class lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 5:00 P.M. What time does Aimee’s karate class start?
______ P.M.

Answer: 3:45 P.M

Explanation:

Aimee’s karate class lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 5:00 P.M.
You need to subtract 1 hour 15 minutes from 5:00 P.M = 5:00 – 1:15 = 3:45 P.M.
Aimee’s karate class started at 3:45 P.M.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 695 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 695 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 695 Q5.1

Common Core – New – Page No. 696

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Bobbie went snowboarding with friends at 10:10 A.M. They snowboarded for 1 hour and 43 minutes and then stopped to eat lunch. What time did they stop for lunch?
Options:
a. 8:27 A.M.
b. 10:53 A.M.
c. 11:53 A.M.
d. 12:53 A.M.

Answer: 11:53 A.M.

Explanation:

Bobbie went snowboarding with friends at 10:10 A.M.
They snowboarded for 1 hour and 43 minutes and then stopped to eat lunch.
Add 1 hour and 43 minutes to 10:10 A.M. = 11:53 A.M.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
The Cain family drove for 1 hour and 15 minutes and arrived at their camping spot at 3:44 P.M. What time did the Cain family start driving?
Options:
a. 4:59 P.M.
b. 2:44 P.M.
c. 2:39 P.M.
d. 2:29 P.M.

Answer: 2:29 P.M.

Explanation:

The Cain family drove for 1 hour and 15 minutes and arrived at their camping spot at 3:44 P.M.
Subtract 1 hour and 15 minutes from 3:44 P.M
3:44 P.M. – 1:15 = 2:29 P.M.
The correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A praying mantis can grow up to 15 centimeters long. How long is this in millimeters?
Options:
a. 15 millimeters
b. 150 millimeters
c. 1,500 millimeters
d. 15,000 millimeters

Answer: 150 millimeters

Explanation:

A praying mantis can grow up to 15 centimeters long.
Convert centimeters to millimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
15 centimeters = 15 × 10 millimeters = 150 millimeters
The correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Thom’s minestrone soup recipe makes 3 liters of soup. How many milliliters of soup is this?
Options:
a. 30 milliliters
b. 300 milliliters
c. 3,000 milliliters
d. 30,000 milliliters

Answer: 3,000 milliliters

Explanation:

Thom’s minestrone soup recipe makes 3 liters of soup.
Convert liters to milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3 × 1000 milliliters = 3,000 milliliters
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Stewart walks \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile each day. Which is a multiple of \(\frac{2}{3}\) ?
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{8}{10}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Explanation:

Stewart walks \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile each day.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)
The correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Angelica colored in 0.60 of the squares on her grid. Which of the following expresses 0.60 as tenths in fraction form?
Options:
a. \(\frac{60}{100}\)
b. \(\frac{60}{10}\)
c. \(\frac{6}{100}\)
d. \(\frac{6}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{10}\)

Explanation:

Angelica colored in 0.60 of the squares on her grid.
The fraction of 0.60 is \(\frac{6}{10}\)
The correct answer is option D.

Page No. 699

Question 1.
A truck is carrying 2 tons 500 pounds of steel. How many pounds of steel is the truck carrying?
Think of 2 tons 500 pounds as 2 tons + 500 pounds.
Write tons as pounds.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 65
So, the truck is carrying _____ pounds of steel.
______ pounds

Answer: 4,500 pounds

Explanation:

A truck is carrying 2 tons 500 pounds of steel.
Before you add convert tons to pounds.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
2 tons = 2 × 2000 pounds = 4000 pounds
4000 pounds
+500 pounds
4500 pounds
So, the truck is carrying 4500 pounds of steel.

Rewrite each measure in the given unit.

Question 2.
1 yard 2 feet
______ feet

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:

Convert yard to feet
1 yard = 3 feet
3 feet + 2 feet = 5 feet

Question 3.
3 pints 1 cup
______ cups

Answer: 7 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
3 pints = 3 × 2 cups = 6 cups
6 cups + 1 cup = 7 cups

Question 4.
3 weeks 1 day
______ days

Answer: 22 days

Explanation:

Convert weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
3 weeks = 21 days
21 days + 1 day = 22 days.

Add or subtract.

Question 5.
2 lb 4 oz
+ 1 lb 6 oz
————–
_____ lb _____ oz

Answer: 3 lb 10 oz

Explanation:

Add 2 lb 4 oz and 1 lb 6 oz

2 lb 4 oz
+ 1 lb 6 oz
3 lb 10 oz

Question 6.
3 gal 2 qt
− 1 gal 3 qt
————–
_____ gal _____ qt

Answer: 1 gal 3 qt

Explanation:

Subtract 1 gal 3 qt from 3 gal 2 qt
Convert gallon to a quart and then borrow to 2 quarts = 6 quarts

3 gal 2 qt
− 1 gal 3 qt
1 gal 3 qt

Question 7.
5 hr 20 min
− 3 hr 15 min
—————–
_____ hr _____ min

Answer: 2 hr 5 min

Explanation:

Subtract 3 hr 15 min from 5 hr 20 min

5 hr 20 min
− 3 hr 15 min
2 hr 5 min

Rewrite each measure in the given unit.

Question 8.
1 hour 15 minutes
_____ minutes

Answer: 75 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
60 minutes + 15 minutes = 75 minutes

Question 9.
4 quarts 2 pints
_____ pints

Answer: 10 pints

Explanation:

Convert quart to pints
1 quart = 2 pints
4 quarts = 8 pints
8 pints + 2 pints = 10 pints

Question 10.
10 feet 10 inches
_____ inches

Answer: 130 inches

Explanation:

Convert feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
10 feet = 10 × 12 inches = 120 inches
120 inches + 10 inches = 130 inches

Add or subtract.

Question 11.
2 tons 300 lb
– 1 ton 300 lb
—————–
_____ ton(s) _____ lb

Answer: 1ton

Explanation:

Subtract 1 ton 300 lb from 2 tons 300 lb

2 tons 300 lb
– 1 ton 300 lb
1ton 0 lb

Question 12.
10 gal 8 c
+ 8 gal 9 c
—————–
_____ gal _____ c

Answer: 19 gal 1 c

Explanation:

Add 10 gal 8 c and 8 gal 9 c
Convert cups to gallon
17 cups = 1 gal 1 cup

10 gal 8 c
+ 8 gal 9 c
18 gal 17 c = 19 gal 1 c

Question 13.
7 lb 6 oz
− 2 lb 12 oz
—————–
_____ lb _____ oz

Answer: 4 lb 10 oz

Explanation:

Subtract 2 lb 12 oz from 7 lb 6 oz
1 lb = 16 oz
Borrow 16 oz to ones place.
7 lb 6 oz

6 lb 22 oz
− 2 lb 12 oz
4 lb 10 oz

Question 14.
Apply Ahmed fills 6 pitchers with juice. Each pitcher contains 2 quarts 1 pint. How many pints of juice does he have in all?
_____ pints of juice

Answer: 30 pints of juice

Explanation:

Apply Ahmed fills 6 pitchers with juice. Each pitcher contains 2 quarts 1 pint.
Convert quarts to pints.
1 quart = 2 pint
2 quarts = 2 × 2 pint = 4 pints
2 quarts 1 pint = 4 pints + 1 pint = 5 pints
5 pints × 6 pitchers = 30 pints of juice.

Question 15.
Sense or Nonsense? Sam and Dave each solve the problem at the right. Sam says the sum is 4 feet 18 inches. Dave says the sum is 5 feet 6 inches. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain.
2 ft 10 in.
+ 2 ft 8 in.
—————-
Type below:
_________

Answer: The answer of Dave and Sam makes sense. Because 4 feet 18 inches and 5 feet 6 inches are the same.
Convert feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
4 feet 18 inches = 5 feet 6 inches.

Question 16.
Jackson has a rope 1 foot 8 inches long. He cuts it into 4 equal pieces. How many inches long is each piece?
______ inches

Answer: 5 inches

Explanation:

Jackson has a rope 1 foot 8 inches long. He cuts it into 4 equal pieces.
Convert feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
12 inches + 8 inches = 20 inches
20 ÷ 4 = 5 inches.
Therefore there are 5 inches in each piece.

Page No. 700

Question 17.
Theo is practicing for a 5-kilometer race. He runs 5 kilometers every day and records his time. His normal time is 25 minutes 15 seconds. Yesterday it took him only 23 minutes 49 seconds. How much faster was his time yesterday than his normal time?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 66
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I am asked to find how much faster was his time yesterday than his normal time.

Question 17.
b. What information do you know?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I know the information about his normal time and the time he took to run yesterday.

Question 17.
c. How will you solve the problem?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I will solve this problem by subtracting the time taken by him yesterday from normal time.
25 minutes 15 seconds
-23 minutes 49 seconds

Question 17.
d. Solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

25 minutes 15 seconds
-23 minutes 49 seconds
1 minute 26 seconds     

Question 17.
e. Fill in the sentence.
Yesterday, Theo ran 5 kilometers in a time that was ______ faster than his normal time.
_____ min _____ sec

Answer: 1 min 26 sec

Question 18.
Don has 5 pieces of pipe. Each piece is 3 feet 6 inches long. If Don joins the pieces end to end to make one long pipe, how long will the new pipe be?
_____ ft _____ in

Answer: 17 ft 6 in.

Explanation:

Don has 5 pieces of pipe. Each piece is 3 feet 6 inches long.
5 pieces = 5 × 3 feet 6 inches
= 15 feet 30 inches
1 feet = 12 inches
30 inches = 2 feet 6 inches
15 feet 30 inches = 17 feet 6 inches
The new pipe will be 17 feet 6 inches long.

Question 19.
Ana mixes 2 quarts 1 pint of apple juice and 1 quart 3 cups of cranberry juice. Will her mixture be able to fit in a 1 gallon pitcher? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Yes

Ana mixes 2 quarts 1 pint of apple juice and 1 quart 3 cups of cranberry juice.
We should convert it into gallons.
Before that convert pint to cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
2 quarts 1 pint = 2 quarts 2 cups

2 quarts 2 cups
1 quart 3 cups
3 quart 5 cups

1 quart = 4 cups
5 cups = 1 quart 1 cup
3 quart 5 cups = 4 quart 1 cup
Now we can convert 4 quarts 1 cup into gallons.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
1 gallon 1 cup.

Common Core – New – Page No. 701

Mixed Measures

Complete.

Question 1.
8 pounds 4 ounces = 132 ounces
Think: 8 pounds = 8 × 16 ounces, or 128 ounces.
128 ounces + 4 ounces = 132 ounces

Question 2.
5 weeks 3 days = _____ days

Answer: 38 days

Explanation:

Convert weeks to days
1 week = 7 days
5 weeks = 5 × 7 days = 35 days
35 days + 3 days = 38 days

Question 3.
4 minutes 45 seconds = _____ seconds

Answer: 285 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds
1 minute = 60 seconds
4 minutes = 4 × 60 seconds = 240 seconds
240 seconds + 45 seconds = 285 seconds

Question 4.
4 hours 30 minutes = _____ minutes

Answer: 270 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
4 hours = 4 × 60 minutes = 240 minutes
240 minutes + 30 minutes = 270 minutes

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 701 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 701 Q6

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 701 Q7

Add or subtract.

Question 8.
9 gal 1 qt
+ 6 gal 1 qt
—————
______ gal ______ qt

Answer: 15 gal 2 qt

Explanation:

9 gal + 6 gal = 15 gal
1 qt + 1 qt = 2qt

9 gal 1 qt
+ 6 gal 1 qt
15 gal 2 qt

Question 9.
12 lb 5 oz
– 7 lb 10 oz
—————
______ lb ______ oz

Answer: 4 lb 11 oz

Explanation:

21 oz – 10 oz = 11 oz
11 lb – 7 lb = 4 lb

12 lb 5 oz
– 7 lb 10 oz
4 lb 11 oz

Question 10.
8 hr 3 min
+ 4 hr 12 min
—————
______ hr ______ min

Answer: 12 hr 15 min

Explanation:

8 hr + 4 hr = 12 hr
3 min + 12 min = 15 min

8 hr 3 min
+ 4 hr 12 min
12 hr 15 min

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Michael’s basketball team practiced for 2 hours 40 minutes yesterday and 3 hours 15 minutes today. How much longer did the team practice today than yesterday?
______ minutes

Answer: 35 minutes

Explanation:

Michael’s basketball team practiced for 2 hours 40 minutes yesterday and 3 hours 15 minutes today.
3 hours 15 minutes
– 2 hours 40 minutes
0 hours 35 minutes

Question 12.
Rhonda had a piece of ribbon that was 5 feet 3 inches long. She removed a 5-inch piece to use in her art project. What is the length of the piece of ribbon now?
______ feet ______ inches

Answer: 4 feet 10 inches

Explanation:

Rhonda had a piece of ribbon that was 5 feet 3 inches long. She removed a 5-inch piece to use in her art project.
5 feet 3 inches
– 0 feet 5-inch

1 feet = 12 inches
12 inches – 5 inches = 7 inches
5 feet 3 inches
– 0 feet 5-inch
4 feet 10 inches

Common Core – New – Page No. 702

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marsha bought 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef and 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef. How much more corned beef did she buy than roast beef?
Options:
a. 16 ounces
b. 10 ounces
c. 7 ounces
d. 6 ounces

Answer: 10 ounces

Explanation:

Marsha bought 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef and 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef.
Subtract 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef from 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef.
2 pounds 5 ounces
1 pound 11 ounces
0 pound 10 ounces
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Theodore says there are 2 weeks 5 days left in the year. How many days are left in the year?
Options:
a. 14 days
b. 15 days
c. 19 days
d. 25 days

Answer: 19 days

Explanation:

Theodore says there are 2 weeks 5 days left in the year.
Convert weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
2 weeks = 14 days
14 days + 5 days = 19 days.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
On one grid, 0.5 of the squares are shaded. On another grid, 0.05 of the squares are shaded. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. 0.05 > 0.5
b. 0.05 = 0.5
c. 0.05 < 0.5
d. 0.05 + 0.5 = 1.0

Answer: 0.05 < 0.5

Explanation:

Given,
On one grid, 0.5 of the squares are shaded.
On another grid, 0.05 of the squares are shaded.
0.5 is greater than 0.05
So, the answer is option C.

Question 4.
Classify the triangle shown below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 67
Options:
a. right
b. acute
c. equilateral
d. obtuse

Answer: right

Explanation:

The above figure is the right angle triangle.
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 5.
Sahil’s brother is 3 years old. How many weeks old is his brother?
Options:
a. 30 weeks
b. 36 weeks
c. 90 weeks
d. 156 weeks

Answer: 156 weeks

Explanation:

Sahil’s brother is 3 years old.
Convert years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
3 years = 3 × 52 = 156 weeks.
Therefore the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Sierra’s swimming lessons last 1 hour 20 minutes. She finished her lesson at 10:50 A.M. At what time did her lesson start?
Options:
a. 9:30 A.M.
b. 9:50 A.M.
c. 10:30 A.M.
d. 12:10 A.M.

Answer: 9:30 A.M.

Explanation:

Sierra’s swimming lessons last 1 hour 20 minutes. She finished her lesson at 10:50 A.M.
10 hour 50 minutes
– 1 hour 20 minutes
9 hours 30 minutes
9:30 A.M.
So, the correct answer is option A.

Page No. 705

Question 1.
The table shows a pattern for two units of time. Label the columns of the table with the units of time.
Think: What unit of time is 24 times as great as another unit?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 68
Type below:
________

Answer: Days, Hours
The conversion of the day to hours is
1 day = 24 hours.

Day Hours
1 24
2 48
3 72
4 96

Each table shows a pattern for two customary units. Label the columns of the table.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 69
Type below:
________

Answer: Pint, Cups
1 pint = 2 Cups
So, the label for the above table is:

Pint Cups
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 70
Type below:
________

Answer: Pound, Ounces
Conversion of pounds to ounces is 1 pound = 16 ounces

Pound Ounces
1 16
2 32
3 48
4 64
5 80

Each table shows a pattern for two customary units. Label the columns of the table.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 71
Type below:
________

Answer: Yard, Inches
1 yard = 36 inches

Yard Inches
1 36
2 72
3 108
4 144
5 180

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 72
Type below:
________

Answer: Feet, Inches
1 Feet = 12 inches

Feet Inches
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48
5 60

Each table shows a pattern for two metric units of length. Label the columns of the table.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 73
Type below:
________

Answer: Decimeter, Centimeter, and Centimeter, Millimeter

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters

Label for Decimeter and Centimeter:

Decimeter Centimeter
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50

Label for Centimeter and Millimeter:

Centimeter Millimeter
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 74
Type below:
________

Answer: Meter, Centimeter

1 meter = 100 centimeters,

Label for Meter and Centimeter is:

Meter Centimeter
1 100
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500

Question 8.
List the number pairs for the table in Exercise 6. Describe the relationship between the numbers in each pair.

Answer: There are 8 pairs for the table.
The relationship for the first pair is Day, Hour.
The relationship for the second pair is Pound, Ounces.
The relationship for the third pair is Yard, Inches.
The relationship for the fourth pair is Feet, inches.
The relationship for the fifth pair is Decimeter, Centimeter.
The relationship for the sixth pair is Centimeter, Millimeter.
The relationship for the seventh pair is Meter, Centimeter.

Page No. 706

Question 9.
What’s the Error? Maria wrote Weeks as the label for the first column of the table and Years as the label for the second column. Describe her error.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 75
Type below:
________

Answer: The error of Maria is she didn’t write the name for the pair of table.

Year Weeks
1 52
2 104
3 156
4 208
5 260

Question 10.
Verify the Reasoning of Others The table shows a pattern for two metric units. Lou labels the columns Meters and Millimeters. Zayna labels them Liters and Milliliters. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 76
Type below:
________

Answer: Both Lou and Zayna labels are correct but they didn’t name the pair of units.

Meters Millimeters
1 1000
2 2000
3 3000
4 4000
5 5000
Liters Milliliters
1 1000
2 2000
3 3000
4 4000
5 5000

Question 11.
Look at the following number pairs: 1 and 365, 2 and 730, 3 and 1,095. The number pairs describe the relationship between which two units of time? Explain.
____ ____

Answer:

Year  Days
1 12
2 24
3 36

Question 12.
The tables show patterns for some units of measurement. Write the correct labels in each table.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 77
Type below:
________

Answer:

The suitable units the first table is

Feet Inches
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48

The suitable units the second table is

Day Hours
1 24
2 48
3 72
4 96

The suitable units the third table is

Gallon Quarts
1 4
2 8
3 12
4 16

Common Core – New – Page No. 707

Patterns in Measurement Units

Each table shows a pattern for two customary units of time or volume. Label the columns of the table.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 78

Question 2.

__________ __________
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48
5 60

Answer:

Years Months
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48
5 60

Question 3.

__________ __________
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Answer:

Pints Cups
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Question 4.

__________ __________
1 7
2 14
3 21
4 28
5 35

Answer:

Weeks Days
1 7
2 14
3 21
4 28
5 35

Problem Solving

Use the table for 5 and 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 79

Question 5.
Marguerite made the table to compare two metric measures of length. Name a pair of units Marguerite could be comparing.
1 _________
= 10 _________

Answer: The pair of units for the above table is Centimeters, Millimeters.

Question 6.
Name another pair of metric units of length that have the same relationship.
1 _________
= 10 _________

Answer: Another pair of metric units of length are Meters, Decimeters.

Common Core – New – Page No. 708

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Joanne made a table to relate two units of measure. The number pairs in her table are 1 and 16, 2 and 32, 3 and 48, 4 and 64. Which are the best labels for
Joanne’s table?
Options:
a. Cups, Fluid Ounces
b. Gallons, Quarts
c. Pounds, Ounces
d. Yards, Inches

Answer: Pounds, Ounces

Explanation:

Joanne made a table to relate two units of measure. The number pairs in her table are 1 and 16, 2 and 32, 3 and 48, 4 and 64.
The label for Joanna’s table is pounds and ounces.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Cade made a table to relate two units of time. The number pairs in his table are 1 and 24, 2 and 48, 3 and 72, 4 and 96. Which are the best labels for Cade’s table?
Options:
a. Days, Hours
b. Days, Weeks
c. Years, Months
d. Years, Weeks

Answer: Days, Hours

Explanation:

Cade made a table to relate two units of time. The number pairs in his table are 1 and 24, 2 and 48, 3 and 72, 4 and 96.
The label for Joanna’s table is Days and Hours.
The correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Anita has 2 quarters, 1 nickel, and 4 pennies. Write Anita’s total amount as a fraction of a dollar
Options:
a. \(\frac{39}{100}\)
b. \(\frac{54}{100}\)
c. \(\frac{59}{100}\)
d. \(\frac{84}{100}\)

Answer: \(\frac{59}{100}\)

Question 4.
The minute hand of a clock moves from 12 to 6. Which describes the turn the minute hand makes?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn
d. 1 full turn

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn

Explanation:

The minute hand of a clock moves from 12 to 6.
If the minute hand move from 12 to 6 then the fraction of the turn is \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Roderick has a dog that has a mass of 9 kilograms. What is the mass of the dog in grams?
Options:
a. 9 grams
b. 900 grams
c. 9,000 grams
d. 90,000 grams

Answer: 9,000 grams

Explanation:

Roderick has a dog that has a mass of 9 kilograms.
Convert kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
9 kilograms = 9 × 1000 grams = 9000 grams
Therefore the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Kari mixed 3 gallons 2 quarts of lemon lime drink with 2 gallons 3 quarts of pink lemonade to make punch. How much more lemon-lime drink did Kari use than pink lemonade?
Options:
a. 3 quarts
b. 4 quarts
c. 1 gallon 1 quart
d. 1 gallon 2 quarts

Answer: 3 quarts

Explanation:

Kari mixed 3 gallons 2 quarts of lemon-lime drink with 2 gallons 3 quarts of pink lemonade to make punch.
Kari used 3 quarts of pink lemonade more to make punch.
The correct answer is option A.

Common Core – New – Page No. 709

Question 1.
Mrs. Miller wants to estimate the width of the steps in front of her house. Select the best benchmark for her to use.
Options:
a. her fingertip
b. the thickness of a dime
c. the width of a license plate
d. how far she can walk in 20 minutes

Answer: the thickness of a dime

Question 2.
Franco played computer chess for 3 hours. Lian played computer chess for 150 minutes. Compare the times spent playing computer chess. Complete the sentence.
_____ played for _____ minutes longer than _____.

Answer: Franco played for 30 minutes longer than Lian.

Question 3.
Select the measures that are equal. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 6 feet
b. 15 yards
c. 45 feet
d. 600 inches
e. 12 feet
f. 540 inches

Answer: B, F; C, F

The measure of 15 yards = 45 feet = 540 inches

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 709 Q4

Page No. 710

Question 5.
Josh practices gymnastics each day after school. The data shows the length of time Josh practiced gymnastics for 2 weeks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 80
Part A
Make a tally table and line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 81
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Time Practicing Gymnastics
Time (in hours) Tally
\(\frac{1}{2}\) |
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ||
\(\frac{3}{4}\) |||
1 ||||

Line Plot:

Go Math 4th Grade Chapter 12 Key Review test solution image_2

Question 5.
Part B
Explain how you used the tally table to label the numbers and plot the Xs.
Type below:
_________

Answer: By using the tally marks table I have plotted the X’s on the line plot. Based on the tally of each fraction I have plotted X on the point.

Question 5.
Part C
What is the difference between the longest time and shortest time Josh spent practicing gymnastics?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) hour

Answer:

The longest time is 1
The shortest time is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
1 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus the difference between the longest time and shortest time Josh spent practicing gymnastics is \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 6.
Select the correct word to complete the sentence.
Juan brings a water bottle with him to soccer practice.
A full water bottle holds Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 82 of water.
_________

Answer: A full water bottle holds 1 liter of water

Page No. 711

Question 7.
Write the symbol that compares the weights correctly.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 83
128 ounces ____ 8 pounds
8,000 pounds ____ 3 tons

Answer:

i. 128 ounces ____ 8 pounds

1 pound = 16ounces
8 pounds = 8 × 16 ounces = 128 ounces
Thus 128 ounces = 8 pounds

ii. 8,000 pounds ____ 3 tons

1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
8000 pounds is greater than 6000 pounds
So, 8,000 pounds > 3 tons

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 711 Q8

Question 9.
A sack of potatoes weighs 14 pounds and 9 ounces. After Wendy makes potato salad for a picnic, the sack weighs 9 pounds 14 ounces. What is the weight of the potatoes Wendy used for the potato salad? Write the numbers to show the correct subtraction.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 84
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 85
____ pounds ____ ounces

Answer: 4 pounds 11 ounces

14 pounds 9 ounces
-9 pounds 14 ounces
Borrow 1 pound to ones place to subtract 11 ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
16 + 9 = 25 ounces

13 pounds 25 ounces
-9 pounds 14 ounces
4 pounds 11 ounces

Question 10.
Sabita made this table to relate two customary units of liquid volume.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 86
Part A
List the number pairs for the table. Then describe the relationship between the numbers in each pair.
Type below:
________

Answer: The relationship between the numbers in each pair is Pint, Cups.

Question 10.
Part B
Label the columns of the table. Explain your answer.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Pint Cups
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Page No. 712

Question 11.
The table shows the distances some students swam in miles. Complete the line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 87
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 88

Answer:

Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Review solution image_3

What is the difference between the longest distance and the shortest distance the students swam?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) mile

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) mile

Explanation:

The longest distance = \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile
The shortest distance = \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\) mile
The difference between the longest distance and the shortest distance the students swam is \(\frac{4}{8}\) mile.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 712 Q12

Question 13.
Katia bought two melons. She says the difference in mass between the melons is 5,000 grams. Which two melons did Katia buy?
Options:
a. watermelon: 8 kilograms
b. cantaloupe: 5 kilograms
c. honeydew: 3 kilograms
d. casaba melon: 2 kilograms
e. crenshaw melon: 1 kilogram

Answer: cantaloupe: 5 kilograms

Katia bought two melons. She says the difference in mass between the melons is 5,000 grams.
She bought cantaloupe: 5 kilograms.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 14.
Write the equivalent measurements in each column.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 89
Type below:
________

Answer:

3 meters 35 centimeters 300 millimeters
3,000 millimeters 35/100 meter 300/1000 meter
300 centimeters 0.35 meter 0.300 meter
30 decimeters 350 millimeters 30 centimeters

Page No. 713

Question 15.
Cheryl is making a mixed fruit drink for a party. She mixes 7 pints each of apple juice and cranberry juice. How many fluid ounces of mixed fruit drink does Cheryl make?
______ fluid ounces

Answer: 224 fluid ounces

Explanation:

Cheryl is making a mixed fruit drink for a party. She mixes 7 pints each of apple juice and cranberry juice.
We need to convert pints into fluid ounces
We know that, 1 pint = 32 fluid ounces
7 pints = 7 × 32 fluid ounces = 224 fluid ounces.
Therefore Cheryl makes 224 fluid ounces of mixed fruit drink.

Question 16.
Hamid’s soccer game will start at 11:00 a.m., but the players must arrive at the field three-quarters of an hour early to warm up. The game must end by 1:15 p.m.
Part A
Hamid says he has to be at the field at 9:45 a.m. is Hamid correct? Explain your answer.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:

Their statement of Hamid is wrong. Because Hamid’s soccer game starts at 10:15 A.M.

Question 16.
Part B
The park closes at 6:30 p.m. There is a 15-minute break between each game played at the park, and each game takes the same amount of time as Hamid’s soccer game. How many more games can be played before the park closes? Explain your answer.
______ more games

Answer: 2 more games

Explanation:

Given that,
The park closes at 6:30 p.m.
There is a 15-minute break between each game played at the park, and each game takes the same amount of time as Hamid’s soccer game.
The game starts at 11:00 A.M and ends at 1:15 P.M.
After completion of the game, they will take a break for 15 minutes.
So, game starts at 1:30 P.M or 2:00 P.M. and ends at 4:15 P.M.
By this, we can say that 2 more games can be played before the park closes.

Question 17.
For numbers 17a–17e, select Yes or No to tell whether the measurements are equivalent.
a. 7,000 grams and 7 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
7 kilograms = 7 × 1000 grams = 7000 grams.
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 17.
b. 200 milliliters and 2 liters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2000 milliliters
So, the above statement is not correct.

Question 17.
c. 6 grams and 6,000 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams.
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 17.
d. 5 liters and 5,000 milliliters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
5 liters = 5000 milliliters
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 17.
e. 2 milliliters and 2,000 liters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2000 milliliters
the above statement is false.

Page No. 714

Question 18.
Draw lines to match equivalent time intervals.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 90

Answer:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Relative-Sizes-of-Measurement-Units-img-90-1

Question 19.
Anya arrived at the library on Saturday morning at 11:10 a.m. She left the library 1 hour 20 minutes later. Draw a time line to show the end time.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 91
Anya left the library at _____ P. M.

Question 20.
The tables show patterns for some units of measurement. Write the correct labels in each table.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 92

Answer: Yard, Feet; Week, days; Quart, Cups.

The label for the first table is:

Yard Feet
1 3
2 6
3 9
4 12

The label for the second table is:

Week Days
1 7
2 14
3 21
4 28

The label for the third table is:

Quart Cups
1 4
2 8
3 12
4 16

 

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 714 Q21

Question 22.
Frankie is practicing for a 5-kilometer race. His normal time is 31 minutes 21 seconds. Yesterday it took him only 29 minutes 38 seconds.
How much faster was Frankie yesterday than his normal time?
Type below:
________

Answer: 1 minute 43 seconds

Explanation:

Frankie is practicing for a 5-kilometer race.
His normal time is 31 minutes 21 seconds. Yesterday it took him only 29 minutes 38 seconds.
Subtract 29 minutes 38 seconds from 31 minutes 21 seconds
31 minutes 21 seconds
29 minutes 38 seconds
1 minute 43 seconds

Page No. 719

Question 1.
Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 93
The perimeter is _______ feet.
_____ ft

Answer: 24 ft.

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 8 ft.
The width of the rectangle = 4 ft.
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (8 ft. + 4 ft.) = 2(12 ft.) = 24 ft.
The perimeter of the rectangle = 24 ft.

Find the perimeter of the rectangle or square.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 94
P = _____ yards

Answer: 40 yards

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 16 yards
The width of the rectangle = 4 yards
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (16 yards + 4 yards) = 2(20 yards) = 40 yards
The perimeter of the rectangle is 40 yards.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 95
P = _____ meters

Answer: 304 meters

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 110 m
The width of the rectangle = 42 m
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (110 m + 42 m) = 2(152 m)
= 304 meters
Therefore the perimeter of the rectangle is 304 meters.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 96
P = _____ meters

Answer: 16 meters

Explanation:

The side of the square is 4 meters
The perimeter of the square = 4a
= 4 × 4 = 16 meters.
Therefore the perimeter of the square is 16 meters.

Find the perimeter of the rectangle or square.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 97
P = _____ inches

Answer: 108 in.

Explanation:
Length = 34 in.
Width = 20 in.
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (34 in. + 20 in.)
= 108 in.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 98
P = _____ feet

Answer: 464 feet

Explanation:

The side of the square is 116 feet
The perimeter of the square = 4a
= 4 × 116 feet = 464 feet.
Thus the perimeter of the square is 464 feet.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 99
P = _____ meters

Answer: 126 meters

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 42 meters
The width of the rectangle = 21 meters
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (42 m + 21 m) = 2 (63 m) = 126 meters
Therefore the perimeter of the above rectangle is 126 meters.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Page 719 Q8

Question 9.
Analyze What is the side length of a square with a perimeter of 60 meters?
l = _____ meters

Answer: 15 meters

Explanation:

The perimeter of the square = 60 meters
We know that, the perimeter of the square = 4a
4a = 60 meters
a = 60/4 = 15 meters
Thus the length of a square is 15 meters.

Page No. 720

Question 10.
Alejandra plans to sew fringe on a scarf. The scarf is shaped like a rectangle. The length of the scarf is 48 inches. The width is one half the length. How much fringe does Alejandra need?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 100
a. Draw a picture of the scarf, and label the given measurements on your drawing.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 12 Review Test solution image_1

Question 10.
b. What do you need to find?
Type below:
___9 _____

Answer: I need to find how much fringe does Alejandra need?

Question 10.
c. What formula will you use?
Type below:
________

Answer: I will use the perimeter of the rectangle formula = 2 (l + w).

Question 10.

d. Show the steps you use to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer:

First I will calculate the width of the rectangle.
After that, I will use the formula of perimeter of the rectangle.
I will substitute the value of the length and width of the rectangle.

Question 10.
e. Complete.
The length of the scarf is ____ inches.
The width is one half the length, or
____ ÷ 2 = ____ inches.
So, the perimeter is
(____ × ____) + (____ × ____) = ____ inches.
Type below:
________

Answer:

The length of the scarf is 48 inches.

The width is one half the length, or 48 ÷ 2 = 24 inches.

So, the perimeter is

(2 × 24) + (2 × 48) = 144 inches

Question 10.
f. Alejandra needs _____ of fringe.
____ inches of fringe

Answer: 144 inches of fringe

Question 11.
Marcia will make a frame for her picture. The picture frame will be three times as long as it is wide. The width of the frame will be 5 inches. How much wood does Marcia need for the frame?
____ inches

Answer: 40 inches

Explanation:

Given that, Marcia will make a frame for her picture.
The picture frame will be three times as long as it is wide.
The width of the frame will be 5 inches.
Length = 3 × 5 inches = 15 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2 (l + w)
= 2 (15 + 5) = 2 × 20 = 40 inches
Marcia needs 40 inches of wood for the frame.

Question 12.
Maya is building a sandbox that is 36 inches wide. The length is four times the width. What is the perimeter of the sandbox? Show your work. Explain.
____ inches

Answer: 360 inches

Explanation:

Maya is building a sandbox that is 36 inches wide. The length is four times the width.
Width = 36 inches
length = 4 × 36 inches = 144 inches
The perimeter of the rectangle = 2 (l + w)
= 2 (144 in. + 36 in.) = 2 × 180 inches = 360 inches
Therefore, the perimeter of the sandbox is 360 inches.

Conclusion:

The questions covered in the review test and mid-chapter checkpoint can also be verified using the Go Math grade 4 answer key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Pdf. So, you can practice well and score good grades in the standard tests and exams. Also, it clarifies all your subject doubts within no time. Hence, download and prepare more on a daily basis.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area

go-math-grade-4-chapter-13-algebra-perimeter-and-area-answer-key

Students who are looking for a great study resource or prep resource can refer to this page. Here, we have curated a Grade 4 Answer Key of Go Math Chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area. Download HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area pdf by accessing the links available over here. Save them and use the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area as a reference purpose during your practice sessions & score good marks in the exam.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area

Students can find various concepts questions and solutions covered in the chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area from this Go math Gerade 4 Answer Keys. All these solutions are prepared by the subject experts in a well-organized and understanding manner. So, practice all exercise and homework problems through Go Math 4th Grade Key of Chapter 13 Perimeter and Area. Also, test your knowledge by answering the given sums and learn your mistakes using HMH Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter Perimeter and Area.

Common Core – New – Page No. 721

Perimeter

Find the perimeter of the rectangle or square.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 1
9+3+9+3=24
24 inches

Explanation:

Length = 9 inches
Width = 3 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = l + w + l + w
9+3+9+3=24
Therefore the Perimeter of the rectangle = 24 inches.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 2
_____ meters

Answer: 32 meters

Explanation:

Side of a square = 8 meters
The perimeter of a square = 4a
= 4 × 8 meters = 32 meters
Thus the perimeter of a square = 32 meters.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 3
_____ feet

Answer: 44 feet

Explanation:

Length = 10 ft
Width = 12 ft
Perimeter of the rectangle = l + w + l + w
P = 10 + 12 + 10 + 12 = 20 + 24 = 44 feets
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle = 44 feet.

Remember: perimeter is the total distance around the outside, which can be found by adding together the length of each side. In the case of a rectangle, opposite sides are equal in length, so the perimeter is twice its width plus twice its height.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 4
_____ centimeters

Answer: 108 centimeters

Explanation:

Length = 30 cm
Width = 24 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = l + w + l + w
= 30 + 24 + 30 + 24 = 60 + 48
= 108 centimeters
Therefore the perimeter of the rectangle = 108 centimeters

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 5
_____ inches

Answer: 216 inches

Explanation:

Length = 25 in.
Width = 83 in.
Perimeter of the rectangle = l + w + l + w
= 25 + 83 + 25 + 83
= 216 inches
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle = 216 inches

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 6
_____ meters

Answer: 240 meters

Explanation:

The side of a square = 60 meters
The perimeter of the square = 4a
= 4 × 60 meters = 240 meters
Thus the perimeter of the square = 240 meters.

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 721 Q7

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 721 Q8

Common Core – New – Page No. 722

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the perimeter of a square window with sides 36 inches long?
Options:
a. 40 inches
b. 72 inches
c. 144 inches
d. 1,296 inches

Answer: 144 inches

Explanation:

Given, Side of a square = 36 inches
The perimeter of the square = 4 × side = 4a
= 4 × 36 inches = 144 inches
Thus the perimeter of the square = 144 inches
The correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
What is the perimeter of the rectangle below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 7
Options:
a. 11 meters
b. 14 meters
c. 18 meters
d. 400 meters

Answer: 18 meters

Explanation:

Length of the rectangle = 5 meter
Width of the rectangle = 4 meters
The perimeter of the rectangle = l + w + l + w
= 5 + 4 + 5 + 4 = 18 meters
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which is the most reasonable estimate for the measure of the angle Natalie drew?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 8
Options:
a. 30°
b. 90°
c. 180°
d. 210°

Answer: 90°

Explanation:

By seeing the above figure we can say that it is the right angle.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Ethan has 3 pounds of mixed nuts. How many ounces of mixed nuts does Ethan have?
Options:
a. 30 ounces
b. 36 ounces
c. 48 ounces
d. 54 ounces

Answer: 48 ounces

Explanation:

Given that, Ethan has 3 pounds of mixed nuts.
1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces
Therefore the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
How many lines of symmetry does the shape below appear to have?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 9
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. more than 2

Answer: 1

Explanation:

The above shape has 1 line of symmetry.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Which of the following comparisons is correct?
Options:
a. 0.70 > 7.0
b. 0.7 = 0.70
c. 0.7 < 0.70
d. 0.70 = 0.07

Answer: 0.7 = 0.70

Explanation:

a. 0.70 > 7.0
7.0 = 7
0.7 is less than 7

b. 0.7 = 0.70
0.7 is nothing but 0.70
So, the comparison is correct.
The answer is option B.

Page No. 725

Question 1.
Find the area of the rectangle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 10
A = _____ square cm

Answer: 143 square cm

Explanation:

Length = 11 cm
Width = 13 cm
Area of the rectangle = l × w
= 11 cm × 13 cm = 143 square cm
Therefore the area of the rectangle = 143 square cm

Find the area of the rectangle or square.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 11
A = _____ square inches

Answer: 14 square inches

Explanation:

Length = 7 inches
Width = 2 inches
Area of the rectangle = l × w
= 7 inches × 2 inches = 14 inches
Therefore the area of the rectangle = 14 square inches

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 12
A = _____ square meters

Answer: 81 square meters

Explanation:

Side of the square = 9 m
Area of a square = s × s
= 9 m × 9 m = 81 square meters
Thus the area of a square = 81 square meters

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 13
A = _____ square feet

Answer: 112 square feet

Explanation:

Length = 8 feet
Width = 14 feet
Area of the rectangle = l × w
= 8 feet × 14 feet = 112 square feet
Therefore, area of the rectangle = 112 square feet

Find the area of the rectangle or square.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 14
A = _____ square feet

Answer: 65 square feet

Explanation:

Length of the rectangle = 13 ft
Width of the rectangle = 5 feet
Area of a rectangle = l × w
= 13 feet × 5 feet = 65 square feet
Thus, the area of the rectangle = 65 square feet

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 15
A = _____ square yards

Answer: 169 square yards

Explanation:

Side of the square = 13 yards
Area of a square = s × s
= 13 yards × 13 yards = 169 square yards
Therefore, the area of a square = 169 square yards

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 16
A = _____ square centimeters

Answer: 40 square centimeters

Explanation:

Length of the rectangle = 20 cm
Width of the rectangle = 2 cm
Area of a rectangle = l × w
= 20 cm × 2 cm = 40 square centimeters
Therefore the area of the rectangle = 40 square centimeters.

Practice: Copy and Solve Find the area of the rectangle.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 725 Q8
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 725 Q8.1

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 725 Q9

Question 10.
base: 14 centimeters
height: 11 centimeters
A = _____ square centimeters

Answer: 154 square centimeters

Explanation:

base: 14 centimeters
height: 11 centimeters
Area of a rectangle = b × h
14 centimeters × 11 centimeters = 154 square centimeters
The area of the rectangle = 154 square centimeters

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 725 Q11

Question 12.
Reason Quantitatively Carmen sewed a square baby quilt that measures 36 inches on each side. What is the area of the quilt?
A = _____ square inches

Answer: 1296 square inches

Explanation:

Carmen sewed a square baby quilt that measures 36 inches on each side.
Area of a square = s × s
= 36 inches × 36 inches = 1296 square inches
Therefore the area of the quilt is 1296 square inches.

Page No. 726

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 17

Question 13.
Nancy and Luke are drawing plans for rectangular flower gardens. In Nancy’s plan, the garden is 18 feet by 12 feet. In Luke’s plan, the garden is 15 feet by 15 feet. Who drew the garden plan with the greater area? What is the area?
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
__________

Answer: I need to find who drew the garden plan with the greater area.

Question 13.
b. What formula will you use?
Type below:
__________

Answer: I will Area of rectangle and Area of a square formula

Question 13.
c. What units will you use to write the answer?
Type below:
__________

Answer: Square feet units

Question 13.
d. Show the steps to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
First, we need to find the area of Nancy’s plan
Length = 18 feet
Width = 12 feet
Area of a rectangle = l × w
A = 18 feet × 12 feet = 216 square feet
And now we need to find the area of Luke’s plan
A = s × s
A = 15 feet × 15 feet = 225 square feet

Question 13.
e. Complete the sentences.
The area of Nancy’s garden is _______.
The area of Luke’s garden is _______.
_______ garden has the greater area.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The area of Nancy’s garden is 216 square feet.
The area of Luke’s garden is 225 square feet.
Luke’s garden has a greater area.

Question 14.
Victor wants to buy fertilizer for his yard. The yard is 35 feet by 55 feet. The directions on the bag of fertilizer say that one bag will cover 1,250 square feet. How many bags of fertilizer should Victor buy to be sure that he covers the entire yard?
______ bags

Answer: 2 bags

Explanation:
Given that,
Victor wants to buy fertilizer for his yard. The yard is 35 feet by 55 feet.
The directions on the bag of fertilizer say that one bag will cover 1,250 square feet.
A = b × h
A = 35 feet × 55 feet
A = 1925 square feet
1925 square feet is greater than 1,250 square feet.
So, Victor has to buy 2 bags to be sure that he covers the entire yard.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 726 Q15

Common Core – New – Page No. 727

Area

Find the area of the rectangle or square.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 18

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 19
______ square yards

Answer: 64 square yards

Explanation:

Side of the square = 8 yards
Area of the square = s × s
8 yards × 8 yards = 64 square yards
Therefore, The area of the square is 64 square yards.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 20
_____ square meters

Answer: 45 square meters

Explanation:

Length of the rectangle = 15 m
Width of the rectangle = 3 m
Area of the rectangle = b × h
= 15 m × 3 m = 45 square meters
Thus the area of the rectangle is 45 square meters.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 21
______ square inches

Answer: 78 square inches

Explanation:

The base of the rectangle = 13 in.
Height of the rectangle = 6 in.
Area of the rectangle = b × h
13 in. × 6 in. = 78 square inches
Thus the area of the rectangle is 78 square inches.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 22
______ square centimeters

Answer: 150 square centimeters

Explanation:

The base of the rectangle = 30 cm
Height of the rectangle = 5 cm
Area of the rectangle = b × h
30 cm × 5 cm = 150 square centimeters
Therefore, the area of the rectangle = 150 square centimeters

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 23
______ square feet

Answer: 56 square feet

Explanation:

The base of the rectangle = 14 feet
Height of the rectangle = 4 feet
Area of the rectangle = b × h
14 feet × 4 feet = 56 square feet
Therefore, the area of the rectangle = 56 square feet.

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 727 Q7

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 727 Q8

Common Core – New – Page No. 728

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Ellie and Heather drew floor models of their living rooms. Ellie’s model represented 20 feet by 15 feet. Heather’s model represented 18 feet by 18 feet. Whose floor model represents the greater area? How much greater?
Options:
a. Ellie; 138 square feet
b. Heather; 24 square feet
c. Ellie; 300 square feet
d. Heather; 324 square feet

Answer: Heather; 24 square feet

Explanation:

Given,
Ellie and Heather drew floor models of their living rooms.
Ellie’s model represented 20 feet by 15 feet.
Heather’s model represented 18 feet by 18 feet.
Area of Ellie’s model = 20 feet × 15 feet = 300 square feet
Area of Heather’s model = 18 feet × 18 feet = 324 square feet
Now subtract the area of Ellie’s model from Heather’s model = 324 square feet – 300 square feet = 24 square feet
Thus the area of Heather’s model is greater than Ellie’s model
The correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Tyra is laying down square carpet pieces in her photography studio. Each square carpet piece is 1 yard by 1 yard. If Tyra’s photography studio is 7 yards long and 4 yards wide, how many pieces of square carpet will Tyra need?
Options:
a. 10
b. 11
c. 22
d. 28

Answer: 28

Explanation:

Tyra is laying down square carpet pieces in her photography studio.
Each square carpet piece is 1 yard by 1 yard. Tyra’s photography studio is 7 yards long and 4 yards wide
Area of the rectangle = b × h
= 7 yards × 4 yards
= 28 square yards
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Typically, blood fully circulates through the human body 8 times each minute. How many times does blood circulate through the body in 1 hour?
Options:
a. 48
b. 240
c. 480
d. 4,800

Answer: 480

Explanation:

Blood fully circulates through the human body 8 times each minute.
1 minute = 60 seconds
8 × 60 seconds = 480 seconds
The correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Each of the 28 students in Romi’s class raised at least $25 during the jump-a-thon. What is the least amount of money the class raised?
Options:
a. $5,200
b. $700
c. $660
d. $196

Answer: $700

Explanation:

Each of the 28 students in Romi’s class raised at least $25 during the jump-a-thon.
Multiply number od students with $25
28 × $25 = $700
The correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
What is the perimeter of the shape below if 1 square is equal to 1 square foot?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 24
Options:
a. 12 feet
b. 14 feet
c. 24 feet
d. 28 feet

Answer: 28 feet

Explanation:

Given that 1 square is equal to 1 square foot
There are 14 squares
Length = 14 squares
Width = 2 squares
Area of the rectangle = l × w = 14 × 2 = 28 sq. feets
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Ryan is making small meat loaves. Each small meat loaf uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound of meat. How much meat does Ryan need to make 8 small meat loaves?
Options:
a. 4 pounds
b. 6 pounds
c. 8 pounds
d. 10 \(\frac{2}{3}\) pounds

Answer: 6 pounds

Explanation:

Ryan is making small meatloaves.
Each small meatloaf uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound of meat.
Ryan need to make 8 small meatloaves.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × 8 = 6 pounds
The correct answer is option B.

Page No. 731

Question 1.
Explain how to find the total area of the figure.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 25
A = ______ square units

Answer: 23 square units

Explanation:
Rectangle:
Each square box = 1 unit
There are 7 units
Base = 7 units
Height = 2 units
The area of the figure = b × h
A = 7 units × 2 units = 14 square units
Square:
The side is 3 units
Area of the square = 3 units × 3 units = 9 square units
Add both the areas = 14 square units + 9 square units = 23 square units
Therefore the area of the above figure is 23 square units.

Find the area of the combined rectangles.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 26
A = ______ square mm

Answer: 72 square mm

Explanation:
Area of top rectangle = b × h
Base = 12 mm
Height = 3 mm
A = 12 mm × 3 mm = 36 square mm
Area of square = s × s
s = 6 mm
A = 6 mm × 6 mm = 36 square mm
Area of the figure = 36 square mm + 36 square mm = 72 square mm
Thus the area of the above figure is 72 square mm.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 27
A = ______ square miles

Answer: 146 square miles

Explanation:
Area of rectangle = b × h
Area of the first rectangle = 10 mi × 9 mi
A = 90 square miles
Area of the second rectangle = 8 mi × 7 mi
A = 56 square miles
Area of the figure = Area of first rectangle + Area of the second rectangle
Area of the figure = 90 square mi + 56 square miles
Thus the Area of the figure = 146 square miles

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 28
A = ______ square feet

Answer: 96 square feet

Explanation:
There are 2 squares and one rectangle in this figure
Area of the square = s × s
A = 4 ft × 4 ft = 16 square ft
Area of the square = s × s
A = 4 ft × 4 ft = 16 square ft
Area of the rectangle = b × h
A = 16 ft × 4 ft = 64 square ft
Area of the figure = 16 square ft + 16 square ft + 64 square ft
Thus the Area of the figure = 96 square feet.

Find the area of the combined rectangles.

Question 5.
Attend to Precision Jamie’s mom wants to enlarge her rectangular garden by adding a new rectangular section. The garden is now 96 square yards. What will the total area of the garden be after she adds the new section?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 29
A = ______ square yards

Answer: 180 square yards

Explanation:

There are 2 rectangles in the above figure
Area of rectangle = b × h
A = 12 yard × 8 yards  = 96 square yards
Area of rectangle = b × h
A = 6 yards × 14 yards = 84 square yards
Area of the figure = 96 square yards + 84 square yards
Therefore the area of the figure = 180 square yards.

Question 6.
Explain how to find the perimeter and area of the combined rectangles at the right.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 30
P = ______ feet; A = ______ square feet

Answer: A = 92 square feet; P = 52 feet

Explanation:
There are 2 rectangle in the figure
Area of rectangle = b × h
A = 5 ft × 4 ft = 20 square ft
Area of rectangle = b × h
A = 8 ft × 9 ft = 72 square ft
Area of the figure = 20 square ft + 72 square ft = 92 square ft
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2 × 5 + 2 × 4 = 10 + 8 = 18 feet
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2 × 8 + 2 × 9 = 16 + 18 = 34 feet
Perimeter of the figure = 52 feet

Page No. 732

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 31

Question 7.
The diagram shows the layout of Mandy’s garden. The garden is the shape of combined rectangles. What is the area of the garden?
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
__________

Answer: I need to find the area of the garden.

Question 7.
b. How can you divide the figure to help you find the total area?
Type below:
__________

Answer: I will divide the figure into 3 parts to find the total area

Question 7.
c. What operations will you use to find the answer?
Type below:
__________

Answer: I will use the addition operation to find the area.

Question 7.
d. Draw a diagram to show how you divided the figure. Then show the steps to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Algebra-Perimeter-and-Area-img-31
There are 2 rectangles and 1 square in this figure.
Area of rectangle = b × h
Base = 1 ft
H = 7 ft
A = 1 ft × 7 ft = 7 square ft
Area of rectangle = b × h
Base = 5 ft
H = 2 ft
A = 5 ft × 2 ft = 10 square ft
Area of the square = s × s
A = 3 ft × 3 ft = 9 square ft
Total area = 7 square ft + 10 square ft + 9 square ft
= 26 square ft

Question 8.
Workers are painting a large letter L for an outdoor sign. The diagram shows the dimensions of the L. For numbers 8a–8c, select Yes or No to tell whether you can add the products to find the area that the workers will paint.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 32
8a. 2 × 8 and 2 × 4
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes
Explanation:
There are 2 rectangles in the above figure
B = 2 ft
H = 8 ft
A = 2 × 8
B = 4 ft
H = 2 ft
A = 4 × 2
Thus the above statement is correct.

Question 8.
8b. 2 × 6 and 2 × 8
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No
There are 2 rectangles in the above figure
B = 6 ft
H = 2 ft
A = 2 × 6
Then 2 will be subtracted from 8 = 6
So, the above statement 2 × 6 and 2 × 8 is false.

Question 8.
8c. 2 × 6 and 6 × 2
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes
Explanation:
There are 2 rectangles in the above figure
B = 6 ft
H = 2 ft
A = 6 × 2
B = 2 ft
H = 6 ft
A = 2 × 6
Thus the above statement is true.

Common Core – New – Page No. 733

Area of Combined Rectangles

Find the area of the combined rectangles.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 33

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 34
______ square feet

Answer: 143 square feet

Explanation:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Algebra-Perimeter-and-Area-img-34

Area of A = 9 ft × 5 ft = 45 sq. ft.
Area of B = 14 ft. × 7 ft. = 98 sq. ft.
Total Area = Area of A + Area of B
= 45 sq. ft. + 98 sq. ft. = 143 square feet
Therefore the total Area = 143 square feet

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 35
______ square inches

Answer: 63 square inches

Explanation:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Algebra-Perimeter-and-Area-img-35

Area of A = 9 in. × 5 in. = 45 square inches
Area of B = 6 inches × 3 inches = 18 square inches
Total Area = Area of A + Area of B
Total Area = 45 square inches + 18 square inches
Total Area = 63 square inches

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 36
______ square feet

Answer: 50 square feet

Explanation:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Algebra-Perimeter-and-Area-img-36

Area of A = 4 feet × 2 feet = 8 square feet
Area of B = 7 feet × 6 feet = 42 square feet
Total Area = Area of A + Area of B
Total Area = 8 square feet + 42 square feet
Total Area = 50 square feet

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 37
______ square centimeters

Answer: 180 square centimeters

Explanation:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Algebra-Perimeter-and-Area-img-37

Area of A = 12 cm × 7 cm = 84 square cm
Area of B = 16 cm × 6 cm = 96 square cm
Total Area = Area of A + Area of B
Total Area = 84 square cm + 96 square cm
Total Area = 180 square centimeters

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 38
______ square yards

Answer: 68 square yards

Explanation:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Algebra-Perimeter-and-Area-img-38

Area of A = 14 yd × 1 yd = 14 square yards
Area of B = 9 yd × 6 yd = 54 square yards
Total Area = Area of A + Area of B
Total Area = 14 square yards + 54 square yards
Total Area = 68 square yards

Problem Solving

Use the diagram for 7–8.

Nadia makes the diagram below to represent the counter space she wants to build in her craft room.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 39

Question 7.
What is the area of the space that Nadia has shown for scrapbooking?
______ square feet

Answer: 52 square feet

Explanation:

Length = 13 feet
Width = 9 feet – 5 feet = 4 feet
Area of scrapbooking = l × w
= 13 feet × 4 feet
= 52 square feet
Therefore the area of the space that Nadia has shown for scrapbooking is 52 square feet.

Question 8.
What is the area of the space she has shown for painting?
______ square feet

Answer: 25 square feet

Explanation:
The space for painting is a square.
Side of the square is 5 feet
Area of the square = 5 feet × 5 feet
= 25 square feet
Thus the area of the space she has shown for painting is 25 square feet.

Common Core – New – Page No. 734

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the area of the combined rectangles below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 40
Options:
a. 136 square yards
b. 100 square yards
c. 76 square yards
d. 64 square yards

Answer: 76 square yards

Explanation:
Area of 1st rectangle = 5 yards × 8 yards = 40 square yards
Area of 2nd rectangle = 12 yards × 3 yards = 36 square yards
Area of the figure = Area of 1st rectangle + Area of 2nd rectangle
Area of the figure = 40 square yards + 36 square yards
Therefore, the Area of the figure is 76 square yards.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Marquis is redecorating his bedroom. What could Marquis use the area formula to find?
Options:
a. how much space should be in a storage box
b. what length of wood is needed for a shelf
c. the amount of paint needed to cover a wall
d. how much water will fill up his new aquarium

Answer: the amount of paint needed to cover a wall

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Giraffes are the tallest land animals. A male giraffe can grow as tall as 6 yards. How tall would the giraffe be in feet?
Options:
a. 2 feet
b. 6 feet
c. 12 feet
d. 18 feet

Answer: 18 feet

Explanation:
Giraffes are the tallest land animals. A male giraffe can grow as tall as 6 yards.
6 yards + 6 yards + 6 yards = 18 yards
The correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Drew purchased 3 books for $24. The cost of each book was a multiple of 4. Which of the following could be the prices of the 3 books?
Options:
a. $4, $10, $10
b. $4, $8, $12
c. $5, $8, $11
d. $3, $7, $14

Answer: $4, $8, $12

Explanation:
Given that,
Drew purchased 3 books for $24.
The cost of each book was a multiple of 4.
So, the prices of books will be multiple of 4.
That means $4 × 1, $4 × 2, $4 × 3
=  $4, $8, $12
The correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Esmeralda has a magnet in the shape of a square. Each side of the magnet is 3 inches long. What is the perimeter of her magnet?
Options:
a. 3 inches
b. 7 inches
c. 9 inches
d. 12 inches

Answer: 12 inches

Explanation:
Esmeralda has a magnet in the shape of a square. Each side of the magnet is 3 inches long.
Side = 3 inches
The perimeter of the square = 4s
P = 4 × 3 = 12 inches
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
What is the area of the rectangle below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 41
Options:
a. 63 square feet
b. 32 square feet
c. 18 square feet
d. 16 square feet

Answer: 63 square feet

Explanation:
Area of the rectangle = base × height
Base = 9 feet
Height = 7 feet
A = 9 feet × 7 feet
A = 63 square feet
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Page No. 735

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 42

Question 1.
A square that is 1 unit wide and 1 unit long is a ________.
__________

Answer: Square unit

Question 2.
The _______ of a two-dimensional figure can be any side.
__________

Answer: Base

Question 3.
A set of symbols that expresses a mathematical rule is called a ______.
__________

Answer: Formula

Question 4.
The ______ is the distance around a shape.
__________

Answer: Perimeter

Find the perimeter and area of the rectangle or square.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 43
Perimeter = ______ cm
Area = ______ square cm

Answer:
Perimeter = 52 cm
Area = 169 square cm

Explanation:
P = 4s
P = 4 × 13 = 52 cm
A = s × s
A = 13 × 13 = 169 square cm

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 44
Perimeter = ______ ft
Area = ______ square ft

Answer:
Perimeter: 48 ft
Area = 63 square ft

Explanation:
Base = 21 ft
Height = 3 ft
P = 2l +2w
P = 2 (21 ft + 3 ft)
P = 2 × 24 = 48 feet
A = b × h
A = 21 × 3
A = 63 square ft

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 45
Perimeter = ______ in.
Area = ______ square in.

Answer:
Perimeter = 46 in.
Area = 120 square in.

Explanation:
P = 2l +2w
P = 2 × 15 + 2 × 8
P = 30 + 16 = 46 inches
A = l × w
A = 15 × 8 = 120 square inches

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 46
Area = ____ square yd

Answer:
Area of the rectangle = 20 yards × 5 yards = 100 square yards
Area of the rectangle = 18 yards × 5 yards = 90 square yards
Area of the figure = 100 square yards + 90 square yards = 190 square yards

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 47
Area = ____ square meters

Answer:
A = b × h
A = 5 m × 2 m = 10 square meters
A = b × h
A = 5 m × 2 m = 10 square meters
A = b × h
A = 4 m × 2 m = 8 square meters
Now add all the areas
10 square meters + 10 square meters + 8 square meters
= 28 square meters
Therefore the area of the figures is 28 square meters

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 48
Area = ____ square feet
Answer:
Area of the rectangle = b × h
A = 14 ft × 2 ft = 28 square feet
A = s × s
A = 8 ft × 8 ft = 64 square feet
Area of the figures = 64 square feet + 28 square feet
Therefore Area of the figure = 92 square feet

Page No. 736

Question 11.
Which figure has the greatest perimeter?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 49
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 50
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 51
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 52
________

Answer: Figure B has the highest perimeter.

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 49
P = 2l +2w
P = 2 × 3 + 2 ×5 = 6 + 10 = 16
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 51

P = 2 × 6 + 2 × 3 = 12 + 6 = 18
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 50
P = 4a = 4 × 4 = 16
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 52
P = 2 × 4 + 2 × 3 = 8+ 6 = 14
Thus the greatest perimeter is figure B.

Question 12.
Which figure has an area of 108 square centimeters?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 53
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 54
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 55
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 56
________

Answer: Figure C

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 53
A = 13 cm × 6 cm = 78 square cm.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 55
A = 11 cm × 11 cm = 121 square cm.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 54
A = 12 cm × 9 cm = 108 square cm.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 56
A = 16 cm × 38 cm = 608 square cm.
Thus the area of 108 square centimeters is Figure C.

Question 13.
Which of the combined rectangles has an area of 40 square feet?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 57
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 58
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 59
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 60
________

Answer: Figure A

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 57
Area of top rectangle = 6 ft × 2 ft = 12 square feet
Area of bottom rectangle = 6 ft × 2 ft = 12 square feet
Area of square = 4 ft × 4 ft = 16 square feet
Add Area of top rectangle, Area of bottom rectangle and Area of square
= 12 square feet +  12 square feet + 16 square feet = 40 square feet.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Page No. 739

Question 1.
Find the unknown measure. The area of the rectangle is 36 square feet.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 61
A = b × h
The base of the rectangle is ________ .
base = _____ ft

Answer: 12 feet

Explanation:
Given,
The area of the rectangle = 36 square feet
Height = 3 feet
Base =?
A = b × h
36 square feet = b × 3 feet
b × 3 feet = 36 square feet
b = 36/3 = 12 feet
The base of the rectangle is 12 feets.

Find the unknown measure of the rectangle.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 62
Perimeter = 44 centimeters
width = _____ cm

Answer: 10 cm

Explanation:
Given,
Perimeter = 44 centimeters
Length = 12 cm
width =?
The perimeter of the rectangle = 2 (l + w)
P = 2l + 2w
44 cm = 24 cm + 2w
2w = 44 cm – 24 cm
2w = 20 cm
w = 20/2 = 10
Therefore width = 10 cm

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 63
Area = 108 square inches
height = _____ in.

Answer: 12 inches

Explanation:
Given,
Area = 108 square inches
Base = 9 inches
height = _____ in.
A = b × h
108 square inches = 9 inches × h
h = 108/9
Height = 12 inches
Therefore the height of the rectangle = 12 inches

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 64
Area = 90 square meters
base = _____ cm

Answer: 18 meters

Explanation:
Given,
Area = 90 square meters
Height = 5 meters
base = _____ cm
A = b × h
90 square meters = b × 5 meters
b × 5 meters = 90 square meters
b = 90/5 = 18 meters
Therefore the base of the rectangle = 18 meters

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 65
Perimeter = 34 yards
length = _____ yd

Answer: 12 yards

Explanation:
Given,
Perimeter = 34 yards
Width = 5 yards
Length =?
The perimeter of the rectangle = 2 (l + w)
P = 2l + 2w
34 yards = 2 × l + 2 × 5 yards
34 yards = 2 × l + 10 yards
2 × l + 10 yards = 34 yards
2l = 34 yards – 10 yards
2l = 24 yards
l = 24/2 = 12 yards
Therefore the length of the rectangle = 12 yards.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 66
Area = 96 square feet
base = ______ ft

Answer: 12 feet

Explanation:
Given,
Area = 96 square feet
Height = 8 feet
Base =?
A = b × h
96 square feet = b × 8 feet
b × 8 feet = 96 square feet
b = 96/8 = 12 feet
Thus base of the rectangle = 12 feet.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 67
Area = 126 square centimeters
height = _____ centimeters

Answer: 14 centimeters

Explanation:
Given,
Area = 126 square centimeters
Base = 9 cm
height = _____ centimeters
A = b × h
126 square centimeters = 9 cm × h
9 cm × h = 126 square centimeters
h = 126/9 = 14 centimeters
Therefore the Height of the rectangle = 14 centimeters

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 739 Q8

Page No. 740

Question 9.
Identify Relationships The area of a swimming pool is 120 square meters. The width of the pool is 8 meters. What is the length of the pool in centimeters?
length = _____ centimeters

Answer:
Given that the area of a swimming pool is 120 square meters.
The width of the pool is 8 meters.
We have to find the length of the pool in centimeters.
We know that Area of the rectangle = l × w
A = l × w
120 square meters = l × 8 meters
l × 8 meters = 120 square meters
l = 120/8 = 15 meters
Therefore, the length of the pool = 15 meters
Convert meters to centimeters
1 meter = 100 centimeters
15 meters = 1500 centimeters.
The length of the pool in centimeters = 1500 centimeters

Question 10.
An outdoor deck is 7 feet wide. The perimeter of the deck is 64 feet. What is the length of the deck? Use the numbers to write an equation and solve. A number may be used more than once.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 68
P=(2 × l) + (2 × w)
So, the length of the deck is _______ feet.
length = _____ ft

Answer:
An outdoor deck is 7 feet wide.
The perimeter of the deck is 64 feet.
We know that,
P=(2 × l) + (2 × w)
64 feet = (2 × l) + (2 × 7)
64 feet = 2l + 14 feet
2 × l = 64 feet – 14 feet
2 × l = 50 feet
l = 50/2 = 25 feet
Therefore the length of the deck = 25 feet.

Question 11.
A male mountain lion has a rectangular territory with an area of 96 square miles. If his territory is 8 miles wide, what is the length of his territory?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 69
length = _____ miles

Answer:
A male mountain lion has a rectangular territory with an area of 96 square miles.
Width = 8 miles
Length =?
A = l × w
96 square miles = l × 8 miles
l × 8 miles = 96 square miles
l = 96/8
l = 12 miles
Therefore, length of his territory = 12 miles

Common Core – New – Page No. 741

Find Unknown Measures

Find the unknown measure of the rectangle.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 70
Perimeter = 54 feet
width = 7 feet
Think: P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
54 = (2 × 20) + (2 × w)
54 = 40 + (2 × w)
Since 54 = 40 + 14, 2 × w = 14, and w = 7.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 71
Perimeter = 42 meters
length = _____ meters

Answer: length = 12 meters

Explanation:

Given, Perimeter = 42 meters
Width = 9 meters
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = (2 × l) + (2 × 9 m)
42 m = 2l + 18 m
42 m – 18 m = 2l
2l = 24 meters
l = 24 meters/2 = 12 meters
Therefore length = 12 meters

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 72
Area = 28 square centimeters
height = _____ centimeters

Answer: height = 7 centimeters

Explanation:

Given,
Area = 28 square centimeters
Base = 4 cm
A = b × h
28 square centimeters = 4 cm × h
4 × h = 28
h = 28/4 = 7 cm
The height of the rectangle = 7 centimeters

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 73
Area = 200 square inches
base = _____ inches

Answer: base = 8 inches

Explanation:

Given,
Area = 200 square inches
Height = 25 inches
Base = ?
Area of the rectangle = b × h
200 square inches = b × 25 inches
b × 25 inches = 200 square inches
b = 200/25 = 8 inches
The base of the rectangle = 8 inches.

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 741 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 741 Q6

Common Core – New – Page No. 742

Lesson Check

Question 1.
The area of a rectangular photograph is 35 square inches. If the width of the photo is 5 inches, how tall is the photo?
Options:
a. 5 inches
b. 7 inches
c. 25 inches
d. 30 inches

Answer: 7 inches

Explanation:

The area of a rectangular photograph is 35 square inches.
Width = 5 inches
A = l × w
35 square inches = l × 5 inches
Length = 35/5 = inches
Thus the photo is 7 inches tall.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Natalie used 112 inches of blue yarn as a border around her rectangular bulletin board. If the bulletin board is 36 inches wide, how long is it?
Options:
a. 20 inches
b. 38 inches
c. 40 inches
d. 76 inches

Answer: 20 inches

Explanation:

Natalie used 112 inches of blue yarn as a border around her rectangular bulletin board.
Width = 36 inches
A = 112 inches
A = l × w
112 inches = l × 36 inches
l × 36 inches = 112 inches
l = 112/36 = 20 inches
Length = 20 inches
The correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A professional basketball court is in the shape of a rectangle. It is 50 feet wide and 94 feet long. A player ran one time around the edge of the court. How far did the player run?
Options:
a. 144 feet
b. 194 feet
c. 238 feet
d. 288 feet

Answer: 288 feet

Explanation:

A professional basketball court is in the shape of a rectangle.
It is 50 feet wide and 94 feet long.
A player ran one time around the edge of the court.
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = (2 × 94 feet) + (2 × 50 feet)
P = 188 feet + 100 feet = 288 feet
Therefore the perimeter of the rectangle is 288 feet.

Question 4.
On a compass, due east is a \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise from due north. How many degrees are in a \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn?
Options:
a. 45°
b. 60°
c. 90°
d. 180°

Answer: 90°

Explanation:

On a compass, due east is a \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise from due north.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 360° = 360°/4 = 90°
The correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Hakeem’s frog made three quick jumps. The first was 1 meter. The second jump was 85 centimeters. The third jump was 400 millimeters. What was the total length of the frog’s three jumps?
Options:
a. 189 centimeters
b. 225 centimeters
c. 486 centimeters
d. 585 millimeters

Answer: 225 centimeters

Explanation:

Hakeem’s frog made three quick jumps.
The first was 1 meter. The second jump was 85 centimeters. The third jump was 400 millimeters.
Convert other units to centimeters
1 meter = 100 centimeters
400 millimeters = 40 centimeters
100 + 85 + 40 = 225 centimeters
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Karen colors in squares on a grid. She colored \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the squares blue and \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the squares red. What fraction of the squares are not colored in?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:

Karen colors in squares on a grid.
She colored \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the squares blue and \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the squares red.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{6}{8}\)
Total number of fractions = \(\frac{8}{8}\)
\(\frac{8}{8}\) – \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\) fraction of the squares are not colored.

Page No. 745

Question 1.
Lila is wallpapering one wall of her bedroom, as shown in the diagram. She will cover the whole wall except for the doorway. How many square feet of wall does Lila need to cover?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 74
First, find the area of the wall.
A = b × h
Awall = _____ square feet

Answer:
Base = 12 feet
Height = 8 feet
A = b × h
Awall = 12 feet × 8 feet
Awall = 96 square feet

Question 1.
Next, find the area of the door.
A = b × h
Adoor = _____ square feet

Answer:
Base = 3 feet
Height = 7 feet
A = b × h
Adoor = 3 feet × 7 feet
Adoor = 21 square feet

Question 1.
Last, subtract the area of the door from the area of the wall.
_____ – _____ = _____ square feet
So, Lila needs to cover _____ of wall.
Type below:
________

Answer:
Adoor = 21 square feet
Awall = 96 square feet
Last, subtract the area of the door from the area of the wall.
A = Awall – Adoor
A = 96 square feet – 21 square feet
A = 75 square feet
So, Lila needs to cover 75 square feet

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 745 Q2

Question 3.
Ed is building a model of a house with a flat roof, as shown in the diagram. There is a chimney through the roof. Ed will cover the roof with square tiles. If the area of each tile is 1 square inch, how many tiles will he need? Explain.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 75
_____ tiles

Answer:
Roof:
Base = 20 inches
Height = 30 inches
Area of the roof = b × h
Aroof = 20 inches × 30 inches
Aroof = 600 inches
Chimney:
Base = 3 inches
Height = 4 inches
Area of the chimney = b × h
Achimney = 3 × 4 = 12 inches
Now subtract Area of Chimney from Area of the roof
A = 600 inches – 12 inches
A = 588 inches
Therefore Ed needs 588 tiles.

Page No. 746

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 746 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 746 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 746 Q6

Question 7.
A rectangular floor is 12 feet long and 11 feet wide. Janine places a rug that is 9 feet long and 7 feet wide and covers part of the floor in the room. Select the word(s) to complete the sentence.
To find the number of square feet of the floor that is NOT covered by the rug,
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 76 the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 77 Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 78 the area of the floor.
_____ square feet

Answer:
Length = 12 feet
Width = 11 feet
Area of the rectangular floor = l × w
= 12 feet × 11 feet = 132 square feet
Room:
Length = 9 feet
Width = 7 feet
Area of the floor in the room = l × w
= 9 feet × 7 feet
= 63 square feet
Subtract the area of the rug from the area of the floor
= 132 square feet – 63 square feet = 69 square feet
The number of square feet of the floor that is NOT covered by the rug is 69 square feet.

Common Core – New – Page No. 747

Problem Solving Find the Area

Solve each problem.

Question 1.
A room has a wooden floor. There is a rug in the center of the floor. The diagram shows the room and the rug. How many square feet of the wood floor still shows?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 79
82 square feet
Area of the floor: 13 × 10 = 130 square feet
Area of the rug: 8 × 6 = 48 square feet
Subtract to find the area of the floor still showing: 130 – 48 = 82 square feet

Question 2.
A rectangular wall has a square window, as shown in the diagram.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 80
What is the area of the wall NOT including the window?
The area of the wall NOT including the window = _____ square feet

Answer: 96 square feet

Explanation:
Wall:
Base = 14 feet
Height = 8 feet
Area of the wall = b × h
A = 14 feet × 8 feet
A = 112 square feet
Window:
Length = 4 feet
Area of the square = s × s
Area of the window = 4 feet × 4 feet = 16 square feet
Now subtract Area of the window from the area of the rectangular wall
= 112 square feet – 16 square feet
= 96 square feet
Therefore the area of the wall NOT including the window = 96 square feet.

Question 3.
Bob wants to put down new sod in his backyard, except for the part set aside for his flower garden. The diagram shows Bob’s backyard and the flower garden.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Common Core - New img 81
How much sod will Bob need?
The area covered with new sod = _____ square yards

Answer: 235 square yards

Flower Garden:
Base = 20 yards
Height = 14 yards
Area of the rectangular flower garden = b × h
A = 20 yards × 14 yards
A = 280 square yards
Sod:
Base = 5 yards
Height = 9 yards
Area of sod = b × h
= 5 yards × 9 yards = 45 square yards
Now subtract area of sod from area of flower garden
= 280 square yards – 45 square yards
= 235 square yards
Thus the area covered with new sod = 235 square yards

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 747 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 747 Q5
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 747 Q5.1

Common Core – New – Page No. 748

Lesson Check

Question 1.
One wall in Zoe’s bedroom is 5 feet wide and 8 feet tall. Zoe puts up a poster of her favorite athlete. The poster is 2 feet wide and 3 feet tall. How much of the wall is not covered by the poster?
Options:
a. 16 square feet
b. 34 square feet
c. 35 square feet
d. 46 square feet

Answer: 34 square feet

Explanation:
One wall in Zoe’s bedroom is 5 feet wide and 8 feet tall.
Area of the wall in Zoe’s bedroom = b × h
A = 5 feet × 8 feet
A = 40 square feet
Zoe puts up a poster of her favorite athlete. The poster is 2 feet wide and 3 feet tall.
Area of the poster = b × h
A = 2 feet × 3 feet = 6 square feet
Now subtract Area of the poster from the Area of the wall in Zoe’s bedroom
= 40 square feet – 6 square feet
= 34 square feet
Thus the area of the wall is not covered by the poster = 34 square feet.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
A garage door is 15 feet wide and 6 feet high. It is painted white, except for a rectangular panel 1 foot high and 9 feet wide that is brown. How much of the garage door is white?
Options:
a. 22 square feet
b. 70 square feet
c. 80 square feet
d. 81 square feet

Answer: 81 square feet

Explanation:
A garage door is 15 feet wide and 6 feet high.
Area of the garage door = b × h
A = 15 feet × 6 feet
A = 90 square feet
It is painted white, except for a rectangular panel 1 foot high and 9 feet wide that is brown.
b = 9 feet
h = 1 foot
A = b × h
A = 9 feet × 1 feet
A = 9 square feet
Area of the garage door is white = 90 square feet – 9 square feet
Area of the garage door is white = 81 square feet
The correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kate baked a rectangular cake for a party. She used 42 inches of frosting around the edges of the cake. If the cake was 9 inches wide, how long was the cake?
Options:
a. 5 inches
b. 12 inches
c. 24 inches
d. 33 inches

Answer: 12 inches

Explanation:
Kate baked a rectangular cake for a party. She used 42 inches of frosting around the edges of the cake.
Width = 9 inches
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
42 inches = (2 × l) + (2 × 9)
(2 × l) + (2 × 9) = 42 inches
(2 × l) = 42 inches – 18 inches
2l = 24 inches
l = 24/2 = 12 inches
Therefore the cake is 12 inches long.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Larry, Mary, and Terry each had a full glass of juice. Larry drank \(\frac{3}{4}\) of his. Mary drank \(\frac{3}{8}\) of hers. Terry drank \(\frac{7}{10}\) of his. Who drank less than \(\frac{1}{2}\) of their juice?
Options:
a. Larry
b. Mary
c. Mary and Terry
d. Larry and Terry

Answer: Mary

Explanation:
Larry, Mary, and Terry each had a full glass of juice.
Larry drank \(\frac{3}{4}\), Mary drank \(\frac{3}{8}\) and Terry drank \(\frac{7}{10}\) of \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(\frac{3}{8}\) is less than \(\frac{1}{2}\) of their juice.
The correct answer is Option B.

Question 5.
Which of the following statements is NOT true about the numbers 7 and 9?
Options:
a. 7 is a prime number.
b. 9 is a composite number.
c. 7 and 9 have no common factors other than 1.
d. 27 is a common multiple of 7 and 9.

Answer: 27 is a common multiple of 7 and 9

Explanation:
a. 7 is a prime number is true.
b. 9 is a composite number is true
c. 7 and 9 have no common factors other than 1 is true.
d. 27 is a common multiple of 7 and 9 is not true because 7 is not multiple of 27.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Tom and some friends went to a movie. The show started at 2:30 P.M. and ended at 4:15 P.M. How long did the movie last?
Options:
a. 1 hour 35 minutes
b. 1 hour 45 minutes
c. 1 hour 55 minutes
d. 2 hours 15 minutes

Answer: 1 hour 45 minutes

Explanation:
Tom and some friends went to a movie. The show started at 2:30 P.M. and ended at 4:15 P.M.
Subtract 2:30 P.M. from 4:15 P.M.
4 hour 15 minutes
-2 hour 30 minutes
1 hour 45 minutes
The movie last for 1 hour 45 minutes
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Page No. 749

Question 1.
For numbers 1a–1e, select Yes or No to indicate if a rectangle with the given dimensions would have a perimeter of 50 inches.
a. length: 25 inches; width: 2 inches
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
50 inches = (2 × 25 in.) + (2 × w)
(2 × w) = 50 inches – 50 inches
w = 0
Thus the above statement is false

Question 1.
b. length: 20 inches; width: 5 inches
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
50 inches = (2 × 20 in.) + (2 × 5)
50 inches = 40 in. + 10 in.
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 1.
c. length: 17 inches; width: 8 inches
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
50 inches = (2 × 17 in.) + (2 × 8 in.)
50 inches = 34 in. + 16 in.
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 1.
d. length: 15 inches; width: 5 inches
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
50 inches = (2 × 15 in.) + (2 × 5 in.)
50 inches = 30 in. + 10 in.
50 inches = 40 inches
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 1.
e. length: 15 inches; width: 10 inches
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
50 inches = (2 × 15 in.) + (2 × 10 in.)
50 inches = 30 in. + 20 in.
50 inches = 50 inches
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 2.
The swimming club’s indoor pool is in a rectangular building.
Marco is laying tile around the rectangular pool.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 82
Part A
What is the area of the pool and the area of the pool and the walkway? Show your work.
A(pool) = ____ m2    A(building) = ____ m2

Answer:
Pool:
Base = 20 m
Height = 16 m
A = b × h
Area of the pool = 20 m × 16 m = 320 square meters
Pool and the walkway:
Area of the pool and the walkway = 26 m × 22 m = 572 square meters

Question 2.
Part B
How many square meters of tile will Marco need for the walkway?
Explain how you found your answer.
A(walkway) = ____ m2

Answer: 252 square meters

Explanation:
Area of walkway = Area of the pool and the walkway – Area of pool
Area of the walkway = 572 square meters – 320 square meters
= 252 square meters
Therefore the Area of walkway = 252 square meters

Page No. 750

Question 3.
Match the dimensions of the rectangles in the top row with the correct area or perimeter in the bottom row
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 83

Answer:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Algebra-Perimeter-and-Area-img-83

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 750 Q4

Question 5.
A rectangular flower garden in Samantha’s backyard has 100 feet around its edge. The width of the garden is 20 feet. What is the length of the garden? Use the numbers to write an equation and solve it. A number may be used more than once.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 84
□ = (2 × l) + (2 × □)
□ = 2 × l + □
□ = 2 × l
□ = l
So, the length of the garden _____ feet.

Answer:
P = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
100 = (2 × l) + (2 × 20)
100 – 40 = 2 × l
2 × l = 60
l = 60/2 = 30 feet
Length = 30 feet
So, the length of the garden 30 feet.

Question 6.
Gary drew a rectangle with a perimeter of 20 inches. Then he tried to draw a square with a perimeter of 20 inches.
Draw 3 different rectangles that Gary could have drawn. Then draw the square, if possible.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The possible rectangles with a perimeter of 20 inches are:
Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 13 Answer Key review solution image-1HMH Grade 4 Go Math Answer Key review solution image-2Go Math 4th Grade Solution Key Review solution image-3
The possible square with a perimeter of 20 inches is:
Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 13 solution key review solution image-4

Page No. 751

Question 7.
Ami and Bert are drawing plans for rectangular vegetable gardens. In Ami’s plan, the garden is 13 feet by 10 feet. In Bert’s plan, the garden is 12 feet by 12 feet. For numbers 7a−7d, select True or False for each statement.
a. The area of Ami’s garden is 130 square feet.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
A = b × h
Area of Ami’s garden = 13 feet × 10 feet =
Area of Ami’s garden = 130 square feet
The above statement is true.

Question 7.
b. The area of Bert’s garden is 48 square feet.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
Area of Bert’s garden = 12 feet × 12 feet = 144 square feet
The above statement is false.

Question 7.
c. Ami’s garden has a greater area than Bert’s garden.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
Area of Ami’s garden = 13 feet × 10 feet = 130 square feet
Area of Bert’s garden = 12 feet × 12 feet = 144 square feet
130 square feet is less than 144 square feet
The area of Ami’s garden is less than Area of Bert’s garden.
The above statement is false.

Question 7.
d. The area of Bert’s garden is 14 square feet greater than Ami’s.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
Area of Ami’s garden = 13 feet × 10 feet = 130 square feet
Area of Bert’s garden = 12 feet × 12 feet = 144 square feet
144 square feet – 130 square feet = 14 square feet
The above statement is true.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 751 Q8

Question 9.
Harvey bought a frame in which he put his family’s picture.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 85
What is the area of the frame not covered by the picture?
_______ square inches

Answer: 136 square inches

Explanation:
Area of the picture = 12 in. × 18 in.
A = 216 square inches
Area of the frame = 16 in. × 22 in.
A = 352 square inches
The area of the frame not covered by the picture = 352 square inches – 216 square inches
= 136 square inches
Therefore the area of the frame not covered by the picture is 136 square inches.

Question 10.
Kelly has 236 feet of fence to use to enclose a rectangular space for her dog. She wants the width to be 23 feet. Draw a rectangle that could be the space for Kelly’s dog. Label the length and width.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Kelly has 236 feet of fence to use to enclose a rectangular space for her dog.
She wants the width to be 23 feet.
Perimeter = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
236 = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
236 = (2 × l) + (2 × 23)
236 – 46 = (2 × l)
(2 × l) = 190HMH Go Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 13 review solution img- 5
l = 190/2
l = 95 feet
Therefore length = 95 feet.

Page No. 752

Question 11.
The diagram shows the dimensions of a new parking lot at Helen’s Health Food store.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 86
Use either addition or subtraction to find the area of the parking lot. Show your work.
_______ square yards

Answer: 1100 square yards

Explanation:
Addition:
Top:
Base = 40 yards
Height = 20 yards
Area of the top rectangle = b × h
A = 40 yards × 20 yards = 800 square yards
Bottom:
Base = 30 yards
Height = 10 yards
Area of the rectangle = b × h
A = 30 yards × 10 yards = 300 square yards
Area of the parking = Area of top + Area of bottom
A = 800 square yards + 300 square yards
Area of parking = 1100 square yards.

Question 12.
Chad’s bedroom floor is 12 feet long and 10 feet wide. He has an area rug on his floor that is 7 feet long and 5 feet wide. Which statement tells how to find the amount of the floor that is not covered by the rug? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. Add 12 × 10 and 7 × 5.
b. Subtract 35 from 12 × 10
c. Subtract 10 × 5 from 12 × 7.
d. Add 12 + 10 + 7 + 5.
e. Subtract 7 × 5 from 12 × 10.
f. Subtract 12 × 10 from 7 × 5.

Answer: B, F

Chad’s bedroom floor is 12 feet long and 10 feet wide.
A = 12 feet × 10 feet = 120 square feet
Area rug on his floor = 7 feet × 5 feet = 35 square feet
To find the amount of the floor that is not covered by the rug we have to subtract 120 square feet from 35 square feet or 35 square feet from 12 × 10.
So, the correct answers are B and F.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area Page 752 Q13

Page No. 753

Question 14.
Ms. Bennett wants to buy carpeting for her living room and dining room.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 87
Explain how she can find the amount of carpet she needs to cover the floor in both rooms. Then find the amount of carpet she will need.
____ square feet

Answer:
She can find the area of each rectangle and then find the sum. The area of the living room is 20 × 20 = 400 square feet.
The area of the dining room is 15 × 10 = 150 square feet.
The sum of the two rooms = 400 + 150 = 550 square feet.
She needs 550 square feet of carpeting.

Question 15.
Lorenzo built a rectangular brick patio. He is putting a stone border around the edge of the patio. The width of the patio is 12 feet. The length of the patio is two feet longer than the width.
How many feet of stone will Lorenzo need? Explain how you found your answer.
____ feet

Answer: 52 feet

Explanation:
Width = 12 feet
Length = 2 × width
Length = 2 + 12 feet = 14 feet
Perimeter = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = (2 × 14) + (2 × 12)
P = 28 + 24
P = 52 feet

Page No. 754

Question 16.
Which rectangle has a perimeter of 10 feet? Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 88
Rectangle: ____
Rectangle: ____

Answer: A, C

Explanation:
i. Perimeter of A = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = (2 × 1) + (2 × 4) = 2 + 8 = 10 feet
ii. Perimeter of B = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = (2 × 2) + (2 × 5) = 4 + 10 = 14 feet
iii. Perimeter of C = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = (2 × 2) + (2 × 3) = 4 + 6 = 14 feet
iv. Perimeter of D = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = (2 × 4) + (2 × 6) = 8 + 12 = 20 feet
The correct answer is options A and C.

Question 17.
A folder is 11 inches long and 8 inches wide. Alyssa places a sticker that is 2 inches long and 1 inch wide on the notebook. Choose the words that correctly complete the sentence.
To find the number of square inches of the folder that is NOT covered by the sticker,
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 89
Type below:
________

Answer: Subtract the area of the sticker from the area of the notebook.

Question 18.
Tricia is cutting her initial from a piece of felt. For numbers, 18a–18c, select Yes or No to tell whether you can add the products to find the number of square centimeters Tricia needs.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 90
a. 1 × 8 and 5 × 2 _______
b. 3 × 5 and 1 × 8 _______
c. 2 × 5 and 1 × 3 and 1 × 3 _______

Answer:
a. 1 × 8 and 5 × 2 _______
Yes
b. 3 × 5 and 1 × 8 _______
No
c. 2 × 5 and 1 × 3 and 1 × 3 _______
No

Question 19.
Mr. Butler posts his students’ artwork on a bulletin board.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area img 91
The width and length of the bulletin board are whole numbers. What could be the dimensions of the bulletin board Mr. Butler uses?
Type below:
________

Answer: 5 feet long by 3 feet wide
Area of the rectangle = l × w
A = 15 square feet
The factor of 15 is 5 and 3.
So, the length = 5 feet long
Width = 3 feet long.

Quick learning is not only important but also understanding is important to learn the concepts. You can’t love maths if you don’t understand the subject. So, to help you guys we have provided the images for your better understanding. Learn the simple techniques to solve the problem in less time in our Go Math Answer Key.

Conclusion:

We wish you all have satisfied with the solutions exists in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area. For better practice sessions refer to the questions given at the end of the chapter and solve them properly with the help of topic-wise chapter 13 Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key. Practice all problems easily and score well in any standard tests or exams.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles

go-math-grade-4-chapter-11-angles-answer-key

Examine your Preparation and understanding level towards chapter 11 concepts with the help of the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Assessment Test. All you need to do is just click on the links provided here and assess your weak areas and strong areas. So that you can allot time accordingly & fill up the knowledge gaps using the 4th Grade HMH Go Math Homework Practice FL Answer Key Ch 11 Angles. With regular practice, you can secure more marks in your exam.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 includes all standard topics of angles. Improve your math skills by taking help from 4th Grade HMH Go Math Solutions Key Chapter 11 Angles Practice FL, Homework practice FL. Educators and Instructors must use of these Grade 4 Go Math Chapter 11 Angles Answer Key & educate their students to understand the topics clearly. Step by step Solutions are given for all the concepts of angles and you can refer to them to easily and clear all your doubts. Utilize these links and begin your practice right away.

Lesson 1:

Lesson 2:

Lesson 3: Measure and Draw Angles

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 4:

Common Core – New

Lesson 5:

Common Core – New

Chapter 11 Review/Test

Common Core – New – Page No. 605

Angles and Fractional Parts of a Circle

Tell what fraction of the circle the shaded angle represents.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 1

The figure shows that the \(\frac{1}{4}\)th part of the circle is shaded. So, the fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 2
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:

Half of the circle is shaded. Thus the fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 3
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{1}\)

Explanation:

From the above figure, we can observe that the complete circle is shaded. So, the fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{1}\) or 1.

Tell whether the angle on the circle shows a \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{3}{4}\), or 1 full turn clockwise or counterclockwise.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn counter clockwise

Explanation:

From the figure, we can see that the circle is rotating in the anti-clockwise direction. And it has completed the half turn.
Thus the fraction is \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn counter clockwise

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 5
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn clockwise

Explanation:

The arrow is turned in a clockwise direction. It has completed \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn. So, the angle with direction is \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn clockwise.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 6
_________

Answer: 1 full turn counter clockwise

Explanation:

From the above picture, we can observe that the circle has completed the full turn in the counter clockwise direction.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Shelley exercised for 15 minutes. Describe the turn the minute hand made.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 7
Type below:
_________

Answer: The minute hand made a turn of \(\frac{1}{4}\) clockwise.

Explanation:

Given that,

Shelley exercised for 15 minutes.
So, the fraction of the minute hand made is \(\frac{1}{4}\).
The direction of the minute hand made is clockwise.
So, the answer is the minute hand made a turn of \(\frac{1}{4}\) clockwise.

Question 8.
Mark took 30 minutes to finish lunch. Describe the turn the minute hand made.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 8
Type below:
_________

Answer: The minute hand made a turn of \(\frac{1}{2}\) clockwise.

Explanation:

Given, Mark took 30 minutes to finish lunch.
The minute hand made a turn in the clockwise direction from 12 to 6.
That means the fraction of the angle is \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Thus the turn minute hand made is \(\frac{1}{2}\) clockwise.

Common Core – New – Page No. 606

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What fraction of the circle does the shaded angle represent
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 9
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{1}\) or 1
b. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:

From the figure we can say that the fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Thus the answer is option D.

Question 2.
Which describes the turn shown below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 10
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise
c. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise
d. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn counterclockwise

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise

Explanation:

From the figure, we can see that the circle is rotating in the clockwise direction. And it has completed the half turn.
So, the answer is \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which shows \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\) written as a pair of fractions with a common denominator?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{4}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{6}{9} \text { and } \frac{6}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{12} \text { and } \frac{3}{12}\)
d. \(\frac{8}{12} \text { and } \frac{9}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{12} \text { and } \frac{9}{12}\)

Explanation:

\(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The denominators are different here. So you have to make the denominators common.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\) = \(\frac{8}{12}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{3}{3}\) = \(\frac{9}{12}\)
So the answer is option D.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 606 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 606 Q5

Question 6.
Jonathan rode 1.05 miles on Friday, 1.5 miles on Saturday, 1.25 miles on Monday, and 1.1 miles on Tuesday. On which day did he ride the shortest distance?
Options:
a. Monday
b. Tuesday
c. Friday
d. Saturday

Answer: Friday

Explanation:

Jonathan rode 1.05 miles on Friday, 1.5 miles on Saturday, 1.25 miles on Monday, and 1.1 miles on Tuesday.
The shortest among all is 1.05 miles.
Therefore the answer is option C.

Page No. 609

Question 1.
Find the measure of the angle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 11
Through what fraction of a circle does the angle turn?
\(\frac{1}{3}=\frac{■}{360}\)
Think: 3 × 12 = 36, so 3 × _____ = 360.
So, the measure of the angle is _____.
_____ degrees

Answer: 120°

Explanation:

The fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
To measure the angle we have to multiply the fraction of the shaded angle with the total angle.
That means, \(\frac{1}{3}\) × 360
360/3 = 120 degrees.
Thus the angle of the shaded part is 120°

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 12
____ °

Answer: 45°

Explanation:

The fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{45}{360}\)
Multiply the fraction with the complete angle
\(\frac{45}{360}\) × 360° = 45°
Thus the angle of the above figure is 45°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 13
____ degrees

Answer: 30°

Explanation:

The figure shows the fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Multiply the fraction with the complete angle
\(\frac{1}{12}\) × 360° = 30°
Therefore the measure of the shaded angle is 30°

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 14
____ °

Answer: 360°

Explanation:

We observe that the circle is shaded completely.
\(\frac{360}{360}\) × 360° = 360°
Thus the above figure is the complete angle.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 15
____ °

Answer: 36°

Explanation:

The fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{10}\)
Multiply the fraction with the complete angle
\(\frac{1}{10}\) × 360° = 36°
Therefore the measure of the shaded angle is 36°

Classify the angle. Write acute, obtuse, right, or straight.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 609 Q6

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 609 Q7

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 609 Q8

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 19
_________

Answer: Straight

A straight angle is 180 degrees. A straight angle changes the direction to point the opposite way.

Question 10.
Is this an obtuse angle? Explain.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 20
Type below:
_________

Answer: Obtuse

An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees. However, A reflex angle measures more than 180 degrees but less than 360 degrees.

Question 11.
Alex cut a circular pizza into 8 equal slices. He removed 2 of the slices of pizza. What is the measure of the angle made by the missing slices of pizza?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 21
____ °

Answer: 90°

Explanation:

Alex cut a circular pizza into 8 equal slices.
He removed 2 of the slices of pizza.
The fraction of the missing slices = \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
The fraction of the missing slices is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
To know the angle we have to multiply the fraction with a complete angle i.e., 360°
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 360° = 90°
Thus the angle of the missing slices is 90°

Page No. 610

Question 12.
Ava started reading at 3:30 p.m. She stopped for a snack at 4:15 p.m. During this time, through what fraction of a circle did the minute hand turn? How many degrees did the minute hand turn?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 22
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I am asked to find the fraction of a circle did the minute hand turn and how many degrees did the minute hand turn

Question 12.
b. What information can you use to find the fraction of a circle through which the minute hand turned?
Type below:
_________

Answer: The fraction of a circle through which the minute hand turned \(\frac{3}{4}\) Clockwise.

Question 12.
c. How can you use the fraction of a circle through which the minute hand turned to find how many degrees it turned?
Type below:
_________

Answer:

The figure shows that the fraction of a circle through which the minute hand turned is \(\frac{3}{4}\) Clockwise.
Let the shaded part be x
And the nonshaded part is 90°
x + 90° = 360°
x = 360°- 90°
x = 270°
Therefore the minute hand turns 270° clockwise.

Question 12.
d. Show the steps to solve the problem.
Step 1:
\(\frac{3 × ■}{4 × ■}=\frac{?}{360}\)
Step 2:
\(\frac{3 × 90}{4 × 90}=\frac{■}{360}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
\(\frac{3 × 90}{4 × 90}=\frac{■}{360}\)
\(\frac{270}{360} = \frac{■}{360}\)
If the denominators are equal then the numerators must be equated.
■ = 270

Question 12.
e. Complete the sentences. From 3:30 p.m. to 4:15 p.m., the minute hand made a ______ turn clockwise. The minute hand turned ______ degrees.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
From 3:30 p.m. to 4:15 p.m., the minute hand made a \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn clockwise. The minute hand turned 270 degrees.

Question 13.
An angle represents \(\frac{1}{15}\) of a circle. Select the number to show how to find the measure of the angle in degrees.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 23
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 24
\(\frac{1}{15}=\frac{1 × □}{15 × □}=\frac{□}{360}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 24°
\(\frac{1}{15} × 360° = 24°

Common Core – New – Page No. 611

Degrees

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 25
Answer: 60°

Explanation:

Given that the fraction of the shaded angle is [latex]\frac{60}{360}\)
\(\frac{60}{360}\) × 360 = 60°
Thus the angle for the above figure is 60°

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 26
____ °

Answer: 180°

Explanation:

Half of the circle is shaded. The fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 360 = 360/2 = 180°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 27
____ °

Answer: 90°

Explanation:

The fraction of the shaded angle is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
To find the angle we need to multiply the fraction with the total angle.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 360° = 90°

Classify the angle. Write acute, obtuse, right, or straight.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 28
_________

Answer: Acute

Explanation:

25° < 90°
So, the above figure is an acute angle.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 29
_________

Answer: Obtuse

Explanation:

110° > 90°
So, the figure shown above is an obtuse angle.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 30
_________

Answer: Acute

Explanation:

60° < 90°
Acute angles measure less than 90 degrees. Thus the above angle is an acute angle.

Classify the triangle. Write acute, obtuse, or right.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 611 Q7

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 611 Q8

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 33
_________

Answer: Acute

Explanation:

50° is less than 90°
Thus the above triangle is an acute angle triangle.

Problem Solving

Ann started reading at 4:00 P.M. and finished at 4:20 P.M.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 34

Question 10.
Through what fraction of a circle did the minute hand turn?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) turn clockwise

Explanation:

The fraction of the shaded clock is \(\frac{12}{4}\)
\(\frac{12}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
The minute hand turn clockwise direction.
So, the answer is \(\frac{1}{3}\) turn clockwise

Question 11.
How many degrees did the minute hand turn?
____ °

Answer: 120°

Explanation:

The fraction of the minute hand turn is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × 360° = 120°
The minute hand turn 120°

Common Core – New – Page No. 612

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What kind of angle is shown?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 35
Options:
a. acute
b. obtuse
c. right
d. straight

Answer: straight

A straight angle is 180 degrees. This is a straight angle. A straight angle changes the direction to point the opposite way.
So, the answer is option D.

Question 2.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a circle?
Options:
a. 45°
b. 90°
c. 180°
d. 270°

Answer: 90°

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 360°
\(\frac{360}{4}\) = 90°
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mae bought 15 football cards and 18 baseball cards. She separated them into 3 equal groups. How many sports cards are in each group?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 11
d. 12

Answer: 11

Explanation:

Mae bought 15 football cards and 18 baseball cards.
She separated them into 3 equal groups.
Total number of cards = 15 + 18 = 33
33/3 = 11
There are 11 sports cards in each group.

Question 4.
Each part of a race is \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile long. Marsha finished 5 parts of the race. How far did Marsha race?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile
b. \(\frac{5}{12}\) mile
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile
d. 5 \(\frac{1}{10}\) miles

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile

Explanation:

Each part of a race is \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile long.
Marsha finished 5 parts of the race.
\(\frac{1}{10}\) × 5 = 5/10 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Jeff said his city got \(\frac{11}{3}\) inches of snow. Which shows this fraction written as a mixed number?
Options:
a. 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
b. 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
d. 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

Jeff said his city got \(\frac{11}{3}\) inches of snow.
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{11}{3}\) is 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
The correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
Amy ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile. Which decimal shows how many miles she ran?
Options:
a. 0.25 mile
b. 0.34 mile
c. 0.5 mile
d. 0.75 mile

Answer: 0.75 mile

Explanation:

Amy ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
The decimal form of \(\frac{75}{100}\) is 0.75
So, the answer is option D.

Page No. 615

Question 1.
Measure ∠ABC.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 36
Place the center of the protractor on point ____.
Align ray BC with ____ .
Read where ____ intersects the same scale.
So, m∠ABC is _____.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 65°

Use a protractor to find the angle measure.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 37
m∠ONM = ____ °

Answer: 55°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 38
m∠TSR = ____ °

Answer: 105°

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 4.
170°
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Go Math grade 4 chapter 11 angles answer key image_1

Question 5.
78°
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 11 Answer Key image_2

Use a protractor to find the angle measure.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 39
m∠QRS = ____ °

Answer: 90°

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 40
m∠XYZ = ____ °

Answer: 155°

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 8.
115°
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 5 Solution Key Angles image_3

Question 9.
67°
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Draw an example of each. Label the angle with its measure.

Question 10.
an acute angle
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 18

Question 11.
an obtuse angle
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 29

Question 12.
Elizabeth is making a quilt with scraps of fabric. What is the difference between m∠ABC and m∠DEF?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 41
____ °

Answer: 15°

Question 13.
Draw an angle with a measure of 0°.
Describe your drawing.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

HMH Go Math Grade 4 Key Chapter 11 image_4

Page No. 616

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 616 Q14
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 616 Q14.1

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 616 Q15

Question 16.
Choose the word or number to complete a true statement about ∠QRS.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 43
∠QRS is a(n) Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 44 angle that has a measure of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 45
Type below:
_________

Answer: ∠QRS is an obtuse angle that has a measure of 135°.

Earth’s Axis Earth revolves around the sun yearly. The Northern Hemisphere is the half of Earth that is north of the equator. The seasons of the year are due to the tilt of Earth’s axis.

Use the diagrams and a protractor for 17–18.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 46

Question 17.
In the Northern Hemisphere, Earth’s axis is tilted away from the sun on the first day of winter, which is often on December 21. What is the measure of the marked angle on the first day of winter, the shortest day of the year?
____ °

Answer: 115°

Explanation:

By seeing the above figure we can say that the angle is an obtuse angle. The mark is above 90° and the marked angle is 115°.
Therefore the measure of the marked angle on the first day of winter, the shortest day of the year is 115°.

Question 18.
Earth’s axis is not tilted away from or toward the sun on the first days of spring and fall, which are often on March 20 and September 22. What is the measure of the marked angle on the first day of spring or fall?
____ °

Answer: 90°

Explanation:

The mark is exactly 90°. So, the angle on the first day of spring or fall is 90°

Common Core – New – Page No. 617

Measure and Draw Angles

Use a protractor to find the angle measure.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 47
m∠ABC = 120°

By using the protractor we can measure the angle m∠ABC i.e., 120°

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 48
m∠MNP = ____ °

Answer: m∠MNP = 90°

By observing the above figure we can say that the angle of m∠MNP is 90°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 49
m∠RST = ____ °

Answer: m∠RST = 65°
By using the protractor we can measure m∠RST = 65°

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 4.
40°

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 image_5

Question 5.
170°

Answer:

Go Math grade 4 chapter 11 angles answer key image_1

Draw an example of each. Label the angle with its measure.

Question 6.
a right angle

Answer:

A right angle is an angle of exactly 90°

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 39

Question 7.
an acute angle

Answer:

The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 28

Problem Solving

The drawing shows the angles a stair tread makes with a support board along a wall. Use your protractor to measure the angles.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 50

Question 8.
What is the measure of ∠A?
____ °

Answer: 45°

By using the protractor we can measure the angle for A = 45°

Question 9.
What is the measure of ∠B?
____ °

Answer: 135°

The same process is used to measure ∠B = 135°

Common Core – New – Page No. 618

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the measure of ∠ABC?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 51
Options:
a. 15°
b. 25°
c. 155°
d. 165°

Answer: 15°

Explanation:

Step 1: Place the center point of the protractor on the point B.
Step 2: Align the 0° mark on the scale of the protractor with ray BC.
Step 3: Find the point where AC meet. Read the angle measure on that scale.
So, the measure of ∠ABC is 15°
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
What is the measure of ∠XYZ?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 52
Options:
a. 20°
b. 30°
c. 150°
d. 160°

Answer: 150°

Explanation:

Step 1: Place the center point of the protractor on the point Y.
Step 2: Align the 0° mark on the scale of the protractor with ray XY.
Step 3: Find the point where YZ meet. Read the angle measure on that scale.
So, ∠XYZ = 150°
Therefore the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 618 Q3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 618 Q4

Question 5.
Trisha drew the figure below. What figure did she draw?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 53
Options:
a. line segment ST
b. ray ST
c. ray TS
d. line TS

Answer: ray TS

A ray can be defined as a part of a line that has a fixed starting point but no endpoint.
Here the point starts from T and ends at S.
So, the figure Trisha drew is ray TS.
The correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Which describes the turn shown by the angle?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 54
Options:
a. 1 full turn clockwise
b. \(\frac{3}{4 }\) turn clockwise
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise
d. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise

Explanation:

The figure shows that the point turned \(\frac{1}{4}\) in clockwise direction.
So, the answer is option D.

Page No. 619

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 55

Question 1.
The unit used to measure an angle is called a ________.
________

Answer: The unit used to measure an angle is called a degree.

Question 2.
________ is the opposite of the direction in which the hands of a clock move.
________

Answer: Counterclockwise is the opposite of the direction in which the hands of a clock move.

Question 3.
A ________ is a tool for measuring the size of an angle.
________

Answer: A protractor is a tool for measuring the size of an angle.

Tell whether the angle on the circle shows a \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{3}{4}\), or 1 full turn clockwise or counterclockwise.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 56
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise
The figure shows that the angle turn \(\frac{1}{4}\) in the clockwise direction.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 57
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn counterclockwise
From the above figure, we can see that the angle turn \(\frac{1}{2}\) in the counterclockwise direction.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 58
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn clockwise
The figure shows that the angle turn \(\frac{3}{4}\) in the clockwise direction.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 59
____

Answer: \(\frac{1}{1}\) or 1 turn counterclockwise
From the above figure, we can see that the angle turn \(\frac{1}{1}\) or 1 in the counterclockwise direction.

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 60
____ °

Answer: 100°

\(\frac{100}{360}\) × 360° = 100°

Question 9.
____ °

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 10.
75°
Type below:
________

HMH Go Math Key Chapter 11 Angles Image_6

Question 11.
127°
Type below:
________

Chapter 11 Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Angles Image_7

Page No. 620

Question 12.
Phillip watched a beach volleyball game from 1:45 p.m. to 2:00 p.m. How many degrees did the minute hand turn?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 61
____ °

Answer: 90°

Explanation:

Phillip watched a beach volleyball game from 1:45 p.m. to 2:00 p.m.
The minute hand turned for 15 minutes.
That means \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise.
Complete angle = 360°
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 360° = 360°/4 = 90°
Therefore the minute hand turn 90°

Question 13.
What angle does this piece of pie form?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 62
____ °

Answer: 180°

From the above figure, we can see that half of the pie is completed.
Complete angle = 360°
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 360°
= 180°
The angle for the piece of pie form is 180°

Question 14.
What is m∠CBT? Use a protractor to help you.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 63
____ °

Answer: 60°

By using the protractor we can say that the angle for the above figure is 60°

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 620 Q15
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 620 Q15.1

Page No. 623

Add to find the measure of the angle. Write an equation to record your work.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 64
∠PQT = ____ °

Answer: 80°

To find the ∠PQT you have to add 43° and 37°
∠PQT = 43° + 37°
∠PQT = 80°

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 65
∠JKL = ____ °

Answer: 100°
Let ∠JKL = x°
∠JKL = 90° + 10°
∠JKL = 100°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 66
∠RHT = ____ °

Answer:
Let ∠RHT = x°
x = 55° + 27° + 78°
x = 160°
Therefore ∠RHT = 160°

Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle. Label each angle with its measure.
Write the sum of the angle measures as an equation.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 67
Type below:
________

Answer:

By using the protractor we can measure the angles of the above figures.
m∠KLM = 160°
m∠KLJ = 80°
m∠LMJ = 120°

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 68
Type below:
________

Answer:

By using the protractor we can measure the angles of the above figures.

m∠WVZ = 90°
m∠YVZ = 90°
m∠WVX = 140°
m∠YVX = 40°

Question 6.
Use Diagrams What is m∠QRT?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 69
∠QRT = ____ °

Answer: 20°

The above figure is a straight angle.
∠QRT + ∠LRD + ∠RLT = 180
∠QRT + 75° + 85° = 180°
∠QRT + 160° = 180°
∠QRT = 180°- 160°
∠QRT = 20°

Question 7.
Look back at Exercise 1. Suppose you joined an angle measuring 10° to ∠PQT. Draw the new angle, showing all three parts. What type of angle is formed?
Type below:
________

Page No. 624

Question 8.
Stephanie, Kay, and Shane each ate an equal-sized piece of a pizza. The measure of the angle of each piece was 45°. When the pieces were together, what is the measure of the angle they formed?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 70
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
________

Answer: What is the measure of the angle for the pizza leftover?

Question 8.
b. What information do you need to use?
Type below:
________

Answer: I need the information about the angle for each piece of pizza.

Question 8.
c. Tell how you can use addition to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer:
The measure of the angle of each piece was 45°
There are 3 pieces of pizza = 45° + 45° + 45° = 135°

Question 8.
d. Complete the sentence. The three pieces of pizza formed a _________ angle.
________

Answer: Obtuse angle

Question 9.
What is the measure of ∠XZW?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 71
____ °

Answer: 113°

Explanation:

∠XZW = ∠XZY + ∠YZW
∠XZY = 42°
∠YZW = 71°
∠XZW = 42° + 71°
∠XZW = 113°

Question 10.
What is m∠PRS? Use equations to explain and check your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 72
____ °

Answer: 12°

Explanation:

The above figure is a straight angle.
The sum of the three angles must be equal to 180°
m∠PRS + m∠PRN + m∠TRN = 180°
m∠PRS + 90° + 78° = 180°
m∠PRS = 180° – 90° – 78°
m∠PRS = 12°

Common Core – New – Page No. 625

Join and Separate Angles

Add to find the measure of the angle. Write an equation to record your work.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 73
50°+75° = 125°
m∠ABD = 125°

Explanation:

m∠ABC = 50°
m∠CBD = 75°
To find the measure of m∠ABD we have to add m∠ABC and m∠CBD
m∠ABD = 50°+75°
m∠ABD = 125°

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 74
____ ° + ____ ° = ____ ° ;   m∠FGJ = ____ °

Answer: 140° + 20° = 160°
m∠FGJ = 160°

Explanation:

m∠FGH = 140°
m∠JGH = 20°
To find the measure of m∠FGJ we need to add m∠FGH and m∠JGH
m∠FGJ = 140° + 20°
m∠FGJ = 160°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 75
____ ° + ____ ° = ____ ° ; m∠KLN = ____ °

Answer: 30° + 90° + 45° = 165°
m∠KLN = 165°

Explanation:

m∠KLM = 30°
m∠MLP = 90°
m∠PLN = 45°
To find the measure of m∠KLN we need to add m∠KLM, m∠MLP and m∠PLN
m∠KLN = 30° + 90° + 45° = 165°
m∠KLN = 165°

Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 76

Question 4.
m∠ABC = ____ °

Answer: 115°

Question 5.
m∠DBE = ____ °

Answer: 90°

Question 6.
m∠CBD = ____ °

Answer: 75°

Question 7.
m∠EBA = ____ °

Answer: 80°

Question 8.
Write the sum of the angle measures as an equation.
____ ° + ____ ° + ____ ° + ____ ° = ____ °

Answer:

Sum all the angles = m∠DBE + m∠ABC + m∠CBD + m∠EBA
= 115° + 90° + 75° + 80° = 360°

Problem Solving
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 77

Question 9.
Ned made the design at the right. Use a protractor. Find and write the measure of each of the 3 angles.
____ ° ; ____ ° ; ____ ° ;

Answer: 50°; 60°; 70°

The above figure is a straight angle.
By using the protractor we can measure the angles of the above figure.
The angle of above 3 shades is 50°; 60°; 70°

Question 10.
Write an equation to find the measure of the total angle.
____ ° + ____ ° + ____ ° = ____ °

Answer: Sum of three angles = 50° + 60° + 70° = 180°

Common Core – New – Page No. 626

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the measure of m∠WXZ?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 78
Options:
a. 32°
b. 83°
c. 88°
d. 97°

Answer: 83°

Explanation:

m∠WXZ = m∠WXY + m∠YXZ
Let m∠WXZ be x°
x° = 58° + 25°
x° = 83°
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Which equation can you use to find the m∠MNQ?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 79
Options:
a. 148° – 24° = ■
b. 148° × 24° = ■
c. 148° ÷ 24° = ■
d. 148° + 24° = ■

Answer: 148° + 24° = ■

Explanation:

To measure the unknown angle we need to add both the angles
m∠MNQ = m∠MNP + m∠PNQ
■ = 148° + 24°
So, the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 626 Q3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 626 Q4

Question 5.
Ron drew a quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides of the same length. Which best describes the figure he drew?
Options:
a. square
b. rhombus
c. trapezoid
d. parallelogram

Answer: square

Explanation:

A square has got 4 sides of equal length and 4 right angles (right angle = 90 degrees).
So, the answer is option A.

Question 6.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through \(\frac{3}{4}\) of a circle?
Options:
a. 45°
b. 90°
c. 180°
d. 270°

Answer: 270°

Explanation:

Complete angle = 360°
To measure the angle that turns through is \(\frac{3}{4}\)
multiply \(\frac{3}{4}\) with 360°
360° × \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 270°
So, the answer is option D.

Page No. 629

Question 1.
Laura cuts a square out of scrap paper as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over?
First, draw a bar model to represent the problem.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 80

Type below:
_________

Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 11 Answer Key image_11

Question 1.
Next, write the equation you need to solve.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

m∠MNQ + m∠QNP = m∠MNP
x + 90° = 115°
x = 115° – 90°

Question 1.
Last, find the angle measure of the piece left over.
m∠MNQ =
So, the angle measure of the piece left over is _____.
____ °

Answer:
x + 90° = 115°
x = 115° – 90°
x = 25°
So, the angle measure of the piece left over is 25°

Question 2.
Jackie trimmed a piece of scrap metal to make a straight edge as shown. What is the measure of the piece she trimmed off?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 81
x = ____ °

Answer:
x + 180° = 225°
x = 225°- 180°
x = 45°
Thus the measure of the piece she trimmed off is 45°

Question 3.
What if Laura cut a smaller square as shown? Would m∠MNQ be different? Explain.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 82
Type below:
_________

Answer: No
m∠MNQ would still be 25°. Only the size of the square changed the angle will be the same.
m∠PNQ and m∠MNP did not change.

Question 4.
The map shows Marco’s paper route. When Marco turns right onto Center Street from Main Street, what degree turn does he make? Hint: Draw a dashed line to extend Oak Street to form a 180° angle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 83

Answer:

x° + 125° + 180° = 360°
x° = 360° – 125° – 180°
x° = 360° – 215°
x° = 145°

Page No. 630

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 630 Q5

Question 6.
Pose a Problem Look back at Problem 5. Write a similar problem about two angles that form a right angle.
____ °

Answer: Two angles form a right angle. The measure of one angle is 25°. What is the measure of the other angle?
x + 25° = 90°
x °= 90° – 25°
x° = 65°
The measure of other angle is 65°

Question 7.
Sam paid $20 for two T-shirts. The price of each T-shirt was a multiple of 5. What are the possible prices of the T-shirts?
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Sam paid $20 for two T-shirts.
The price of each T-shirt was a multiple of 5.
$20 – 2 T-shirts
x – 1 T-shirt
x = $10
The possible prices of the T-shirts are $10, $10
Another possible price of the T-shirts are $5, $15

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 630 Q8

Question 9.
What’s the Question? It measures greater than 0° and less than 90°.
Type below:
_________

Answer: What is an acute angle?

Question 10.
Two angles, ∠A and ∠B, form a straight angle. ∠A measures 65°. For numbers 10a–10c, select True or False for the statement.
a. ∠B is an acute angle.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

Two angles, ∠A and ∠B, form a straight angle. ∠A measures 65°.
65° + ∠B = 180°
∠B = 180° – 65°
∠B = 115°
115° is not an acute angle.
So, the above statement is false.

Question 10.
b. The equation 180° – 65° = x° can be used to find the measure of ∠B.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Question 10.
c. The measure of ∠B is 125°.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

65° + ∠B = 180°
∠B = 180° – 65°
∠B = 115°
So, the above statement is false.

Common Core – New – Page No. 631

Problem Solving Unknown Angle Measures

Solve each problem. Draw a diagram to help.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 84
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 85

Question 2.
An artist is cutting a piece of metal as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 86
x = ____ °

Answer: 95°

x + 130° = 225°
x = 225° – 130°
x = 95°
Therefore the angle of the piece leftover is 95°.

Question 3.
Joan has a piece of material for making a costume. She needs to cut it as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 87
x = ____ °

Answer: 50°

Joan has a piece of material for making a costume. She needs to cut it as shown.
By seeing the above figure we can say that it is a right angle.|
The sum of two must be equal to 90°
Let the unknown angle be x
x + 40° = 90°
x = 90° – 40°
x = 50°
Thue the angle measure of the piece leftover is 50°

Common Core – New – Page No. 632

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Angelo cuts a triangle from a sheet of paper as shown. What is the measure of ∠x in the triangle?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 88
Options:
a. 15°
b. 25°
c. 75°
d. 105°

Answer: 15°

Explanation:

The above figure is a right angle.
So, to measure the ∠x we have to subtract 75° from 90°
∠x + 75° = 90°
∠x = 90° – 75°
∠x = 15°
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
Cindy cuts a piece of wood as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 89
Options:
a. 30°
b. 90°
c. 120°
d. 150°

Answer: 120°

Explanation:

x + 90° = 210°
x = 210° – 90°
x = 120°
120° is the measure of the piece leftover.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Tyronne worked 21 days last month. He earned $79 each day. How much did Tyronne earn last month?
Options:
a. $869
b. $948
c. $1,659
d. $2,169

Answer: $1,659

Explanation:

Tyronne worked 21 days last month.
He earned $79 each day.
$79 × 21 = 1659
Thus Tyronne earned $1,659 last month.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Meg inline skated for \(\frac{7}{10}\) mile. Which shows this distance written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 0.07 mile
b. 0.1 mile
c. 0.7 mile
d. 7.1 miles

Answer: 0.7 mile

Explanation:

Meg inline skated for \(\frac{7}{10}\) mile.
The decimal of the fraction \(\frac{7}{10}\) is 0.7
So, the answer is option C.

Question 5.
Kerry ran 34 mile. Sherrie ran \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile. Marcie ran \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile. Which list orders the friends from least to greatest distance
run?
Options:
a. Kerry, Sherrie, Marcie
b. Kerry, Marcie, Sherrie
c. Sherrie, Kerry, Marcie
d. Sherrie, Marcie, Kerry

Answer: Sherrie, Marcie, Kerry

Explanation:

Kerry ran 34 miles. Sherrie ran \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile. Marcie ran \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile.
The order of the above fractions is Sherrie ran \(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\), 34
The distance from least to greatest is Sherrie, Marcie, Kerry.
so, the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
What is the measure of m∠ABC?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - New img 90
Options:
a. 32°
b. 84°
c. 88°
d. 94°

Answer: 84°

Explanation:

m∠ABC = m∠ABD + m∠DBC
m∠ABC = 58° + 26°
m∠ABC = 84°
So, the correct answer is option B.

Page No. 633

Question 1.
An angle represents \(\frac{1}{12}\) of a circle. Use the numbers to show how to find the measure of the angle in degrees.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 91
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 92
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 93
The angle measure is ____ °

Answer: 30°
\(\frac{1}{12}\) × \(\frac{30}{30}\) = \(\frac{30}{360}\)
Thus the angle measure is 30°

Question 2.
Match the measure of each ∠C with the measure of ∠D that forms a straight angle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 94
Type below:
_________

i. 122° + 58° = 180°
ii. 35° + 145° = 180°
iii. 62° + 118° = 180°
iv. 105° + 75° = 180°

Question 3.
Katie drew an obtuse angle. Which could be the measure of the angle she drew? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 35°
b. 157°
c. 180°
d. 92°

Answer: 157° and 92°
An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees.
From the above options, B and D are more than 90°
So, the answer is option B and D.

Question 4.
Draw an angle that represents a \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise on the circle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 95
Type below:
_________

Go Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 solution image_8

Page No. 634

Question 5.
Renee drew the figure shown. For 5a–5c, select Yes or No to tell whether the statement is true.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 96
a. The measure of a straight angle is 180°.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

By seeing the above figure we can say that the angle is a straight angle.
So, the above statement is true.

Question 5.
b. To find the measure of x, Renee can subtract 75° from 180°.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

To know the value of x we have to subtract 75° from 180°.
x = 180° – 75°
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 5.
c. The measure of x is 115°.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No
x = 180° – 75°
x = 105°
Thus the above statement is false.
So, the answer is no.

Question 6.
Trey drew this figure with a protractor.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 97
Part A
Write an equation that can be used to find m∠KFG.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 55° + 80° + x = 180°

The figure is a straight angle.
So, the sum of the three angles must be equal to 180°
Let m∠KFG = x
55° + 80° + x = 180°

Question 6.
Part B
What is the measure of m∠KFG? Describe how you solved the equation and how you can check your answer.
____ °
Explain:
_________

Answer: 45°

Explanation:

55° + 80° + x = 180°
x = 180° – 80° – 55°
x = 45°

Question 7.
Use a protractor to find the measure of the angle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 98
The angle measures ____ °

Answer: 40°
By using a protractor we can measure the angle.
The angle of the above figure is 40°

Page No. 635

Question 8.
Alex drew this angle on the circle. Which describes the angle? Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 99
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn
b. clockwise
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn
d. counterclockwise

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn

The above figure shows that it is straight angle. So, the fraction of the circle is \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn.
The correct answer is option C.

Question 9.
Miles has a piece of paper that is \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a large circle. He cuts the paper into three equal parts from the center point of the circle. What is the angle measure of each part?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 100
The angle measure is ____ °

Answer: 30°

Explanation:

Miles has a piece of paper that is \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a large circle. He cuts the paper into three equal parts from the center point of the circle.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) of a large circle = 90°
Given that he cut into 3 equal parts = \(\frac{90}{3}\) = 30°
So, the angle for each part is 30°

Question 10.
Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle. Write each angle and its measure in a box ordered by the measure of the angles from least to greatest.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 101
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 102

Answer:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Angles-solution-img-9

Question 11.
Use the numbers and symbols to write an equation that can be used to find the measure of the unknown angle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 103
What is the measure of the unknown angle?
____ °

Answer: 57°

Explanation:

Let the unknown angle be x
It is a straight angle.
The sum of three angles = 180°
90° + 33° + x = 180°
x = 180° – 90° – 33°
x = 57°

Page No. 636

Question 12.
Choose the word or number to complete a true statement about m∠JKL.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 104
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 105
m∠JKL is a(n) ______ angle that has a measure of ____ °.

Answer: m∠JKL is an Obtuse angle that has a measure of 120°.

Question 13.
Vince began practicing piano at 5:15 p.m. He stopped at 5:35 p.m. How many degrees did the minute hand turn during Vince’s practice time?
Explain how you found your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 106
____ °
Explain:
_________

Answer: 120°

I shaded the part of the clock that the minute hand-turned from 5:15 p.m. to 5:35 p.m. and found that it is \(\frac{1}{3}\) of the circle.
Next, I multiplied \(\frac{1}{3}\) × 360° = 120°
Thus the minute hand moved 120°

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 636 Q14

Question 15.
Write the letter for each angle measure in the correct box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 107
Type below:
__________

Answer:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Angles-solution-img-10

Page No. 637

Question 16.
For numbers 16a–16b, select the fraction that makes a true statement about the figure.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 108

Question 16.
a. The angle in Figure 1 represents a Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 109 turn.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) turn

Answer: The angle in Figure 1 represents a \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn

The above figure shows that \(\frac{3}{4}\) part of the circle is shaded. So, the angle represents \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn.

Question 16.
b. The angle in Figure 2 represents a Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 110 turn.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) turn

Answer: The angle in Figure 2 represents a \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn.
From the second figure, we observe that half of the circle is shaded. So, The angle in Figure 2 represents a \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn.

Question 17.
Melanie cuts a rectangle out of a piece of scrap paper as shown. She wants to calculate the angle measure of the piece that is left over.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 111
Part A
Draw a bar model to represent the problem.

Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 11 Answer Key Angles Image_7

Question 17.
Part B
Write and solve an equation to find x.
The angle measures ____ °.

Answer: 36°
m∠RST = 90°
m∠RSN = 126°
m∠TSN = x°
x + 90° = 126°
x = 126° – 90°
x = 36°
m∠TSN = 36°

Page No. 638

Question 18.
Two angles, m∠A and m∠B, form a right angle. m∠A measures 32°.
For numbers, 18a–18c, select True or False for the statement.
a. m∠B is an acute angle.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

If the sum of two angles is 90°, if one angle is acute then the other angle will be acute.
So, the above statement is true.

Question 18.
b. The equation 180° − 32° = x° can be used to find the measure of m∠B.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

Given that the sum of 2 angles is 90°
The sum of m∠A and m∠B = 90°
90° – 32° = x°
So, the above statement is false.

Question 18.
c. The measure of m∠B is 58°.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

Let m∠B = x
x° + 32° = 90°
x = 90 – 32
x = 58°.
So, the above statement is true.

Question 19.
A circle is divided into parts. Which sum could represent the angle measures that make up the circle? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 120° + 120° + 120° + 120°
b. 25° + 40° + 80° + 105° + 110°
c. 33° + 82° + 111° + 50° + 84°
d. 40° + 53° + 72° + 81° + 90° + 34°

Answer: 25° + 40° + 80° + 105° + 110°; 33° + 82° + 111° + 50° + 84°

Explanation:

The sum of all the angles must be equal to 360°
i. 120° + 120° + 120° + 120° = 480° ≠ 360°
ii. 25° + 40° + 80° + 105° + 110° = 360°
iii. 33° + 82° + 111° + 50° + 84° = 360°
iv. 40° + 53° + 72° + 81° + 90° + 34° = 370° ≠ 360°
So, the correct answers are option B, C.

Question 20.
Use a protractor to find the measures of the unknown angles.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 112
What do you notice about the measures of the unknown angles? Is this what you would have expected? Explain your reasoning.
m∠x = ____ ° m∠y = ____ °

Answer: m∠x = 70°; m∠y = 110°
By using a protractor we can find the measure of m∠y
m∠y = 110°
Let m∠x = x°
Sum of supplementary angles = 180°
110° + x = 180°
x = 180° – 110°
x = 70°
Therefore m∠x = 70°

Page No. 643

Use benchmarks to choose the metric unit you would use to measure each.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 113

Question 1.
mass of a strawberry
__________

Answer: gram
The metric unit used to measure the mass of a strawberry is the gram.

Question 2.
length of a cell phone
__________

Answer: Centimeter
The metric unit used to measure the length of a cell phone is Centimeter.

Circle the better estimate.

Question 3.
width of a teacher’s desk
10 meters or 1 meter
__________

Answer: 1 meter
The estimation of the width of the teacher’s desk is 1 meter.

Question 4.
the amount of liquid a punch bowl holds
2 liters or 20 liters
__________

Answer: 2 liters

20 liters is greater than 2 liters.
The estimation of the amount of liquid a punch bowl holds is 2 liters.

Question 5.
distance between Seattle and San Francisco
6 miles or 680 miles
__________

Answer: 680 miles
The distance between Seattle and San Francisco is 680 miles.

Use benchmarks to choose the customary unit you would use to measure each.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 114

Question 6.
length of a football field
__________

Answer: Yard
The units to measure the length of a football field is Yards.

Question 7.
weight of a pumpkin
__________

Answer: Pound
The customary unit I use to measure the weight of a pumpkin is pounds.

Circle the better estimate.

Question 8.
weight of a watermelon
4 pounds or 4 ounces
__________

Answer: 4 pounds
The estimation of the weight of watermelon is 4 pounds.

Question 9.
the amount of liquid a fish tank holds
10 cups or 10 gallons
__________

Answer: 10 gallons
The estimation of the amount of liquid a fish tank holds is 10 gallons.

Complete the sentence. Write more or less.

Question 10.
Matthew’s large dog weighs ________ than one ton.
________

Answer: Less
1 ton = 1000 kgs
The weight of dogs can’t be more than a ton.
So, Matthew’s large dog weighs less than one ton.

Question 11.
The amount of liquid a sink can hold is _______ than one cup of water.
________

Answer: More
1 cup holds very less amount of water.
So, The amount of liquid a sink can hold is more than one cup of water.

Question 12.
A paper clip has a mass of _______ than one kilogram.
________

Answer: Less

The weight of a paper clip is about 1 gram.
So, A paper clip has a mass of less than one kilogram.

Page No. 644

For 13–15, use benchmarks to explain your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 115

Question 13.
Cristina is making macaroni and cheese for her family. Would Cristina use 1 pound of macaroni or 1 ounce of macaroni?
__________

Answer: Cristina should use 1 pound of macaroni.

Question 14.
Which is the better estimate for the length of a kitchen table, 200 centimeters or 200 meters?
__________

Answer: 200 centimeters

Centimeters are less than meters. The length of the kitchen will be measured in centimeters.
So, the answer is 200 centimeters.

Question 15.
Jodi wants to weigh her cat and measure its standing height. Which two units should she use?
weight: ________
height: ________

Answer:
The weight of the cat should be measured in Kilograms.
The height of the cat should be measured in Centimeters.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles Page 644 Q16

Question 17.
Select the correct word to complete the sentence. Justine is thirsty after running two miles.
She should Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 11 Angles img 116 of water.
__________

Answer: 1 pint

The suitable word for the above sentence is the pint. Pint is a measure for liquid equal to about half a liter. There are eight pints in a gallon.

Conclusion

Hoping that the data provided here has shed some light on the students of grade 4. If teachers & parents want to make their kids learn all angles concepts properly then make sure they refer to these Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 11 Angles Answer Key. Need any assistance then check our other articles such as HMH Go Math 4th Grade Chapter 11 Homework Practice FL Angles.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions

go-math-grade-4-answer-key-chapter-7-add-and-subtract-fractions

One of the best study guides for grade 4 students is Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions. Make use of these pdf formatted chapter 7 Go Math HMH 4th Grade Answer Key for free and learn the topics efficiently. Download the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions pdf from here and get the step-wise answers to all the questions. From this page, you’ll find the different possible models & techniques that students use to find the correct way to solve the fractions.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions

Approaching the best ways will make you understand the concepts of adding and subtracting fractions. Master in the Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions by using the clear cut explanation for all the questions with images. Obtain the knowledge to write the fractions as sum and subtractions from Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key of Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions.

Lesson: 1 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 2 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 3 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 4 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 5 – Add Fractions Using Models

Lesson: 6 – Subtract Fractions Using Models

Lesson: 7 – Subtract Fractions Using Models

Lesson: 8 – Add and Subtract Fractions

Lesson: 9 – Add and Subtract Fractions

Lesson: 10 – Add and Subtract Fractions

Lesson: 11 – Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 12 – Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 13 – Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 14 – Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 15 – Record Subtraction with Renaming

Lesson: 16 – Record Subtraction with Renaming

Lesson: 17 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 18 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 19 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 20 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 21 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 22 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 389

Use the model to write an equation.

Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 1

Answer: 3/8 + 2/8 = 5/8

Explanation:
By seeing the above 3 figures we can say that the fraction of the shaded part of the first circle is 3/8, the fraction of the second figure is 2/8
By adding the 2 fractions we get the fraction of the third circle.
3/8 + 2/8 = 5/8

Question 2:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 2

Answer: 4/5 – 3/5 = 1/5

Explanation:
The fraction of the shaded part for the above rectangle is 4/5
The fraction of the box is 3/5
The equation for the above figure is 4/5 – 3/5 = 1/5

Question 3:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 3

Answer: 1/4 + 2/4 = 3/4

Explanation:
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of first figure is 1/4
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of second figure is 1/4
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of third figure is 3/4
So, The equation for the above figure is 1/4 + 2/4 = 3/4

Question 4:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 4

\(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \)

Explanation:
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of first figure is 2/6
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of second figure is 3/6
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of third figure is 5/6
So, The equation for the above figure is \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \)

Question 5:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 5

\(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } -\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } -\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Explanation:
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of the figure is 3/5
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of the closed box is 2/5
So, The equation for the above figure is \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } -\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Q6

Question 7:
Kate ate \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) of her orange. Ben ate \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) of his banana. Did Kate and Ben eat \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } +\frac { 2}{ 4 } =\frac { 3}{ 4 } \) of their fruit?

Answer: No, one whole refers to orange and the other whole to a banana.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 390

Question 1:
A whole pie is cut into 8 equal slices. Three of the slices are served. How much of the pie is left?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 5 }{ 8} \)
(d)\(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 5 }{ 8} \)

Explanation:
Given,
A whole pie is cut into 8 equal slices. Three of the slices are served.
The fraction of 8 slices is 8/8.
Out of which 3/8 are served.
8/8 – 3/8 = 5/8
Therefore \(\frac { 5 }{ 8} \) of the pie is left.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2:
An orange is divided into 6 equal wedges. Jody eats 1 wedge. Then she eats 3 more wedges. How much of the orange did Jody eat?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 6} \)
(b) \(\frac { 4}{ 6 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 5}{ 6 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 6}{ 6} \)

Answer: \(\frac { 4}{ 6 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
An orange is divided into 6 equal wedges.
Jody eats 1 wedge.
Then she eats 3 more wedges.
The fraction of orange that Jody eat is \(\frac { 4}{ 6 } \).
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 3:
Which list of distances is in order from least to greatest?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8} \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile
(d)\(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile

Answer: \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile

Explantion:
Compare the three fractions 1/8, 3/4 and 3/16
Make the common denominators.
1/8 × 2/2 = 2/16
3/4 × 4/4 = 12/16
The fractions are 2/16, 12/16 and 3/16
The numerator with the highest number will be the greatest.
The fractions from least to greatest is \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
Jeremy walked 6/8 of the way to school and ran the rest of the way. What fraction, in simplest form, shows the part of the way that Jeremy walked?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2} \)
(d)\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Jeremy walked 6/8 of the way to school and ran the rest of the way.
The simplest form of 6/8 is 3/8.
The simplest form of part of the way that Jeremy walked is 3/8.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5:
An elevator starts on the 100th floor of a building. It descends 4 floors every 10 seconds. At what floor will the elevator be 60 seconds after it starts?
(a) 60th floor
(b) 66th floor
(c) 72nd floor
(d) 76th floor

Answer: 76th floor

Explanation:
Given,
An elevator starts on the 100th floor of a building.
It descends 4 floors every 10 seconds.
4 floors – 10 seconds
? – 60 seconds
60 × 4/10 = 240/10 = 24 floors
100 – 24 = 76th floor
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6:
For a school play, the teacher asked the class to set up chairs in 20 rows with 25 chairs in each row. After setting up all the chairs, they were 5 chairs short. How many chairs did the class set up?
(a) 400
(b) 450
(c) 495
(d) 500

Answer: 495

Explanation:
Given,
For a school play, the teacher asked the class to set up chairs in 20 rows with 25 chairs in each row.
After setting up all the chairs, they were 5 chairs short.
20 × 25 = 500
500 – 5 = 495
Therefore the class set up 495 chairs.
Thus the correct answer is c.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 393

Question 1:
Write \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 }\) as a sum of unit fractions.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Question 1
\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 3/4 is 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 3/4 is 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4.

Write the fraction as a sum of unit fractions.
Question 2:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Question 2
\(\frac { 5 }{ 6 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 5/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 5/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Question 3:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Question 3
\(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 2/3 is 1/3 + 1/3.

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 2/3 is 1/3 + 1/3.

Question 4:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 4/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 4/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Q6

Question 7:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 6 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 6/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 6/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Question 8:
Compare Representations How many different ways can you write a fraction that has a numerator of 2 as a sum of fractions? Explain.

Answer:
Let’s say we have the fraction 2/9.
We can split this one fraction into two by modifying the numerator, like so: 2/9 = 1/9 + 1/9
This works because since both fractions have a numerator of 9, you can easily add the numerators to give 2, and that will give 2/9 in return. However, you can’t separate the denominators.
2/9 is not equal to 2/6 + 2/3
2/9 = 1/9 + 1/9
2/9 = 0.5/9 + 1.5/9 (which simplifies to 1/18 + 3/18, also giving 2/9)
2/9 = 0.5/9 + 0.5/9 + 0.5/9 + 0.5/9 = 1/18 + 1/18 + 1/18 + 1/18
I basically split it up into more and more fractions that add up to give 2/9. So, in short, there are infinitely many ways to do it.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 394

Question 9:
Holly’s garden is divided into 5 equal sections. She will fence the garden into 3 areas by grouping some equal sections together. What part of the garden could each fenced area be?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 394 Question 9
a. What information do you need to use?

Answer:
We need the information about the equal sections and fence the garden into 3 areas by grouping some equal sections together.

b. How can writing an equation help you solve the problem?

Answer: The equation helps to find what part of the garden could each fenced area be.

Explanation:
If you write an equation with 3 addends whose sum is 5/5, you could find the possible sizes of each fenced area. The size of each section is 1/5. Each addend represents the size of a fenced area.

c. How can drawing a model help you write an equation?

Answer: If you draw a model that shows 5 fifth-size parts representing the sections, you can see how to group the parts into 3 areas in different ways.

d. Show how you can solve the problem.

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 img_1

Question 9:
Complete the sentence.
The garden can be fenced into ______, ______, and ______ parts or ______, ______, and ______ parts.

Answer: 3/5, 1/5 and 1/5 parts or 2/5, 2/5 and 1/5 parts

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 395

Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 394 Question 1
Answer: 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 4/5 is 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5.

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 8 }= \)

Answer: 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 3/8 is 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8

Question 3:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 12 }= \)

Answer: 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 6/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Question 4:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 4 }= \)

Answer: 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 4/4 is 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4

Question 5:
\(\frac { 7 }{ 10 }= \)

Answer: 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 7/10 is 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10

Question 6:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 6 } =\)

Answer: 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 6/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Question 7:
Miguel’s teacher asks him to color \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 }\) of his grid. He must use 3 colors: red, blue, and green. There must be more green sections than red sections. How can Miguel color the sections of his grid to follow all the rules?

Answer: 1/8 red, 1/8 blue, and 2/8 green

Explanation:
If there are 8 tiles, coloring \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 }\) means coloring 4 tiles. Using those three colors, we could use each 1 time with 1 leftover. Since we must have more green, we would use it twice; this would give us 2 green, 1 red and 1 blue.
Since the grid is not necessarily 8 squares, we must account for this by saying 2/8 green, 1/8 red, and 1/8 blue.

Question 8:
Petra is asked to color \(\frac { 6 }{ 6 }\) of her grid. She must use 3 colors: blue, red, and pink. There must be more blue sections than red sections or pink sections. What are the different ways Petra can color the sections of her grid and follow all the rules?

Answer: 3/6 blue, 2/6 red, 1/6 pink

Explanation:
1. 3 blues, 2 red, 1 pink.
2. 3 blues, 2 pink, 1 red.
3. 4 blues, 1 red, 1 pink
The different ways in which Petra can color the sections of her grid and follow the rules are;
1. 3 blues, 2 red, 1 pink.
2. 3 blues, 2 pink, 1 red.
3. 4 blues, 1 red, 1 pink
All these three ways follows the rules that; there must be three colors an also Blue sections are more than red sections or pink sections.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 396

Question 1:
Jorge wants to write \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) as a sum of unit fractions. Which of the following should he write?
(a) \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 }+\frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Jorge wants to write \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) as a sum of unit fractions.
The sum of the unit fraction for \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) is \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2:
Which expression is equivalent to \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \) ?
(a) \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8}+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } +\frac {3 }{ 8 } +\frac { 1 }{ 8 } +\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)

Explanation:
The fraction equivalent to \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \) is \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \).
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 3:
An apple is cut into 6 equal slices. Nancy eats 2 of the slices. What fraction of the apple is left?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 6 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
An apple is cut into 6 equal slices. Nancy eats 2 of the slices.
6 – 2 = 4
\(\frac { 6 }{ 6 } \) – \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
Which of the following numbers is a prime number?
(a) 1
(b) 11
(c) 21
(d) 51

Answer: 11

Explanation:
A prime number is a natural number greater than 1 that is not a product of two smaller natural numbers.
11 is a multiple of 1 and itself.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5:
A teacher has a bag of 100 unit cubes. She gives an equal number of cubes to each of the 7 groups in her class. She gives each group as many cubes as she can. How many unit cubes are left over?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 6

Answer: 2

Explanation:
Given,
A teacher has a bag of 100 unit cubes. She gives an equal number of cubes to each of the 7 groups in her class.
She gives each group as many cubes as she can.
100 divided by 7 is 14 r 2, so there are 2 leftover.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6:
Jessie sorted the coins in her bank. She made 7 stacks of 6 dimes and 8 stacks of 5 nickels. She then found 1 dime and 1 nickel. How many dimes and nickels does Jessie have in all?
(a) 84
(b) 82
(c) 80
(d) 28

Answer: 84

Explanation:
Given,
Jessie sorted the coins in her bank. She made 7 stacks of 6 dimes and 8 stacks of 5 nickels.
She then found 1 dime and 1 nickel.
43 dimes and 41 nickles
43 + 41 = 84
Jessie has 84 dimes and nickels in all.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 399

Question 1:
Adrian’s cat ate \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \) of a bag of cat treats in September and \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \) of the same bag of cat treats in October. What part of the bag of cat treats did Adrian’s cat eat in both months? Use the model to find the sum \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \)+\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \). How many fifth-size pieces are shown?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 1
Use the model to find the sum \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \)+\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \). How many fifth-size pieces are shown? fifth-size pieces

Answer: 4/5

Explanation:
Given,
Adrian’s cat ate \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \) of a bag of cat treats in September and \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \) of the same bag of cat treats in October.
From the above figure, we can see that there are 4 fifth size pieces.
\(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \)+\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \).

Use the model to find the sum.
Question 2:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 2
\(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } +\frac { 2 }{ 4 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/4

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that there are 3 one-fourth shaded parts.
So, \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } +\frac { 2 }{ 4 } =\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Question 3:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 3
\(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } +\frac { 3 }{ 10 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 9/10

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that there are 9 one-tenth shaded parts.
So, \(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } +\frac { 3 }{ 10 } =\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \).

Find the sum. Use models to help.
Question 4:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 6/6 = 1

Explanation:
3/6 and 3/6 has same numerators and same denominators so we have to add both the fractions.
\(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { 6 }{ 6 } \)
6/6 = 1

Question 5:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } +\frac { 1 }{ 3 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 2/3

Explanation:
1/3 and 1/3 has same numerators and same denominators so we have to add both the fractions.
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } +\frac { 1 }{ 3 } =\frac { 2 }{ 3 } \)

Question 6:
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 7/8

Explanation:
Given the expressions 5/8 and 2/8.
The above fractions have the same denominators but the numerators are different.
So, \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)

Find the sum. Use models or iTools to help.
Question 7:
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: 7/8

Explanation:
Given the expressions 5/8 and 2/8.
The above fractions have the same denominators but the numerators are different.
So, \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)

Question 8:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: 4/5

Explanation:
2/5 and 2/5 have the same numerators and same denominators so we have to add both the fractions.
\(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \)

Question 9:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } +\frac { 1 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: 5/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions 4/6 and 1/6.
The above fractions have the same denominators but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } +\frac { 1 }{ 6 } =\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Q10

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Q11

Question 12:
In a survey, \(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \) of the students chose Friday and \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) chose Saturday as their favorite day of the week. What fraction shows the students who chose Friday or Saturday as their favorite day? Shade the model to show your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 12
\(\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: \(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \)

Explanation:
Given that,
In a survey, \(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \) of the students chose Friday and \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) chose Saturday as their favorite day of the week.
Add both the fractions 4/12 and 5/12
\(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \) + \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \)

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 400

Question 13:
Model Mathematics Jin is putting colored sand in a jar. She filled \(\frac {2 }{ 10} \) of the jar with blue sand and \(\frac { 4}{ 10} \) of the jar with pink sand. Describe one way to model the part of the jar filled with sand.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 400 Question 13

Answer: \(\frac { 4}{ 10} \)

Explanation:
the answer is 4/10 because 4/10 + 2/10= 6/10+ 4/10 = 10/10. a bit confusing
4 + 2 = 6 right the, 6 + 4 = 10 so 10/10.

Have you ever seen a stained glass window in a building or home? Artists have been designing stained glass windows for hundreds of years.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 400 Question 13 - i

Help design the stained glass sail on the boat below.

Materials • color pencils

Look at the eight triangles in the sail. Use the guide below to color the triangles:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 400 Question 13 - ii

  • \(\frac {2 }{8 } \) blue
  • \(\frac {3 }{8 } \) red
  • \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) orange
  • \(\frac {1 }{8 } \) yellow

Question 14:
Write an Equation Write an equation that shows the fraction of triangles that are red or blue.
Answer: \(\frac {3 }{8 } \) red

Question 15:
What color is the greatest part of the sail? Write a fraction for that color. How do you know that fraction is greater than the other fractions? Explain.
Answer: Red

Explanation:
Among all the colors Red color has the greatest part of the sail.

Add Fractions Using Models – Page No 401

Find the sum. Use fraction strips to help.

Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 401 Question 1

Answer: 3/6

Question 2:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 10 } +\frac { 5 }{ 10 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 9/10
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Img_6

Question 3:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } +\frac { 2 }{ 3 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/3
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter Add & Subtract Fractions Img_7

Question 4:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } +\frac { 1 }{ 4 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/4
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Img_8

Question 5:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 12 } +\frac { 4 }{ 12 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 6/12
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_9

Question 6:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/6
Go Math Grade 4 Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_10

Question 7:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 12 } +\frac { 9 }{ 12 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 12/12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_11

Question 8:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } +\frac { 4 }{ 8 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 7/8

Go Math 4th Grade Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_12

Question 9:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } +\frac { 1 }{ 4 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 4/4
Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_13

Question 9:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter Img_14

Question 10:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } +\frac { 3 }{ 10 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 9/10
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Img_15

Question 11:
Lola walks \(\frac { 4 }{ 10} \) mile to her friend’s house. Then she walks \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \) mile to the store. How far does she walk in all?

Answer: \(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \) mile

Explanation:
Given,
Lola walks \(\frac { 4 }{ 10} \) mile to her friend’s house.
Then she walks \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \) mile to the store.
\(\frac { 4 }{ 10} \) + \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \) = \(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \)
Therefore she walked \(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \) mile in all.

Question 12:
Evan eats \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) of a pan of lasagna and his brother eats \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of it. What fraction of the pan of lasagna do they eat in all?
Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) of the pan

Explanation:
Given,
Evan eats \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) of a pan of lasagna and his brother eats \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of it.
\(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) + \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \)
= \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 401 Q13

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 401 Q14

Add Fractions Using Models – Lesson Check – Page No 402

Question 1:
Mary Jane has \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) of medium pizza left. Hector has \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of another medium pizza left. How much pizza do they have altogether?

(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 6 }{ 8 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Mary Jane has \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) of medium pizza left.
Hector has \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of another medium pizza left.
To find how much pizza do they have altogether we have to add both fractions.
\(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) + \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) = \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \)
Therefore Mary Jane and Hector has \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \) pizza altogether.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2:
Jeannie ate \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) of an apple. Kelly ate \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) of the apple. How much did they eat in all?

(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Jeannie ate \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) of an apple.
Kelly ate \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) of the apple.
\(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) + \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) = \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 3:
Karen is making 14 different kinds of greeting cards. She is making 12 of each kind. How many greeting cards is she making?

(a) 120
(b) 132
(c) 156
(d) 168

Answer: 168

Explanation:
Given,
Karen is making 14 different kinds of greeting cards.
She is making 12 of each kind.
To find how many greeting cards she is making we have to multiply 14 and 12.
14 × 12 = 168.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
Jefferson works part-time and earns $1,520 in four weeks. How much does he earn each week?

(a) $305
(b) $350
(c) $380
(d) $385

Answer: $380

Explanation:
Jefferson works part-time and earns $1,520 in four weeks.
1520 – 4 weeks
? – 1 week
1520/4 = $380
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5:
By installing efficient water fixtures, the average American can reduce water use to about 45 gallons of water per day. Using such water fixtures, about how many gallons of water would the average American use in December?

(a) about 1,200 gallons
(b) about 1,500 gallons
(c) about 1,600 gallons
(d) about 2,000 gallons

Answer: about 1,500 gallons

Explanation:
Given,
By installing efficient water fixtures, the average American can reduce water use to about 45 gallons of water per day.
1 day – 45 gallons
31 days – ?
45 × 31 = 1395 gallons
The number near to 1395 is 1500 gallons.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6:
Collin is making a bulletin board and note center. He is using square cork tiles and square dry-erase tiles. One of every 3 squares will be a cork square. If he uses 12 squares for the center, how many will be cork squares?

(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Given that,
Collin is making a bulletin board and note center.
He is using square cork tiles and square dry-erase tiles.
One of every 3 squares will be a cork square.
12/3 = 4
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Add Fractions Using Models – Lesson Check – Page No 405

Question 1:
Lisa needs 4/5 pound of shrimp to make shrimp salad. She has 1/5 pound of shrimp. How much more shrimp does Lisa need to make the salad?
Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 405 Q1
Subtract \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } – \frac { 1 }{ 5 }\). Use the model to help.
Shade the model to show how much shrimp Lisa needs.
Then shade the model to show how much shrimp Lisa has.
Compare the difference between the two shaded rows.
\(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } – \frac { 1 }{ 5 } = \frac {■ }{ 5} \)
Lisa needs _____ pound more shrimp.

Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Given that,
Lisa needs 4/5 pounds of shrimp to make shrimp salad. She has 1/5 pound of shrimp.
The denominators have the same numbers and numerators have different numbers.
4/5 – 3/5 = 1/5
Thus Lisa needs 1/5 pounds more shrimp.

Use the model to find the difference.

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } – \frac { 2 }{ 6 } = \frac {■ }{ 6} \)
Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 405 Q2

Answer: 1/6

Explanation:
Given two fractions 3/6 and 2/6
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
3/6 – 2/6 = 1/6

Question 3:
\(\frac { 8 }{ 10 } – \frac { 5 }{ 10 } = \frac {■ }{ 10} \)
Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 405 Q 3

Answer: 3/10

Explanation:
Given two fractions 8/10 and 5/10
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different.
8/10 – 5/10 = 3/10

Subtract. Use models to help.

Question 4:
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } – \frac { 2 }{ 8 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/8

Explanation:
Given two fractions 5/8 and 2/8
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } – \frac { 2 }{ 8 } = \frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions img_1

Question 5:
\(\frac { 7 }{ 12 } – \frac { 2 }{ 12 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 5/12

Explanation:
Given two fractions 7/12 and 2/12
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 7 }{ 12 } – \frac { 2 }{ 12 } = \frac { 5 }{ 12 } \)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions img_2

Question 6:
\(\frac { 3 }{4 } – \frac { 2 }{ 4 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 1/4

Explanation:
Given two fractions 3/4 and 2/4
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 3 }{4 } – \frac { 2 }{ 4 } = \frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions img_3

Question 7:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } – \frac { 1 }{ 3 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 1/3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions img_4

Question 8:
\(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } – \frac { 5 }{ 8 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 2/8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions img_5

Question 9:
Explain how you could find the unknown addend in \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \) + _____ = 1 without using a model.
Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
1 can be written in the fraction form as 6/6
2/6 + x = 6/6
x = 6/6 – 2/6
x = 4/6

Add Fractions Using Models – Lesson Check – Page No 406

Question 10:
Mrs. Ruiz served a pie for dessert two nights in a row. The drawings below show the pie after her family ate dessert on each night. What fraction of the pie did they eat on the second night?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 406 Q 10

\( \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 10/12

a. What do you need to know?

Answer: We need to find the fraction of the pie did they eat on the second night.

b. How can you find the number of pieces eaten on the second night?

Answer: We can find the number of pieces eaten on the second night by dividing the number of eaten pieces by the total number of pieces.

c. Explain the steps you used to solve the problem.
Complete the sentences.
After the first night, _______ pieces were left.
After the second night, _______ pieces were left.
So, _______ of the pie was eaten on the second night.

Answer:
After the first night, 9 pieces were left.
After the second night, 2 pieces were left.
So, 10 of the pie was eaten on the second night.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 406 Q11

Question 12:
Keiko sewed \(\frac { 3}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack. Pam sewed \(\frac { 1}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack. Shade the model to show how much more lace Keiko sewed on her backpack than Pam
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 406 Q 12
\(\frac { ■ }{  ■ } \)
Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given,
Keiko sewed \(\frac { 3}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack. Pam sewed \(\frac { 1}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack.
\(\frac {3}{4} \) – \(\frac {1}{4} \) = \(\frac {2}{4} \)

Subtract Fractions Using Models – Page No 407

Subtract. Use fraction strips to help.
Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Subtract Fractions Using Models Q1
Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Given the fraction, 4/5 and 1/5
The denominators of both fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
4/5 – 1/5 = 3/5

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 3}{ 4 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1}{ 4 } [/latex]
The denominators of both fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Question 3:
\(\frac { 5}{ 6 } – \frac { 1}{ 6 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1 }{ 6 } [/latex]
The denominators of both fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 5}{ 6 } – \frac { 1}{ 6 } = \frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)

Question 4:
\(\frac { 7}{ 8 } – \frac { 1}{ 8 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 6/8

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1 }{ 8 } [/latex]
The denominators of both fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 7}{ 8 } – \frac { 1}{ 8 } = \frac { 6 }{ 8 } \)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 407 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 407 Q6

Question 7:
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1 }{ 4 } [/latex]
The denominators of both fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Question 8:
\(\frac { 7}{ 6 } – \frac {5}{ 6 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 7 }{ 6 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 5 }{ 6 } [/latex]
The denominators of both fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 7}{ 6 } – \frac {5}{ 6 } = \frac { 2 }{ 6 } \)

Problem Solving
Use the table for 9 and 10.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Subtract Fractions Using Models Q9
Question 9:
Ena is making trail mix. She buys the items shown in the table. How many more pounds of pretzels than raisins does she buy?
\(\frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 5/8 pound

Explanation:
Given that,
Ena is making trail mix.
pretzels = 7/8
Raisins = 2/8
To find the number of more pounds of pretzels than raisins she buys
we have to subtract both fractions.
7/8 – 2/8 = 5/8

Question 10:
How many more pounds of granola than banana chips does she buy?
\(\frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/8 pound

Explanation:
Granola = 5/8
Banana Chips = 3/8
To find How many more pounds of granola than banana chips she buy we have to subtract both fractions.
5/8 – 3/8 = 2/8 pounds

Subtract Fractions Using Models – Page No 408

Question 1:
Lee reads for \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) hour in the morning and \(\frac {2}{ 4} \) hour in the afternoon. How much longer does Lee read in the morning than in the afternoon?
(a) 5 hours
(b) \(\frac { 5}{ 4} \)
(c) \(\frac { 4}{ 4} \)
(d) \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \)

Answer: \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \)

Explanation:
Given,
Lee reads for \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) hour in the morning and \(\frac {2}{ 4} \) hour in the afternoon.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) – \(\frac {2}{ 4} \) = \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \)
Lee read \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \) hour in the morning than in the afternoon.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2:
Which equation does the model below represent?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 408 Q2
(a) \(\frac { 3}{ 6} – \frac { 2}{ 6} = \frac { 1}{ 6} \)
(b) \(\frac { 2}{ 6} – \frac { 1}{ 6} = \frac { 1}{ 6} \)
(c) \(\frac { 5}{ 6} – \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac { 2}{ 6} \)
(d) 1 – \( \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac {3}{ 6} \)

Answer: \(\frac { 5}{ 6} – \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac { 2}{ 6} \)

Explanation:
From the above figure we can say that \(\frac { 5}{ 6} – \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac { 2}{ 6} \)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 3:
A city received 2 inches of rain each day for 3 days. The meteorologist said that if the rain had been snow, each inch of rain would have been 10 inches of snow. How much snow would that city have received in the 3 days?

(a) 20 inches
(b) 30 inches
(c) 50 inches
(d) 60 inches

Answer: 60 inches

Explanation:
Given,
A city received 2 inches of rain each day for 3 days.
2 × 3 inches = 6 inches
The meteorologist said that if the rain had been snow, each inch of rain would have been 10 inches of snow.
6 × 10 inches = 60 inches
Therefore the city has received 60 inches of snow in 3 days.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
At a party there were four large submarine sandwiches, all the same size. During the party, \(\frac { 2}{ 3} \) of the chicken sandwich, \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) of the tuna sandwich, \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \) of the roast beef sandwich, and \(\frac { 5}{ 6} \) of the veggie sandwich were eaten. Which sandwich had the least amount left?

(a) chicken
(b) tuna
(c) roast beef
(d) veggie

Answer: veggie

Explanation:
Given,
At a party there were four large submarine sandwiches, all the same size. During the party, \(\frac { 2}{ 3} \) of the chicken sandwich, \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) of the tuna sandwich, \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \) of the roast beef sandwich, and \(\frac { 5}{ 6} \) of the veggie sandwich were eaten.
Compare the fractions \(\frac { 2}{ 3} \), \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) , \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \) and \(\frac { 5}{ 6} \).
Among all the fractions veggie has the least fraction.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5:
Deena uses \(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) cup milk and \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) cup oil in a recipe. How much liquid does she use in all?

(a) \(\frac {1}{ 8} \) cup
(b) \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup
(c) \(\frac {6}{ 8} \) cup
(d) 5 cups

Answer: \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup

Explanation:
Given,
Deena uses \(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) cup milk and \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) cup oil in a recipe.
\(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) + \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) = \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup
Therefore she used \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup of milk in all.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6:
In the car lot, \(\frac { 4}{ 12} \) of the cars are white and \(\frac { 3}{ 12} \) of the cars are blue. What fraction of the cars in the lot are either white or blue?
(a) \(\frac { 1}{ 12} \)
(b) \(\frac { 7}{ 24} \)
(c) \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \)
(d) 7

Answer: \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \)

Explanation:
Given,
In the car lot, \(\frac { 4}{ 12} \) of the cars are white and \(\frac { 3}{ 12} \) of the cars are blue.
\(\frac { 4}{ 12} \) + \(\frac { 3}{ 12} \) = \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Subtract Fractions Using Models – Page No 411

Question 1:
9 twelfth-size parts − 5 twelfth-size parts =
\(\frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/12

Explanation:
9 twelfth-size parts − 5 twelfth-size parts
9 × \(\frac { 1 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \)
5 × \(\frac { 1 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \)
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \) – \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \)

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3}{ 12} + \frac {8}{ 12 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 11/12

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 3 }{ 12 } \) and \(\frac { 8 }{ 12 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 12} + \frac {8}{ 12 } = \frac { 11 }{ 12 } \)

Question 3:
\(\frac { 1}{ 3 } + \frac {1}{ 3 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/3

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 3 } + \frac {1}{ 3 } = \frac { 2 }{ 3 } \)

Question 4:
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 411 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 411 Q6

Question 7:
\(\frac { 6}{ 10 } – \frac {2}{ 10 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/10

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } \) and \(\frac { 2 }{ 10 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 6}{ 10 } – \frac {2}{ 10 } = \frac { 4 }{ 10 } \)

Question 8:
\(\frac { 1}{ 2 } – \frac {1}{2 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 0

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 2 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 2 } – \frac {1}{2 } \) = 0

Question 9:
\(\frac {5}{ 6 } – \frac {4}{ 6 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 1/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \) and \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac {5}{ 6 } – \frac {4}{ 6 } = \frac { 1 }{ 6 } \)

Question 10:
\(\frac { 4}{ 5 } – \frac {2}{ 5 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/5

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) and \(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 4}{ 5 } – \frac {2}{ 5 } = \frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)

Question 11:
\(\frac { 1}{ 4 } + \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 4 } + \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Question 12:
\(\frac { 9}{ 10 } – \frac {5}{ 10 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/10

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \) and \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 9}{ 10 } – \frac {5}{ 10 } = \frac { 4 }{ 10 } \)

Question 13:
\(\frac { 1}{ 12 } + \frac {7}{ 12 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 8/12

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 12 } \) and \(\frac { 7 }{ 12 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 12 } + \frac {7}{ 12 } = \frac { 8 }{ 12 } \)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 411 Q14

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 411 Q15

Question 16:
Sense or Nonsense? Brian says that when you add or subtract fractions with the same denominator, you can add or subtract the numerators and keep the same denominator. Is Brian correct? Explain.

Answer: Correct

Explanation:
The statement of Brian is correct because when you add or subtract fractions with the same denominator, you can add or subtract the numerators and keep the same denominator.

Question 17:
The length of a rope was \(\frac { 6}{8} \) yard. Jeff cut the rope into 3 pieces. Each piece is a different length measured in eighths of a yard. What is the length of each piece of rope?

Answer: \(\frac { 2}{8} \)

Explanation:
Given,
The length of a rope was \(\frac { 6}{8} \) yard.
Jeff cut the rope into 3 pieces. Each piece is a different length measured in eighths of a yard.
Divide \(\frac { 6}{8} \) into 3 pieces.
\(\frac { 6}{8} \) ÷ 3 = \(\frac { 2}{8} \)

Question 18:
For 18a–18d, choose Yes or No to show if the sum or difference is correct.

a. \(\frac { 3}{ 5 } – \frac {1}{ 5 } = \frac {4 }{5 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no

Answer: no

Explanation:
The denominators of both fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 5 } – \frac {1}{ 5 } = \frac {2 }{5 } \)
Thus the above statement is not correct.

b. \(\frac { 1}{ 4 } – \frac {2}{4 } = \frac {3 }{8 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no

Answer: no

Explanation:
The denominators of both fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 4 } – \frac {2}{4 } = \frac {1 }{4 } \)
Thus the above statement is not correct.

c. \(\frac { 5}{ 8} – \frac {4}{ 8 } = \frac {1 }{8 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no

Answer: yes

Explanation:
The denominators of both fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 5}{ 8} – \frac {4}{ 8 } = \frac {1 }{8 } \)
Thus the above statement is correct.

d. \(\frac { 4}{ 9 } – \frac {2}{ 9 } = \frac {6 }{9 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no
Answer: no

Explanation:
The denominators of both fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
d. \(\frac { 4}{ 9 } – \frac {2}{ 9 } = \frac {2 }{9 } \)
Thus the above statement is not correct.

Sense or Nonsense? – Page No. 412

Question 19.
Harry says that \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\). Jane says \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\).
Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain your reasoning. Draw a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 412 Q 19
Type below:
___________

Answer: Jane’s Answer Makes Sense. Because the numerators are the same but the denominators are different. So, in order to add the fractions first, they have to make the denominators equal.
1/4 + 1/8 = 2/8 + 1/8 = 3/8

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 413

Find the sum or difference.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 413 Q 1

Answer: 12/12

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{12}\) + \(\frac{8}{12}\)
= \(\frac{12}{12}\)

Question 2.
\(\frac{3}{6}-\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2/6

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{3}{6}\) – \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{4}{5}-\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1/5

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{5}\) – \(\frac{3}{5}\)
= \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{6}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9/10

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{6}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 413 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 413 Q6

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 413 Q7

Question 8.
\(\frac{5}{6}-\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/6

Explanation:
The denominators of both fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{5}{6}-\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{2}{3}+\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/3 = 1

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{2}{3}+\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{3}{3}\) = 1

Problem Solving

Use the table for 10 and 11.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 413 Q 10

Question 10.
Guy finds how far his house is from several locations and makes the table shown. How much farther away from Guy’s house is the library than the cafe?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile

Explanation:
The distance from Guy’s house to the library is \(\frac{9}{10}\) mile
The distance from Guy’s house to the cafe is \(\frac{4}{10}\) mile
To find how much farther away from Guy’s house is the library than the cafe subtract both the fractions.
\(\frac{9}{10}\) – \(\frac{4}{10}\) = \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile

Question 11.
If Guy walks from his house to school and back, how far does he walk?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 10/10 mile

Explanation:
The distance from Guy’s house to school = \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile
From school to house \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile
\(\frac{5}{10}\) + \(\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{10}{10}\) mile

Add and Subtract Fractions – Lesson Check – Page No. 414

Question 1.
Mr. Angulo buys \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of red grapes and \(\frac{3}{8}\)pound of green grapes. How many pounds of grapes did Mr. Angulo buy in all?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{8}\) pound
b. \(\frac{2}{8}\) pound
c. 1 pound
d. 2 pounds

Answer: 1 pound

Explanation:
Given that,
Mr. Angulo buys \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of red grapes and \(\frac{3}{8}\)pound of green grapes.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= \(\frac{8}{8}\)
= 1
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Which equation does the model below represent?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 414 Q 2
Options:
a. \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{8}{8}\) – \(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that, the equation of the model is
\(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There are 6 muffins in a package. How many packages will be needed to feed 48 people if each person has 2 muffins?
Options:
a. 4
b. 8
c. 16
d. 24

Answer: 16

Explanation:
There are 6 muffins in a package.
Number of people = 48
48/6 = 8
Also given that each person gets 2 muffins.
8 × 2 = 16
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Camp Oaks gets 32 boxes of orange juice and 56 boxes of apple juice. Each shelf in the cupboard can hold 8 boxes of juice. What is the least number of shelves
needed for all the juice boxes?
Options:
a. 4
b. 7
c. 11
d. 88

Answer: 11

Explanation:
Given,
Camp Oaks gets 32 boxes of orange juice and 56 boxes of apple juice.
Each shelf in the cupboard can hold 8 boxes of juice.
First, add the boxes of orange juice and apple juice.
32 + 56 = 88 boxes of juice
Now divide 88 by 8
88/8 = 11
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
A machine makes 18 parts each hour. If the machine operates 24 hours a day, how many parts can it make in one day
Options:
a. 302
b. 332
c. 362
d. 432

Answer: 432

Explanation:
Given,
A machine makes 18 parts each hour.
Multiply the number of parts with the number of hours.
18 × 24 = 432 parts in a day.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Which equation does the model below represent?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 414 Q 6
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{5}\) – \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{5}\) – \(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
d. \(\frac{6}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
By observing the figure we can say that the equation is \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\).
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 415

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 1

Question 1.
A ___________ always has a numerator of 1.
________________

Answer: unit fraction

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer.

Write the fraction as a sum of unit fractions.

Question 2.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 1/3 + 1/3 + 1/3

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The unit fraction of 3/3 is 1/3 + 1/3 + 1/3

Question 3.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The unit fraction of 4/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12.

Use the model to write an equation.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 4
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1/5

Explanation:
By using the above model we can write the equation
3/5 – 2/5 = 1/5

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 5
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
By using the above model we can write the equation
5/6 – 1/6 = 4/6

Use the model to solve the equation.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 6
\(\frac{3}{8}+\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5/8

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{3}{8}+\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}8}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9/10

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Find the sum or difference.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 415 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 415 Q9

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 415 Q10

Question 11.
\(\frac{2}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
The denominators of both fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{2}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{4}{4}-\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
The denominators of both fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{4}-\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 13.
\(\frac{7}{8}-\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/8

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{7}{8}-\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 416

Question 14.
Tyrone mixed \(\frac{7}{12}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{1}{12}\) quart of yellow paint. How much paint does Tyrone have in the mixture?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) quart

Answer: 8/12 quart

Explanation:
Given that,
Tyrone mixed \(\frac{7}{12}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{1}{12}\) quart of yellow paint.
Add both the fraction of paints.
\(\frac{7}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{8}{12}\) quart
Therefore Tyrone has \(\frac{8}{12}\) quart in the mixture.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 416 Q15

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 416 Q16

Question 17.
Eloise hung artwork on \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bulletin board. She hung math papers on \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the same bulletin board. What part of the bulletin board has artwork or math papers?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Given,
Eloise hung artwork on \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bulletin board.
She hung math papers on \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the same bulletin board.
\(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
\(\frac{3}{5}\) part of the bulletin board has artwork or math papers.

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 419

Write the unknown numbers. Write mixed numbers above
the number line and fractions greater than one below the number line.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 419 Q 1
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-419-Q-1

Write the mixed number as a fraction.

Question 2.
1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9/8

Explanation:
Given the expression,
1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) = (1 × 8 + 1)/8 = 9/8

Question 3.
1 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = (5 × 1 + 3)/5 = \(\frac{8}{5}\)

Question 4.
1 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5/3

Explanation:
Given the expression,
1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = (3 × 1 + 2)/3 = \(\frac{5}{3}\)

Write the fraction as a mixed number.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 419 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 419 Q6

Question 7.
\(\frac{13}{10}\) = _____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{13}{10}\)
Convert from the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{13}{10}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Write the mixed number as a fraction.

Question 8.
2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{27}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
2 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{27}{10}\)

Question 9.
3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{11}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{11}{3}\)

Question 10.
4 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{22}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
4 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
4 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{22}{5}\)

Use Repeated Reasoning Algebra Find the unknown numbers.

Question 11.
\(\frac{13}{7}\) = 1 \(\frac{■}{7}\)
■ = _____

Answer: 1 \(\frac{6}{7}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{13}{7}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
\(\frac{13}{7}\) = 1 \(\frac{6}{7}\)

Question 12.
■ \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{23}{6}\)
■ = _____

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given the expression,
■ \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{23}{6}\)
■ \(\frac{5}{6}\) × 6 = 23
■ ×  = 23 – 5
■ = 18/6
■ = 3

Question 13.
\(\frac{57}{11}\) = ■ \(\frac{■}{11}\)
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{2}{11}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{57}{11}\) = ■ \(\frac{■}{11}\)
Convert from the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{57}{11}\) = 5 \(\frac{2}{11}\)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 419 Q14

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 419 Q15

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 420

Use the recipe to solve 16–18.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 420 Q 16

Question 16.
Reason Quantitatively Cal is making energy squares. How many \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe?
_____ \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter

Explanation:
Given that 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe.
We have to find how many \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)  + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Therefore 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe.

Question 17.
Suppose Cal wants to make 2 times as many energy squares as the recipe makes. How many cups of bran cereal should he use? Write your answer as a mixed number and as a fraction greater than 1 in simplest form.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Take the amount of bran Cal is using and multiply it by 2
Given that 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of bran cereal is used in the recipe.
3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 2
= \(\frac{13}{4}\) × 2
= \(\frac{13}{2}\)
= 6 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus 6 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of bran cereal he should use.

Question 18.
Cal added 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of raisins. Write this mixed number as a fraction greater than 1 in the simplest form.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{19}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Cal added 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of raisins.
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{19}{8}\)

Question 19.
Jenn is preparing brown rice. She needs 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of brown rice and 2 cups of water. Jenn has only a \(\frac{1}{8}\)– cup measuring cup. How many \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups each of rice and water will Jenn use to prepare the rice?
brown rice: ________ \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups
water: _________ \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups

Answer:
Number of water cups = 16
Number of brown rice cups = 12

Explanation:
Brown rice needed = 1 1/2 cups = 3/2 cups
Water needed = 2 cups
Measuring cups = 1/8
No. of cups used of water = 2/1/8 = 16
No. of cups used of rice = 3/2/1/8 = 12 cups

Question 20.
Draw a line to show the mixed number and fraction that have the same value.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 420 Q 20
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-420-Q-20

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Page No. 421

Write the mixed number as a fraction.

Question 1.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 421 Q 1

Question 2.
4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{13}{3}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{13}{3}\)

Question 3.
1 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{7}{5}\)

Question 4.
3 \(\frac{3}{2}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{9}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 421 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 421 Q6

Question 7.
5 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{11}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{11}{2}\)

Question 8.
2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{19}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Write the fraction as a mixed number.

Question 9.
\(\frac{31}{6}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{20}{10}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2

Explanation:
\(\frac{10}{10}\) + \(\frac{10}{10}\) = 1 + 1 = 2

Question 11.
\(\frac{15}{8}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{7}{8}\)
1 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) = 1 \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{13}{6}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 2 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 421 Q13

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 421 Q14

Question 15.
\(\frac{11}{3}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= 1 + 1 + 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 16.
\(\frac{9}{2}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 17.
A recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups of raisins, but Julie only has a \(\frac{1}{4}\) -cup measuring cup. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups does Julie need to measure out 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups of raisins?
She needs ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups

Answer: 10 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
A recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups of raisins, but Julie only has a \(\frac{1}{4}\) -cup measuring cup.
\(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 10 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups

Question 18.
If Julie needs 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal, how many \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal will she use?
She will use ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal

Answer: 13 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 13 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Therefore Julie needs 13 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal.

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Lesson Check – Page No. 422

Question 1.
Which of the following is equivalent to \(\frac{16}{3}\) ?
Options:
a. 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
b. 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
c. 5 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
d. 5 \(\frac{6}{3}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{16}{3}\) = \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 5 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Stacey filled her \(\frac{1}{2}\)cup measuring cup seven times to have enough flour for a cake recipe. How much flour does the cake recipe call for?
Options:
a. 3 cups
b. 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
c. 4 cups
d. 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
Stacey filled her \(\frac{1}{2}\)cup measuring cup seven times to have enough flour for a cake recipe.
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
1 + 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Becki put some stamps into her stamp collection book. She put 14 stamps on each page. If she completely filled 16 pages, how many stamps did she put in the book?
Options:
a. 224
b. 240
c. 272
d. 275

Answer: 224

Explanation:
Becki put some stamps into her stamp collection book.
She put 14 stamps on each page.
If she completely filled 16 pages
Multiply 14 with 16 pages.
14 × 16 = 224 pages
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
Brian is driving 324 miles to visit some friends. He wants to get there in 6 hours. How many miles does he need to drive each hour?
Options:
a. 48 miles
b. 50 miles
c. 52 miles
d. 54 miles

Answer: 54 miles

Explanation:
Brian is driving 324 miles to visit some friends. He wants to get there in 6 hours.
Divide the number of miles by hours.
324/6 = 54 miles
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
During a bike challenge, riders have to collect various colored ribbons. Each \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile they collect a red ribbon, each \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile they collect a green ribbon, and each \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile they collect a blue ribbon. Which colors of ribbons will be collected at the \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile marker?
Options:
a. red and green
b. red and blue
c. green and blue
d. red, green, and blue

Answer: green and blue

Explanation:
Given,
During a bike challenge, riders have to collect various colored ribbons.
Each \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile they collect a red ribbon, each \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile they collect a green ribbon, and each \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile they collect a blue ribbon.
Green and Blue colors of ribbons will be collected at the \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile marker.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
Stephanie had \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound of bird seed. She used \(\frac{3}{8}\) pound to fill a bird feeder. How much bird seed does Stephanie have left?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\) pound
b. \(\frac{4}{8}\) pound
c. 1 pound
d. \(\frac{10}{8}\) pound

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) pound

Explanation:
Given,
Stephanie had \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound of bird seed.
She used \(\frac{3}{8}\) pound to fill a bird feeder.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\) pound
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Page No. 425

Write the sum as a mixed number with the fractional part less than 1.

Question 1.
1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
+3 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
+3 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
4 \(\frac{4}{6}\) = 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 2.
1 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
1 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
8 \(\frac{6}{5}\) = 9 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 3.
2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
———————–
_______

Answer: 6

Explanation:
2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
5 \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 6

Find the difference.

Question 4.
3 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-2 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
3 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-2 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
1 \(\frac{2}{12}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 5.
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 6.
6 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
-3 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
-3 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
3 \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Write the sum as a mixed number with the fractional part less than 1.

Question 7.
7 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
+4 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 12 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
+4 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
12 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 8.
8 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 12

Explanation:
8 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
11 \(\frac{3}{3}\) = 12

Question 9.
5 \(\frac{4}{8}\)
+3 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{4}{8}\)
+3 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
9 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 10.
5 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
+4 \(\frac{2}{12}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
+4 \(\frac{2}{12}\)
9 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Find the difference.

Question 11.
5 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 12.
5 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-4 \(\frac{1}{12}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-4 \(\frac{1}{12}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 13.
3 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
-1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
3 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
-1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
2 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 14.
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{2}{4}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{2}{4}\)
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Practice: Copy and Solve Find the sum or difference.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 425 Q15

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 425 Q16

Question 17.
\(9 \frac{1}{2}+8 \frac{1}{2}\) = _______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+ 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
18

Question 18.
\(6 \frac{3}{5}+4 \frac{3}{5}\) = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
+ 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
11 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 19.
\(8 \frac{7}{10}-\frac{4}{10}\) = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 8 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
8 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
 – \(\frac{4}{10}\)
8 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Question 20.
\(7 \frac{3}{5}-6 \frac{3}{5}\) = _______

Answer: 1

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
+ 6 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
1

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Page No. 426

Solve. Write your answer as a mixed number.

Question 21.
Make Sense of Problems The driving distance from Alex’s house to the museum is 6 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles. What is the round-trip distance?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 13 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Given that,
The driving distance from Alex’s house to the museum is 6 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles.
To find the round-trip distance we have to multiply the driving distance with 2.
6 \(\frac{7}{10}\) × 2 = 13 \(\frac{4}{10}\)
= 13 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles

Question 22.
The driving distance from the sports arena to Kristina’s house is 10 \(\frac{9}{10}\) miles. The distance from the sports arena to Luke’s house is 2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles. How much greater is the driving distance between the sports arena and Kristina’s house than between the sports arena and Luke’s house?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Given,
The driving distance from the sports arena to Kristina’s house is 10 \(\frac{9}{10}\) miles.
The distance from the sports arena to Luke’s house is 2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles.
10 \(\frac{9}{10}\) –  2 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
First, subtract the whole numbers and then subtract the fractions
10 – 2 = 8
\(\frac{9}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) miles

Question 23.
Pedro biked from his house to the nature preserve, a distance of 23 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles. Sandra biked from her house to the lake, a distance of 12 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles. How many miles less did Sandra bike than Pedro?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 11 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Pedro biked from his house to the nature preserve, a distance of 23 4/5 miles. Converting 23 4/5 miles to an improper fraction, it becomes 119/5 miles.
Sandra biked from her house to the lake, a distance of 12 2/5 miles.
Converting 12 2/5 miles to an improper fraction, it becomes 62/5 miles.
Therefore, the difference in the number of miles biked by Sandra and Pedro is
119/5 – 62/5 = 57/5 = 11 2/5 miles

Question 24.
During the Martinez family trip, they drove from home to a ski lodge, a distance of 55 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles, and then drove an additional 12 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles to visit friends. If the family drove the same route back home, what was the distance traveled during their trip?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 68 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Given,
During the Martinez family trip, they drove from home to a ski lodge, a distance of 55 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles, and then drove an additional 12 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles to visit friends.
55 \(\frac{4}{5}\) + 12 \(\frac{4}{5}\) = 67 \(\frac{8}{5}\) = 68 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles

Question 25.
For 25a–25d, select True or False for each statement.
a. 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{6}{8}\) is equal to 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
Given the statement 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{6}{8}\) is equal to 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\).
First add the whole numbers
2 + 1 = 3
\(\frac{3}{8}\) + \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
Convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{9}{8}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
3 +1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\).
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 25.
b. 1 \(\frac{1}{6}\) + 1 \(\frac{4}{12}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{2}{12}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
1 \(\frac{1}{6}\) + 1 \(\frac{4}{12}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{2}{12}\).
First add the whole numbers
1 + 1 = 2
\(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{12}\)

\(\frac{2}{12}\) + \(\frac{4}{12}\) = \(\frac{6}{12}\)
= 2 \(\frac{6}{12}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 25.
c. 5 \(\frac{5}{6}\) – 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) is equal to 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{5}{6}\) – 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) is equal to 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\).
5 – 2 = 3
\(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 25.
d. 5 \(\frac{5}{8}\) – 3 \(\frac{2}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{5}{8}\) – 3 \(\frac{2}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
First, subtract the whole numbers
5 – 3 = 2
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Page No. 427

Find the sum. Write the sum as a mixed number, so the fractional part is less than 1.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 427 Q 1

Question 2.
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 7

4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
6 \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 6 + 1 = 7

Question 3.
2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 6 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
5 \(\frac{4}{3}\)
= 5 + 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 6 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 4.
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 14 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
13 \(\frac{8}{5}\)
13 + 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
= 14 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 5.
9 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
+2 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
+2 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
11 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 6.
8 \(\frac{4}{12}\)
+3 \(\frac{6}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11 \(\frac{10}{12}\)

Explanation:
8 \(\frac{4}{12}\)
+3 \(\frac{6}{12}\)
11 \(\frac{10}{12}\)

Question 7.
4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
+1 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 6

Explanation:
4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
+1 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
5 \(\frac{8}{8}\)
= 5 + 1 = 6

Question 8.
9 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
+6 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 15 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
+6 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
15 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Find the difference.

Question 9.
6 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
2 \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Question 10.
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 11.
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
-3 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
-3 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 12.
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
5 \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 427 Q13

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 427 Q14

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Lesson Check – Page No. 428

Question 1.
Brad has two lengths of copper pipe to fit together. One has a length of 2 \(\frac{5}{12}\) feet and the other has a length of 3 \(\frac{7}{12}\) feet. How many feet of pipe does he have in all?
Options:
a. 5 feet
b. 5 \(\frac{6}{12}\) feet
c. 5 \(\frac{10}{12}\) feet
d. 6 feet

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:
Given,
Brad has two lengths of copper pipe to fit together. One has a length of 2 \(\frac{5}{12}\) feet and the other has a length of 3 \(\frac{7}{12}\) feet.
Add both the lengths
2 \(\frac{5}{12}\) + 3 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
= 5 \(\frac{12}{12}\) = 5 feet
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
A pattern calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of material and 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of lining. How much total fabric is needed?
Options:
a. 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards
b. 3 yards
c. 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards
d. 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards

Answer: 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards

Explanation:
Given,
A pattern calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of material and 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of lining.
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 3 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Shanice has 23 baseball trading cards of star players. She agrees to sell them for $16 each. How much will she get for the cards?
Options:
a. $258
b. $358
c. $368
d. $468

Answer: $368

Explanation:
Given,
Shanice has 23 baseball trading cards of star players. She agrees to sell them for $16 each.
To find how much will she get for the cards
23 × 16 = 368
Therefore she will get $368 for the cards.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Nanci is volunteering at the animal shelter. She wants to spend an equal amount of time playing with each dog. She has 145 minutes to play with all 7 dogs. About how much time can she spend with each dog?
Options:
a. about 10 minutes
b. about 20 minutes
c. about 25 minutes
d. about 26 minutes

Answer: about 20 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
Nanci is volunteering at the animal shelter. She wants to spend an equal amount of time playing with each dog. She has 145 minutes to play with all 7 dogs.
145/7 = 20.7
Therefore she can spend about 20 minutes with each dog.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Frieda has 12 red apples and 15 green apples. She is going to share the apples equally among 8 people and keep any extra apples for herself. How many apples will Frieda keep for herself?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given,
Frieda has 12 red apples and 15 green apples.
She is going to share the apples equally among 8 people and keep any extra apples for herself.
12 + 15 = 27
27/8
27 – 24 = 3
Thus Frieda keep for herself 3 apples.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
The Lynch family bought a house for $75,300. A few years later, they sold the house for $80,250. How much greater was the selling price than the purchase price?
Options:
a. $4,950
b. $5,050
c. $5,150
d. $5,950

Answer: $4,950

Explanation:
Given,
The Lynch family bought a house for $75,300.
A few years later, they sold the house for $80,250.
$80,250 – $75,300 = $4,950
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Page No. 431

Question 1.
Rename both mixed numbers as fractions. Find the difference.
3 \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{■}{6}\)
−1 \(\frac{4}{6}\) = – \(\frac{■}{6}\)
—————————————-
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to the improper fractions.
3 \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{21}{6}\)
1 \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{10}{6}\)
\(\frac{21}{6}\)
– \(\frac{10}{6}\)
\(\frac{11}{6}\)
Convert from improper fractions to the mixed fractions.
\(\frac{11}{6}\) = 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Find the difference.

Question 2.
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
− \(\frac{2}{3}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\)
\(\frac{4}{3}\)
– \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 3.
4 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
− 1 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
———————
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
4 \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{47}{10}\)
1 \(\frac{9}{10}\) = \(\frac{19}{10}\)
\(\frac{47}{10}\)
– \(\frac{19}{10}\)
\(\frac{28}{10}\) = 2 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Question 4.
3 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
− \(\frac{8}{12}\)
———————
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
3 \(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{41}{12}\)
\(\frac{41}{12}\)
− \(\frac{8}{12}\)
2 \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Question 5.
8 \(\frac{1}{10}\)
− 2 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
8 \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{81}{10}\)
2 \(\frac{9}{10}\) = \(\frac{29}{10}\)
\(\frac{81}{10}\)
–\(\frac{29}{10}\)
\(\frac{52}{10}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 6.
2
− 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
2
− 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 7.
4 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
− 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
4 \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{21}{5}\)
3 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{17}{5}\)
\(\frac{21}{5}\)
–\(\frac{17}{5}\)
\(\frac{4}{5}\)

Practice: Copy and Solve Find the difference.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 431 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 431 Q9

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 431 Q10

Question 11.
4 – 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{13}{5}\)
4
–\(\frac{13}{5}\) 
1 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 12.
Lisa mixed 4 \(\frac{2}{6}\) cups of orange juice with 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) cups of pineapple juice to make fruit punch. She and her friends drank 3 \(\frac{4}{6}\) cups of the punch. How much of the fruit punch is left?
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) cups

Answer: 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
Lisa mixed 4 \(\frac{2}{6}\) cups of orange juice with 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) cups of pineapple juice to make fruit punch.
She and her friends drank 3 \(\frac{4}{6}\) cups of the punch.
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
4 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
+ 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
7 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
Now subtract 3 \(\frac{4}{6}\) from 7 \(\frac{3}{6}\).
7 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
-3 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
3 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Page No. 432

Rename the fractions to solve.

Many instruments are coiled or curved so that they are easier for the musician to play, but they would be quite long if straightened out completely.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 432 Q 13

Question 13.
Analyze Relationships Trumpets and cornets are brass instruments. Fully stretched out, the length of a trumpet is 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet and the length of a cornet is 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) feet. The trumpet is how much longer than the cornet?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) feet

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet

Explanation:
Given,
Trumpets and cornets are brass instruments. Fully stretched out, the length of a trumpet is 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet and the length of a cornet is 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) feet.
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) – 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\)
First subtract the whole numbers
5 – 4 = 1
\(\frac{1}{4}\) – \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
1 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet
Therefore trumpet is \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet longer than the cornet.

Question 14.
Tubas, trombones, and French horns are brass instruments. Fully stretched out, the length of a tuba is 18 feet, the length of a trombone is 9 \(\frac{11}{12}\) feet, and the length of a French horn is 17 \(\frac{1}{12}\) feet. The tuba is how much longer than the French horn? The French horn is how much longer than the trombone?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
First, convert the fractions to decimals making the trombone 8.93 feet and the french horn 17.21 feet. The tuba would be 0.79 feet longer than the french horn, and the french horn would be 8.23 feet longer than the trombone. However, if you need the answer to remain a fraction, the tuba would be 11/14 feet longer than a french horn, and a french horn would be 8 3/14 feet longer than a trombone.

Question 15.
The pitch of a musical instrument is related to its length. In general, the greater the length of a musical instrument, the lower its pitch. Order the brass instruments identified on this page from lowest pitch to the highest pitch.
____________
____________
____________

Answer:
Tuba
French Horn
Trombone

Explanation:
By seeing the above answer we can write the order of the brass instruments from the lowest pitch to the highest pitch. The order is tuba, french horn, and trombone.

Question 16.
Alicia had 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)yards of fabric. After making a tablecloth, she had 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\) yards of fabric. Alicia said she used 2 \(\frac{3}{6}\) yards of fabric for the tablecloth. Do you agree? Explain.
______

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
An easier way to do this is to make the fractions improper fractions.
3 1/6 can be rewritten as 19/6. 1 4/6 can be rewritten as 10/6.
Multiply the denominator by the number at its side, and add it to the numerator.
2 3/6 is 15/6.
Subtract 10/6 from 19/6.
19/6-10/6=9/6.
9/6 is not 15/6, therefore she did not use 2 3/6 yards of fabric.

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Page No. 433

Find the difference.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 433 Q 1

Question 2.
6
– 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
6 – 3 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
3 – \(\frac{2}{5}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 3.
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
– 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
5 – 2 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\) = – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
3 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 4.
9 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
– 8 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
9 – 8 = 1
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
= – \(\frac{4}{8}\)
= – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 1 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 5.
12 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
– 7 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
12 – 7 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) = – \(\frac{4}{10}\)
5 – \(\frac{4}{10}\)
5 – \(\frac{2}{5}\) = 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 6.
8 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
– 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
8 – 3 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) – \(\frac{5}{6}\) = – \(\frac{2}{3}\)
5 – \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 7.
7 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
– 4 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
7 – 4 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{5}\) – \(\frac{4}{5}\) = – \(\frac{1}{5}\)
3 – \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 2 \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Question 8.
10 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
– 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
10 – 8 = 2
\(\frac{1}{2}\) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0

Question 9.
7 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
– 2 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
7 – 2 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) – \(\frac{5}{6}\) = – \(\frac{4}{6}\)
5 – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 10.
9 \(\frac{3}{12}\)
– 4 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
9 – 4 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{12}\) – \(\frac{7}{12}\) = – \(\frac{4}{12}\) = – \(\frac{1}{3}\)
5 – \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 11.
9 \(\frac{1}{10}\)
– 8 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
9 – 8 = 1
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) = – \(\frac{6}{10}\)
1 – \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 12.
9 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
– \(\frac{2}{3}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 8 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
– \(\frac{2}{3}\)
8 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 13.
3 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
– 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

3 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
– 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 14.
4 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
– 1 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
4 – 1 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\) = – \(\frac{1}{4}\)
3 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 15.
5 \(\frac{1}{12}\)
– 3 \(\frac{8}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
5 – 3 = 2
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{12}\) – \(\frac{8}{12}\) = – \(\frac{7}{12}\)
2 – \(\frac{7}{12}\) = 1 \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Question 16.
7
– 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
7
– 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
5 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 433 Q17

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 433 Q18

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Lesson Check – Page No. 434

Question 1.
Reggie is making a double-layer cake. The recipe for the first layer calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of sugar. The recipe for the second layer calls for 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups sugar. Reggie has 5 cups of sugar. How much will he have left after making both recipes?
Options:
a. 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups
b. 1 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups
c. 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups
d. 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups

Answer: 1 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
Reggie is making a double-layer cake. The recipe for the first layer calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups sugar.
The recipe for the second layer calls for 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups sugar.
Reggie has 5 cups of sugar.
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
5 – 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Kate has 4 \(\frac{3}{8}\) yards of fabric and needs 2 \(\frac{7}{8}\) yards to make a skirt. How much extra fabric will she have left after making the skirt?
Options:
a. 2 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards
b. 2 \(\frac{2}{8}\) yards
c. 1 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards
d. 1 \(\frac{2}{8}\) yards

Answer: 1 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards

Explanation:
Given,
Kate has 4 \(\frac{3}{8}\) yards of fabric and needs 2 \(\frac{7}{8}\) yards to make a skirt.
First, subtract the whole numbers
4 – 2 = 2
Next, subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\) = – \(\frac{4}{8}\)
2 – \(\frac{4}{8}\) = 1 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Paulo has 128 glass beads to use to decorate picture frames. He wants to use the same number of beads on each frame. If he decorates 8 picture frames, how many beads will he put on each frame?
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 14
d. 16

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Given,
Paulo has 128 glass beads to use to decorate picture frames. He wants to use the same number of beads on each frame
128/8 = 16
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Madison is making party favors. She wants to make enough favors so each guest gets the same number of favors. She knows there will be 6 or 8 guests at the party. What is the least number of party favors Madison should make?
Options:
a. 18
b. 24
c. 30
d. 32

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Given,
Madison is making party favors. She wants to make enough favors so each guest gets the same number of favors.
She knows there will be 6 or 8 guests at the party.
To find the least number of party favors, we have to consider the number of guests.
In this case, there are two possibilities—6 or 8.
For 6: 6, 12, 18, 24 (Add 6 to each number)
For 8: 8, 16, 24 (Add 8 to each number)
Now in both series, the least number (that is in common) is 24. Hence, Madison should make at least 24 party favors.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
A shuttle bus makes 4 round-trips between two shopping centers each day. The bus holds 24 people. If the bus is full on each one-way trip, how many passengers are carried by the bus each day?
Options:
a. 96
b. 162
c. 182
d. 192

Answer: 96

Explanation:
Given,
A shuttle bus makes 4 round-trips between two shopping centers each day. The bus holds 24 people.
4 × 24 = 96
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
To make a fruit salad, Marvin mixes 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of diced peaches with 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of diced pears. How many cups of peaches and pears are in the fruit salad?
Options:
a. 4 cups
b. 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups
c. 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups
d. 3 cups

Answer: 4 cups

Explanation:
Given,
To make a fruit salad, Marvin mixes 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of diced peaches with 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of diced pears.
1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 4 cups
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Page No. 437

Question 1.
Complete. Name the property used.
\(\left(3 \frac{4}{10}+5 \frac{2}{10}\right)+\frac{6}{10}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
The property used is associative property.
9 \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(3 \frac{4}{10}+5 \frac{2}{10}\right)+\frac{6}{10}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
(3 \(\frac{4}{10}\) + 5 \(\frac{2}{10}\)) + \(\frac{6}{10}\)
3 + 5 = 8
8 + \(\frac{4}{10}\) + \(\frac{2}{10}\) + \(\frac{6}{10}\)
Now add the fractions
8 + \(\frac{6}{10}\) + \(\frac{6}{10}\)
8 + \(\frac{12}{10}\)
Convert from improper fractions to the mixed fractions.
\(\frac{12}{10}\) = 1 \(\frac{2}{10}\)
8 + 1 \(\frac{2}{10}\) = 9 \(\frac{2}{10}\)
Thus \(\left(3 \frac{4}{10}+5 \frac{2}{10}\right)+\frac{6}{10}\) = 9 \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Use the properties and mental math to find the sum.

Question 2.
\(\left(2 \frac{7}{8}+3 \frac{2}{8}\right)+1 \frac{1}{8}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given
\(\left(2 \frac{7}{8}+3 \frac{2}{8}\right)+1 \frac{1}{8}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
(2 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 3 \(\frac{2}{8}\)) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
2 + 3 = 5
5 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{2}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
5 + \(\frac{9}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
6 + \(\frac{10}{8}\) = 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus \(\left(2 \frac{7}{8}+3 \frac{2}{8}\right)+1 \frac{1}{8}\) = 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 3.
\(1 \frac{2}{5}+\left(1+\frac{3}{5}\right)\)
______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(1 \frac{2}{5}+\left(1+\frac{3}{5}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
1 + \(\frac{3}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
1 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
1 + 1 + \(\frac{5}{5}\)
1 + 1 + 1 = 3
Thus \(1 \frac{2}{5}+\left(1+\frac{3}{5}\right)\) = 3

Question 4.
\(5 \frac{3}{6}+\left(5 \frac{5}{6}+4 \frac{3}{6}\right)\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 15 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(5 \frac{3}{6}+\left(5 \frac{5}{6}+4 \frac{3}{6}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
5 + 4 = 9
\(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{8}{6}\)
5 \(\frac{3}{6}\) + 9 \(\frac{8}{6}\)
5 \(\frac{3}{6}\) + 10 \(\frac{2}{6}\) = 15 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus \(5 \frac{3}{6}+\left(5 \frac{5}{6}+4 \frac{3}{6}\right)\) = 15 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 5.
\(\left(1 \frac{1}{4}+1 \frac{1}{4}\right)+2 \frac{3}{4}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(1 \frac{1}{4}+1 \frac{1}{4}\right)+2 \frac{3}{4}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
(1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)) + 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
1 + 1 = 2
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Add the whole numbers
2 + 2 = 4
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus \(\left(1 \frac{1}{4}+1 \frac{1}{4}\right)+2 \frac{3}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 6.
\(\left(12 \frac{4}{9}+1 \frac{2}{9}\right)+3 \frac{5}{9}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 17 \(\frac{2}{9}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(12 \frac{4}{9}+1 \frac{2}{9}\right)+3 \frac{5}{9}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
12 + 1 = 13
Add the fraction in the group.
\(\frac{4}{9}\) + \(\frac{2}{9}\) + 3 \(\frac{5}{9}\)
= 13 \(\frac{6}{9}\) + 3 \(\frac{5}{9}\)
= 16 \(\frac{11}{9}\)
= 17 \(\frac{2}{9}\)
Thus \(\left(12 \frac{4}{9}+1 \frac{2}{9}\right)+3 \frac{5}{9}\) = 17 \(\frac{2}{9}\)

Question 7.
\(\left(\frac{3}{12}+1 \frac{8}{12}\right)+\frac{9}{12}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(\frac{3}{12}+1 \frac{8}{12}\right)+\frac{9}{12}\)
First add the fractions in the group.
\(\frac{3}{12}\) + \(\frac{8}{12}\) = \(\frac{11}{12}\)
1 \(\frac{11}{12}\) + \(\frac{9}{12}\) = 1 \(\frac{20}{12}\)
= 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus \(\left(\frac{3}{12}+1 \frac{8}{12}\right)+\frac{9}{12}\) = 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Use the properties and mental math to find the sum.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 437 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 437 Q9

Question 10.
\(\left(3 \frac{5}{10}+10\right)+11 \frac{5}{10}\)
______

Answer: 25

Explanation:
Given,
\(\left(3 \frac{5}{10}+10\right)+11 \frac{5}{10}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
3 + 10 = 13
13 + \(\frac{5}{10}\) + 11 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
Add the whole numbers
13 + 11 = 24
24 + \(\frac{5}{10}\) + \(\frac{5}{10}\) = 25
Thus \(\left(3 \frac{5}{10}+10\right)+11 \frac{5}{10}\) = 25

Question 11.
Pablo is training for a marathon. He ran 5 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Friday, 6 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles on Saturday, and 7 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Sunday. How many miles did he run on all three days?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 19 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles

Explanation:
Given,
Pablo is training for a marathon. He ran 5 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Friday, 6 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles on Saturday, and 7 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Sunday.
Add all the fractions to find how many miles he runs on all three days.
5 \(\frac{4}{8}\) + 6 \(\frac{5}{8}\) + 7 \(\frac{4}{8}\)
First add the whole numbers
5 + 6 + 7 = 18
18 + \(\frac{4}{8}\) + \(\frac{5}{8}\) + \(\frac{4}{8}\)
= 18 + \(\frac{13}{8}\)
= 19 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles
Therefore Pablo runs 19 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles on all three days.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 437 Q12

Use the expressions in the box for 13–14.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 437 Q 13

Question 13.
Which property of addition would you use to regroup the addends in Expression A?
______ property

Answer: Associative Property

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Expression A is \(\frac{1}{8}\) + (\(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{4}{8}\))
The denominators of all three fractions are the same. So, the property for expression A is Associative Property.

Question 14.
Which two expressions have the same value?
________ and _________

Answer: A and C

Explanation:
Expression A is \(\frac{1}{8}\) + (\(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{4}{8}\))
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + (\(\frac{11}{8}\) = \(\frac{12}{8}\)
Expression B is 1/2 + 2
1/2 + 4/2 = 5/2
Expression C is \(\frac{3}{7}\) + (\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{4}{7}\))
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{4}{7}\) = \(\frac{7}{14}\) + \(\frac{8}{14}\) = \(\frac{15}{14}\)
\(\frac{15}{14}\) + \(\frac{3}{7}\) = \(\frac{15}{14}\) + \(\frac{6}{14}\) = \(\frac{21}{14}\)
Thus the expressions A and C has the same value.

Question 15.
Match the equation with the property used.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 437 Q 15
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-437-Q-15

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Page No. 438

Pose a Problem
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 438 Q 16

Question 16.
Costumes are being made for the high school musical. The table at the right shows the amount of fabric needed for the costumes of the male and female leads. Alice uses the expression \(7 \frac{3}{8}+1 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{4}{8}\) to find the total amount of fabric needed for the costume of the female lead. To find the value of the expression using mental math, Alice used the properties of addition.
\(7 \frac{3}{8}+1 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{4}{8}=\left(7 \frac{3}{8}+1 \frac{5}{8}\right)+2 \frac{4}{8}\)
Alice added 7 + 1 and was able to quickly add \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{8}\) to the sum of 8 to get 9. She added 2 \(\frac{4}{8}\) to 9, so her answer was 11 \(\frac{4}{8}\).
So, the amount of fabric needed for the costume of the female lead actor is 11 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards.
Write a new problem using the information for the costume for the male lead actor.
Pose a Problem                     Solve your problem. Check your solution.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Alice used the expressions 1 2/8 + 2 3/8 + 5 6/8 to find the total amount of frabric needed for the costume of the male lead. What is the total amount of fabric needed for the costume?
Answer: Alice wrote the expressions as (1 2/8 + 5 6/8) + 2 3/8 and simplified it by adding the whole number parts and the fraction parts in the parentheses.
Then she added the mixed number: 1 + 5 + 1 + 2 3/8 = 9 3/8.
So, the male leads costume needed 9 3/8 yards of fabric.

Question 16.
Identify Relationships Explain how using the properties of addition makes both problems easier to solve.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The properties make the properties the easier to solve because you can rearrange the mixed numbers so that their fraction parts add to 1.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 439

Use the properties and mental math to find the sum.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 439 Q 1

Question 2.
\(10 \frac{1}{8}+\left(3 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{7}{8}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 16 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
\(10 \frac{1}{8}+\left(3 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{7}{8}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
3 + 2 = 5
10 \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 5 + \(\frac{5}{8}\) + \(\frac{7}{8}\)
10 \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 5 + \(\frac{12}{8}\)
10 + 5 = 15
15 + \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{12}{8}\)
15 + \(\frac{13}{8}\)
16 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
\(10 \frac{1}{8}+\left(3 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{7}{8}\right)\) = 16 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 3.
\(8 \frac{1}{5}+\left(3 \frac{2}{5}+5 \frac{4}{5}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 17 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(8 \frac{1}{5}+\left(3 \frac{2}{5}+5 \frac{4}{5}\right)\)
8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) + 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + 5 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
3 + 5 = 8
8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) + 8 + \(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\)
8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) + 8 + \(\frac{6}{5}\)
8 + 8 = 16
16 + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{6}{5}\)
16 + \(\frac{7}{5}\)
17 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
\(8 \frac{1}{5}+\left(3 \frac{2}{5}+5 \frac{4}{5}\right)\) = 17 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 4.
\(6 \frac{3}{4}+\left(4 \frac{2}{4}+5 \frac{1}{4}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 16 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(6 \frac{3}{4}+\left(4 \frac{2}{4}+5 \frac{1}{4}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
6 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) + 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
4 + 5 = 9
6 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 9 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
6 + 9 = 15
15 + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
16 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(6 \frac{3}{4}+\left(4 \frac{2}{4}+5 \frac{1}{4}\right)\) = 16 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 439 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 439 Q6

Question 7.
\(7 \frac{7}{8}+\left(3 \frac{1}{8}+1 \frac{1}{8}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 12 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(7 \frac{7}{8}+\left(3 \frac{1}{8}+1 \frac{1}{8}\right)\)
7 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 3 \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
3 + 1 = 4
7 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 4 + \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
7 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 4 +\(\frac{2}{8}\)
7 + 4 = 11
11 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{2}{8}\)
11 + \(\frac{9}{8}\) = 12 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Thus \(7 \frac{7}{8}+\left(3 \frac{1}{8}+1 \frac{1}{8}\right)\) = 12 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 8.
\(14 \frac{1}{10}+\left(20 \frac{2}{10}+15 \frac{7}{10}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 50

Explanation:
\(14 \frac{1}{10}+\left(20 \frac{2}{10}+15 \frac{7}{10}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
14 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + 20 \(\frac{2}{10}\) + 15 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
20 + 15 = 35
14 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + 35 + \(\frac{2}{10}\) + \(\frac{7}{10}\)
14 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + 35 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
49 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{9}{10}\)
49 + 1 = 50
Thus \(14 \frac{1}{10}+\left(20 \frac{2}{10}+15 \frac{7}{10}\right)\) = 50

Question 9.
\(\left(13 \frac{2}{12}+8 \frac{7}{12}\right)+9 \frac{5}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 31 \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Explanation:
\(\left(13 \frac{2}{12}+8 \frac{7}{12}\right)+9 \frac{5}{12}\)
13 \(\frac{2}{12}\) + 8 \(\frac{7}{12}\) + 9 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
13 + 8 = 21
21 + \(\frac{2}{12}\) + \(\frac{7}{12}\) + 9 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
21 + \(\frac{9}{12}\) + 9 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
30 + \(\frac{9}{12}\) + \(\frac{5}{12}\) = 31 \(\frac{2}{12}\)
Thus \(\left(13 \frac{2}{12}+8 \frac{7}{12}\right)+9 \frac{5}{12}\) = 31 \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Nate’s classroom has three tables of different lengths. One has a length of 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet, another has a length of 4 feet, and a third has a length of 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet. What is the length of all three tables when pushed end to end?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11

Explanation:
Given,
Nate’s classroom has three tables of different lengths. One has a length of 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet, another has a length of 4 feet, and a third has a length of 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet.
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 4 + 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
4 + 4 + 2 = 10
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1
10 + 1 = 11
Therefore the length of all three tables when pushed end to end is 11 feet.

Question 11.
Mr. Warren uses 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags of mulch for his garden and another 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags for his front yard. He also uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) bag around a fountain. How many total bags of mulch does Mr. Warren use?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Mr. Warren uses 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags of mulch for his garden and another 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags for his front yard.
He also uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) bag around a fountain.
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
2 + 4 = 6
6 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
= 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 440

Question 1.
A carpenter cut a board into three pieces. One piece was 2 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long. The second piece was 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet long. The third piece was 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long. How long was the board?
Options:
a. 6 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet
b. 7 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet
c. 7 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet
d. 8 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet

Answer: c. 7 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet

Explanation:
Given,
A carpenter cut a board into three pieces. One piece was 2 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long. The second piece was 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet long.
The third piece was 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long.
Add three pieces.
2 \(\frac{5}{6}\) + 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 5 + \(\frac{6}{6}\)
= 5 + 1 = 6
6 + 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
= 7 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Harry works at an apple orchard. He picked 45 \(\frac{7}{8}\) pounds of apples on Monday. He picked 42 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds of apples on Wednesday. He picked 54 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds of apples on Friday. How many pounds of apples did Harry pick those three days?
Options:
a. 132 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds
b. 141 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds
c. 142 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds
d. 142 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds

Answer: 142 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds

Explanation:
Given,
Harry works at an apple orchard. He picked 45 \(\frac{7}{8}\) pounds of apples on Monday.
He picked 42 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds of apples on Wednesday.
He picked 54 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds of apples on Friday.
45 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 42 \(\frac{3}{8}\) + 54 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Add the whole numbers first
45 + 42 + 54 = 141
141 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
141 + 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= 142 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There were 6 oranges in the refrigerator. Joey and his friends ate 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges. How many oranges were left?
Options:
a. 2 \(\frac{1}{3}\) oranges
b. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges
c. 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\) oranges
d. 9 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges

Answer: 9 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges

Explanation:
Given,
There were 6 oranges in the refrigerator.
Joey and his friends ate 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges.
6 + 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= 9 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Darlene was asked to identify which of the following numbers is prime. Which number should she choose?
Options:
a. 2
b. 12
c. 21
d. 39

Answer: 2

Explanation:
A prime number is an integer, or whole number, that has only two factors 1 and itself.
In the above options, all are composite numbers except 2.
Therefore 2 is a prime number.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
A teacher has 100 chairs to arrange for an assembly. Which of the following is NOT a way the teacher could arrange the chairs?
Options:
a. 10 rows of 10 chairs
b. 8 rows of 15 chairs
c. 5 rows of 20 chairs
d. 4 rows of 25 chairs

Answer: 8 rows of 15 chairs

Explanation:
A teacher has 100 chairs to arrange for an assembly.
15 × 8 = 120
So, 8 rows of 15 chairs are not the way to arrange the chairs.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Nic bought 28 folding chairs for $16 each. How much money did Nic spend on chairs?
Options:
a. $196
b. $348
c. $448
d. $600

Answer: c. $448

Explanation:
Given,
Nic bought 28 folding chairs for $16 each.
28 × 16 = 448
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 443

Question 1.
Last week, Sia ran 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) miles each day for 5 days and then took 2 days off. Did she run at least 6 miles last week? First, model the problem. Describe your model.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
I will model the problem using fraction strips. I need a 1 strip for the whole and a 1/4 part for each of the 5 days. My model has a total of five 1 strops and five 1/4 parts.

Question 1.
Then, regroup the parts in the model to find the number of whole miles Sia ran.
Sia ran ___________ whole miles and ___________ mile.
Finally, compare the total number of miles she ran to 6 miles.
So, Sia ___________ run at least 6 miles last week.
6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) miles _____ 6 miles

Answer:
Sia ran 6 whole miles and 1/4 mile.
So, Sia did run at least 6 miles last week.
6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) miles > 6 miles

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 443 Q2

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 443 Q3

Question 4.
How many \(\frac{2}{5}\) parts are in 2 wholes?
_____

Answer: 5

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{5}\)/2 = 5

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 444

Question 5.
A company shipped 15,325 boxes of apples and 12,980 boxes of oranges. How many more boxes of apples than oranges did the company ship?
_____ boxes

Answer: 2345 boxes

Explanation:
Given,
A company shipped 15,325 boxes of apples and 12,980 boxes of oranges.
Subtract 12,980 from 15,325 boxes
15,325 – 12,980 = 2,345 boxes.

Question 6.
Analyze A fair sold a total of 3,300 tickets on Friday and Saturday. It sold 100 more on Friday than on Saturday. How many tickets did the fair sell on Friday?
_____ tickets

Answer: 1700 tickets

Explanation:
Given,
Analyze A fair sold a total of 3,300 tickets on Friday and Saturday. It sold 100 more on Friday than on Saturday.
3,300 – 100 = 3,200 tickets
3200/2 = 1,600 tickets
It sold 1600 tickets on saturday and 1700 tickets on Friday.

Question 7.
Emma walked \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile on Monday, \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile on Tuesday, and \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile on Wednesday. If the pattern continues, how many miles will she walk on Friday? Explain how you found the number of miles.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: \(\frac{5}{4}\) miles

Explanation:
I made a table that shows each day and the distance she walked. Then I looked for a pattern. The pattern showed that she walked 1/4 mile more each day. I continued the pattern to show she walked 4/4 mile on Thursday and 5/4 miles on Friday.

Question 8.
Jared painted a mug \(\frac{5}{12}\) red and \(\frac{4}{12}\) blue. What part of the mug is not red or blue?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Jared painted a mug \(\frac{5}{12}\) red and \(\frac{4}{12}\) blue.
We have to find What part of the mug is not red or blue which means \(\frac{3}{12}\) part is neither red nor blue.

Question 9.
Choose the number that correctly completes the sentence.
Each day, Mrs. Hewes knits \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the morning and \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the afternoon.
It will take Mrs. Hewes Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 444 Q 9 days to knit 2 scarves.
_____

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given,
Each day, Mrs. Hewes knits \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the morning and \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the afternoon.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus it takes 3 days to knit 2 scarves.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 445

Read each problem and solve.

Question 1.
Each child in the Smith family was given an orange cut into 8 equal sections. Each child ate \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the orange. After combining the leftover sections, Mrs. Smith noted that there were exactly 3 full oranges left. How many children are in the Smith family?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 445 Q 1

Question 2.
Val walks 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles each day. Bill runs 10 miles once every 4 days. In 4 days, who covers the greater distance?
_________

Answer: Val

Explanation:
Given,
Val walks 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles each day. Bill runs 10 miles once every 4 days.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) × 4
Convert from mixed fraction to improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{13}{5}\) × 4 = 10.4
10.4 > 10
Thus Val covers a greater distance.

Question 3.
Chad buys peanuts in 2-pound bags. He repackages them into bags that hold \(\frac{5}{6}\) pound of peanuts. How many 2-pound bags of peanuts should Chad buy so that he can fill the \(\frac{5}{6}\) -pound bags without having any peanuts left over?
_________ 2-pound bags

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Given,
Chad buys peanuts in 2-pound bags. He repackages them into bags that hold \(\frac{5}{6}\) pound of peanuts.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus 5 2-pound bags of peanuts are left.

Question 4.
A carpenter has several boards of equal length. He cuts \(\frac{3}{5}\) of each board. After cutting the boards, the carpenter notices that he has enough pieces left over to make up the same length as 4 of the original boards. How many boards did the carpenter start with?
_________

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Given,
A carpenter has several boards of equal length. He cuts \(\frac{3}{5}\) of each board. After cutting the boards, the carpenter notices that he has enough pieces left over to make up the same length as 4 of the original boards.
4 of the original boards have a summed length of 20 units. 5 x 4 = 20.
Since 2/5 is left from each board, you simply add them until the 2’s add to 20.
So, 2 x 10 = 20. Hence, there are 10 2/5 boards.
That’s just 4 of the boards that the 2/5 make up, but that should also mean that there are 10 3/5 boards as well.
30/5 + 20/5 = 50/5 = 10

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 446

Question 1.
Karyn cuts a length of ribbon into 4 equal pieces, each 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet long. How long was the ribbon?
Options:
a. 4 feet
b. 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet
c. 5 feet
d. 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:
Given,
Karyn cuts a length of ribbon into 4 equal pieces, each 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet long.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 4
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
\(\frac{5}{4}\) × 4 = 5 feet
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Several friends each had \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bag of peanuts left over from the baseball game. They realized that they could have bought 2 fewer bags of peanuts between them. How many friends went to the game?
Options:
a. 6
b. 5
c. 4
d. 2

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Given,
Several friends each had \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bag of peanuts left over from the baseball game.
They realized that they could have bought 2 fewer bags of peanuts between them
2 ÷ \(\frac{2}{5}\) = 5
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A frog made three jumps. The first was 12 \(\frac{5}{6}\) inches. The second jump was 8 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches. The third jump was 15 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches. What was the total distance the frog jumped?
Options:
a. 35 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches
b. 36 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches
c. 36 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches
d. 38 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches

Answer: 36 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches

Explanation:
Given,
A frog made three jumps. The first was 12 \(\frac{5}{6}\) inches. The second jump was 8 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches. The third jump was 15 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches.
First add the whole numbers
12 + 8 + 15 = 35
Next add the fractions,
\(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{3}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
35 + \(\frac{3}{6}\) = 36 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
LaDanian wants to write the fraction \(\frac{4}{6}\) as a sum of unit fractions. Which expression should he write?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
Given,
LaDanian wants to write the fraction \(\frac{4}{6}\) as a sum of unit fractions.
The unit fraction for \(\frac{4}{6}\) is \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Greta made a design with squares. She colored 8 out of the 12 squares blue. What fraction of the squares did she color blue?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Greta made a design with squares. She colored 8 out of the 12 squares blue.
\(\frac{8}{12}\)
= \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
The teacher gave this pattern to the class: the first term is 5 and the rule is add 4, subtract 1. Each student says one number. The first student says 5. Victor is tenth in line. What number should Victor say?
Options:
a. 17
b. 19
c. 20
d. 21

Answer:
given
a=5
d=4-1=3
to find t10
tn=a + (n-1) d
t10=5 + (10-1) 3
t10=5 + 27
t10 = 32
victor is tenth in line, therefore he should say the number 32

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 447

Question 1.
A painter mixed \(\frac{1}{4}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{3}{4}\) blue paint to make purple paint.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 447 Q 1
How much purple paint did the painter make?
_____ quart of purple paint

Answer: 1

Explanation:
Given,
A painter mixed \(\frac{1}{4}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{3}{4}\) blue paint to make purple paint.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{4}{4}\) or 1.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 447 Q2

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 447 Q3

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 448

Question 4.
Miguel’s class went to the state fair. The fairground is divided into sections. Rides are in \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the fairground. Games are in \(\frac{2}{10}\) of the fairground. Farm exhibits are in \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the fairground.
Part A
Use the model. What fraction of the fairground is rides and games?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 448 Q 4
The fraction of the fairground with games and rides is ______ .
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Miguel’s class went to the state fair. The fairground is divided into sections. Rides are in \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the fairground.
Games are in \(\frac{2}{10}\) of the fairground.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) + \(\frac{2}{10}\) = \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Question 4.
Part B
How much greater is the part of the fairground with rides than with farm exhibits? Explain how the model could be used to find the answer.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{10}\)

Explanation:
I could shade 6 sections to represent the section with the rides, and then I could cross out 1 section to represent the farm exhibits. This leaves 5 sections, so the part of the fairground with rides is 5/10 or 1/2 greater than the part with farm exhibits.

Question 5.
Rita is making chili. The recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of tomatoes. How many cups of tomatoes, written as a fraction greater than one, are used in the recipe?
_____ cups

Answer: 11/4 cups

Explanation:
Given,
Rita is making chili. The recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of tomatoes.
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 11/4 cups

Question 6.
Lamar’s mom sells sports equipment online. She sold \(\frac{9}{10}\) of the sports equipment. Select a way \(\frac{9}{10}\) can be written as a sum of fractions. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\)
d. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\)
e. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\)
f. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
a. \(\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\) = 6/10 ≠ 9/10
b. \(\frac{3}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\) = 9/10
c. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\) = 8/10
d. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = 9/10
e. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\) = 10/10 ≠ 9/10
f. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = 9/10
Thus the suitable answers are b, d, f.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 449

Question 7.
Bella brought \(\frac{8}{10}\) gallon of water on a hiking trip. She drank \(\frac{6}{10}\) gallon of water. How much water is left?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) gallons

Answer: \(\frac{2}{10}\) gallons

Explanation:
Given,
Bella brought \(\frac{8}{10}\) gallon of water on a hiking trip.
She drank \(\frac{6}{10}\) gallon of water.
To find how much water is left we have to subtract the two fractions.
\(\frac{8}{10}\) – \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{2}{10}\) gallons

Question 8.
In a survey, \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the students chose Saturday and \(\frac{1}{10}\) chose Monday as their favorite day of the week. What fraction shows the students who chose Saturday or Monday as their favorite day?
Part A
Shade the model to show your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 449 Q 8
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given,
In a survey, \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the students chose Saturday and \(\frac{1}{10}\) chose Monday as their favorite day of the week.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Question 8.
Part B
How are the numerator and denominator of your answer related to the model? Explain.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The numerator shows the number of parts shaded. The denominator shows the size of the parts.

Question 9.
Match the equation with the property used.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 449 Q 9
Type below:
__________________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-449-Q-9

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 450

Question 10.
For numbers 10a–10e, select Yes or No to show if the sum or difference is correct.
(a) \(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{1}{8}=\frac{3}{8}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, add the numerators.
\(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{1}{8}=\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 10.
(b) \(\frac{4}{5}+\frac{1}{5}=\frac{5}{5}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{5}+\frac{1}{5}=\frac{5}{5}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 10.
(c) \(\frac{4}{6}+\frac{1}{6}=\frac{5}{12}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{6}+\frac{1}{6}=\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 10.
(d) \(\frac{6}{12}-\frac{4}{12}=\frac{2}{12}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{6}{12}-\frac{4}{12}=\frac{2}{12}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 10.
(e) \(\frac{7}{9}-\frac{2}{9}=\frac{9}{9}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{7}{9}-\frac{2}{9}=\frac{5}{9}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 11.
Gina has 5 \(\frac{2}{6}\) feet of silver ribbon and 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) of gold ribbon. How much more silver ribbon does Gina have than gold ribbon?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) feet more silver ribbon.

Answer: 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) feet more silver ribbon.

Explanation:
Given,
Gina has 5 \(\frac{2}{6}\) feet of silver ribbon and 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) of gold ribbon.
5 \(\frac{2}{6}\) – 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
= \(\frac{32}{6}\) – \(\frac{16}{6}\)
= \(\frac{16}{6}\)
Convert from improper fraction to mixed fraction.
2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) feet more silver ribbon
Therefore Gina has 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) feet more silver ribbon than gold ribbon.

Question 12.
Jill is making a long cape. She needs 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards of blue fabric for the outside of the cape. She needs 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) yards of purple fabric for the lining of the cape.
Part A
Jill incorrectly subtracted the two mixed numbers to find how much more blue fabric than purple fabric she should buy. Her work is shown below.
\(4 \frac{1}{3}-3 \frac{2}{3}=\frac{12}{3}-\frac{9}{3}=\frac{3}{3}\)
Why is Jill’s work incorrect?
Type below:
__________________

Answer:
Jill changed only the whole number parts of the mixed number to thirds. She forgot to add the fraction part of the mixed number.

Question 12.
Part B
How much more blue fabric than purple fabric should Jill buy? Show your work.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
4 \(\frac{1}{3}\) – 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= \(\frac{13}{3}\) – \(\frac{11}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Jill should buy \(\frac{2}{3}\) yard more blue fabric than purple fabric.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 451

Question 13.
Russ has two jars of glue. One jar is \(\frac{1}{5}\) full. The other jar is \(\frac{2}{5}\) full.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 13
Use the fractions to write an equation to find the amount of glue Russ has.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Question 13
Type below:
_________________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-451-Question-13

Explanation:
Given,
Russ has two jars of glue. One jar is \(\frac{1}{5}\) full.
The other jar is \(\frac{2}{5}\) full.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 14.
Gertie ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile during physical education class. Sarah ran \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile during the same class. How much farther did Gertie run than Sarah? Shade the model to show your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 14
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given that,
Gertie ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile during physical education class.
Sarah ran \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile during the same class.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 15.
Teresa planted marigolds in \(\frac{2}{8}\) of her garden and petunias in \(\frac{3}{8}\) of her garden. What fraction of the garden has marigolds and petunias?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Teresa planted marigolds in \(\frac{2}{8}\) of her garden and petunias in \(\frac{3}{8}\) of her garden.
Add both the fractions 2/8 and 3/8 to find the fraction of the garden has marigolds and petunias.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 16.
Draw a line to show the mixed number and fraction that have the same value.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 16

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-451-Q-16

Question 17.
Each day, Tally’s baby sister eats \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of rice cereal in the morning and \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of rice cereal in the afternoon. It will take Tally’s sister Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 17 days to eat 2 cups of rice cereal.
Type below:
_________________

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Each day she eats 1/2 cups of rice. But we want to know how long it will take to each 2 cups worth. so lets make an equation.
1/2 × x = 2
x = 4
Thus It will take 4 days to eat 2 cups of rice cereal.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 452

Question 18.
Three girls are selling cases of popcorn to earn money for a band trip. In week 1, Emily sold 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cases, Brenda sold 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cases, and Shannon sold 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases.
Part A
How many cases of popcorn have the girls sold in all? Explain how you found your answer.
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases

Explanation:
Given,
Three girls are selling cases of popcorn to earn money for a band trip. In week 1, Emily sold 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cases, Brenda sold 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cases, and Shannon sold 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases.
First I add the whole numbers 2 + 4 + 3 = 9 cases. Then I add the fractions by combining 3/4 + 1/4 into one whole.
So, 9 + 1 + 1/2 = 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases

Question 18.
Part B
The girls must sell a total of 35 cases in order to have enough money for the trip. Suppose they sell the same amount in week 2 and week 3 of the sale as in week 1. Will the girls have sold enough cases of popcorn to go on the trip? Explain.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:
Given,
The girls must sell a total of 35 cases in order to have enough money for the trip.
Suppose they sell the same amount in week 2 and week 3 of the sale as in week 1.
If I add the sales from the 3 weeks, or 10 1/2 + 10 1/2 + 10 1/2, the sum is only 31 1/2 cases of popcorn. This is less than 35 cases.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 452 Q19

Question 20.
For numbers 20a–20d, choose True or False for each sentence.
a. \(1 \frac{4}{9}+2 \frac{6}{9}\) is equal to 4 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
\(1 \frac{4}{9}+2 \frac{6}{9}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
First add the whole numbers
1 + 2 = 3
4/9 + 6/9 = 10/9
Convert it into the mixed fractions
10/9 = 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
3 + 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 20.
b. \(3 \frac{5}{6}+2 \frac{3}{6}\) is equal to 5 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
First add the whole numbers
3 + 2 = 5
5/6 + 3/6 = 8/6
Convert it into the mixed fractions
8/6 = 1 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
5 + 1 \(\frac{2}{6}\) = 6 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 20.
c. \(4 \frac{5}{8}-2 \frac{4}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
\(4 \frac{5}{8}-2 \frac{4}{8}\)
First subtract the whole numbers
4 – 2 = 2
5/8 – 4/8 = 1/8
= 2 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 20.
d. \(5 \frac{5}{8}-3 \frac{2}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
\(5 \frac{5}{8}-3 \frac{2}{8}\)
5 – 3 = 2
5/8 – 2/8 = 3/8
= 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
\(5 \frac{5}{8}-3 \frac{2}{8}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 452 Q21
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 452 Q21.1

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 457

Question 1.
Use the picture to complete the equations.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 457 Q 1
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = _ + _ + _
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = _ × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: 3

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)
The unit fraction of \(\frac{3}{4}\) is \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = 3 × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the whole number is 3.

Write the fraction as a product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 457 Q2

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 457 Q3

Question 4.
\(\frac{8}{3}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: 8

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{8}{3}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{8}{3}\) = 8 × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus the whole number is 8.

List the next four multiples of the unit fraction.

Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ,
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2/6, 3/6, 4/6, 5/6

Explanation:
The next four multiples of \(\frac{1}{6}\) is \(\frac{2}{6}\) , \(\frac{3}{6}\) , \(\frac{4}{6}\) , \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ,
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2/3, 3/3, 4/3, 5/3

Explanation:
The next four multiples of \(\frac{1}{3}\) is \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{3}{3}\), \(\frac{4}{3}\) and \(\frac{5}{3}\)

Write the fraction as a product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Question 7.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer: 5

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{5}{6}\) is \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
\(\frac{5}{6}\) = 5 × \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus the whole number is 5.

Question 8.
\(\frac{9}{4}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: 9

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{9}{4}\) is \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{9}{4}\) = 9 × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the whole number is 9.

Question 9.
\(\frac{3}{100}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{100}\)

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{3}{100}\) is \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\)
\(\frac{3}{100}\) = 3 × \(\frac{1}{100}\)
Thus the whole number is 3.

List the next four multiples of the unit fraction.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 457 Q10

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ,
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2/8, 3/8, 4/8, 5/8

Explanation:
The next four multiples of \(\frac{1}{8}\) is 2/8, 3/8, 4/8, 5/8.

Question 12.
Robyn uses \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blueberries to make each loaf of blueberry bread. Explain how many loaves of blueberry bread she can make with 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of blueberries.
_____ loaves of blueberry bread

Answer: 5 loaves of blueberry bread

Explanation:
Given,
Robyn uses \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blueberries to make each loaf of blueberry bread.
The unit fraction for 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) is \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
=  5 loaves of blueberry bread

Question 13.
Nigel cut a loaf of bread into 12 equal slices. His family ate some of the bread and now \(\frac{5}{12}\) of the loaf is left. Nigel wants to put each of the leftover slices in its own bag. How many bags does Nigel need?
_____ bags

Answer: 5 bags

Explanation:
Given,
Nigel cut a loaf of bread into 12 equal slices. His family ate some of the bread and now \(\frac{5}{12}\) of the loaf is left.
Nigel wants to put each of the leftover slices in its own bag.
\(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\)
= 5 bags

Question 14.
Which fraction is a multiple of \(\frac{1}{5}\)? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{5}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{7}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{9}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{5}\), \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
The multiples of the \(\frac{1}{5}\) is \(\frac{4}{5}\), \(\frac{3}{5}\).

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 458

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 15.
Whose statement makes sense? Whose statement is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 458 Q 15
Type below:
_________________

Answer: The boy’s statement makes sense. Because 4/5 is not the multiple of 1/4.

Question 15.
For the statement that is nonsense, write a new statement that makes sense.
Type below:
_________________

Answer: 4/5 is the multiple of 1/5.

Conclusion:

Just click on the links available above and practice the concepts of add and subtract fractions for homework help & standard tests. Help students to practice all chapter 7 questions from Go Math Answer Key to write the answers perfectly. For more questions just go with our Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Homework Practice FL pdf article.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers is the most important learning guide to learn the subject properly. It is a quick preparation & practice purpose material for students and educators. So, We have provided the solutions for all the questions with a brief explanation in this Go Math HMH Grade 4 Chapter 4 Answer Key. All these solutions are prepared by the Math Experts. Students and parents are suggested to Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers pdf from here for free.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Avail all detailed solutions to the questions via Go Math Answer Key of grade 4 chapter 4 and aid while doing homework and also while preparing for the exams. Just tap on the respective lesson link from chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers and solve the questions. Along with the exercise and homework problems, we have also listed the answers for the mid-chapter checkpoint and review test in the Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers.

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 1

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 2

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 3

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 4

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 5

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 6

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 7

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 8

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 9

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 10

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 11

Mid Chapter Checkpoint

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 12

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 13

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 14

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 15

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 16

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 17

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 18

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 19

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 20

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 21

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 22

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 23

Chapter 4 – Review/Test

Common Core – Page No. 201

Estimate Quotients Using Multiples

Find two numbers the quotient is between. Then estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
175 ÷ 6
Think: 6 × 20 = 120 and 6 × 30 = 180. So, 175 ÷ 6 is between 20 and 30. Since 175 is closer to 180 than to 120, the quotient is about 30.
between 20 and 30
about 30

Answer: About 30

Explanation:
6 × 20 = 120 and 6 × 30 = 180. 175 is between 120 and 180. 175 ÷ 6 is closest to 20 and 30. So, 175 ÷ 6 is between 20 and 30. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 30.

Question 2.
53 ÷ 3
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 18

Explanation:
17 × 3= 51 and 18 × 3 = 54. 53 is between 51 and 54. 53 ÷ 3 is closest to 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 is between 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 will be about 18.

Question 3.
75 ÷ 4
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 19

Explanation:
18 × 4= 72 and 19 × 4= 76. 75 is between 72 and 76. 75 ÷ 4 is closest to 18 and 19. So, 75÷ 4 is between 18 and 19. So, 75 ÷ 4 will be about 19.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 201 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 201 Q5

Question 6.
191 ÷ 3
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 64

Explanation:
63 × 3 = 189 and 64 × 3 = 192. 191 is between 189 and 192. 191 ÷ 3 is closest to 63 and 64. So, 191 ÷ 3 is between 63 and 64. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 64.

Question 7.
100 ÷ 7
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 14

Explanation:
14 × 7 = 98 and 15 × 7 = 105. 100 is between 98 and 105. 100 ÷ 7 is closest to 14 and 15. So, 100 ÷ 7 is between 14 and 15. So, 100 ÷ 7 will be about 14.

Question 8.
438 ÷ 7
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 63

Explanation:
63 × 7 = 441 and 62 × 7 = 434. 438 is between 434 and 441. 438 ÷ 7 is closest to 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 is between 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 will be about 63.

Question 9.
103 ÷ 8
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 13

Explanation:
13 × 8 = 104 and 12 ×8 = 96. 103 is between 96 and 104. 103 ÷ 8 is closest to 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 is between 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 will be about 13.

Question 10.
255 ÷ 9
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 28

Explanation:
28 × 9 = 252 and 29 × 9 = 261. 255 is between 252 and 261. 255 ÷ 9 is closest to 28 and 29. So, 255 ÷ 9 is between 28 and 29. So, 255 ÷ 9 will be about 28.

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 201 Q11
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 201 Q11.1

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 201 Q12

Common Core – Page No. 202

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Abby did 121 sit-ups in 8 minutes. Which is the best estimate of the number of sit-ups she did in 1 minute?
Options:
a. about 12
b. about 15
c. about 16
d. about 20

Answer: b. About 15

Explanation:
15 × 8 = 120 and 16 × 8 = 128. 121 is between 120 and 128. 121 ÷ 8 is closest to 120 and 128. So, 121 ÷ 8 is between 15 and 16. So, 121 ÷ 8 will be about 15.

Question 2.
The Garibaldi family drove 400 miles in 7 hours. Which is the best estimate of the number of miles they drove in 1 hour?
Options:
a. about 40 miles
b. about 57 miles
c. about 60 miles
d. about 70 miles

Answer: b. About 57 miles

Explanation:
57 × 7 = 399 and 58 × 7 = 406. 400 is between 399 and 406. 400 ÷ 7 is closest to 57 and 58. So, 400 ÷ 7 is between 57 and 58. So, 400 ÷ 7 will be about 57.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Twelve boys collected 16 aluminium cans each. Fifteen girls collected 14 aluminium cans each. How many more cans did the girls collect than the boys?
Options:
a. 8
b. 12
c. 14
d. 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Number of aluminium cans boys had= 12× 16=192
Number of aluminium cans girls had = 15× 14=210
Girls collected more cans compared to boys,
Number of more cans collected by girls= 210-192=18

Question 4.
George bought 30 packs of football cards. There were 14 cards in each pack. How many cards did George buy?
Options:
a. 170
b. 320
c. 420
d. 520

Answer: c. 420

Explanation:
Number of packs of football cards= 30
Number of cards in each pack= 14
Total number of cards George bought=30×14=420

Question 5.
Sarah made a necklace using 5 times as many blue beads as white beads. She used a total of 30 beads. How many blue beads did Sarah use?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 24
d. 25

Answer: d. 25

Explanation:
Let the number of white beads be x while the number of blue beads are 5x.
Total number of beads in the necklace=30 beads
According to the problem,
5x+x=30
6x=30
x=30/6=5
Therefore the number of blue beads in the necklace are 5x= 5×5=25

Question 6.
This year, Ms. Webster flew 145,000 miles on business. Last year, she flew 83,125 miles on business. How many more miles did Ms. Webster fly on business this year?
Options:
a. 61,125 miles
b. 61,875 miles
c. 61,985 miles
d. 62,125 miles

Answer: b. 61,875 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in this year= 145,000 miles
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in the last year=83,125 miles
Number of more miles travelled by Ms Webster =145,000-83,125=61,875

Page No. 205

Use counters to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 1.
10 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 3 Remainder: 1

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 10 counters to represent the 10 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 10 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles equally filled are 3, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 10 ÷ 3, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 1, or 3 r1.

Question 2.
28 ÷ 5
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 5 Remainder: 3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of  counters formed = quotient of  28÷ 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 28 ÷ 5, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 3, or 5 r3.

Question 3.
15 ÷ 6
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:2 Remainder:3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 15 counters to represent the 15 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 28 ÷ 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 28 ÷ 6, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 3, or 2 r3.

Question 4.
11 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient:3 Remainder:2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 11 counters to represent the 3 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of  circles filled = quotient of 11 ÷ 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 11 ÷ 3, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 2, or 3 r2.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 205 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 205 Q6

Question 7.
25 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient: 8 Remainder: 1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 25  counters to represent the 25 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of  25 ÷ 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 25 ÷ 3, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 1, or 8 r1.

Question 8.
7)\(\overline { 20 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:2 Remainder:6

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 20 counters to represent the 20 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 7 qw20

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 9.
4)\(\overline { 35 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder:3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 35 counters to represent the 35 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of \(\overline { 35 } \)=8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

Question 10.
23 ÷ 8
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 2 Remainder: 7

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 23 counters to represent the 23 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 23 ÷ 8 = 2

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 7

Question 11.
Explain how you use a quick picture to find the quotient and remainder.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Quick pictures can be used to find the quotient and the remainder visually and accurately.

Explanation:
Example: 39÷ 5.
Use 39 counters.
Share the counters equally among 5 groups. The number of counters left over is the remainder.
For 39 ÷ 5, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 2, or 7 r2.
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the remainder.

Question 12.
Alyson has 46 beads to make bracelets. Each bracelet has 5 beads. How many more beads does Alyson need so that all the beads she has are used? Explain.
_____ more beads

Answer: 4 beads

Explanation:
Number of beads Alyson has= 46
Number of beads each bracelet needs=5
The number of bracelets which can be made = 46÷5

Since the remainder is one we can say that one bead is leftover after making 9 bracelets.
Therefore, 4 beads should be added to 1 so that all the beads are used up.

Question 13.
For 13a–13d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the division expression has a remainder.
a. 36 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Question 13.
b. 23 ÷ 3
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Question 13.
c. 82 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Question 13.
d. 28 ÷ 7
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Page No. 206

Question 14.
Macy, Kayley, Maddie, and Rachel collected 13 marbles. They want to share the marbles equally. How many marbles will each of the 4 girls get? How many marbles will be left over?
Oscar used a model to solve this problem. He says his model represents 4)\(\overline { 13 } \). What is his error?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 1
Look at the way Oscar solved this problem. Find and describe his error.
_________________________________________________________
Draw a correct model and solve the problem.
So, each of the 4 girls will get _______ marbles and _______ marble will be left over.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Quotient: 3 Remainder: 1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 13 counters to represent the 13 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 13 ÷ 4 = 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1
Therefore each girl will get 3 marbles.

Common Core – Page No. 207

Remainders

Use counters to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 1.
13 ÷ 4
3 r1

Answer: 3 r1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 13 counters to represent the 13 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 13 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 13 ÷ 4, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 1, or 3 r1.

Question 2.
24 ÷ 7
_____ R ______

Answer: 3 r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 24 counters to represent the 24 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 24 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 3 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 24 ÷ 7, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 3, or 3 r3.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 207 Q3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 207 Q4

Question 5.
6)\(\overline { 27 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: 4 r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 27 counters to represent the 27 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 27 ÷6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 27 ÷ 6, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 3, or 4 r3.

Question 6.
25 ÷ 9
_____ R ______

Answer: 2 r7

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 25 counters to represent the 25 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 25 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 2 counters, therefore, the quotient is 2

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 7

For 25 ÷ 7, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 7, or 2 r7.

Question 7.
3)\(\overline { 17 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: 5 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 17 counters to represent the 17 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 17 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 17 ÷ 3, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.

Question 8.
26 ÷ 4
_____ R ______

Answer: 6 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 26 counters to represent the 26 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 26 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 26 ÷ 4, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 9.
14 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 4 Remainder: 2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 14 counters to represent the 14 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 14 ÷ 3 = 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

Question 10.
5)\(\overline { 29 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 5 Remainder: 4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 29 counters to represent the 29 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 29 ÷ 5 = 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

Problem Solving

Question 11.
What is the quotient and remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 2
_____ R ______

Answer: quotient:6  remainder2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 20 counters to represent the 20 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 20 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 20 ÷ 3, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Question 12.
Mark drew the following model and said it represented the problem 21 ÷ 4. Is Mark’s model correct? If so, what is the quotient and remainder? If not, what is the correct quotient and remainder?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 3
_____ ; _____ r

Answer: 4 r5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 21 counters to represent the 21 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 21 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

For 21 ÷ 4, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 5, or 4 r5.

Common Core – Page No. 208

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the quotient and remainder for 32 ÷ 6?
Options:
a. 4 r3
b. 5 r1
c. 5 r2
d. 6 r1

Answer: c. 5 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 32 counters to represent the 32 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 32 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 32 ÷ 6, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.

Question 2.
What is the remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 4
Options:
a. 8
b. 4
c. 3
d. 1

Answer: c. 3

Explanation:
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the remainder.
The number of counters that are left  = remainder = 3

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Each kit to build a castle contains 235 parts. How many parts are in 4 of the kits?
Options:
a. 1,020
b. 940
c. 920
d. 840

Answer: b. 940

Explanation:
Number of parts used to build a castle in each kit=235 parts
Number of kits= 4
Total number of parts in 4 of the kits= 235 x 4=940 parts

Question 4.
In 2010, the population of Alaska was about 710,200. What is this number written in word form?
Options:
a. seven hundred ten thousand, two
b. seven hundred twelve thousand
c. seventy-one thousand, two
d. seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Answer: d. seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Explanation:
The ones and tens place of the number are zeroes, so the next place which is hundreds is considered and the value is 7 so, it can be written as seven hundred and in the thousands period it can be written as seven hundred ten thousand.

Question 5.
At the theater, one section of seats has 8 rows with 12 seats in each row. In the center of the first 3 rows are 4 broken seats that cannot be used. How many seats can be used in the section?
Options:
a. 84
b. 88
c. 92
d. 96

Answer: c. 92

Explanation:
Number of rows at the theatre = 8
Number of seats each row= 12
Number of seats broken and that cannot be used to sit= 4
Total number of seats that can be used= 12 x 8-4=96-4=92

Question 6.
What partial products are shown by the model below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 5
Options:
a. 300, 24
b. 300, 600, 40, 60
c. 300, 60, 40, 24
d. 300, 180, 40, 24

Answer: d. 300, 180, 40, 24

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 10=300
Area of green rectangle= 4 x 10 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 6 x 30= 180
Area of blue rectangle= 4 x 6= 24

Common Core – Page No. 211

Question 1.
Olivia baked 53 mini-loaves of banana bread to be sliced for snacks at a craft fair. She will place an equal number of loaves in 6 different locations. How many loaves will be at each location?
a. Divide to find the quotient and remainder.
□ r □
6)\(\overline { 53 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder: 5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 53 counters to represent the 53 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 53 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 8 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

Therefore, there will be 8 loaves at each location.

Question 1.
b. Decide how to use the quotient and remainder to answer the question.
Type below:
____________

Answer:

The quotient is used to determine the number of loaves at each location, while the remainder gives us the information about the number of loaves left after placing in different locations.

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 53 counters to represent the 53 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 53 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 8 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5
Therefore, there will be 8 mini loaves at each location.

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 2.
What if Olivia wants to put only whole loaves at each location? How many loaves will be at each location?
_______ whole loaves

Answer: Since there are 8 mini loaves at each location. Then there will be 4 whole loaves.

Explanation:
Olivia baked 53 mini-loaves of banana bread

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 211 Q3

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 4.
Myra has a 17-foot roll of crepe paper to make 8 streamers to decorate for a party. How long will each streamer be if she cuts the roll into equal pieces?
Type below:
____________

Answer: 2 foot

Explanation:
Length of the crepe paper = 17 foot
Number of streamers in the party=8
Length of each part if they are cut into equal pieces = 17 ÷ 8

Question 5.
Juan has a piano recital next month. Last week he practiced for 8 hours in the morning and 7 hours in the afternoon. Each practice session is 2 hours long. How many full practice sessions did Juan complete?
_______ full practice sessions

Answer: 7 full practice sessions

Explanation:
Number of hours he practiced in the morning= 8 hours
Each practice session is 2 hours long
Number of full practice sessions attended by Juan in the morning= 8÷2=4
Number of hours he practiced in the afternoon= 7 hours
Number of full practice sessions attended by Juan in the evening= 7÷2=3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 211 Q6

Page No. 212

Use the picture for 7–9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 6

Question 7.
Teresa is making sock puppets just like the one in the picture. If she has 53 buttons, how many puppets can she make?
_______ sock puppets

Answer: 17 sock puppets

Explanation:
Total number of buttons Teresa has=53
Number of buttons each puppet needs= 3
Number of sock puppets made= Quotient of 53÷3=17 sock puppets

Question 8.
Write a question about Teresa and the sock puppets for which the answer is 3. Explain the answer.
Type below:
____________

Answer: How many buttons did Teresa use for one sock puppet?

Explanation:
Total number of sock puppets made= 17
Number of buttons used for making 17 sock puppets = 52
then,
Number of buttons used for one sock puppet= Quotient of 52÷17= 3 buttons

Question 9.
Interpret a Result How many more buttons will Teresa need if she wants to make 18 puppets? Explain.
_______ buttons

Answer: 1 button

Explanation:
After preparing 17 puppets there were 2 buttons leftover then on the addition of 1 button gives 3 buttons which can be used to prepare another puppet.

Question 10.
A total of 56 students signed up to play in a flag football league. If each team has 10 students, how many more students will need to sign up so all of the students can be on a team?
_______ students

Answer: 4 students

Explanation:
Total number of students in the football league= 56
Number of students in each group= 10
then,
Number of groups= Quotient of 56÷10=5 groups
Remainder= 6
By the addition of 4 students, the group of 6 gets completed by 10
Therefore, 4 students should be added so that all students can be on a team.

Question 11.
A teacher plans for groups of her students to eat lunch at tables. She has 34 students in her class. Each group will have 7 students. How many tables will she need? Explain how to use the quotient and remainder to answer the question.
_______ tables

Answer: She needs 3 tables

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 34 counters to represent the 34 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 34 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 6
The quotient is used to indicate the number of groups
Therefore, there will be 4 tables.
While the remainder is used to determine the number of students in the incomplete group.

Common Core – Page No. 213

Interpret the Remainder

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 1.
Hakeem has 100 tomato plants. He wants to plant them in rows of 8. How many full rows will he have?
Think: 100 ÷ 8 is 12 with a remainder of 4. The question asks “how many full rows,” so use only the quotient.
12 full rows

Answer: 12 full rows

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 100 counters to represent the 100 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 100 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 12 counters, therefore, the quotient is 12
Therefore, the tomatoes placed in full rows are 12

Question 2.
A teacher has 27 students in her class. She asks the students to form as many groups of 4 as possible. How many students will not be in a group?
_______ students

Answer: 3 students will not be the group

Explanation:
Total number of students in the class= 27
Number of students who make a group=4
Number of groups that can be made =Quotient of 27÷ 4=6
Number of students who do not come under a group= Remainder of 27÷ 4=3

Question 3.
A sporting goods company can ship 6 footballs in each carton. How many cartons are needed to ship 75 footballs?
_______ cartons

Answer: 12 full cartons and 0.5 or 1/2 carton to ship all the 75 footballs

Explanation:
Total number of footballs that should be shipped= 75
Number of footballs placed in each carton = 6
Number of cartons required=Quotient of 75÷ 6=12


Since each carton carries 6 balls, half carton contains 3 balls because 6÷3=2, therefore, each half of the carton contains 3 balls.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 213 Q4

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 213 Q5

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Joanna has 70 beads. She uses 8 beads for each bracelet. She makes as many bracelets as possible. How many beads will Joanna have left over?
_______ beads

Answer: 6 beads

Explanation:
Total number of beads Joanna has= 70 beads
Number beads used for each bracelet= 8 beads
Number of bracelets made with these beads= Quotient of 70÷8= 7 bracelets
then,
The number of beads leftover= Remainder of 70÷8= 6 beads

Question 7.
A teacher wants to give 3 markers to each of her 25 students. Markers come in packages of 8. How many packages of markers will the teacher need?
_______ packages

Answer: 10 packages

Explanation:
Total number of students= 25
Number of markers each student got= 3
Total number of markers the teacher needs to distribute= 25 x 3= 75
Number of markers in each package= 8
Number of packages the teacher required= Quotient of 75÷8=9
While the remainder= 3
Therefore the total number packages=10

Common Core – Page No. 214

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marcus sorts his 85 baseball cards into stacks of 9 cards each. How many stacks of 9 cards can Marcus make?
Options:
a. 4
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: d. 10

Explanation:
Total number of baseball cards=85
Number of cards in each stack=9
Number of stacks sorted= Quotient of 85÷9=9
While the remainder=4
So the total number of stacks required= 10

Question 2.
A minivan can hold up to 7 people. How many minivans are needed to take 45 people to a basketball game?
Options:
a. 3
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: d. 7

Explanation:
A minivan can hold up to 7 people.
Total number of people who want to hire the minivan= 45 people
Number of minivans required= Quotient of 45÷7= 6 vans
While the remainder is 3.
Total number of minivans required to take the people to the baseball game= 7 minivans

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mrs. Wilkerson cut some oranges into 20 equal pieces to be shared by 6 friends. How many pieces did each person get and how many pieces were left over?
Options:
a. 2 pieces with 4 pieces leftover
b. 3 pieces with 2 pieces leftover
c. 3 pieces with 4 pieces leftover
d. 4 pieces with 2 pieces leftover

Answer: b. 3 pieces with 2 pieces leftover

Explanation:
Total number of orange pieces= 20
Number of friends= 6
Number of pieces each friend got= Quotient of 20÷6= 3 pieces
Number of pieces leftover= Remainder of 20÷6= 2 pieces

Question 4.
A school bought 32 new desks. Each desk cost $24. Which is the best estimate of how much the school spent on the new desks?
Options:
a. $500
b. $750
c. $1,000
d. $1,200

Answer: b. $750

Explanation:
Total number of desks= 32
Cost of each desk= $24
Total cost spent on the desks= 32 x 24=$768

So the estimated value can be $768

Question 5.
Kris has a box of 8 crayons. Sylvia’s box has 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box. How many crayons are in Sylvia’s box?
Options:
a. 48
b. 42
c. 36
d. 4

Answer: 48 crayons

Explanation:
Number of crayons in Kris box=8
Number of crayons in Sylvia’s box= 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box= 6 x 8=48

Question 6.
Yesterday, 1,743 people visited the fair. Today, there are 576 more people at the fair than yesterday. How many people are at the fair today?
Options:
a. 1,167
b. 2,219
c. 2,319
d. 2,367

Answer: c. 2,319

Explanation:
Number of people in the fair yesterday= 1,743
Number of more people at the fair than yesterday= 576
Total number of people in the fair today=2,319

Page No. 216

Question 1.
Divide. 2,800 ÷ 7
What basic fact can you use? ___________
2,800 = 28 ___________
28 hundreds ÷ 7 = ___________
2,800 ÷ 7 = ___________
Type below:
___________

Answer: 400

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,800 = 28 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 28 hundreds ÷ 4 = 4 hundreds
2,800 ÷ 7 = 400

Question 2.
Divide. 280 ÷ 7
What basic fact can you use? ___________
280 = 28 ___________
28 tens ÷ _____ = 4 ___________
280 ÷ 7 = _____
Type below:
___________

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 4 = 4 tens
280 ÷ 7 = 40

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 216 Q3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 216 Q4

Question 5.
4,500 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,500 = 45 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 45 hundreds ÷ 9 = 5 hundreds
4,500 ÷ 9 = 500

Question 6.
560 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 70

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 56 ÷ 8
STEP 2 Use place value. 560 = 56 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 56 tens ÷ 8 = 7 tens
560 ÷ 8 = 70

Question 7.
6,400 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 64 ÷ 8
STEP 2 Use place value. 6,400 =64 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 64 hundreds ÷ 8 = 8 hundreds
6,400 ÷ 8 = 800

Question 8.
3,500 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 35 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,500 = 35 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 35 hundreds ÷ 7 = 5 hundreds
3,500 ÷ 7 = 500

Use Patterns Algebra Find the unknown number.

Question 9.
420 ÷ ______ = 60

Answer: 7

Explanation:
To find the divisor (the missing number) divide 420 with 60

Therefore the quotient of 420 ÷ 60= The missing number=7

Question 10.
______ ÷ 4 = 30

Answer: 120

Explanation:
To find the dividend (the missing number) we must multiply the divisor and the quotient.
Therefore the dividend is 30 x 4=120.

Question 11.
810 ÷ ______ = 90

Answer: 9

Explanation:
To find the divisor (the missing number) divide 810 with 90

Therefore the quotient of 810 ÷ 90= The missing number=9

Question 12.
Divide 400 ÷ 40. Explain how patterns and place value can help.
______

Answer: 10

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 40 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 400 = 40 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 40 tens ÷ 4 = 1 tens
400 ÷ 40 = 10

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 216 Q13

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 216 Q14

Page No. 217

Question 15.
Jamal put 600 pennies into 6 equal rolls. How many pennies were in each roll?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 7
______ pennies

Answer: 100 pennies

Explanation:
Total number of pennies= 600
Number of rolls= 6
The number of pennies= Quotient of 600 ÷ 6=100

Question 16.
Sela has 6 times as many coins now as she had 4 months ago. If Sela has 240 coins now, how many coins did she have 4 months ago?
______ coins

Answer: 60 coins

Explanation:
Let the number of coins four months ago be x coins.
According to the question,
Number of coins Sela has at present = 4x
4x=240
x= 240 ÷ 4=60
Therefore the number of coins Sela has=60

Question 17.
Chip collected 2,090 dimes. Sue collected 1,910 dimes. They divided all their dimes into 8 equal stacks. How many dimes are in each stack?
______ dimes

Answer:

Explanation:
Number of dimes Chip collected= 2,090
Number of dimes Sue collected= 1,910
Total number of dimes= 2,090+1,910= 4100
Number of stacks= 8
Number of dimes in each stack = Quotient of 4100 ÷8=512

Question 18.
Communicate Mr. Roberts sees a rare 1937 penny. The cost of the penny is $210. If he saves $3 each week, will Mr. Roberts have enough money to buy the penny in one year? Explain.
______

Answer: No Mr. Roberts cannot buy the penny in one year.

Explanation:
Amount saved in each week= $3
Number of weeks in a year= 52
The total amount saved= 52 x 3=$156
Cost of the penny=$210
Therefore Mr. Roberts cannot buy the penny in one year.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 217 Q19
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 217 Q19.1

Page No. 218

Question 20.
Which quotients are equal to 20? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 600 ÷ 2
b. 1,200 ÷ 6
c. 180 ÷ 9
d. 140 ÷ 7
e. 500 ÷ 5

Answer: c. 180 ÷ 9
d. 140 ÷ 7

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 180 counters to represent the 180 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 180 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 20 counters, therefore, the quotient is 20

Quotient:
A. Use 140 counters to represent the 140 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 140 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 20 counters, therefore, the quotient is 20

Insect Flight

True flight is shared only by insects, bats, and birds. Flight in insects varies from the clumsy flight of some beetles to the acrobatic moves of dragonflies.
The wings of insects are not moved by muscles attached to the wings. Muscles in the middle part of the body, or the thorax, move the wings. The thorax changes shape as the wings move.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 8

Question 21.
About how many times do a damselfly’s wings beat in 1 minute?
______ times

Answer: 900

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 3 minutes= 2,700
Number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 1 minute= 2,700 ÷3=900

Question 22.
About how many times do a scorpion fly’s wings beat in 6 minutes?
______ times

Answer: 10,000

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of scorpionfly in 3 minutes=5,000
Number of parts of time-intervals in 6 minutes = 6÷3=2
Number of wingbeats of scorpionfly in 6 minutes= 5,000 x 2 = 10,000

Question 23.
In one minute, how many more times do a damselfly’s wings beat than a large white butterfly’s wings?
______ more times

Answer: 200

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 3 minutes= 2,700
Number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 1 minute= 2,700 ÷3=900

Total number of wingbeats of large white butterfly in 3 minutes= 2,100
Number of wingbeats of large white butterfly in 1 minute= 2,100 ÷3=700

Number of more times the damselfly’s wings beat than a large white butterfly=900-700=200

Question 24.
What’s the Question? The answer is about 2,300 times.
Type below:
___________

Answer: About how many times do an Aeschind dragonfly’s wings beat in 1 minute?

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Aeschind dragonfly’s in 3 minutes= 6,900
Number of wingbeats of Aeschind dragonfly’s in 1 minute= 6,900 ÷3=2,300

Common Core – Page No. 219

Divide Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 1.
3,600 ÷ 4 = 900
Think: 3,600 is 36 hundreds.
Use the basic fact 36 ÷ 4 = 9.
So, 36 hundreds ÷ 4 = 9 hundreds, or 900.

Answer: 900

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,600 = 36 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 36 hundered ÷ 4 = 9 hundreds
3,600 ÷ 4 = 900

Question 2.
240 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 24 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 240 = 24 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 24 tens ÷ 6 = 4 tens
240 ÷ 6 = 40

Question 3.
5,400 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 600

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 54 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 5,400 = 54 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 54 hundreds ÷ 9 = 6 hundreds
5,400 ÷ 9 = 600

Question 4.
300 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 30 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 300 = 30 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 30 tens ÷ 5 = 60 tens
300 ÷ 5 = 60

Question 5.
4,800 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 48 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,800 = 48 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 48 hundreds ÷ 6 = 80 hundreds
4,800 ÷ 6 = 800

Question 6.
420 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 42 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 420 = 42 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 42 tens ÷ 7 = 60 tens
420 ÷ 7 = 60

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 219 Q7

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 219 Q8

Question 9.
1,200 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 300

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 12 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,200 = 12 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 12 hundreds ÷ 4 = 3 hundreds
1,200 ÷ 4 = 300

Question 10.
360 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 360 = 36 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 36 tens ÷ 6 = 6 tens
360 ÷ 6 = 60

Find the quotient.

Question 11.
28 ÷ 4 = ______
280 ÷ 4 = ______
2,800 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 7, 70, 700

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 28 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 7 counters, therefore, the quotient is 7

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 4 = 7 tens
280 ÷ 4 = 70

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,800 = 28 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 28 hundreds ÷ 4 = 7 hundreds
2,800 ÷ 4 = 700

Question 12.
18 ÷ 3 = ______
180 ÷ 3 = ______
1,800 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 6, 60, 600

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 18 counters to represent the 18 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 18 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 180 = 18 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 18 tens ÷ 3 = 6 tens
180 ÷ 6 = 60

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,800 = 18 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 18 hundreds ÷ 3 = 6 hundreds
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600

Question 13.
45 ÷ 9 = ______
450 ÷ 9 = ______
4,500 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 5, 50, 500

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 45 counters to represent the 45 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 45 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 450 = 45 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 45 tens ÷ 9 = 5 tens
450 ÷ 9 = 50

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,500 = 45 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 45 hundreds ÷ 9 = 5 hundreds
4,500 ÷ 9 = 500

Problem Solving

Question 14.
At an assembly, 180 students sit in 9 equal rows. How many students sit in each row?
______ students

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Total number of students= 180
Number of rows= 9
Number of students in each row= 180 ÷9=20

Question 15.
Hilary can read 560 words in 7 minutes. How many words can Hilary read in 1 minute?
______ words

Answer: 80

Explanation:
Total number of words Hilary can read in 7 minutes = 560
Number of words Hilary can read in 1 minute= 560 ÷ 7= 80

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 219 Q16

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 219 Q17

Common Core – Page No. 220

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A baseball player hits a ball 360 feet to the outfield. It takes the ball 4 seconds to travel this distance. How many feet does the ball travel in 1 second?
Options:
a. 9 feet
b. 40 feet
c. 90 feet
d. 900 feet

Answer: c. 90 feet

Explanation:
The height to which the player hits a ball=360 feet
Height to which the ball travels in 1 second= 360÷4= 90 feet

Question 2.
Sebastian rides his bike 2,000 meters in 5 minutes. How many meters does he bike in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 4 meters
b. 40 meters
c. 50 meters
d. 400 meters

Answer: d. 400 meters

Explanation:
Total number of meters travelled in 5 minutes= 2,000
Number of meters travelled in 1 minute= 2,000÷5= 400

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A full container of juice holds 63 ounces. How many 7-ounce servings of juice are in a full container?
Options:
a. 1
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: c. 9

Explanation:
A full container of juice holds= 63 ounces
Quantity of servings of juice in one glass=7 ounce
Number of servings of the juice are= 63÷7=9

Question 4.
Paolo pays $244 for 5 identical calculators. Which is the best estimate of how much Paolo pays for one calculator?
Options:
a. $40
b. $50
c. $60
d. $245

Answer: b. $50

Explanation:
Amount Paolo pays for the identical calculators = $244
Number of identical calculators=5
The best-estimated value of each identical calculator=$244 ÷ 5is approximately $50

Question 5.
A football team paid $28 per jersey. They bought 16 jerseys. How much money did the team spend on jerseys?
Options:
a. $44
b. $196
c. $408
d. $448

Answer: d. $448

Explanation:
Cost of each jersey=$28
Number of jerseys= 16
Total cost of the jerseys= $28 x 16= $448

Question 6.
Suzanne bought 50 apples at the apple orchard. She bought 4 times as many red apples as green apples. How many more red apples than green apples did Suzanne buy?
Options:
a. 10
b. 25
c. 30
d. 40

Answer: d. 40

Explanation:
Let the number of green apples be x and the number of red apples be 4x
4x + x = 50
x = 50  ÷ 5= 10
Number of red balls = 4x = 4 x 10 = 40

Page No. 222

Question 1.
Estimate. 1,718 ÷ 4
Think: What number close to 1,718 is easy to divide by 4?
______ is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
______ ÷ 4
______ is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
______ ÷ 4
Choose 1,600 because
__________________________________.
16 ÷ 4 = ______
1,600 ÷ ______ = ______
1,718 ÷ 4 is about ______
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Explanation:
What number close to 1,718 is easy to divide by 4?
1,600 is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
1,600 ÷ 4
Choose 1,600 because it is close to 1,718 and can easily be divided by 4.
16 ÷ 4 = 4
1,600 ÷ 4 = 400
1,600 ÷ 4 is about 400

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 2.
455 ÷ 9
______

Answer: 50

Explanation:
What number close to 455 is easy to divide by 9?
450 is close to 455. What basic fact can you use?
450 ÷ 9
Choose 450 because it is close to 455 and can easily be divided by 9.
45 ÷ 9 = 5
450 ÷ 9 = 50
455 ÷ 9 is about 50

Question 3.
1,509 ÷ 3
______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
What number close to 1,509 is easy to divide by 3?
1,500 is close to 1,509. What basic fact can you use?
1,500 ÷ 3
Choose 1,500 because it is close to 1,509 and can easily be divided by 3.
15 ÷ 3 = 5
1,500 ÷ 3 = 500
1,509 ÷ 3 is about 500

Question 4.
176 ÷ 8
______

Answer:

Explanation:
What number close to 176 is easy to divide by 8?
160 is close to 176. What basic fact can you use?
160 ÷ 8
Choose 160 because it is close to 176 and can easily be divided by 8.
16 ÷ 8 = 2
160 ÷ 8 = 20
176 ÷ 8 is about 20

Question 5.
2,795 ÷ 7
______

Answer:  400

Explanation:
What number close to 2,795 is easy to divide by 7?
2,800 is close to 2,795. What basic fact can you use?
2,800 ÷ 7
Choose 2,800 because it is close to 2,795 and can easily be divided by 7.
28 ÷ 7 = 4
2,800 ÷ 7 = 400
2,795 ÷ 7 is about 400

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates that the quotient is between.

Question 6.
5,321 ÷ 6
______ and ______

Answer: 900

Explanation:
What number close to 5,321 is easy to divide by 6?
5,400 is close to 5,321. What basic fact can you use?
5,400 ÷ 6
Choose 5,400 because it is close to 5,321 and can easily be divided by 6.
54 ÷ 6 = 9
5,400 ÷ 6 = 900
5,321 ÷ 6 is about 900

Question 7.
1,765 ÷ 6
______ and ______

Answer: 300

Explanation:
What number close to 1,765 is easy to divide by 6?
1,800 is close to 1,765. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 6
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,765 and can easily be divided by 6.
18 ÷ 6 = 3
1,800 ÷ 6 = 300
1,765 ÷ 6 is about 300

Question 8.
1,189 ÷ 3
______ and ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:
What number close to 1,189 is easy to divide by 3?
1,200 is close to 1,189. What basic fact can you use?
1,200 ÷ 3
Choose 1,200 because it is close to 1,189 and can easily be divided by 3.
12 ÷ 3 = 4
1,200 ÷ 3 = 400
1,189 ÷ 3 is about 400

Question 9.
2,110 ÷ 4
______ and ______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
What number close to 2,110 is easy to divide by 4?
2,000 is close to 2,110. What basic fact can you use?
2,000 ÷ 4
Choose 2,000 because it is close to 2,110 and can easily be divided by 4.
20 ÷ 4 = 5
2,000 ÷ 4 = 500
2,110 ÷ 4 is about 500

Reason Abstractly Algebra Estimate to compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 10.
613 ÷ 3 ______ 581 ÷ 2

Answer: 613 ÷ 3 < 581 ÷ 2

Explanation:
What number close to 613 is easy to divide by 3?
600 is close to 613. What basic fact can you use?
600 ÷ 3
Choose 600 because it is close to 613 and can easily be divided by 3.
6 ÷ 3 = 2
600 ÷ 3 = 200
613 ÷ 3 is about 200

What number close to 581 is easy to divide by 2?
580 is close to 581. What basic fact can you use?
580 ÷ 2
Choose 580 because it is close to 581 and can easily be divided by 2.
58 ÷ 2 = 29
580 ÷ 2 = 290
581 ÷ 2 is about 290

Question 11.
364 ÷ 4 ______ 117 ÷ 6

Answer: 364 ÷ 4 >  117 ÷ 6

Explanation:
What number close to 364 is easy to divide by 4?
360 is close to 364. What basic fact can you use?
360 ÷ 4
Choose 360 because it is close to 364 and can easily be divided by 4.
36 ÷ 4 = 9
360 ÷ 4 = 90
364 ÷ 4 is about 90

What number close to 117 is easy to divide by 6?
120 is close to 117. What basic fact can you use?
120 ÷ 6
Choose 120 because it is close to 117 and can easily be divided by 6.
12 ÷ 6 = 2
120 ÷ 6 = 20
117 ÷ 6 is about 20

Question 12.
2,718 ÷ 8 ______ 963 ÷ 2

Answer: 2,718 ÷ 8 < 963 ÷ 2

Explanation:
What number close to 2,718 is easy to divide by 8?
2,400 is close to 2,718. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 8
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,718 and can easily be divided by 8.
24 ÷ 8 = 3
2,400 ÷ 8 = 300
2,718 ÷ 8 is about 300

What number close to 963 is easy to divide by 2?
960 is close to 963. What basic fact can you use?
960 ÷ 2
Choose 960 because it is close to 963 and can easily be divided by 2.
96 ÷ 2 = 48
960 ÷ 2 = 480
963 ÷ 2 is about 480

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 222 Q13

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 222 Q14

Page No. 223

Use the table for 15–17.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 9

Question 15.
About how many times does a chicken’s heart beat in 1 minute?
about ______ times

Answer: 275

Explanation:
Number of times the chicken’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 1,375
Number of times the chicken’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 1,375÷ 5= 275

Question 16.
About how many times does a cow’s heart beat in 2 minutes?
about ______ times

Answer: 130

Explanation:
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 325
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 325÷5=65
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 2 minutes= 65 x 2=130

Question 17.
Use Reasoning About how many times faster does a cow’s heart beat than a whale’s?
about ______ times

Answer: nearly 11 times

Explanation:
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 325
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 325÷5=65

Number of times the whale’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 31
Number of times the whale’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 31÷5=6.2= rounding to nearest whole number 6 (approx)

Number of more times the cow’s heartbeats compared to whale’s=65÷6=10.8 times=rounding to a nearest whole number 11(approx)

Question 18.
Martha had 154 stamps and her sister had 248 stamps. They combined their collections and put the stamps in an album. If they want to put 8 stamps on each page, about how many pages would they need?
about ______ times

Answer: 50.25 pages

Explanation:
Number of stamps Martha has= 154
Number of stamps Martha’s sister has= 248
The total number of stamps they have = 154 +248 = 402
Number of stamps on each page= 8
Number of pages= 402÷8= 50.25 pages= 51 (approx)

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 223 Q19

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 223 Q20

Page No. 224

Question 21.
Cause and Effect
The reading skill cause and effect can help you understand how one detail in a problem is related to another detail.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 10
Chet wants to buy a new bike that costs $276. Chet mows his neighbor’s lawn for $15 each week. Since Chet does not have money saved, he needs to decide which layaway plan he can afford to buy the new bike.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 11
Which plan should Chet choose?
3-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 3
Estimate.
$270 ÷ 3 ______
6-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 6
Estimate.
$300 ÷ 6 _____
Chet earns $15 each week. Since there are usually 4 weeks in a month, multiply to see which payment he can afford.
$15 × 4 = _______
So, Chet can afford the ______ layaway plan.
Type below:
___________

Answer: Chet can afford the 3-month layaway plan.

Explanation:
What number close to $276  is easy to divide by 3?
$270 is close to $276. What basic fact can you use?
$270 ÷ 3
Choose 270 because it is close to 276 and can easily be divided by 3.
27 ÷ 3 = 9
270 ÷ 3 = 90
$276 ÷ 3 is about 90

Use estimation to solve.

Question 21.
Sofia wants to buy a new bike that costs $214. Sofia helps her grandmother with chores each week for $18. Estimate to find which layaway plan Sofia should choose and why.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 3 months

Explanation:
What number close to $214  is easy to divide by 3?
$215 is close to $214. What basic fact can you use?
$215 ÷ 3
Choose 215 because it is close to 214 and can easily be divided by 3.
215 ÷ 3 = 71.6=72 (approx)
$214 ÷ 3 is about 72

Question 22.
Describe a situation when you have used cause and effect to help you solve a math problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer: To buy a bike

Explanation:
3-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 3
Estimate.
$270 ÷ 3 ______
6-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 6
Estimate.
$300 ÷ 6 _____
Chet earns $15 each week. Since there are usually 4 weeks in a month, multiply to see which payment he can afford.
$15 × 4 = _______
So, Chet can afford the ______ layaway plan.

The above is a profit gaining plan to buy a bike.

Common Core – Page No. 224

Estimate Quotients Using Compatible Numbers

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
389 ÷ 4
400 ÷ 4 = 100

Answer: 100

Explanation:
What number close to 389 is easy to divide by 4?
400 is close to 389. What basic fact can you use?
400 ÷ 4
Choose 400 because it is close to 389 and can easily be divided by 4.
40 ÷ 4 = 10
400 ÷ 4 = 100
389 ÷ 4 is about 100

Question 2.
358 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 120

Explanation:
What number close to 358 is easy to divide by 3?
360 is close to 358. What basic fact can you use?
360 ÷ 3
Choose 360 because it is close to 358 and can easily be divided by 3.
36 ÷3 = 12
360 ÷ 3 =120
358 ÷ 3 is about 120

Question 3.
784 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 100

Explanation:
What number close to 784 is easy to divide by 8?
800 is close to 784. What basic fact can you use?
800 ÷ 8
Choose 800 because it is close to 784 and can easily be divided by 8.
80 ÷ 8 = 10
800 ÷ 8 = 100
784 ÷ 8 is about 100

Question 4.
179 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 20

Explanation:
What number close to 179 is easy to divide by 9?
180 is close to 179. What basic fact can you use?
180 ÷ 9
Choose 180 because it is close to 179 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
180 ÷ 9 = 20
179 ÷ 9 is about 20

Question 5.
315 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 40

Explanation:
What number close to 315 is easy to divide by 8?
320 is close to 315. What basic fact can you use?
320 ÷ 8
Choose 320 because it is close to 315 and can easily be divided by 8.
32 ÷ 8 = 4
320 ÷ 8 =40
315 ÷ 8 is about 40

Question 6.
2,116 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,116 is easy to divide by 7?
2,100 is close to 2,116. What basic fact can you use?
2,100 ÷ 7
Choose 2,100 because it is close to 2,116 and can easily be divided by 7.
21 ÷ 7= 3
2,100 ÷ 7 = 300
2,116 ÷ 7 is about 300

Question 7.
4,156 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 600

Explanation:
What number close to 4,156 is easy to divide by 7?
4,200 is close to 4,156. What basic fact can you use?
4,200 ÷7
Choose 4,200 because it is close to 4,156 and can easily be divided by 7.
42 ÷ 7 = 6
4,200 ÷ 7 = 600
4,156 ÷ 7 is about 600

Question 8.
474 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 50

Explanation:
What number close to 474 is easy to divide by 9?
450 is close to 474. What basic fact can you use?
450 ÷ 9
Choose 450 because it is close to 474 and can easily be divided by 9.
45 ÷ 9 = 5
450 ÷ 9 = 50
474 ÷ 9 is about 50

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates that the quotient is between.

Question 9.
1,624 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 500 and 600

Explanation:
What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,500 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,500 ÷ 3
Choose 1,500 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
15 ÷ 3 = 5
1,500 ÷ 3 = 500
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 500

What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,800 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 3
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
18 ÷ 3 = 6
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 600

Question 10.
2,593 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 400 and 500

Explanation:
What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
2,400 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 6
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
24 ÷ 6 = 4
2,400 ÷ 6 = 400
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 400

What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
3,000 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
3000 ÷ 6
Choose 3,000 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
30 ÷ 6 = 5
3,000 ÷ 6 = 500
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 500

Question 11.
1,045 ÷ 2
_____ ÷ 2 = _____
_____ ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 520 and 525

Explanation:
What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,040 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,040 ÷ 2
Choose 1,040 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,04 ÷ 2 = 52
1,040 ÷ 2 = 520
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 520

What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,050 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,050 ÷ 2
Choose 1,050 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,050 ÷ 2 = 525
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 525

Question 12.
1,754 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 195 and 200

Explanation:
What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,755 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,755 ÷ 9
Choose 1,755 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
1,755 ÷ 9 = 195
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 195

What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,800 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 9
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
1,800 ÷ 9 = 200
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 200

Question 13.
2,363 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 295 and 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,360 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,360 ÷ 8
Choose 2,360 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
2,360 ÷ 8 = 295
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 295

What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,400 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 8
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
24 ÷ 8 = 3
2,400 ÷ 8= 300
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 300

Question 14.
1,649 ÷ 5
_____ ÷ 5 = _____
_____ ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 329 and 330

Explanation:
What number close to 1,649 is easy to divide by 5?
1,645 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,645 ÷ 5
Choose 1,645 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,645 ÷ 5 = 329
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 329

What number close to 1,650 is easy to divide by 5?
1,650 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,650 ÷ 5
Choose 1,650 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,650 ÷ 5 = 330
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 330

Question 15.
5,535 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 790 and 791

Explanation:
What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,530 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,530 ÷ 7
Choose 5,530 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,530 ÷ 7 = 790
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 790

What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,537 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,537 ÷ 7
Choose 5,537 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,537 ÷ 7 = 791
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 791

Question 16.
3,640 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 606 and 607

Explanation:
What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,636 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,636 ÷ 6
Choose 3,636 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
36 ÷ 6 = 6
3,636 ÷ 6 = 606
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 606

What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,642 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,642 ÷ 6
Choose 3,642 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
3,642 ÷ 6 = 607
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 607

Problem Solving

Question 17.
A CD store sold 3,467 CDs in 7 days. About the same number of CDs were sold each day. About how many CDs did the store sell each day?
about _____ CDs

Answer: 495(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of CDs in the store= 3,467
Number of days= 7
Number of CDs sold on one day= 3,467 ÷ 7=495(approx)

Question 18.
Marcus has 731 books. He puts about the same number of books on each of 9 shelves in his a bookcase. About how many books are on each shelf?
about _____ books

Answer: 81 books(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of books Marcus has= 731
Number of shelves= 9
Number of books on each shelf= 731÷9= 81 (approx)

Common Core – Page No. 226

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Jamal is planting seeds for a garden nursery. He plants 9 seeds in each container. If Jamal has 296 seeds to plant, how many containers will he use?
Options:
a. about 20
b. about 30
c. about 200
d. about 300

Answer: b. about 30

Explanation:
Total number of seeds Jamal has= 296
Number of seeds placed in each container= 9
Number of containers Jamal used= 296÷9= 32.8=33 (approx)
Therefore, the number of containers used is about 30

Question 2.
Winona purchased a set of vintage beads. There are 2,140 beads in the set. If she uses the beads to make bracelets that have 7 beads each, how many bracelets can she make?
Options:
a. about 30
b. about 140
c. about 300
d. about 14,000

Answer: c. about 300

Explanation:
Total number of beads Winona has= 2,140
Number of beads in each bracelet= 7
Number of bracelets made= 2,140÷7=305.7=306(approx)
Therefore, the number of bracelets made are about 30

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A train traveled 360 miles in 6 hours. How many miles per hour did the train travel?
Options:
a. 60 miles per hour
b. 66 miles per hour
c. 70 miles per hour
d. 600 miles per hour

Answer: a. 60 miles per hour

Explanation:
Total number of miles travelled by the train= 360
Time taken by the train to cover 360 miles= 6 hours
Number of miles travelled in each hour= 360÷6=60 miles

Question 4.
An orchard has 12 rows of pear trees. Each row has 15 pear trees. How many pear trees are there in the orchard?
Options:
a. 170
b. 180
c. 185
d. 190

Answer: b. 180

Explanation:
Number of rows of pear trees in an orchard= 12
Number of pear trees in each row=15
Total number of pear trees in the orchard= 12 x 15=180

Question 5.
Megan rounded 366,458 to 370,000. To which place did Megan round the number?
Options:
a. hundred thousand
b. ten thousand
c. thousands
d. hundreds

Answer: b. ten thousand

Explanation:
The given number is 366,458, the ten thousand place digit has 6 which while rounding off should be changed to the next consecutive number and the digits in the other places should be written as zeroes.

Question 6.
Mr. Jessup, an airline pilot, flies 1,350 miles a day. How many miles will he fly in 8 days?
Options:
a. 1,358 miles
b. 8,400 miles
c. 10,800 miles
d. 13,508 miles

Answer: c. 10,800 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in one day= 1,350 miles
Number of days=8
Total number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in 8 days= 1,350 x 8= 10,800 miles

Page No. 229

Model the division on the grid.

Question 1.
26 ÷ 2 = (□ ÷ 2) + (□ ÷ 2)
= □ + □
= □
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 12
Type below:
_________

Answer: 26 ÷ 2 = (20 ÷ 2) + (6 ÷ 2)
= 10 + 3
= 13

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 26 ÷ 2. Shade columns of 2 until you have 26 squares.
How many groups of 2 can you make?
B. Think of 26 as 20 + 6. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (20 + 6 ) ÷ 2. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
26 ÷ 2 = (20÷ 2 ) + (6÷ 2)
= 10+ 3
= 13

Question 2.
45 ÷ 3 = (□ ÷ 3) + (□ ÷ 3)
= □ + □
= □
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 13
Type below:
_________

Answer: 45 ÷ 3 = (15 ÷ 3) + (30 ÷ 3)
= 5 + 10
= 15

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 45 ÷ 3.
Shade columns of 3 until you have 45 squares.
How many groups of 3 can you make? _
B. Think of 45 as 15 + 30. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (15 + 30 ) ÷ 3. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
45 ÷ 3 = (15÷ 3 ) + (30÷ 3 )
= 5 + 10
= 15

Find the quotient.

Question 3.
82 ÷ 2 = (□ ÷ 2) + (□ ÷ 2)
= □ + □
= □
______

Answer: 82 ÷ 2 = (80 ÷ 2) + ( 2÷ 2)
= 40 + 1
= 41

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 82 ÷ 2. Shade columns of 2 until you have 80 squares.
How many groups of 2 can you make?
B. Think of 82 as 80 + 2. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (80 + 2 ) ÷ 2. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colors.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
82 ÷ 2 = (80 ÷ 2 ) + (2÷ 2)
= 40 + 1
= 41

Question 4.
208 ÷ 4 = (□ ÷ 4) + (□ ÷ 4)
= □ + □
= □
______

Answer: 208 ÷ 4 = (200 ÷ 4) + (8 ÷ 4)
= 50 + 4
= 54

Explanation:
A. Outline another model to show 208 ÷ 4.
How many groups of 4 can you make?
B. Think of 208 as 200 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
208 ÷ 4 = (200 ÷ 4 ) + (8 ÷ 4 )
= 50 + 4
= 54

Use base-ten blocks to model the quotient.
Then record the quotient.

Question 5.
88 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 22

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 88 ÷ 4.
How many groups of 4 can you make?
B. Think of 88 as 80 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
88 ÷ 4 = (80 ÷ 4 ) + (8 ÷ 4 )
= 40 + 4
= 44

Question 6.
36 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 12

Explanation:

A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 36 ÷ 3.
Shade columns of 3 until you have 36 squares.
How many groups of 3 can you make? _
B. Think of 36 as 6 + 30. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (6 + 30 ) ÷ 3. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
36 ÷ 3 = (30÷ 3 ) + (6÷ 3 )
= 10 + 2
= 12

Question 7.
186 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 31

Explanation:

A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 186 ÷ 6.
Shade columns of 18 until you have 180 squares.
How many groups of 6 can you make? _
B. Think of 186 as 6 + 180. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (6 + 180 ) ÷ 6. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
186 ÷ 6 = (180÷ 6 ) + (6÷ 6 )
= 30 + 1
= 31

Question 8.
Explain how you can model finding quotients using the Distributive Property.
Type below:
_________

Answer: We can use the Distributive Property to break apart numbers to
make them easier to divide.

Explanation:
50
The Distributive Property of division says that dividing a sum by
a number is the same as dividing each addend by the number
and then adding the quotients.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 229 Q9

Page No. 230

Question 10.
Christelle went to a gift shop. The shop sells candles in a variety of sizes and colors. The picture shows a display of candles. Write a problem that can be solved using the picture.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 14
Pose a problem.      Solve your problem

Answer:
Question: How many candles are there in the gift shop?

Explanation:
Count the number of candles in the rows and columns and then multiply them, by this we can find out the total number of candles in the gift shop.

Describe how you could change the problem by changing the number of rows of candles. Then solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: There will be no change in the solution by changing the number of rows of candles.

Explanation:
By changing the number of rows of candles the number of columns increases but there will be no change in the total number of candles.

Question 11.
For 11a–11d, choose Yes or No to indicate if the expression shows a way to break apart the dividend to find the quotient 147 ÷ 7.
a. (135 ÷ 7) + (10 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
Because 137+10 is not equal to 147

Question 11.
b. (147 ÷ 3) + (147 ÷ 4)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
Because according to the distributive property we need to divide the dividend into two parts, but not the divisor.

Question 11.
c. (140 ÷ 7) + (7 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 147
STEP2 We can break the number 147 into 140 + 7
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (140 ÷ 7) + (7 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +1= 21

Question 11.
d. (70 ÷ 7) + (77 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 147
STEP2 We can break the number 147 into 70 + 77
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (70 ÷ 7) + (77 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +11= 21

Common Core – Page No. 231

Division and the Distributive Property

Find the quotient.

Question 1.
54 ÷ 3 = (30 ÷ 3) + (24 ÷ 3)
= 10 + 8
= 18
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 15

Answer: 18

Explanation:
54 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 54
STEP2 We can break the number 54 into 30 + 24
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (30 ÷ 3) + (24÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +8= 18

Question 2.
81 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 27

Explanation:
81 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 81
STEP2 We can break the number 81 into 21 + 60
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (21 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +7= 27

Question 3.
232 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 58

Explanation:
232 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 232
STEP2 We can break the number 232 into 200 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (200 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +8= 58

Question 4.
305 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 61

Explanation:
305 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 305
STEP2 We can break the number 305 into 300 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +1= 61

Question 5.
246 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 41

Explanation:
246 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 246
STEP2 We can break the number 246 into 240 + 6
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 6) + (6 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 40 +1= 41

Question 6.
69 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 23

Explanation:
69 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 69
STEP2 We can break the number 69 into 60 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +3= 23

Question 7.
477 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 53

Explanation:
477 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 477
STEP2 We can break the number 477 into 450 + 27
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (450 ÷ 9) + (27 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +3= 53

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 32

Explanation:
224 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 224
STEP2 We can break the number 224 into 210 + 14
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 7) + (14 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 30 +2= 32

Question 9.
72 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
72 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 72
STEP2 We can break the number 72 into 40 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (40 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +8= 18

Question 10.
315 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 105

Explanation:
315 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 315
STEP2 We can break the number 315 into 300 + 15
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 3) + (15 ÷3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 100 +5= 105

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Cecily picked 219 apples. She divided the apples equally into 3 baskets. How many apples are in each basket?
______ apples

Answer: 73 apples

Explanation:
The total number of apples Cecily picked= 219 apples
Number of parts into which she wanted to divide the apples= 3
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 219
STEP2 We can break the number 219 into 210 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 70 +3= 73

Question 12.
Jordan has 260 basketball cards. He divides them into 4 equal groups. How many cards are in each group?
______ cards

Answer: 65 cards

Explanation:
The total number of basketball cards Jordan has= 260 basketball cards
Number of parts into which he wanted to divide the cards= 4
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 260 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 260
STEP2 We can break the number 260 into 240 + 20
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 4) + (20 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +5= 65

Question 13.
The Wilsons drove 324 miles in 6 hours. If they drove the same number of miles each hour, how many miles did they drive in 1 hour?
______ miles

Answer: 54 miles

Explanation:
The total number of miles drove by Wilson= 324 miles
Number of hours he drove = 6
Number of miles drove in each hour = Quotient of 324 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 324
STEP2 We can break the number 324 into 300 + 24
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 6) + (24 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +4= 54

Question 14.
Phil has 189 stamps to put into his stamp album. He puts the same number of stamps on each of 9 pages. How many stamps does Phil put on each page?
______ stamps

Answer: 21 stamps

Explanation:
The total number of stamps Phil has= 189 stamps
Number of pages= 9
Number of stamps put on each page  = Quotient of 189 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 189
STEP2 We can break the number 189 into 180 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (180 ÷ 9) + (9 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +1= 21

Common Core – Page No. 232

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A landscaping company planted 176 trees in 8 equal rows in the new park. How many trees did the company plant in each row?
Options:
a. 18
b. 20
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: c. 22

Explanation:
The total number of trees in the landscaping= 176 trees
Number of rows= 8
Number of trees in each row = Quotient of 176 ÷ 8
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 176
STEP2 We can break the number 176 into 160 + 16
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (160 ÷ 8) + (16 ÷ 8)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +2= 22

Question 2.
Arnold can do 65 pushups in 5 minutes. How many pushups can he do in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 11
b. 13
c. 15
d. 17

Answer: b. 13

Explanation:
The total number of pushups done by Arnold = 65
Number of minutes spent on pushups= 5
Number of pushups done in each minute = Quotient of 65 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 65
STEP2 We can break the number 65 into 60 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 12 +1= 13

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Last Saturday, there were 1,486 people at the Cineplex. There were about the same number of people in each of the 6 theaters. Which is the best estimate of the number of people in each theater?
Options:
a. between 20 and 30
b. between 80 and 90
c. between 100 and 200
d. between 200 and 300

Answer: d. between 200 and 300

Explanation:
Total number of people at the Cineplex= 1,486 people
Number of theatres =  6
Number of people at each theatre= estimate of the number of people 1,486 ÷ 6

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,488 is close to 1,486. What basic fact can you use?
1,488 ÷ 6
Choose 1,488 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,488 ÷ 6 = 248
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 248

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,482 is close to 1,486 . What basic fact can you use?
1,482 ÷ 6
Choose 1,482 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,482 ÷ 6 = 247
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 247

Question 4.
Nancy walked 50 minutes each day for 4 days last week. Gillian walked 35 minutes each day for 6 days last week. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. Gillian walked 10 minutes more than Nancy.
b. Gillian walked 20 minutes more than Nancy.
c. Nancy walked 10 minutes more than Gillian.
d. Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Answer: d. Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Explanation:
Time walked by Nancy= 50 minutes
Time walked by Gillian= 35 minutes
Nancy walked more time compared to Gillian
50-35=15 minutes
Therefore,  Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Question 5.
Three boys share 28 toy cars equally. Which best describes how the cars are shared?
Options:
a. Each gets 3 cars with 1 left over.
b. Each gets 8 cars with 2 left over.
c. Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.
d. Each gets 10 cars with 2 left over.

Answer: c. Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.

Explanation:
Total number of toys three boys have= 28
Number of toys each boy got= 28 ÷3=9.33
Therefore we can say that each gets 9 cars with 1 leftover.

Question 6.
An airplane flies at a speed of 474 miles per hour. How many miles does the plane fly in 5 hours?
Options:
a. 2,070 miles
b. 2,140 miles
c. 2,370 miles
d. 2,730 miles

Answer: c. 2,370 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by aeroplane in one hour= 474
Number of hours the aeroplane flew= 5 hours
Total number of miles flew in 5 hours= 474 x 5=  2,370 miles

Page No. 233

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 16

Question 1.
A number that is the product of a number and a counting number is called a _____________.
___________

Answer: Multiple

Explanation:
3 x 4 = 12
In which 4 is a multiple and also 4 is a counting number

Question 2.
Numbers that are easy to compute mentally are called _____________.
___________

Answer: Compatible numbers

Explanation:
Compatible numbers are pairs of numbers that are easy to add, subtract, multiply, or divide mentally. When using estimation to approximate a calculation, replace actual numbers with compatible numbers.

Question 3.
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the _____________.
___________

Answer: Remainder

Explanation:
When we divide 10 with 3 there will be 1 remaining, which is called remainder.

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 4.
26 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder: 2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 26 counters to represent the 26 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 26 ÷ 3 = 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

Question 5.
19 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 4 Remainder: 3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 19 counters to represent the 19 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 19 ÷ 4 = 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 233 Q6

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 233 Q7

Question 8.
3,000 ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: 500

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 30 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,000 = 30 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 30 hundreds ÷ 6 = 5 hundreds
3,000 ÷ 6 = 500

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 9.
635 ÷ 9
about _____

Answer: 70

Explanation:
What number close to 635 is easy to divide by 9?
630 is close to 635. What basic fact can you use?
630 ÷ 9
Choose 630 because it is close to 635 and can easily be divided by 9.
63 ÷ 9 = 7
630 ÷ 9 = 70
635 ÷ 9 is about 70

Question 10.
412 ÷ 5
about _____

Answer: 82

Explanation:
What number close to 412 is easy to divide by 5?
410 is close to 412. What basic fact can you use?
410 ÷ 5
Choose 410 because it is close to 412 and can easily be divided by 5.
410 ÷ 5 = 82
412 ÷ 5 is about 82

Question 11.
490 ÷ 8
about _____

Answer: 60

Explanation:
What number close to 490 is easy to divide by 8?
480 is close to 490. What basic fact can you use?
480 ÷ 8
Choose 480 because it is close to 490 and can easily be divided by 8.
48 ÷ 8 = 6
480 ÷ 8 = 60
490 ÷ 8 is about 60

Use grid paper or base-ten blocks to model the quotient.
Then record the quotient.

Question 12.
63 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 21

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 63 ÷ 3.
How many groups of 3 can you make?
B. Think of 63 as 60 + 3. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
63 ÷ 3 = (60 ÷ 3 ) + (3 ÷ 3 )
= 20 + 1
= 21

Question 13.
85 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 17

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 85 ÷ 5.
How many groups of 5 can you make?
B. Think of 85 as 80 + 5. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
85 ÷ 5 = (80 ÷ 5 ) + (5 ÷ 5)
= 16 + 1
= 17

Question 14.
168 ÷ 8 = _____

Answer:21

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 168 ÷ 8.
How many groups of 8 can you make?
B. Think of 168 as 160 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
168 ÷ 8 = (160 ÷ 8 ) + (8 ÷ 8 )
= 20 + 1
= 21

Page No. 234

Question 15.
Ana has 296 coins in her coin collection. She put the same number of coins in each of 7 jars. About how many coins are in each jar?
about _____ coins

Answer: 42

Explanation:
The total number of coins Ana has= 296 coins
Number of Jars= 7
Number of coins in each Jar= 296 ÷ 7 = 42 coins

Question 16.
Which two estimates is the quotient 345 ÷ 8 between?
_____ and _____

Answer: The quotient is between 42 and 43

Explanation:

What number close to 345 is easy to divide by 8?
336 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
336 ÷ 8
Choose 336  because it is close to 345 and can easily be divided by 8.
336 ÷ 8 = 42
345 ÷ 8 is about 42

What number close to 345 is easy to divide by 8?
344 is close to 345. What basic fact can you use?
344 ÷ 8
Choose 344 because it is close to 345 and can easily be divided by 8.
344 ÷ 8 = 43
345 ÷ 8 is about 43

Question 17.
A total of 8,644 people went to the football game. Of those people, 5,100 sat on the home side and the rest sat on the visitor’s side. If the people sitting on the visitor’s side filled 8 equal-sized sections, how many people sat in each of the sections?
about _____ people

Answer: 443

Explanation:
Total number of people in the football game= 8,644
Number of people who sat on the homeside= 5,100
Number of people who sat on the visitor’s side= 3,544
Number of equal-sized sections= 8
Number of people who sat in each of the sections= 3,544 ÷ 8= 443

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 234 Q18

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 234 Q19

Page No. 237

Use repeated subtraction to divide.

Question 1.
84 ÷ 7
_____

Answer: 12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 84 counters. Subtract 7 counters.
B. Subtract 7 counters from 84 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12.

Question 2.
60 ÷ 4
_____

Answer: 15

Explanation:
A. Begin with 60 counters. Subtract 4 counters.
B. Subtract 4 counters from 60 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 15.

Question 3.
91 ÷ 8
_____ R _____

Answer: 11.3=11(approx)

Explanation:
A. Begin with 91 counters. Subtract 8 counters.
B. Subtract 8 counters from 91 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 11

Draw a number line to divide.

Question 4.
65 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 13

Explanation:
A. Begin with 65 counters. Subtract 5 counters.
B. Subtract 5 counters from 65 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 13

Question 5.
Use Appropriate Tools Can you divide 32 by 3 evenly? Use the number line to explain your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 17
Type below:
__________

Answer: 11 (approx)

Explanation:
How many equal groups of 3 did you subtract?
So, 32 ÷ 3 = 10.8=11(approx).

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 237 Q6
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 237 Q6.1

Page No. 238

Question 7.
A new playground will be 108 feet long. Builders need to allow 9 feet of space for each piece of climbing equipment. They want to put as many climbers along the length of the playground as possible. How many climbers can they place?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 18
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
__________

Answer: 12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 108 counters. Subtract 9 counters.
B. Subtract 9 counters from 108 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12.

Question 7.
b. How can you use repeated subtraction to solve the problem?
Type below:
__________

Answer: Repeated subtraction is a method to solve and find the quotient.

Explanation:
Example:
A. Begin with 65 counters. Subtract 5 counters.
B. Subtract 5 counters from 65 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 13

Question 7.
c. Tell why you might use multiples of the divisor to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer: The multiple which divides 108 is 12

Explanation:
The number 108 has multiples which divide 108 evenly,
1 x 108 =108
2 x 54   =108
3 x 36   =108
4 x 27   =108
6 x 18   =108
9 x  12  =108
12 x 9   =108
18 x 6   =108
27 x 4   =108
36 x 3   =108
54 x 2   =108
108 x 1   =108
Multiples which divide 108 are 1,2,3,4,5,6,9,12,18,27,36,54,108.

Question 7.
d. Show steps to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer: 108 ÷ 9 =12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 108 counters. Subtract 9 counters.
B. Subtract 9 counters from 108 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12

Question 7.
e. Complete the sentences.
There are _______ equal parts of the playground, each _______ feet long.
So, _______ climbers can fit along the length of the playground.
Type below:
__________

Answer: There are ___108____ equal parts of the playground, each __09_____ feet long. So, __12_____ climbers can fit along the length of the playground.

Explanation:
A new playground will be 108 feet long.
Builders need to allow 9 feet of space for each piece of climbing equipment.
Number of climbers that can fit along the length of the playground= 108 ÷ 9 =12

Question 8.
Which model matches each expression?
Write the letter on the line next to the model.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 19
Type below:
__________

Answer: 240 ÷ 80 expression resembles the second model while 240 ÷ 60 expression resembles the first model.

Explanation:
240 ÷ 80
A. Draw a number line with 80 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 240 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 3
240 ÷ 60
A. Draw a number line with 60 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 240 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 4

Common Core – Page No. 239

Divide Using Repeated Subtraction
Use repeated subtraction to divide.

Question 1.
42 ÷ 3 = 14
3)\(\overline { 42 } \)
-30 ← 10 × 3 | 10
——-
12
-12 ← 4 × 3 | +4
——-    ———–
0             14

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Begin with 42 counters. Subtract 3 counters.
B. Subtract 3 counters from 42 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 14

Question 2.
72 ÷ 4 = _____

Answer: 18

Explanation:
A. Begin with 72 counters. Subtract 4 counters.
B. Subtract 4 counters from 72 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 18

Question 3.
93 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 31

Explanation:
A. Begin with 93 counters. Subtract 3 counters.
B. Subtract 3 counters from 93 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 31

Question 4.
35 ÷ 4 = _____ r _____

Answer: 8r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 35 counters to represent the 35 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 35 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 35 ÷ 4, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 3, or 8 r3.

Question 5.
93 ÷ 10 = _____ r _____

Answer: 9r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 93 counters to represent the 93 dominoes. Then draw 10 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 10 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 93 ÷ 10
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 10 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 93 ÷ 10, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 3, or 9 r3.

Question 6.
86 ÷ 9 = _____ r _____

Answer: 9r5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 86 counters to represent the 86 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 86 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 9 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

For 86 ÷ 9, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 5, or 9 r5.

Draw a number line to divide.

Question 7.
70 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Draw a number line with 5 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 70 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 14

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 239 Q8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 239 Q9

Common Core – Page No. 240

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Randall collects postcards that his friends send him when they travel. He can put 6 cards on one scrapbook page. How many pages does Randall need to fit 42 postcards?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: d. 7

Explanation:
Total number of postcards Randall has = 42 postcards
Number of postcards on one scrapbook page = 6 cards
Number of pages needed to fit the postcards = 42 ÷ 6=7

Question 2.
Ari stocks shelves at a grocery store. He puts 35 cans of juice on each shelf. The shelf has 4 equal rows and another row with only 3 cans. How many cans are in each of the equal rows?
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: c. 8

Explanation:
Total number of cans of juice on each shelf = 35
Number of rows = 4
Number of cans on the other shelf = 3
Number of cans placed on the first shelf = 35 – 3 = 32
Number of juice cans in the first row = 32 ÷ 4 = 8 cans

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Fiona sorted her CDs into separate bins. She placed 4 CDs in each bin. If she has 160 CDs, how many bins did she fill?
Options:
a. 4
b. 16
c. 40
d. 156

Answer: c. 40

Explanation:
Total number of CD’s in Fiona has = 160 CD’s
Number of CD’s placed in each bin = 4
Number of bins required to place the CD’s = 160 ÷ 4 = 40

Question 4.
Eamon is arranging 39 books on 3 shelves. If he puts the same number of books on each shelf, how many books will there be on each shelf?
Options:
a. 11
b. 12
c. 13
d. 14

Answer: c. 13

Explanation:
Total number of books Eamon has = 39 books
Number of shelves = 3
Number of books in each shelf = 39 ÷ 3 = 13

Question 5.
A newborn boa constrictor measures 18 inches long. An adult boa constrictor measures 9 times the length of the newborn plus 2 inches. How long is the adult?
Options:
a. 142 inches
b. 162 inches
c. 164 inches
d. 172 inches

Answer: c. 164 inches

Explanation:
Length of newborn boa constrictor = 18 inches
Length of an adult boa constrictor = 9 x Length of newborn boa constrictor = 9 x 18 = 162
Total length of an adult boa constrictor = 162 + 2 = 164 inches

Question 6.
Madison has 6 rolls of coins. Each roll has 20 coins. How many coins does Madison have in all?
Options:
a. 110
b. 120
c. 125
d. 130

Answer: b. 120

Explanation:
Number of rolls of coins = 6
Number of coins in each roll = 20
Total number of coins Madison has = 20 x 6 = 120

Page No. 243

Question 1.
Lacrosse is played on a field 330 ft long. How many yards long is a lacrosse field? (3 feet = 1 yard)
Divide. Use partial quotients.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 20
So, the lacrosse field is _____ yards long.
______ yards

Answer: 37 yards (approx)

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor. For example, you know that you can make at least 100 ft which is long 33 yards.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 110 ft =  110 ÷ 3 = 36.6 yards = 37 yards (approx).

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 2.
3)\(\overline { 225 } \)
____

Answer: 75

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 50 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 50 x 3 = 150 : 225 – 150 = 75
3 x 25 = 75 : 75 – 75 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 75 ( 50 + 25)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 3.
428 ÷ 4 =
____

Answer: 107

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 50 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 4 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 50 x 4 = 200 : 428 – 200 = 228
4 x 50 = 200 : 228 – 200 = 28
7 x 4 = 28 : 28 – 28 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 107 ( 50 + 50 + 7)
The rectangle models are given below :

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 4.
7)\(\overline { 224 } \)
____

Answer: 32

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 7 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 224 – 210 = 14
7 x 2 = 14 : 14 – 14 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 32 ( 30 + 2)

Question 5.
7)\(\overline { 259 } \)
____

Answer: 37

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 7 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 225 – 210 = 49
7 x 7 = 49 : 49 – 49 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 37 ( 30 + 7)

Question 6.
8)\(\overline { 864 } \)
____

Answer: 108

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 8.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 8 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 8 = 800 : 864 – 800 = 64
8 x 8 = 64 : 64 – 64 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 108 ( 100 + 8)

Question 7.
6)\(\overline { 738 } \)
____

Answer: 123

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 6 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 6 = 600 : 738 – 600 = 138
6 x 23 = 138 : 138 – 138 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 123 ( 100 + 23)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 8.
328 ÷ 2 =
____

Answer: 164

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 2.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 2 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 2 = 200 : 328 – 200 = 128
2 x 64 = 128 : 128 – 128 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 164 ( 100 + 64)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 9.
475 ÷ 5 =
____

Answer: 95

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 90 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 90 x 5 = 450 : 475 – 450 = 25
5 x 5 = 25 : 25 – 25 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 95 (90 + 5)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 10.
219 ÷ 3 =
____

Answer: 73

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 70 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 70 x 3 = 210 : 219 – 210 = 9
3 x 3 = 9 : 9 – 9 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 73 ( 70 + 3)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 11.
488 ÷ 4 =
____

Answer: 122

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 4 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 4 = 400 : 488 – 400 = 88
4 x 22 = 88 : 88 – 88 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 122 ( 100 + 22)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 12.
Use Reasoning What is the least number you can divide by 5 to get a three-digit quotient? Explain how you found your answer.
____

Answer: The quotient can be a three-digit number or a two-digit number.

Explanation:
Example:

475 ÷ 5 =
____

Answer: 95

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 90 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 90 x 5 = 450 : 475 – 450 = 25
5 x 5 = 25 : 25 – 25 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 95 (90 + 5)

Page No. 244

Use the table for 13–15.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 21

Question 13.
Rob wants to put 8 baseball cards on each page in an album. How many pages will he fill?
____ pages

Answer: 31 pages

Explanation:
Total number of baseball cards = 248
Number of cards in each page = 8
Number of pages required = 248 ÷ 8 = 31 pages

Question 14.
Rob filled 5 plastic boxes with hockey cards. There were the same number of cards in each box. How many cards did he put in each box? How many cards were left over?
Type below:
___________

Answer: There where 12 hockey cards in each box, number of cards leftover = 4

Explanation:
Total number of hockey cards = 64
Number of boxes = 5
Number of cards in each box = 64 ÷ 5 = 12.8 that is exactly 60 cards can be fit in 5 boxes and 12 in each box
Number of cards leftover = 64 – 60 = 4

Question 15.
Rob filled 3 fewer plastic boxes with football cards than basketball cards. He filled 9 boxes with basketball cards. How many boxes did he fill with football cards? How many football cards were in each box?
____ boxes ____ cards

Answer: 6 boxes and 16 cards in each box

Explanation:
Number of basketball cards= 189
Number of boxes in which the basketball cards were kept= 9 boxes
Number of football cards= 96
Number of boxes in which the football cards were kept =  number of boxes in which the basketball cards were kept – 3 =
9-3=6boxes
Number of football cards in each box = 96 ÷ 6 =16 cards

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 244 Q16
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 244 Q16.1

Question 17.
Use partial quotients. Fill in the blanks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 22
Type below:
___________

Answer: 97

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 80 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 80 x 5 = 400 : 485 – 400 = 85
5 x 17 = 85 : 85 – 85 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 97 ( 80 + 17)

Common Core – Page No. 245

Divide Using Partial Quotients
Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 1.
8)\(\overline { 184 } \)
-80 ← 10 × 8 10
——-
104
-80 ← 10 × 8 + 10
——-
-24
-24 ← 3 × 8 + 3
——– ——–
0 23

Answer: 23

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 10 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 8.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 10 x 8 = 80 : 184 – 80 = 104
10 x 8 = 80 : 104 – 80 = 24 : 3 x 8 = 24 : 24 – 24 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 23 ( 10 + 10 + 3)

Question 2.
6)\(\overline { 258 } \)
_____

Answer: 43

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 40 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 40 x 6 = 240 : 258 – 240 = 18
3 x 6 = 18 : 18 – 18 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 43 ( 40 + 3)

Question 3.
5)\(\overline { 630 } \)
_____

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 630 – 500 = 130
5 x 20 = 100 : 130 – 100 = 30 : 5 x 6 = 30 : 30 – 30 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 20 + 6)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 4.
246 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 82

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 80 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 80 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 80 x 3 = 240 : 246 – 240 = 6
3 x 2 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 82 ( 80 + 2)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 5.
126 ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: 63

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 60 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple,2.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 60 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 60 x 2 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6
2 x 3 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 63 ( 60 +3)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 6.
605 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 605 – 500 = 105
5 x 20 = 100 : 105 – 100 = 5 : 5 x 1 = 5 : 5 – 5 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 + 1)
The rectangle models are given below :

Divide. Use either way to record the partial quotients.

Question 7.
492 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 164

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 50 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 492 – 300 = 192
50 x 3 = 150 : 192 – 150 = 42 : 3 x 14 = 42 : 42 – 42 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 164  ( 100 + 50 + 14)

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 32

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 30 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 224 – 210 = 14
7 x 2 = 14 : 14 – 14 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 32 ( 30 + 2)

Question 9.
692 ÷ 4 = _____

Answer: 173

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 4 = 400 : 692 – 400 = 392
4 x 50 = 200 : 392 – 200 = 192 : 4 x 48 = 192 : 192 – 192 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 198 ( 100 + 50 + 48)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Allison took 112 photos on vacation. She wants to put them in a photo album that holds 4 photos on each page. How many pages can she fill?
_____ pages

Answer: 28

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 20 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 20 x 4 = 80 : 112 – 80 = 32
4 x 8 = 32 : 32 – 32 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 28 ( 20 + 8)

Question 11.
Hector saved $726 in 6 months. He saved the same amount each month. How much did Hector save each month?
$ _____

Answer: $121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 6 = 600 : 726 – 600 = 126
6 x 20 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6 : 6 x 1 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 +1)

Common Core – Page No. 246

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Annaka used partial quotients to divide 145 ÷ 5. Which shows a possible sum of partial quotients?
Options:
a. 50 + 50 + 45
b. 100 + 40 + 5
c. 10 + 10 + 9
d. 10 + 4 + 5

Answer: c. 10 + 10 + 9

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 10 x 5 = 50 : 145 – 50 = 95
5 x 10 = 50 : 95 – 50 = 45 : 5 x 9 = 45 : 45 – 45 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 29 ( 10 + 10 +9)

Question 2.
Mel used partial quotients to find the quotient 378 ÷ 3. Which might show the partial quotients that Mel found?
Options:
a. 100, 10, 10, 9
b. 100, 10, 10, 6
c. 100, 30, 30, 6
d. 300, 70, 8

Answer: b. 100, 10, 10, 6

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 378 – 300 = 78
10 x 3 =30 : 78 – 30 = 48 : 3 x 16 = 48 : 48 – 48 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 10 +10 + 6)

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What are the partial products of 42 × 5?
Options:
a. 9 and 7
b. 20 and 10
c. 200 and 7
d. 200 and 10

Answer: d. 200 and 10

Explanation:
STEP1
42 x 5
Start by multiplying the digit five with the units digit 2 = 5 x 2 =10
Multiply the digit 5 with 4 in the tens place = 4 x 5 = 20
Since 4 is in the tens place when we multiply 4 and 5 we must place it in the hundreds place by assuming units digit to be zero.
Therefore, the partial product of 42 x 5 = 200

Question 4.
Mr. Watson buys 4 gallons of paint that cost $34 per gallon. How much does Mr. Watson spend on paint?
Options:
a. $38
b. $126
c. $136
d. $1,216

Answer: c. $136

Explanation:
Cost of each gallon of paint = $34
Number of gallons = 4
The total cost of the gallons = $ 34 x 4 = $136

Question 5.
Use the area model to find the product 28 × 32.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 23
Options:
a. 840
b. 856
c. 880
d. 896

Answer: d. 896

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 20=600
Area of green rectangle= 2 x 20 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 8 x 30= 240
Area of blue rectangle= 2 x 8= 16
Product of 32 and 28 = Area of yellow rectangle + Area of green rectangle + Area of pink rectangle + Area of the blue rectangle = 600+40+240+16 =  896

Question 6.
An adult male lion eats about 108 pounds of meat per week. About how much meat does an adult male lion eat in one day?
Options:
a. about 14 pounds
b. about 15 pounds
c. about 16 pounds
d. about 17 pounds

Answer: b. about 15 pounds

Explanation:
Mass of meat an adult lion eats in one week = 108
Number of days in a week = 7
Mass of meat ate by the lion in one day = 108 ÷ 7 = 15.4 pounds = about 15 pounds

Page No. 249

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.

Question 1.
48 ÷ 3
_____

Answer: 16

Explanation:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 48. Show 48 as 4 tens and 8 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 6 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 16.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 249 Q2

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 249 Q3

Question 4.
Divide. Draw a quick picture. Record the steps.
84 ÷ 3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 24
_____

Answer: 28

Explanation:
STEPS:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 8 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 28.

Question 5.
Explain why you did not need to regroup in Exercise 2.
Type below:
___________

Answer: We did not regroup in exercise two because we used the method of counters in which we placed the counters one after the other in the circles and concluded with number of counters in each group and the number of counters left over.

Explanation:
Example: 28 ÷ 3(in the form of exercise 2)
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the 3 players.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Find the number of counters in each group and the number of counters left over. Record your answer. 9 counters in each group and 3 counters are leftover.

Example: 84 ÷ 3

A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 8 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 28.

Question 6.
Mindy is preparing fruit boxes for gifts. She divides 36 apples evenly into 6 boxes. Then she divided 54 bananas evenly into the same 6 boxes. How many pieces of fruit are in each of Mindy’s boxes?
_____ pieces of fruit

Answer: 6+9=15 pieces of fruits are in each box of Mindy’s

Explanation:
Total number of apples = 36
Number of boxes in which the apples were kept = 6
Number of apple pieces in each box = 36 ÷ 6 = 6
Total number of bananas = 54
Number of boxes in which the bananas were kept = 6
Number of banana pieces in each box = 54 ÷ 6 = 9
Total number of fruit pieces in each box = 9 + 6 = 15

Question 7.
Ami needs to divide these base-ten blocks into 4 equal groups.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 25
Describe a model that would show how many are in each group.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 56. Show 56 as 5 tens and 6 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 14.

Page No. 250

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 8.
Angela and Zach drew quick pictures to find 68 ÷ 4. Whose quick picture makes sense? Whose quick picture is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 26
Type below:
___________

Answer: Zach’s quick picture is correct while Angela’s is not correct.

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 68. Show 68 as 6 tens and 8 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 17.
Hence Zach’s statement and the quick picture are correct.

Question 9.
Analyze What did Angela forget to do after she shared the tens equally among the 4 groups?
Type below:
___________

Answer: Angela forgot to regroup the leftover tens into ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.

Explanation:
Since there are 6 tens and 4 circles only 4 tens can be placed in them while the other 2 tens are leftover which must be converted into 20 ones.

Common Core – Page No. 251

Model Division with Regrouping

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.
Question 1.
63 ÷ 4 = 15 r3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 27

Answer: 15 r 3

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 63. Show 63 as 6 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 5 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 15.
E. After grouping, there are 3 blocks which weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 3

Question 2.
83 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: 27 r 2

Explanation:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 83. Show 83 as 8 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 27.
E. After grouping, there are 2 blocks which weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 2

Divide. Draw quick pictures. Record the steps.

Question 3.
85 ÷ 5
_____

Answer: 17

Explanation:
A. Draw 5 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 85. Show 85 as 8 tens and 5 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 5 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 5 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 17.

Question 4.
97 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: 24 r 1

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 97. Show 97 as 9 tens and 7 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 24.
E. After grouping, there is 1 block which wasn’t grouped. So, the remainder is 1

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 251 Q5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 251 Q6

Common Core – Page No. 252

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Gail bought 80 buttons to put on the shirts she makes. She uses 5 buttons for each shirt. How many shirts can Gail make with the buttons she bought?
Options:
a. 14
b. 16
c. 17
d. 18

Answer: b. 16

Explanation:
Total number of buttons = 80
Number of buttons used for each shirt = 5
Number of shirts she can make = 80 ÷ 5 =16

Question 2.
Marty counted how many breaths he took in 3 minutes. In that time, he took 51 breaths. He took the same number of breaths each minute. How many breaths did Marty take in one minute?
Options:
a. 15
b. 16
c. 17
d. 19

Answer: c. 17

Explanation:
Total number of breaths Marty counted = 51
Time in which the breath was counted = 3 minutes
Number of breaths in one minute = 51 ÷ 3 = 17

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kate is solving brain teasers. She solved 6 brain teasers in 72 minutes. How long did she spend on each brain teaser?
Options:
a. 12 minutes
b. 14 minutes
c. 18 minutes
d. 22 minutes

Answer: a. 12 minutes

Explanation:
Number of brain teasers solved = 6
Number of minutes spent on brain teasers = 72 minutes
Number of minutes spent on each problem = 72 ÷ 6 =12 minutes

Question 4.
Jenny works at a package delivery store. She puts mailing stickers on packages. Each package needs 5 stickers. How many stickers will Jenny use if she is mailing 105 packages?
Options:
a. 725
b. 625
c. 525
d. 21

Answer: c. 525

Explanation:
Number of packages = 105
Number of stickers on each package = 5
Total number of stickers on the packages = 105 x 5 = 525

Question 5.
The Puzzle Company packs standardsized puzzles into boxes that hold 8 puzzles. How many boxes would it take to pack up 192 standard-sized puzzles?
Options:
a. 12
b. 16
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: d. 24

Explanation:
Total number of puzzles = 192
Number of puzzles in each box = 8
Number of boxes used = 192 ÷ 8 = 24 boxes

Question 6.
Mt. Whitney in California is 14,494 feet tall. Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney. How tall is Mt. McKinley?
Options:
a. 21,310 feet
b. 20,320 feet
c. 20,230 feet
d. 19,310 feet

Answer: b. 20,320 feet

Explanation:
Height of Mt. Whitney in California = 14,494 feet
Height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney.
Therefore the height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska = 14,494 feet + 5,826 feet  =  20,320 feet

Page No. 255

Question 1.
There are 452 pictures of dogs in 4 equal groups. How many pictures are in each group? Explain how you can use place value to place the first digit in the quotient.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 28
______ pictures

Answer: 113

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 452. 400 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 45 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 11 = 44
Subtract. 45  − 44 = 1 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Regroup 1 ten as 10 ones.
Now there are 12 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 12 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×3 ones
Subtract. 12 ones − 12 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 113

Divide.

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 166 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 41

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 166. 1 hundred cannot be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 166 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 40 = 160
Subtract. 166 − 160 = 6
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×1 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 4 ones = 2

So, the quotient is 41 and remainder is 2

Question 3.
5)\(\overline { 775 } \)
______

Answer: 155

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 775. 700 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 70 ten to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 700 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 140 = 700
Subtract. 700  − 700 = 0
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 70 tens to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 70 tens  ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×14
Subtract. 75 − 70 tens = 5 ones
Multiply 5 x 1 = 5
Subtract 5 ÷ 5 = 0

So, the quotient is 155 (140 + 14 + 1)

Question 4.
4)\(\overline { 284 } \)
______

Answer: 71

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 284. 200 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 20 tens to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 200 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 50 = 200
Subtract. 20  − 20 = 0 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 80 tens to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 80 tens ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×20 = 80
Subtract. 80 tens − 80 tens = 0 ones
There are 4 ones
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4
Subtract 4-4 =0

So, the quotient is 71 (50+20+1)

Question 5.
5)\(\overline { 394 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 78

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 394. 300 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 30 ten to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 300 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 60 = 300
Subtract. 300  − 300 = 0 tens
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
Now there are 9 tens to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 9 tens ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×18 tens
Subtract. 90 tens − 90 tens = 0 ones
There are 4 ones
4 is the remainder.
So, the quotient is 78(60+18)

Question 6.
3)\(\overline { 465 } \)
______

Answer: 155

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 465. 400 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 40 tens to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 400 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 130  = 390
Subtract. 400  − 390 = 1 tens
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
Now there are 7 tens and 5 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 75  ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 25 = 75
Subtract. 75 tens − 75 tens = 0

So, the quotient is 155 ( 130+ 25)

Question 7.
8)\(\overline { 272 } \)
______

Answer: 34

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 272. 200 hundred can be shared among 8 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 27 tens and 2 ones to share among 8 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 270 ÷ 8
Multiply. 8 × 30 = 240
Subtract. 270  − 240 = 3 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Regroup 3 tens as 30 ones.
Now there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones to share among 8 groups.
Divide. 32 ones ÷ 8
Multiply. 8×4 ones
Subtract. 32 ones − 32 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 34 (30 + 4)

Practice: Copy and Solve Divide.

Question 8.
516 ÷ 2 = ______

Answer: 258

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 2
Multiply. 2 × 250 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 2 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 2
Multiply. 2×8 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 258 (250 + 8)

Question 9.
516 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 172

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 160 = 480
Subtract. 516  − 480 = 36 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 36 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 36 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 3×12 ones
Subtract. 36 ones − 36 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 172 (160 + 12)

Question 10.
516 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 129

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 125 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 129 (125 + 4)

Question 11.
516 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 103 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 100 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×3 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 15 ones = 1 one

So, the quotient is 103 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 1

Question 12.
Look back at your answers to Exercises 8–11. What happens to the quotient when the divisor increases? Explain.
The quotient ______

Answer: The quotient gets decreased when we increase the divisor.

Explanation:

Example:

516 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 129

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 125 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 129 (125 + 4)

516 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 103 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 100 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×3 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 15 ones = 1 one

So, the quotient is 103 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 1

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 255 Q13

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 255 Q14

Page No. 256

Question 15.
Nan wants to put 234 pictures in an album with a blue cover. How many full pages will she have in her album?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 29
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: How many full pages will she have in her album?
We can find number of pictures in blue pages?
We can find number of pictures in green pages?
We can find number of pictures in red pages?

Explanation:

Question 15.
b. How will you use division to find the number of full pages?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Since the total number of pictures and the number of colour pages are given we can divide the total number of pictures are the number of pages to find the number of full pages.

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13

Question 15.
c. Show the steps you will use to solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 13

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13

Question 15.
d. Complete the following sentences.
Nan has _______ pictures.
She wants to put the pictures in an album with pages that each hold _______ pictures.
She will have an album with _______ full pages and _______ pictures on another page.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 234 pictures, 18 pictures, 13 full pages, 0 pictures on another page

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13 full pages

Since the remainder is 0 the number of pictures on another page = 0

Question 16.
Mr. Parsons bought 293 apples to make pies for his shop. Six apples are needed for each pie. If Mr. Parsons makes the greatest number of apple pies possible, how many apples will be left?
_____ pies _____ apples left over.

Answer: 48 pies and 5 apples are leftover

Explanation:
Total number of apples= 293
Number of apples that make a pie = 6
Number of pies = Quotient of 293 ÷ 6 = 48
Number of apples leftover = 5

Question 17.
Carol needs to divide 320 stickers equally among 4 classes. In which place is the first digit of the quotient? Choose the word that completes the sentence.
The first digit of the quotient is in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 30 place.
_________

Answer: tens

Explanation:
Total number of stickers = 320
Number of classes = 4
Number of stickers in each class = Quotient of 320 ÷ 4 = 80
The first digit of quotient is in the tens place.

Common Core – Page No. 257

Place the First Digit

Divide.

Question 1.
62
——-
3)\(\overline { 186 } \)
-18
——-
06
-6
——-
0

Answer: 62

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 186. 180 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 18 tens and 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 180 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 60 = 180
Subtract. 186  − 180 = 6 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 2×3 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 2 ones =0 one

So, the quotient is 62 (60 + 2) and the remainder is 0

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 298 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 298. 280 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 28 tens and 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 280 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 70 = 280
Subtract. 280  − 280 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 18 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 18 ones − 16 ones = 2 ones

So, the quotient is 74 (70 + 4) and the remainder is 2

Question 3.
3)\(\overline { 461 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 153

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 461. 450 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 45 tens and 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 450 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 150 = 450
Subtract. 450  − 450 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 11 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 3×3 ones
Subtract. 11 ones − 9 ones = 2 ones

So, the quotient is 153 (150 + 3) and the remainder is 2

Question 4.
9)\(\overline { 315 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 35

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 315. 310 hundred can be shared among 9 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 31 tens and 5 ones to share among 9 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide.310 ÷ 9
Multiply. 9 × 30 = 270
Subtract. 310  − 270 = 40 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 40 + 5 = 45 ones to share among 9 groups.
Divide. 45 ones ÷ 9
Multiply. 5×9 ones
Subtract. 45 ones − 45 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 35 (30 + 5) and the remainder is 0

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 257 Q5

Question 6.
4)\(\overline { 604 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 151

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 604. 600 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 60 tens and 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 600 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 150 = 600
Subtract. 600  − 600 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 4 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×1 ones
Subtract. 4 ones − 4 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 151 (150 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 7.
6)\(\overline { 796 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 132

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 796. 790 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 79 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 790 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 131 = 786
Subtract. 790  − 786 = 4 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 + 6 = 10 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 10 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 10 ones − 6 ones = 4 ones

So, the quotient is 132 (131 + 1) and the remainder is 4

Question 8.
5)\(\overline { 449 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 89

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 449. 440 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 44 tens and 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 440 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 88 = 440
Subtract. 440  − 440 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 9 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 9 ones − 5 ones = 4 ones

So, the quotient is 89 (88 + 1) and the remainder is 4

Question 9.
6)\(\overline { 756 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 756. 750 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 75 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 750 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 125 = 750
Subtract. 750  − 750 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 6 ones =  0 ones

So, the quotient is 126 (125 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 10.
7)\(\overline { 521 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 74

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 521. 520 hundred can be shared among 7 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 52 tens and 1 one to share among 7 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 520 ÷ 7
Multiply. 7 × 74 = 518
Subtract. 520  − 518 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 1 = 3 ones to share among 7 groups.
Divide. 3 ones ÷ 7 (not possible)

So, the quotient is 74  and the remainder is 3

Question 11.
5)\(\overline { 675 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 135

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 675. 670 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 67 tens and 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 670 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 134 = 670
Subtract. 670  − 670 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 5 ones − 5 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 135 (134 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 12.
8)\(\overline { 933 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 116

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 933. 930 hundred can be shared among 8 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 93 tens and 3 ones to share among 8 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 930 ÷ 8
Multiply. 8 × 116 = 928
Subtract. 930  − 928 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 3 = 5 ones to share among 8 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 8 (not possible)

So, the quotient is 116 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 5

Problem Solving

Question 13.
There are 132 projects in the science fair. If 8 projects can fit in a row, how many full rows of projects can be made? How many projects are in the row that is not full?
_____ full rows
_____ projects in the non-full row

Answer: 16 full rows and 4 projects in the non-full row

Explanation:
Total number of projects = 132
Number of projects placed in full row = 8
Number of rows having full projects =Quotient of  132 ÷ 8 = 16
Number of projects in the non-full row = Remainder of 132 ÷ 8 = 4

Question 14.
There are 798 calories in six 10-ounce bottles of apple juice. How many calories are there in one 10-ounce bottle of apple juice?
_____ R _____ calories in one 10-ounce bottles of juice

Answer: 133 calories

Explanation:
Number of calories in 6 bottles of apple juice = 798
Number of calories in each bottle = 798 ÷6 = 133 calories

Common Core – Page No. 258

Lesson Check

Question 1.
To divide 572 ÷ 4, Stanley estimated to place the first digit of the quotient. In which place is the first digit of the quotient?
Options:
a. ones
b. tens
c. hundreds
d. thousands

Answer: c. hundreds

Explanation:
The quotient of  572÷ 4 is 143
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 572. 560 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Question 2.
Onetta biked 325 miles in 5 days. If she biked the same number of miles each day, how far did she bike each day?
Options:
a. 1,625 miles
b. 320 miles
c. 65 miles
d. 61 miles

Answer: c. 65 miles

Explanation:
Total number of miles biked = 325 miles
Number of days biked = 5
Number of miles biked on each day = Quotient of 325 ÷ 5 = 65

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mort makes beaded necklaces that he sells for $32 each. About how much will Mort make if he sells 36 necklaces at the local art fair?
Options:
a. $120
b. $900
c. $1,200
d. $1,600

Answer: c. $1,200

Explanation:
Cost of each beaded necklace = $32
Number of necklaces = 36
The total cost of the necklaces = $32 x 36 = $1,200 (approx)

Question 4.
Which is the best estimate of 54 × 68?
Options:
a. 4,200
b. 3,500
c. 3,000
d. 350

Answer: b. 3,500

Explanation:

Taking the terms nearest to the 54 x 68 as 54 x 65 = 3510 = 3500 (approx)

Question 5.
Ms. Eisner pays $888 for 6 nights in a hotel. How much does Ms. Eisner pay per night?
Options:
a. $5,328
b. $882
c. $148
d. $114

Answer: c. $148

Explanation:
Total pays of Ms Eisner in a hotel = $888
Number of nights = 6
Amount Ms Eisner pay per night = $888 ÷ 6 = $148

Question 6.
Which division problem does the model show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 31
Options:
a. 42 ÷ 3
b. 44 ÷3
c. 51 ÷ 3
d. 54 ÷ 3

Answer: d. 54 ÷ 3

Explanation:
Number of counters in each model = 18
Number of models = 3
Total number of counters = 18 x 3 = 54
Therefore the model displays = 54 ÷ 3

Page No. 261

Question 1.
Ollie used 852 beads to make 4 bracelets. He put the same number of beads on each bracelet. How many beads does each bracelet have? Check your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 32
Divide             Check
2
4)\(\overline { 852 } \)
So, each bracelet has _____ beads.
_____ beads

Answer: 213

Explanation:
Total number of beads =852
Number of bracelets = 4
Number of beads in each bracelet = 852 ÷ 4 = 213

Divide and check.

Question 2.
2)\(\overline { 394 } \)
_____

Answer: 197

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 3.
2)\(\overline { 803 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 401 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 4.
3)\(\overline { 3,448 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 1149 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 3,448. 3 thousand can be shared among 3 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 5.
2)\(\overline { 816 } \)
_____

Answer: 408

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 6.
4)\(\overline { 709 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 177 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 7.
3)\(\overline { 267 } \)
_____

Answer: 89

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 8.
The flower shop received a shipment of 248 pink roses and 256 red roses. The shop owner uses 6 roses to make one arrangement. How many arrangements can the shop owner make if he uses all the roses?
_____ arrangement

Answer: 84 arrangements

Explanation:
Number of pink roses = 248
Number of red roses = 256
Total number of roses = 504
Number of roses in each arrangement = 6
Number of arrangements = 504 ÷ 6 = 84

Page No. 262

Use the table for 9–11.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 33

Question 9.
Four teachers bought 10 origami books and 100 packs of origami paper for their classrooms. They will share the cost of the items equally. How much should each teacher pay?
_____ $

Answer: $210

Explanation:
Number of origami books = 10
Cost of each origami book = $24
Total cost of origami books = $24 x 10 = $240
Number of origami papers = 100
Cost of each origami book = $6
Total cost of origami books = $6 x 100 = $600
Total cost of items = $240 + $600 = $840
Number of teachers = 4
Cost earned by each teacher = $840 ÷ 4 = $210

Question 10.
Communicate Six students shared equally the cost of 18 of one of the items in the chart. Each student paid $24. What item did they buy? Explain how you found your answer.
__________

Answer: The students bought origami kit.

Explanation:
Number of students = 6
Number of items they bought = 18
Amount each student paid = $24
The total amount paid = $24 x 6 =$144
The item they bought can be found by knowing the cost of the item:
Cost of the item=
The total amount paid ÷ Number of items =  144 ÷ 18 = $8
Therefore the item is origami kit.

Question 11.
Ms Alvarez has $1,482 to spend on origami paper. How many packs can she buy?
_____ packs

Answer: 247

Explanation:
Cost of origami paper = $6
Amount Ms Alvarez was supposed to spend on origami paper = $1,482
Number of packs bought = $1,482 ÷ $6 = 247

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 262 Q12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 262 Q13

Common Core – Page No. 263

Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Divide and check.

Question 1.
318
2)\(\overline { 636 } \) 318
-6       × 2
——   ——-
03    636
-2
——
16
-16
——-
0

Answer: 318

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 631 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 3.
8)\(\overline { 906 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 4.
6)\(\overline { 6,739 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 6,739. 6 thousand can be shared among 6 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousand’s place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 5.
4)\(\overline { 2,328 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 2,328. 2 thousand can be shared among 4 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 6.
5)\(\overline { 7,549 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 7,549. 7 thousand can be shared among 5 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 7 and 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 34

Question 7.
The Briggs rented a car for 5 weeks. What was the cost of their rental car per week?
$ _____

Answer: $197

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Briggs = $985
Number of weeks = 5
Cost of rent per week = $985 ÷ 5 =$ 197

Question 8.
The Lees rented a car for 4 weeks. The Santos rented a car for 2 weeks. Whose weekly rental cost was lower? Explain.
The rental cost of _____

Answer: Weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Lees = $632
Number of weeks = 4
Cost of rent per week = $632 ÷ 4 =$ 158

Cost of the car of Santos = $328
Number of weeks = 2
Cost of rent per week = $328 ÷ 2 =$ 164
Therefore weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos.

Common Core – Page No. 264

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which expression can be used to check
the quotient 646 ÷ 3?
Options:
a. (251 × 3) + 1
b. (215 × 3) + 2
c. (215 × 3) + 1
d. 646 × 3

Answer: c. (215 × 3) + 1

Explanation:
Multiply 215 x 3 = 645
Then add 1 to 645
Then the dividend is 645 + 1 = 646

Question 2.
There are 8 volunteers at the telethon. The goal for the evening is to raise $952. If each volunteer raises the same amount, what is the minimum amount each needs to raise to meet the goal?
Options:
a. $7,616
b. $944
c. $119
d. $106

Answer: a. $7,616

Explanation:
Number of volunteers = 8
Amount raised by each volunteer = $952
Total amount raised = $952 x 8 = $7,616

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which product is shown by the model?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 35
Options:
a. 5 × 15 = 75
b. 5 × 16 = 80
c. 5 × 17 = 75
d. 5 × 17 = 85

Answer: d. 5 × 17 = 85

Explanation:
By counting the number of counters we can give the expression.
Number of counters in one row = 17
Number of rows = 5
Therefore the expression = 5 × 17 = 85

Question 4.
The computer lab at a high school ordered 26 packages of CDs. There were 50 CDs in each package. How many CDs did the computer lab order?
Options:
a. 1,330
b. 1,300
c. 1,030
d. 130

Answer: b. 1,300

Explanation:
Number of packages = 26
Number of CDs in each pack = 50
Total number of CDs the computer lab ordered = 26 x 50 = 1,300

Question 5.
Which of the following division problems has a quotient with the first digit in the hundreds place?
Options:
a. 892 ÷ 9
b. 644 ÷ 8
c. 429 ÷ 5
d. 306 ÷ 2

Answer: d. 306 ÷ 2

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 306. 300 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 30 tens and 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Question 6.
Sharon has 64 ounces of juice. She is going to use the juice to fill as many 6-ounce glasses as possible. She will drink the leftover juice. How much juice will Sharon drink?
Options:
a. 4 ounces
b. 6 ounces
c. 10 ounces
d. 12 ounces

Answer: a. 4 ounces

Explanation:
The total quantity of juice = 64 ounces
Quantity of juice she filled = 6 ounces
Quantity of juice she drank = Remainder of 64 ÷  6 = 4

Page No. 267

Question 1.
A firehouse pantry has 52 cans of vegetables and 74 cans of soup. Each shelf holds 9 cans. What is the least number of shelves needed for all the cans?
First, draw a bar model for the total number of cans.
Next, add to find the total number of cans.
Then, draw a bar model to show the number of shelves needed.
Finally, divide to find the number of shelves needed.
So, _______ shelves are needed to hold all of the cans.
_______ shelves

Answer: 14

Explanation:
Number of vegetable cans = 52

Number of soup cans = 74


Total number of cans = 74 +52 = 126
126 ÷ 9 = 14

So, 14 shelves are needed to hold all of the cans.

Question 2.
What if 18 cans fit on a shelf? What is the least number of shelves needed? Describe how your answer would be different.
_______ shelves

Answer: 7 shelves

Explanation:
Total number of cans = 126
Number of cans which can fit in one shelf = 18
Number of shelves required to place all the cans = 126 ÷ 18 = 7 shelves

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 267 Q3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 267 Q4

Page No. 268

Question 5.
Ms Johnson bought 6 bags of balloons. Each bag has 25 balloons. She fills all the balloons and puts 5 balloons in each bunch. How many bunches can she make?
_______ bunches

Answer: 30

Explanation:
Number of bags = 6
Number of ballons in each bag = 25
Total number of ballons = 25 x 6 = 150
Number of ballons in each bunch = 5
Number of bunches = Total number of ballons ÷ Number of ballons in each bunch = 150 ÷ 5 = 30

Question 6.
An adult’s dinner costs $8. A family of 2 adults and 2 children pays $26 for their dinners. How much does a child’s dinner cost? Explain.
$ _______

Answer: $10

Explanation:
Number of adults = 2
Number of children = 2
Cost of dinner of an adult = $8
The total cost of dinner of the adults = $8 x 2 = $16
Total amount paid = $26
Amount spent on children dinner = $26 – $16 = $10
Cost of dinner for the diner = $10 ÷ 2 = $5

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 268 Q7

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 268 Q8

Question 9.
Ryan bought 8 dozen bandages for the track team first-aid kit. The bandages were divided equally into 4 boxes. How many bandages are in each box?
_______ bandages

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Number of bandages bought for the track team first-aid kit = 8 dozens x 12 = 96
Number of boxes = 4
Number of bandages in each box = 96 ÷ 4 = 24

Common Core – Page No. 269

Problem Solving Multistep Division Problems

Solve. Draw a diagram to help you.

Question 1.
There are 3 trays of eggs. Each tray holds 30 eggs. How many people can be served if each person eats 2 eggs?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 36
Think: What do I need to find? How can I draw a diagram to help?
45 people can be served

Answer: 45 people can be served.

Explanation:
Drawbar models to visualize the information given.

First, draw the model and compare to find the number of eggs they had.
Then we must model and divide to find how many eggs are served to each person.

Question 2.
There are 8 pencils in a package. How many packages will be needed for 28 children if each child gets 4 pencils?
________ packages

Answer: 14 packages

Explanation:
Number of pencils in each package = 8

Number of children = 28

Number of pencils each child needs = 4
Total number of pencils = 28 x 4 =112
Number of packages = 112 ÷ 8 = 14

Question 3.
There are 3 boxes of tangerines. Each box has 93 tangerines. The tangerines will be divided equally among 9 classrooms. How many tangerines will each classroom get?
________ tangerines

Answer:31

Explanation:
Number of boxes = 3
Number of tangerines in each box = 93
Total number of tangerines = 93 x 3 = 279

Number of classrooms = 9
Number of tangerines in each classroom = 279 ÷ 9 = 31

Question 4.
Misty has 84 photos from her vacation and 48 photos from a class outing. She wants to put all the photos in an album with 4 photos on each page. How many pages does she need?
______ pages

Answer: 33

Explanation:
Number of photos from her vacation = 84

Number of photos from her class outing = 48

Total number of photos = 84 + 48 = 132
Number of photos in each page = 4
Number of pages required = 132 ÷ 4 = 33

Common Core – Page No. 270

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Gavin buys 89 blue pansies and 86 yellow pansies. He will plant the flowers in 5 rows with an equal number of plants in each row. How many plants will be in each row?
Options:
a. 875
b. 175
c. 35
d. 3

Answer: c. 35

Explanation:
Number of blue pansies = 89
Number of yellow pansies = 86
Total number of pansies = 89 + 86 = 175
Number of rows = 5
Number of plants in each row = 175 ÷ 5 = 35

Question 2.
A pet store receives 7 boxes of cat food. Each box has 48 cans. The store wants to store the cans in equal stacks of 8 cans. How many stacks can be formed?
Options:
a. 8
b. 42
c. 56
d. 336

Answer: b. 42

Explanation:
Number of boxes of cat food = 7
Number of cans in a box = 48
Total number of cans = 48 x 7 = 336
Number of cans in each stack = 8
Number of stacks = 336 ÷ 8 = 42

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What product does the model show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 37
Options:
a. 284
b. 304
c. 340
d. 364

Answer: d. 364

Explanation:
Length = 20 +6 = 26
Breadth = 10 + 4 = 14
Area of the rectangle = 26 x 14 = 364

Question 4.
Mr. Hatch bought 4 round-trip airplane tickets for $417 each. He also paid $50 in baggage fees. How much did Mr. Hatch spend?
Options:
a. $467
b. $1,698
c. $1,718
d. $16,478

Answer: c. $1,718

Explanation:
Cost of each ticket of the airplane = $417
Cost baggage fees = $50
Number of trips of the airplane = 5
Cost of the trips = $417 x 5 = $1,668
The total cost of the trip = $1,668 + $50 = $1,718

Question 5.
Mae read 976 pages in 8 weeks. She read the same number of pages each week. How many pages did she read each week?
Options:
a. 109
b. 120
c. 122
d. 984

Answer: c. 122

Explanation:
Total number of pages = 976
Number of weeks = 8
Number of pages Mae read in each week = 976 ÷ 8 = 122

Question 6.
Yolanda and her 3 brothers shared a box of 156 toy dinosaurs. About how many dinosaurs did each child get?
Options:
a. 40
b. 50
c. 60
d. 80

Answer: b. 50

Explanation:
Total number of  toy dinosaurs = 156
Number of brothers = 3
Number of toy dinosaurs each brother got = 156 ÷ 3 = 50

Page No. 271

Question 1.
There are 9 showings of a film about endangered species at the science museum. A total of 459 people saw the film. The same number of people were at each showing. About how many people were at each showing? Select the numbers the quotient is between.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 38
Options:
A. 40
B. 50
C. 60
D. 70
E. 80

Answer: B. 50 C. 60 The quotient is between 50 and 60

Explanation:
Number of people at the showings = 459
Number of showings of a film = 9
Number of people at each showing = Quotient of 459 ÷ 9 = 51

Question 2.
Between which two numbers is the quotient of 87 ÷ 5? Write the numbers in the boxes.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 39
The quotient is between _____ and _____.

Answer: The quotient is between 15 and 20.

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 17 and the remainder is 2.

Question 3.
Look at the model. What division does it show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 40
_____ ÷ _____ = _____ r _____

Answer: 19 ÷ 3 = 6 r 1

Explanation:
Count the total number of counters =Dividend = 19
Number of circles = Divisor = 3
After the distribution of the counters,
The quotient is 6 because in each circle there are 6 counters
The leftover counter is the remainder = 1

For 4a–4d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the division sentence has a remainder.

Question 4.
a. 28 ÷ 4
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 0

Question 4.
b. 35 ÷ 2
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 17 and the remainder is 1

Question 4.
c. 40 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 4

Question 4.
d. 45 ÷ 5
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 0

Page No. 272

Question 5.
A park guide plans the swan boat rides for 40 people. Each boat can carry 6 people at a time. What is the best way to interpret the remainder in this situation so that everyone gets a ride?
Type below:
____________

Answer: 4 people are leftover after the boat takes 6 people at a time for a ride, therefore, these four people go on the ride in the next round.

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 40 counters to represent the 40 people. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 40 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6
Therefore, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 4
It means that the boat takes 7 rounds in which 6 are filled with 6 people while 4 people are leftover they take the last ride.

Question 6.
Nolan divides his 88 toy cars into boxes. Each box holds 9 cars. How many boxes does Nolan need to store all of his cars?
______ boxes

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Total number of toys Nolan has = 88
Number of cars placed in each box  = 9
Number of boxes = 88 ÷ 9 = 9.7 = 10 (approx)
We take approximate value because all the toys must be fit in the box.

A group of 140 tourists are going on a tour. The tour guide rents 15 vans. Each van holds 9 tourists.

Question 7.
Part A
Write a division problem that can be used to find the number of vans needed to carry the tourists. Then solve.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 140 divided by 9 gives the number of vans  needed to carry the tourists

Explanation:

Total number of tourists = 140
Number of students who fit in each van = 9
Number of vans = Quotient of 150 ÷ 9 = 15
The leftover of tourists = Remainder =5
Can be placed in a different van or can be adjusted in the 15 vans.

Question 7.
Part B
What does the remainder mean in the context of the problem?
Type below:
____________

Answer: The leftover of tourists = Remainder =5

Explanation:
The leftover of tourists= Remainder =5
Can be placed in a different van or can be adjusted in the 15 vans.

Question 7.
Part C
How can you use your answer to determine if the tour guide rented enough vans? Explain.
Type below:
____________

Answer: The number of vans would be correct if they were 16 instead of 15

Explanation:
Then the answer can be determined as all the 140  tourists have enjoyed their trip to the fullest and traveled comfortably without any hassle and bustle.

Question 8.
Solve.
3,200 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:

Therefore we can say that the quotient is 400 while the remainder is 0

Page No. 273

Question 9.
Which quotients are equal to 300? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 1,200 ÷ 4
b. 180 ÷ 9
c. 2,400 ÷ 8
d. 2,100 ÷ 7
e. 90 ÷ 3
f. 3,000 ÷ 3

Answer: a. 1,200 ÷ 4, c. 2,400 ÷ 8, d. 2,100 ÷ 7

Explanation:

1,200 ÷ 4

Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

2,400 ÷ 8

Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

2,100 ÷ 7


Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

Question 10.
Margo estimated 188 ÷ 5 to be between 30 and 40. Which basic facts did she use to help her estimate? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 10 ÷ 5
b. 15 ÷ 5
c. 20 ÷ 5
d. 25 ÷ 5

Answer: b. 15 ÷ 5 c. 20 ÷ 5

Explanation:
188 ÷ 5
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 15 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 150 = 15 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 15 tens ÷ 5 = 3 tens
150 ÷ 3 = 30

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 20 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 200 = 20 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 20 tens ÷ 5 = 4 tens
200 ÷ 5 = 40

Therefore we can say that the quotient is between 30 to 40

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 273 Q11

For 12a–12d, choose Yes or No to show how to use the Distributive Property to break apart the dividend to find the quotient 132 ÷ 6.

Question 12.
a. (115 ÷ 6) + (17 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
According to the question, the nearest estimates are 115 and 17 but these are not divisible by 6.

Question 12.
b. (100 ÷ 6) + (32 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
According to the question, the nearest estimates are 100 and 32 but these are not divisible by 6.

Question 12.
c. (90 ÷ 6) + (42 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 132
STEP2 We can break the number 132 into 90 + 42
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (90 ÷ 6) + (42 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 15 +7= 22

Question 12
d. (72 ÷ 6) + (60 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 132
STEP2 We can break the number 132 into 72 + 60
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (72 ÷ 6) + (60 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 12 +10= 22

Question 13.
There are 60 people waiting for a river raft ride. Each raft holds 15 people. Silvia used the work below to find the number of rafts needed. Explain how Silvia’s work can be used to find the number of rafts needed.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 41
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Total number of people = 60
Number of people each river raft can hold = 15
Number of rafts needed to give a ride to all the people = 60 ÷ 15 = 4

Page No. 274

A travelling circus brings along everything it needs for a show in big trucks.

Question 14.
Part A
The circus sets up chairs in rows with 9 seats in each row. How many rows will need to be set up if 513 people are expected to attend the show?
______ rows

Answer: 57

Explanation:
The total number of people = 513
Number of seats in each row = 9
Number of rows = 513 ÷ 9 = 57

Question 14.
Part B
Can the rows be divided into a number of equal sections? Explain how you found your answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Yes, the rows can be divided into equal sections. 57 ÷ 3 = 19

Explanation:
We can divide 57 using the divisor as 3, then the quotient is 19 and the remainder is 0.

Question 14.
Part C
Circus horses eat about 250 pounds of horse food per week. About how many pounds of food does a circus horse eat each day? Explain.
About ______ pounds

Answer: About 35 pounds

Explanation:
Mass of food the horses ate in one week = 250 pounds
Number of days in a week =7
Mass of food the horses ate per day = Quotient of 250 ÷  7 = about 35

Question 15.
Hilda wants to save 825 digital photographs in an online album. Each folder of the album can save 6 photographs. She uses division to find out how may full folders she will have. In what place is the first digit of the quotient?
_________

Answer: Hundreds place

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 825. 800 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 80 tens and 25 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Page No. 275

Question 16.
Which model matches each expression? Write the letter in the box next to the model.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 42
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 43

Answer: 1st picture – 150 ÷ 30
2nd picture – 160 ÷ 40
3rd picture – 150 ÷ 50
4th picture – 160 ÷ 80

Explanation:
150 ÷ 30

160 ÷ 40

150 ÷ 50

160 ÷ 80

Question 17.
Popcorn was donated for the school fair by 3 different popcorn vendors. They donated a total of 636 bags of popcorn. Each vendor donated the same number of bags. How many bags of popcorn did each vendor donate?
______ bags

Question 18.
Use partial quotients. Fill in the blanks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 44

Answer: 212

Explanation:
Total number of popcorn bags = 636
Number of popcorn vendors = 3
Number of popcorn bags donated by each vendor = 636 ÷ 3 = 212

Therefore the number of bags donated by each vendor = 212

Page No. 276

Question 19.
Zack needs to divide these base-ten blocks into 3 equal groups.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 45
Draw or describe a model to show how many are in each group.
Type below:
________

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Total number of counters = 48
Number of groups they are supposed to be divided = 3
Then, 48 ÷ 3

Therefore the quotient is 16 and the remainder is 0.

Question 20.
Jim needs to divide 750 coupon books equally among 9 stores. In which place is the first digit of the quotient? Choose the word that makes the sentence true.
The first digit of the quotient is in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 46 place.
________

Answer: tens place

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 750. 720 hundred can be shared among 9 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 72 tens and 30 ones to share among 9 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 276 Q21

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Page 276 Q22

Page No. 280

Question 1.
Use the arrays to name the factors of 12.
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 47
_____ × _____ = 12

Answer: 6 x 2 = 12

Explanation:
There are a total of 12 counters in the given figure.
So, we can see that 6 + 6 = 12 from the above figure.
Hence we can write as 6 x 2 = 12

Question 1.
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 48
_____ × _____ = 12

Question 1.

Answer: 4 x 3 = 12

Explanation:
The number of columns and rows are 4 and 3 respectively.
So we can calculate the multiplication by 4 x 3 = 12

c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 49
_____ × _____ = 12

Answer: 6 x 2 = 12

Explanation:
The number of columns and rows are 4 and 3 respectively.
So we can calculate the multiplication by 4 x 3 = 12.

Use tiles to find all the factors of the product. Record the arrays and write the factors shown.

Question 2.
5: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 3.
20: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 4.
25: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Page No. 281

Practice: Copy and Solve Use tiles to find all the factors of the product. Record the arrays on grid paper and write the factors shown.

Question 5.
9: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 6.
21: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 7.
17: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 8.
18: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Use the diagram for 9–10.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 50

Question 9.
Pablo is using 36 tiles to make a patio. Can he arrange the tiles in another way and show the same factors? Draw a quick picture and explain.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 10.
How many different rectangular arrays can Pablo make with all 36 tiles, so none of the arrays show the same factors?
________ rectangular arrays

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 11.
If 6 is a factor of a number, what other numbers must be factors of the number?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 12.
Jean spent $16 on new T-shirts. If each shirt cost the same whole-dollar amount, how many could she have bought?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Page No. 282

Question 13.
Carmen has 18 connecting cubes. She wants to model a house shaped like a rectangle. If the model has a height of one connecting cube, how many different ways can Carmen model the house using all 18 connecting cubes?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 51
a. What do you need to know?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
b. How is finding the number of ways to model a rectangular house related to finding factor pairs?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
c. Why is finding the factor pairs only the first step in solving the problem?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
d. Show the steps you used to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
Complete the sentences. Factor pairs for 18 are ___________________ .
There are ______ different ways Carmen can arrange the cubes to model the house.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
Sarah was organizing vocabulary words using index cards. She arranged 40 index cards in the shape of a rectangle on a poster. For 14a–14e, choose Yes or No to tell whether a possible arrangement of cards is shown.
a. 4 rows of 10 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
b. 6 rows of 8 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
c. 20 rows of 2 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
d. 40 rows of 1 card
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
e. 35 rows of 5 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Conclusion:

I think the answers provided in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers are beneficial for all the students of 4th grade. Our aim is to help the students to become masters in maths. So, Refer to our HMH Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers and secure good marks in the exams.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume

go-math-grade-5-chapter-11-geometry-and-volume-answer-key

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume comes with Crystal Clear Solutions and makes it easy for you to grasp the topics in it. Get Acquainted with the Geometry and Volume of Rectangular Prisms in the later sections. We provide Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key by Subject experts and explained them clearly so that students will no longer feel the concepts of Geometry and Volume difficult anymore.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume

Anyone who wishes to know the Procedure on How to find the Geometry and Volume of different shapes can get them using the 5th Grade Go Math Answer Key for Ch 11 Geometry and Volume. You can access the Topics of 5th Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 11 through the direct links available out there. The Topics Covered in the Geometry and Volume Chapter include polygons, quadrilaterals, triangles, understand volume, estimate volume, the volume of the rectangular prism, etc.

Lesson 1: Polygons

Lesson 2: Triangles

Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals

Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures

Lesson 6: Understand Volume

Lesson 7: Estimate Volume

Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms

Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas

Lesson 10: Problem Solving Compare Volumes

Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures

Chapter Review/Test

Share and Show – Lesson 1: Polygons – Page No. 639

Question 1.
Name the polygon. Then use the markings on the figure to tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 1
a. Name the polygon.
__________

Answer: Triangle

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of three sides. So, the name of the polygon is a triangle.

Question 1.
b. Are all the sides and all the angles congruent?
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
When line segments have the same length or when angles have the same measure, they are congruent. All sides are equal in the above figure.
Thus the above figure is congruent.

Question 1.
c. Is the polygon a regular polygon?
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent.
The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above figure is a regular polygon.

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 2
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Hexagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 6 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Hexagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above figure is a regular polygon.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 3
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Quadrilateral
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 4 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Quadrilateral.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 4
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Octagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 8 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Octagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Octagon is a regular polygon.

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 5
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Quadrilateral
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 4 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Quadrilateral.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Quadrilateral is a regular polygon.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 6
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Triangle
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of three sides. So, the name of the polygon is a triangle.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 7
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Heptagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 7 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Heptagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Heptagon is a regular polygon.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 8
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Hexagon
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of six sides. So, the name of the polygon is a Hexagon.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides and angles thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 9
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Pentagon
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of five sides. So, the name of the polygon is a Pentagon.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides and angles thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 10
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Pentagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of five sides. So, the name of the polygon is a Pentagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Pentagon is a regular polygon.

Problem Solving – Lesson 1: Polygons – Page No. 640

For 11–12, use the Castel del Monte floor plan at the right.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 11

Question 11.
Which polygons in the floor plan have four equal sides and four congruent angles? How many of these polygons are there?
polygon: __________
The number of polygons: __________

Answer:
polygon: Quadrilateral
The number of polygons: 8

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are eight Quadrilaterals in the octagon. And the number of polygons is 8.

Question 12.
Is there a quadrilateral in the floor plan that is not a regular polygon? Name the quadrilateral and tell how many of the quadrilaterals are in the floor plan.
Name of quadrilateral: __________
The number of quadrilaterals: __________

Answer:
Name of quadrilateral: Trapezoid
The number of quadrilaterals: 8

Explanation:
The name of the Quadrilateral for the above figure is Trapezoid. There is 8 number of quadrilaterals in the floor plan.

Question 13.
Sketch eight points. Then connect the points to draw a closed plane figure.
What kind of polygon did you draw?
__________

Answer: Octagon

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 4

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 640 Q14

Question 15.
Test Prep Which of the following is a regular hexagon?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 12
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 13
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 14
d. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 15

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 14

Share and Show – Lesson 2: Triangles – Page No. 645

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 16
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are unequal. If three sides of the triangle are different it is known as Scalene. The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 17
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Equilateral
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are equal. If three sides of the triangle are equal it is known as the equilateral triangle. The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 18
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:

△ – Isosceles
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 2 sides of the triangle are equal and the third side is not equal. If two sides of the triangle are different it is known as Isosceles.
The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

On Your Own

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 19
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene
∠ – Right

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are unequal. If three sides of the triangle are different it is known as Scalene. One of the angle is 90° thus the angle is known as a right angle.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 20
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Isosceles
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 2 sides of the triangle are equal and the third side is not equal. If two sides of the triangle are different it is known as Isosceles.
The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 21
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene
∠ – Obtuse

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are unequal. If three sides of the triangle are different it is known as Scalene. The angles are more than 90° thus the angle is known as an obtuse angle.

A triangle has sides with the lengths and angle measures are given.

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 645 Q7

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 645 Q8

Question 9.
Circle the figure that does not belong.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 22
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-22

Problem Solving – Lesson 2: Triangles – Page No. 646

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 646 Q10

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 646 Q11

Question 12.
Test Prep Which kind of triangle has exactly 2 congruent sides?
Options:
a. isosceles
b. equilateral
c. scalene
d. right

Answer: isosceles

Explanation:
An isosceles triangle, therefore, has both two equal sides and two equal angles.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Connect to Science
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 23

Classify the triangles in the structures below. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral. Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 13.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 24
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Equilateral triangle
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
From the figure, we can see an equilateral triangle. In an equilateral triangle, all sides will be less than 90°. So it is an acute angle.

Question 14.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 25
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene triangle
∠ – Right

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see a right-angle triangle. The three sides of the above triangle is different. So, it is known as the scalene triangle.

Share and Show – Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals – Page No. 651

Question 1.
Use quadrilateral ABCD to answer each question. Complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 26
a. Measure the sides. Are any of the sides congruent?
Mark any congruent sides.
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The above figure consists of same sides. Thus the above Quadrilateral is congruent.

Question 1.
b. How many right angles, if any, does the quadrilateral have?
_____

Answer: 0

The above figure doesn’t have any straight line. Thus the above figure has 0 right angles.

Question 1.
c. How many pairs of parallel sides, if any, does the quadrilateral have?
_____ pairs

Answer: 2

Explanation:
The above has two parallel sides. Yes, the Quadrilateral has parallel sides.

Question 1.
So, quadrilateral ABCD is a ______________ .
_________

Answer: Parallelogram

Explanation:
A parallelogram is a special trapezoid with opposite sides are equal.

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.

Write quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, square, or trapezoid.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 27
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral are:
1. Rectangle
2. Parallelogram
3. Quadrilateral

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 28
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral are:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Trapezoid

On Your Own

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.

Write quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, square, or trapezoid.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 29
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________
4. _________
5. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Square
2. Quadrilateral
3. Parallelogram
4. Rectangle
5. Rhombus

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 30
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Trapezoid
2. Parallelogram

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 31
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Rhombus
2. Parallelogram
3. Square

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 32
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Rectangle
2. Parallelogram

Problem Solving – Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals – Page No. 652

Solve the problems.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 652 Q8

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 652 Q9

Question 10.
The opposite corners of a quadrilateral are right angles. The quadrilateral is not a rhombus. What kind of quadrilateral is this figure? Explain how you know.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

It depends, is it just one set of opposite angles that are right angles? Then it could be just a quadrilateral, or it could be a kite, or it could be a rectangle. Because a Quadrilateral is the least restrictive, the best answer is. “It is a quadrilateral”.
Or is it both sets of opposite angles are right angles? Then it can only be a “rectangle, that is not a square”.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 solution img-1

Question 11.
I am a figure with four sides. I can be placed in the following categories: quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, and square. Draw me. Explain why I fit into each category.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Square
Go Math 5th Grade Solution Key Chapter 11 img-2

Question 12.
Test Prep A quadrilateral has exactly 1 pair of parallel sides and no congruent sides. What type of quadrilateral is it?
Options:
a. rectangle
b. rhombus
c. parallelogram
d. trapezoid

Answer: Trapezoid

Explanation:
A quadrilateral with one pair of parallel sides is a trapezoid.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 455

Question 1.
Erica thinks that triangle X Y Z, below, has two congruent sides, but she does not have a ruler to measure the sides. Are two sides congruent?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 33
First, trace the triangle and cut out the tracing.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-22 (1)

Question 1.
Then, fold the triangle to match each pair of sides to determine if at least two of the sides are congruent. As you test the sides, record or draw the results for each pair to make sure that you have checked all pairs of sides. Possible drawings are shown.
Type below:
_________

Question 1.
Finally, answer the question.
______

Answer: Yes

Question 2.
What if Erica also wants to show, without using a protractor, that the triangle has one right angle and two acute angles? Explain how she can show this.

Answer:
The sum of three angles = 180
If one of the angles is 90 then the other two angles will be acute angles.

Question 3.
December, January, and February were the coldest months in Kristen’s town last year. February was the warmest of these months. December was not the coldest. What is the order of these months from coldest to warmest?
Coldest: _________
_________
Warmest: _________
_________

Answer:
Coldest: January
December
Warmest: February

Explanation:
January and December are the coldest months of the year depending on the direction of the wind. February is the warmest month among these months.

Question 4.
Jan enters a 20-foot by 30-foot rectangular room. The long sides face north and south. Jan enters the exact center of the south side and walks 10 feet north. Then she walks 8 feet east. How far is she from the east side of the room?
______ ft

Answer: 7 feet

Explanation:
Given that,
Jan enters a 20-foot by 30-foot rectangular room.
The long sides face north and south.
Jan enters the exact center of the south side and walks 10 feet north.
Then she walks 8 feet east.
Jan is 7 feet from the east wall in the room.

On Your Own – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 456

Question 5.
Max drew a grid to divide a piece of paper into 18 congruent squares, as shown. What is the least number of lines Max can draw to divide the grid into 6 congruent rectangles?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 34
______ lines

Answer: 3 lines

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that there are 18 congruent squares.
To find the least number of lines Max can draw we have to divide number of squares by number of congruent rectangles
18 ÷ 6 = 3
Thus the least number of lines that Max can Draw is 3 lines.

Question 6.
Of the 95 fifth and sixth graders going on a field trip, there are 27 more fifth-graders than sixth graders. How many fifth graders are going on the field trip?
5th graders = ______

Answer: 61

Explanation:
Since we are not told how many 6th graders are going on the trip let’s use a variable, the letter x.
Now let’s understand the problem in the “math” language.
x= the number of 6th graders.
X+27= the number of 5th graders since there are 27 more fifth-graders than sixth graders.
x+x+27 = 95
2x+27=95
-27 -27
2x+ 0 =68
2x=68
divide by 2 on both sides.
x = 34
Now, remember how x+27 = the number of 5th graders going on the trip?
Since we know that x=34, substitute the x as 34+27 which = 61 fifth graders going on the trip.

Use the map to solve 7–8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 35

Question 7.
Sam’s paper route begins and ends at the corner of Redwood Avenue and Oak Street. His route is made up of 4 streets, and he makes no 90° turns. What kind of polygon do the streets of Sam’s paper route form? Name the streets in Sam’s route.
_________

Answer: Parallelogram

Explanation:
Given that, Sam’s paper route begins and ends at the corner of Redwood Avenue and Oak Street. His route is made up of 4 streets, and he makes no 90° turns.
By following the route map we can say that the polygon is a parallelogram.

Question 8.
Sam’s paper route includes all 32 houses on two pairs of parallel streets. If each street has the same number of houses, how many houses are on each street?
Name the parallel streets.
______ houses on each street

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Given,
Sam’s paper route includes all 32 houses on two pairs of parallel streets.
If each street has same number of houses we have to divide 32 by 4
32 ÷ 4 = 8
Thus there are 8 houses on each street.

Question 8.
Test Prep Which figure below is a quadrilateral that has opposite sides that are congruent and parallel?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 36
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 37
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 38
d. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 39

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 37

Explanation:
Square is a type of quadrilateral that has opposite sides that are congruent and parallel.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Share and Show – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 656

Classify the solid figure. Write prism, pyramid, cone, cylinder, or sphere.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 40
_________

Answer: Triangular prism

Explanation:
A triangular prism is a three-sided prism; it is a polyhedron made of a triangular base, a translated copy, and 3 faces joining corresponding sides. A right triangular prism has rectangular sides, otherwise, it is oblique.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 41
_________

Answer: Sphere

Explanation:
A sphere has no bases and 1 curved surface.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 42
_________

Answer: Hexagonal Base Pyramid

Explanation:
A pyramid that has a hexagonal base, that is, base with six sides and 6 triangular lateral faces, then it is a hexagonal pyramid.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 43
_________

Answer: Pentagonal prism

Explanation:
A pentagonal prism is a prism that has two pentagonal bases like top and bottom and five rectangular sides. It is a type of heptahedron with 7 faces, 10 vertices, and 15 edges.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 44
_________

Answer: Pentagonal Base Pyramid

Explanation:
In geometry, a pentagonal pyramid is a pyramid with a pentagonal base upon which are erected five triangular faces that meet at a point.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 45
_________

Answer: Cylinder

Explanation:
A cylinder has 2 congruent circular bases and 1 curved surface.

On Your Own

Classify the solid figure. Write prism, pyramid, cone, cylinder, or sphere.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 46
_________

Answer: Rectangular prism

Explanation:
A rectangular prism is a polyhedron with two congruent and parallel bases. It is also a cuboid. It has six faces, and all the faces are in a rectangle shape and have twelve edges. Because of its cross-section along the length, it is said to be a prism.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 47
_________

Answer: Cylinder

Explanation:
A cylinder has 2 congruent circular bases and 1 curved surface.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 48
_________

Answer: Cone

Explanation:
A cone has 1 circular base and 1 curved surface.

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 49
_________

Answer: Triangle base pyramid

Explanation:
A triangle-based pyramid has four triangular sides. The base can be any shape or size of the triangle but usually, it is an equilateral triangle. This means the three sides of the pyramid are the same size as each other and the pyramid looks the same if you rotate it.

Question 11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 50
_________

Answer: Rectangular prism

Explanation:
A rectangular prism is a polyhedron with two congruent and parallel bases. It is also a cuboid. It has six faces, and all the faces are in a rectangle shape and have twelve edges. Because of its cross-section along the length, it is said to be a prism.

Question 12.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 51
_________

Answer: Triangular prism

Explanation:
A prism’s base shape is used to name the solid figure. The base shape of this prism is a triangle. The prism is a triangular prism.

Question 13.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 52
_________

Answer: Hexagonal Prism

Explanation:
In geometry, the hexagonal prism is a prism with a hexagonal base. This polyhedron has 8 faces, 18 edges, and 12 vertices. Since it has 8 faces, it is an octahedron. However, the term octahedron is primarily used to refer to the regular octahedron, which has eight triangular faces.

Question 14.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 53
_________

Answer: Square Pyramid

Explanation:
In geometry, a square pyramid is a pyramid having a square base. If the apex is perpendicularly above the center of the square, it is a right square pyramid and has symmetry. If all edges are equal, it is an equilateral square pyramid.

Question 15.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 54
_________

Answer: Octagonal Prism

Explanation:
In geometry, the octagonal prism is the sixth in an infinite set of prisms, formed by square sides and two regular octagon caps. If the faces are all regular, it is a semiregular polyhedron.

Problem Solving – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 657

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 657 Q16

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 657 Q17

Connect to Reading

Example Read the description. Underline the details you need to identify the solid figure that will name the correct building.

This building is one of the most identifiable structures on its city’s skyline. It has a square foundation and 28 floors. The building has four triangular exterior faces that meet at a point at the top of the structure.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 55
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 56
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 57

Identify the solid figure and name the correct building.

Question 18.
Solve the problem in the Example.
Solid figure: _________
Building: _________

Answer:
i. Pyramid
ii. Luxor Hotel-Las Vegas-Nevada

Explanation:
The 3rd figure is in the form of a pyramid. The name of the pyramid-shaped building is Luxor Hotel-Las Vegas-Nevada.

Question 19.
This building was completed in 1902. It has a triangular foundation and a triangular roof that are the same size and shape. The three sides of the building are rectangles.
Solid figure: _________
Building: _________

Answer:
i. prism
ii. Flatiron Building-New York City-New York

Explanation:
The triangle-shaped figure is in the form of a prism. The name of the triangular prism building is Flatiron Building-New York, City-New York.

Mid-Chapter Review – Vocabulary – Page No. 661

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 58

Question 1.
A closed plane figure with all sides congruent and all angles congruent is called a ________ .
_________

Answer: Regular Polygon

Question 2.
Line segments that have the same length or angles that have the same measure are __________ .
_________

Answer: Congruent

Concepts and Skills

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 59
Name: _________
Type: _________

Answer:
i. Hexagon
ii. Regular Polygon

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 60
Name: _________
Type: _________

Answer:
i. Triangle
ii. Non-Regular

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 61
Name: _________
Type: _________

Answer:
i. Pentagon
ii. Not Regular

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 62
△ _________
∠ _________

Answer:
i. Equilateral
ii. Acute

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 63
△ _________
∠ _________

Answer:
i. Isosceles
ii. Right

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 64
△ _________
∠ _________

Answer:
i. Isosceles
ii. Obtuse

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible. Write quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, square, or trapezoid.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 65
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Trapezoid

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 66
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________

Answer:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Parallelogram
3. Rectangle

Question 11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 67
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________
4. _________
5. _________

Answer:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Parallelogram
3. Rhombus
4. Rectangle
5. Square

Mid-Chapter Review – Page No. 662

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 12.
What type of triangle is shown below?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 68
Options:
a. right isosceles
b. right scalene
c. equilateral
d. obtuse scalene

Answer: right isosceles

Explanation:
The above figure is a right angle and the two sides of the triangle are equal. The above figure is a right isosceles.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 13.
Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 69
Options:
a. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus
b. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, trapezoid
c. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, trapezoid, square
d. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, square

Answer: quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, square

Question 14.
Classify the following figure.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 70
Options:
a. cone
b. cube
c. rectangular prism
d. rectangular pyramid

Answer: rectangular prism

Explanation:
The 3-dimensional figure of the above rectangle is a rectangular prism.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Share and Show – Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures – Page No. 665

Count the number of cubes used to build each solid figure.

Question 1.
The rectangular prism is made up of _____ unit cubes.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 71
______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the rectangular prism has 3 unit cubes.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 72
______ unit cubes

Answer: 15

Explanation:
The above figure shows that there are 5 congruent squares of 3 lines.
5 × 3 = 15 unit cubes

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 73
______ unit cubes

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The above figure shows that there are 4 congruent squares of 3 lines.
4 × 3 = 12 unit cubes

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 74
______ unit cubes

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The above figure shows that there are 6 congruent squares of 2 lines.
6 × 2 = 12

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 75
______ unit cubes

Answer: 5

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are 5 unit cubes.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 76
______ unit cubes

Answer: 6

Explanation:
There are 6 congruent squares in the above figure.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 77
______ unit cubes

Answer: 7

Explanation:
The figure shows that there are 7 unit cubes.

Question 8.
How are the rectangular prisms in Exercises 3–4 related? Can you show a different rectangular prism with the same relationship? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Go Math Grade 5 key Chapter 11 solution img-3
A rectangular prism is a polyhedron with two congruent and parallel bases. It is also a cuboid. It has six faces, and all the faces are in a rectangle shape and have twelve edges. Because of its cross-section along the length, it is said to be a prism.

Compare the number of unit cubes in each solid figure. Use < , > or =.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 78 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 79

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 78 = Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 79

Explanation:
There are 5 cubes in the first figure and there are 5 cubes in the second figure.
Thus the figures Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 78 is equal to Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 79

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 80 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 81

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 80 < Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 81

Explanation:
There are 4 cubes in the first figure and there are 5 cubes in the second figure.
4 is less than 5
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 80 is less than Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 81

Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures – Page No. 666

Use the information to answer the questions.

The Cube Houses of Rotterdam, Netherlands
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 82

The Nakagin Capsule Tower, Tokyo, Japan
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 83

Question 11.
There are 38 Cube Houses. Each house could hold 1,000 unit cubes that are 1 meter by 1 meter by 1 meter. Describe the dimensions of a cube house using unit cubes. Remember that the edges of a cube are all the same length.
Each dimension = ______ meters

Answer: 10 meters

Explanation:
So each house can hold 1000 cubes that are 1 meter in length.
The house is also shaped like a cube, so you need to cube-root 1000.
The cube-root of 1000 is 10. So the cube house has a length, width, and height of 10 meters.
V = lbh
V = 10 m × 10 m × 10 m = 1000 cu. meter
Thus Each dimension is 10 meters.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 666 Q12

Share and Show – Lesson 6: Understand Volume – Page No. 671

Use the unit given. Find the volume.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 84
Each cube = 1 cu cm
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 48 cu. cm

Explanation:
Given that,
L = 4cm
B = 4cm
H = 3 cm
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lbh
V = 4 cm × 4 cm × 3 cm = 48 cubic cm
Thus the volume for the above cube is 48 cubic cm.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 85
Each cube = 1 cu in.
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 24 cu. in.

Explanation:
Given that,
L = 3 in
B = 2 in
H = 4 in.
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lb
V = 3 in × 2 in × 4 in = 24 cubic inches
Therefore the volume for the above cube is 24 cubic inches.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 86
Each cube = 1 cu ft
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 36 cu. ft

Explanation:
Given that,
L = 6 ft
B = 2 ft
H = 3 ft
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lbh
V = 6 ft × 2 ft × 3 ft = 36 cubic feet
V = 36 cu. ft
Therefore the volume for the above figure is 36 cu. ft

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 87
Each cube = 1 cu in.
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 60 cu. in

Given that,
L = 5 in.
B = 4 in.
H = 3 in.
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lbh
V = 5 in × 4 in × 3 in = 60 cubic inches
Thus the volume for the above figure is 60 cu. in.

Compare the volumes. Write < , >, or =.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 88 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 89

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 88Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 89

Explanation:
Figure 1:
L = 4 cm
B = 4 cm
H = 2 cm
V = 4 × 4 × 2 = 32 cu. cm
Figure 2:
L = 4 in
B = 4 in
H = 2 in
V = 4 × 4 × 2 = 32 cu. in
32 cu. cm is less than 32 cu. in
Thus Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 88Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 89

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 90 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 91

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 90 > Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 91

Explanation:
Let us find the volume for both figures,
Figure 1:
L = 9 ft
B = 4 ft
H = 3 ft
Volume of the cuboid = lbh
V = 9 × 4 × 3 = 108 cu. ft
Figure 2:
L = 8 ft
B = 5 ft
H = 2 ft
Volume of the cuboid = lbh
V = 8 ft × 5 ft × 3 ft = 120 cu. ft
By seeing the volume for both the figures we can say that 120 cu. ft is greater than 108 cu. ft
Thus, Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 90 > Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 91

Problem Solving – Lesson 6: Understand Volume – Page No. 672

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 672 Q7

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 672 Q8
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 672 Q8.1

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 672 Q9

Question 10.
Test Prep Find the volume of the rectangular prism.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 92
Each cube = 1 cu cm
Options:
a. 25 cubic feet
b. 25 cubic meters
c. 75 cubic meters
d. 75 cubic centimeters

Answer: 75 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
L = 5 cm
B = 3 cm
H = 5 cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is lbh
V = 5 cm × 3 cm × 5 cm = 75 cubic centimeter
V = 75 cu. cm
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 7: Estimate Volume – Page No. 677

Estimate the volume.

Question 1.
Each tissue box has a volume of 125 cubic inches.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 93
There are _______ tissue boxes in the larger box.
The estimated volume of the box holding the tissue
boxes is ______ × 125 = _____ cu in.
_____ tissue boxes _____ cu in.

Answer:
Given that the volume of each box is 125 cubic inches.
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are 9 boxes in the larger box.
Thus there are 9 tissue boxes in the larger box.
Now to find the volume of the tissue boxes.
We have to multiply the number of boxes with the volume of the box
V = 125 × 9 = 1125 cubic inches.
Therefore The estimated volume of the box holding the tissue boxes is 1125 cubic inches.

Question 2.
Volume of chalk box: 16 cu in.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 94
Volume of large box: ______________ .
_____ cu in.

Answer:
Given that, the volume of the chalk box is 16 cubic inches.
From the figure, we can see that there are 24 boxes.
The volume of the large box is 24 × 16 = 384 cubic inches.
Therefore the estimated volume of the large box is 384 cu in.

Question 3.
Volume of small jewelry box: 30 cu cm
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 95
Volume of large box: __________
_____ cu cm

Answer:
Given, the volume of the small jewelry box is 30 cu cm
There are 10 small jewelry boxes.
V = 30 × 10 = 300 cu. cm
Thus the estimated volume of large box is 300 cu. cm

On Your Own

Estimate the volume.

Question 4.
Volume of book: 80 cu in.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 96
Volume of large box: __________
_____ cu in.

Answer:
Given that, the volume of the book is 80 cu. in
There are 12 books in the figure.
Multiply the number of books with the volume of each book
= 12 × 80 = 960 cu. inches
Thus the estimated volume of large books is 960 cu in.

Question 5.
Volume of spaghetti box: 750 cu cm
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 97
Volume of large box: ________
_____ cu cm

Answer:
Volume of spaghetti box is 750 cu. cm
Volume = 2 × 5 × 4 = 40
Number of boxes = 40
Now multiply 40 with 750 cu. cm to find the volume of large box
V = 40 × 750 cu. cm
V = 30000 cubic cm
Therefore the estimated Volume of large box is 30000 cubic cm

Question 6.
Volume of cereal box: 324 cu in.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 98
Volume of large box: __________
cu in.

Answer:
Given, Volume of a cereal box is 324 cu. in
Number of boxes is 2 × 3 × 3 = 18
The volume of large box is 18 × 324 cu. in
V = 18 × 324 cu. in = 5832 cubic inches
Thus the estimated Volume of large box is 5832 cubic inches.

Question 7.
Volume of pencil box: 4,500 cu cm
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 99
Volume of large box: ________
_____ cu cm

Answer:
Volume of pencil box is 4500 cu cm
Number of pencil boxes = 2 × 5 = 10
The volume of large box is 4500 × 10 = 45000 cu cm
Thus the estimated volume of large box is 45000 cu cm

Problem Solving – Lesson 7: Estimate Volume – Page No. 678

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 8.
Marcelle estimated the volume of the two boxes below, using one of his books. His book has a volume of 48 cubic inches. Box 1 holds about 7 layers of books, and Box 2 holds about 14 layers of books. Marcelle says that the volume of either box is about the same.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 100
Does Marcelle’s statement make sense or is it nonsense?
Explain your answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Calculate the books in box 1
V = lbh
V1 = 2 × 4 × 7 = 56 books
Calculate the volume of books in box 2
V = lbh
V2 = 1 × 4 × 14 = 56 books
So, both boxes hold the same number of books.
Thus Marcelle’s statement make sense.

Share and Show – Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms – Page No. 683

Find the volume.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 101
The length of the rectangular prism is ______.
The width is ______. So, the area of the base is ______.
The height is ______. So, the volume of the prism is ______.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 120 cu. in

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 4 in
The width of the rectangular prism is 5 in
The height of the rectangular prism is 6 in.
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 4 in × 6 in × 5 in = 120 cu. in
So, the volume of the prism is 120 cu. in

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 102
Volume: ______ cu cm

Answer: 18

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 2 cm
The width of the rectangular prism is 3 cm
The height of the rectangular prism is 3 cm
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 2 cm × 3 cm × 3 cm = 18 cu. cm
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 18 cu. cm

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 103
Volume: ______ cu in.

Answer: 12

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 2 in.
The width of the rectangular prism is 6 in.
The height of the rectangular prism is 1 in.
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 2 in × 6 in × 1 in
V = 12 Cu in.
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 12 Cu in.

On Your Own

Find the volume.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 104
Volume: ______ cu mm

Answer: 24

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 1 mm
The width of the rectangular prism is 8 mm
The height of the rectangular prism is 3 mm
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 1 mm × 8 mm × 3 mm
V = 24 Cu. mm
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 24 Cu. mm

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 105
Volume: ______ cu cm

Answer: 160

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 10 cm
The width of the rectangular prism is 4 cm
The height of the rectangular prism is 4 cm
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 10 cm × 4 cm × 4 cm = 160 Cu. cm
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 160 Cu. cm

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 106
Volume: ______ cu ft

Answer: 150

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 5 ft
The width of the rectangular prism is 6 ft
The height of the rectangular prism is 5 ft
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 5 ft × 6 ft × 5 ft
V = 150 Cu. ft
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 150 Cu. ft

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 107
Volume: ______ cu in.

Answer: 196

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 7 in.
The width of the rectangular prism is 7 in.
The height of the rectangular prism is 4 in.
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 7 in × 7 in × 4 in = 196 Cu. in
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 196 Cu. in

UNLOCK the Problem – Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms – Page No. 684

Question 8.
Rich is building a travel crate for his dog, Thomas, a beagle mix who is about 30 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 24 inches tall. For Thomas to travel safely, his crate needs to be a rectangular prism that is about 12 inches greater than his length and width, and 6 inches greater than his height. What is the volume of the travel crate that Rich should build?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 108
a. What do you need to find to solve the problem?
Type below:
_________

Answer: We need to find the volume of the travel crate that Rich should build.

Question 8.
b. How can you use Thomas’s size to help you solve the problem?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Thomas’s size helps to find the length, width and height of the dog crate.

Question 8.
c. What steps can you use to find the size of Thomas’s crate?
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Rich is building a travel crate for his dog, Thomas, a beagle mix who is about 30 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 24 inches tall.
For Thomas to travel safely, his crate needs to be a rectangular prism that is about 12 inches greater than his length and width, and 6 inches greater than his height.
Length of the dog crate is 30 in + 12 in = 42 inches
Width of the dog crate is 12 inches more than width of Thomas crate = 12 in + 12 in = 24 inches
Height of the dog crate is 24 in + 6 in = 30 inches
V = 42 in × 24 in × 30 in
V = 30,240 cu in

Question 8.
d. Fill in the blanks for the dimensions of the dog crate.
length: _____
width: _____
height: _____
area of base: _____
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Crate length = 30 + 12 = 42 in
Crate width = 12 + 12 = 24 in
Crate height = 24 + 6 = 30 in
Area of base = l × w
A = 42 in × 24 in = 1008 sq in.

Question 8.
e. Find the volume of the crate by multiplying the base area and the height.
______ × ______ = ______
So, Rich should build a travel crate for Thomas that has a volume of ______ .
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Area of base = l × w
A = 42 in × 24 in = 1008 sq in.
Height = 30 in
V = 1008 sq in × 30 in = 30240 cu. in
So, Rich should build a travel crate for Thomas that has a volume of 30240 cu. in

Question 9.
What is the volume of the rectangular prism at the right?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 109
Options:
a. 35 in.3
b. 125 in.3
c. 155 in.3
d. 175 in.3

Answer: 175 in.3

Explanation:
Length = 5 in
Width = 7 in
Height = 5 in
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 5 in × 7 in × 5 in
V = 175 in.3
The volume of the rectangular prism is 175 in.3
Therefore the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas – Page No. 689

Find the volume.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 110
V =____ cu ft

Answer: 40

Explanation:
length = 2 ft
width = 4 ft
height = 5 ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 2 ft × 4 ft × 5 ft
V = 40 cu ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is 40 cu. ft

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 111
V =____ cu cm

Answer: 144

Explanation:
length = 4 cm
width = 4 cm
height = 9 cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 4 cm × 4 cm × 9 cm
V = 144 cu cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is 144 cu cm

On Your Own

Find the volume.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 112
V =____ cu in.

Answer: 216

Explanation:
length = 6 in
width = 6 in
height = 6 in
Volume of the prism is l × w × h
V = 6 in × 6 in × 6 in
V = 216 cu. in
Thus the Volume of the prism is 216 cu. in.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 113
V =____ cu ft

Answer: 192

Explanation:
length = 12 ft
width = 4 ft
height = 4 ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 12 ft × 4 ft × 4 ft
V = 192 cu ft
Therefore, the Volume of the rectangular prism is 192 cu ft.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 114
V =____ cu cm

Answer: 240

Explanation:
length = 10 cm
width = 6 cm
height = 4 cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 10 cm × 6 cm × 4 cm
V = 240 Cu. cm
Therefore, the Volume of the rectangular prism is 240 Cu. cm.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 115
V =____ cu in.

Answer: 1008

Explanation:
length = 14 in.
width = 6 in.
height = 12 in.
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 14 in × 6 in × 12 in
V = 1008 cu. in
Thus the Volume of the rectangular prism is 1008 cu. in

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 116
V =420 cu ft
■ = ____ ft

Answer: 10

Explanation:
length = 7 ft
width = 6 ft
height = ■ ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
420 cu ft = 7 ft × 6 ft × ■
■ × 42 sq ft = 420 cu ft
■ = 420 cu ft ÷ 42 sq ft
■ = 10 ft

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 117
V =900 cu cm
■ = ____ cm

Answer: 10

Explanation:
length = 6 cm
width = 15 cm
height = ■ cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 900 cu cm
900 cu cm = 6 cm × 15 cm × ■ cm
900 cu cm = 90 sq cm × ■ cm
■ cm = 900 cu cm ÷ 90 sq cm
■ cm = 10 cm

Problem Solving – Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas – Page No. 690

Question 9.
The Jade Restaurant has a large aquarium on display in its lobby. The base of the aquarium is 5 feet by 2 feet. The height of the aquarium is 4 feet. How many cubic feet of water are needed to completely fill the aquarium?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 118
V =____ cu ft of water

Answer: 40 cu ft of water

Explanation:
The Jade Restaurant has a large aquarium on display in its lobby.
The base of the aquarium is 5 feet by 2 feet.
The height of the aquarium is 4 feet.
Volume = b × w × h
V = 5 feet × 2 feet× 4 feet
V = 40 Cu. ft
Therefore, the volume of the aquarium is 40 cu ft of water.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 690 Q10

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 690 Q11
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 690 Q11.1

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 690 Q12

Question 13.
Test Prep Adam stores his favorite CDs in a box like the one at the right. What is the volume of the box?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 119
Options:
a. 150 cubic centimeters
b. 750 cubic centimeters
c. 1,050 cubic centimeters
d. 1,150 cubic centimeters

Answer: 1,050 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
L = 15 cm
W = 10 cm
H = 7 cm
V = lwh
V = 15 cm × 10 cm × 7 cm = 1050 cubic centimeters
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Share and Show – Lesson 10: Problem Solving Compare Volumes – Page No. 695

Question 1.
Mr. Price makes cakes for special occasions. His most popular-sized cakes have a volume of 360 cubic inches. The cakes have a height, or thickness, of 3 inches, and have different whole number lengths and widths. No cakes have a length or width of 1 or 2 inches. How many different cakes, each with a different-size base, have a volume of 360 cubic inches?
First, think about what the problem is asking you to solve, and the information that you are given.
Next, make a table using the information from problem.
Finally, use the table to solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: There are total of 8 different possible combination of length and width

Explanation:
Volume = 360 cubic inches
Height = 3 inches
Volume = l x w x h
360 = l x w x 3
l x w = 120
The factors of 120 are,
1 x 120,
2x 60,
3 x 40,
4 x 30,
5 x 24,
6 x 20,
8 x 15,
10 x 12

Question 2.
What if the 360 cubic-inch cakes are 4 inches thick and any whole number length and width are possible? How many different cakes could be made? Suppose that the cost of a cake that size is $25, plus $1.99 for every 4 cubic inches of cake. How much would the cake cost?
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Since the store have a volume of 360 cu in and a height of 4 in.
We need to find the number of different stones which have a base of 90 sq in.
V = b × h
B = 360 cu in/4 in
B = 90 sq in.
Consider the factors of 90.
The factors of 90 are 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 15, 18, 30, 45, 90
Make a table with the base, height and volume for each pair of factors
Height = 4 in
1 × 90 × 4 = 360 cu in
2 × 45 × 4 = 360 cu in
3 × 30 × 4 = 360 cu in
5 × 18 × 4 = 360 cu in
6 × 15 × 4 = 360 cu in
9 × 10 × 4 = 360 cu in
6 different sized paving stones.
Remember that each store has a volume of 360 cu in.
Divide by 4 to find how many 4 cu in per stone
Concrete = $0.18 × (360/4)
= $0.18 × 90 = $18.70
The cost of the stone plus the concrete
cost = $2.50 + concrete
Cost = $2.50 + $16.20 = $18.70

Question 3.
One company makes inflatable swimming pools that come in four sizes of rectangular prisms. The length of each pool is twice the width and twice the depth. The depth of the pools are each a whole number from 2 to 5 feet. If the pools are filled all the way to the top, what is the volume of each pool?
Type below:
_________

Answer:
If the depth of the pool is 2 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 2 feet × 2 × 2 = 8 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 2 feet × 2 = 4 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 8 ft × 4 feet × 2 ft
V = 64 cu ft
If the depth of the pool is 3 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 3 feet × 2 × 2 = 12 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 3 feet × 2 = 6 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 12 ft × 6 feet × 2 ft
V = 144 cu ft
If the depth of the pool is 4 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 4 feet × 2 × 2 = 16 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 4 feet × 2 = 8 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 16 ft × 8 feet × 2 ft
V = 256 cu ft
If the depth of the pool is 5 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 5 feet × 2 × 2 = 20 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 5 feet × 2 = 10 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 20 ft × 10 feet × 2 ft
V = 400 cu ft

On Your Own – Lesson 10: Problem Solving Compare Volumes – Page No. 696

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 696 Q4
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 696 Q4.1

Question 5.
Ken owns 13 CDs. His brother Keith has 7 more CDs than he does. Their brother, George, has more CDs than either of the younger brothers. Together, the three brothers have 58 CDs. How many CDs does George have?
______ CDs

Answer: 25 CDs

Explanation:
Given that,
Ken owns 13 CDs.
His brother Keith has 7 more CDs than he does.
Their brother, George, has more CDs than either of the younger brothers.
Together, the three brothers have 58 CDs.
Keith has 7 more CDs than Ken
That means he has 7 + 13 = 20 CDs
Now subtract Ken’s CDs, Keith CDs from the total number of CDs.
= 58 – 20 – 13 = 25 CDs.
Thus George has 25 CDs.

Question 6.
Kathy has ribbons that have lengths of 7 inches, 10 inches, and 12 inches. Explain how she can use these ribbons to measure a length of 15 inches.
Type below:
_________

Answer: She could take the 10-inch ribbon and then use 5 inches from the 7-inch ribbon

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 696 Q7

Question 8.
Test Prep John is making a chest that will have a volume of 1,200 cubic inches. The length is 20 inches and the width is 12 inches. How many inches tall will his chest be?
Options:
a. 4 in.
b. 5 in.
c. 6 in.
d. 7 in.

Answer: 5 in

Explanation:
John is making a chest that will have a volume of 1,200 cubic inches.
The length is 20 inches and the width is 12 inches.
Volume = l × w × h
1200 cu in = 20 in × 12 in × h
240 sq in × h = 1200 cu in
h = 1200 cu in ÷ 240 sq in
h = 5 in
Thus John’s chest will be 5 inches tall.
The correct answer is option B.

Share and Show – Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures – Page No. 701

Find the volume of the composite figure.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 120
V = ______ cu in.

Answer: 88 cu in.

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 2 in
h = 3 in
w = 4 in
V = 2 in × 4 in × 3 in
V = 24 cu. in
Volume of figure 2:
b = 8 in
w = 4 in
h = 2 in
V = 8 in × 4 in × 2 in
V = 64 in
Volume of the composite figure = 24 cu in + 64 cu. in = 88 cu. in

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 121
V = ______ cu cm

Answer: 48 cu cm

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 3 cm
h = 1 cm
w = 2 cm
V = 3 cm × 2 cm × 1 cm
V = 6 cu. cm
Volume of figure 2:
b = 7 cm
w = 6 cm
h = 1 cm
V = 7 cm × 6 cm × 1 cm
V = 42 cu. cm
Volume of the composite figure = 42 cu. cm + 6 cu. cm = 48 cu cm

On Your Own

Find the volume of the composite figure.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 122
V = ______ cu ft

Answer: 52 cu ft

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 6 ft
h = 2 ft
w = 3 ft
V = 6 ft × 3 ft × 2 ft
V = 36 cu. ft
Volume of figure 2:
b = 4 ft
w = 2 ft
h = 2 ft
V = 4 ft × 2 ft × 2 ft
V = 16 cu. ft
Volume of the composite figure = 36 cu. ft + 16 cu. ft = 52 cu ft

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 123
V = ______ cu cm

Answer: 108 cu. cm

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 3 cm
w = 8 cm
h = 2 cm
V = 3 cm × 8 cm × 2 cm
V = 48 cu cm
Volume of figure 2:
b = 10 cm
w = 3 cm
h = 2 cm
V = 10 cm × 3 cm × 2 cm
V = 60 cu cm
Volume of the composite figure = 48 cu cm + 60 cu cm = 108 cu. cm

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 124
V = ______ cu in.

Answer: 204 cu. in

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 3 in
h = 5 in
w = 4 in
V = 3 in × 4 in × 5 in
V = 60 cu. in
Volume of figure 2:
b = 12 in
w = 4 in
h = 3 in
V = 12 in × 4 in × 3 in
V = 144 cu. in
Volume of the composite figure = 60 cu in + 144 cu. in = 204 cu. in

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 125
V = ______ cu ft

Answer: 96 cu ft

Explanation:
Split the figure into 3 parts.
Figure 1:
V1 = 9 ft × 4 ft × 2 ft
V1 = 72 cu. ft
Figure 2:
V2 = 3 ft × 4 ft × 2 ft
V2 = 24 cu. ft
V = V1 + V2
V = 72 cu. ft + 24 cu. ft = 96 cu. ft
Thus the volume of the composite figure is 96 cu. ft

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 126
V = ______ cu ft

Answer: 300 cu. ft

Explanation:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-126
Split the figure into 3 parts.
Figure 1:
V1 = 5 ft × 4 ft × 4 ft
V1 = 80 cu. ft
Figure 2:
V2 = 6 ft × 5 ft × 6 ft
V2 = 180 cu ft
Figure 3:
V3 = 4 ft × 5 ft × 2 ft
V3 = 40 cu. ft
V = V1 + V2 + V3
V = 80 cu. ft + 180 cu ft + 40 cu ft = 300 cu. ft

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 127
V = ______ cu cm

Answer: 102 cu cm

Explanation:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-127
Figure 1:
V1 = 10 cm × 3 cm × 2 cm = 60 cu cm
V1 = 60 cu. cm
Figure 2:
V2= 2 cm × 3 cm × 4 cm
V2 = 24 cu. cm
Figure 3:
V3 = 2 cm × 3 cm × 3 cm
V3 = 18 cu. cm
V = V1 + V2 + V3
V = 60 cu. cm + 24 cu. cm + 18 cu. cm = 102 cu. cm

Problem Solving – Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures – Page No. 702

Use the composite figure at the right for 9–11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 128

Question 9.
As part of a wood-working project, Jordan made the figure at the right out of wooden building blocks. How much space does the figure he made take up?
______ cu in.

Answer: 784 cu. in

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Figure 1:
V1 = 14 in × 4 in × 5 in
V1 = 280 cu. in
Figure 2:
V2 = 12 in × 14 in × 3 in
V2 = 504 cu. in
V = V1 + V2
V = 280 cu. in + 504 cu. in
V = 784 cu. in

Question 10.
What are the dimensions of the two rectangular prisms you used to find the volume of the figure? What other rectangular prisms could you have used?
Type below:
________

Answer:
Dimensions for figure 1:
Base = 14 in
Width = 4 in
Height = 5 in
Dimensions for figure 2:
Base = 12 in
Width = 14 in
Height = 3 in

Question 11.
If the volume is found using subtraction, what is the volume of the empty space that is subtracted? Explain.
______ cu in.

Answer: 560 cu. in

Explanation:
B = 8 in
H = 5 in
W = 14 in
V = 8 in × 14 in × 5 in
V = 560 cu. in
Thus the volume of the empty space is 560 cu. in

Question 12.
Explain how you can find the volume of composite figures that are made by combining rectangular prisms.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Split the figure into 2 parts
Figure 1:
V1 = 14 in × 4 in × 5 in
V1 = 280 cu. in
Figure 2:
V2 = 12 in × 14 in × 3 in
V2 = 504 cu. in
V = V1 + V2
V = 280 cu. in + 504 cu. in
V = 784 cu. in

Question 13.
Test Prep What is the volume of the composite figure?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 129
Options:
a. 126 cubic centimeters
b. 350 cubic centimeters
c. 450 cubic centimeters
d. 476 cubic centimeters

Answer: 476 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Figure 1:
V1 = 10 cm × 7 cm × 5 cm
V1 = 350 cu. cm
Figure 2:
V2 = 3 cm × 7 cm × 6 cm
V2 = 126 cu. cm
V = V1 + V2
V = 350 cu. cm + 126 cu. cm
V = 476 cu. cm

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 705

Question 1.
Fran drew a triangle with no congruent sides and 1 right angle. Which term accurately describes the triangle? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. isosceles
b. scalene
c. acute
d. right

Answer: Right

Explanation:
A right triangle is a type of triangle that has one angle that measures 90°. Right triangles, and the relationships between their sides and angles, are the basis of trigonometry.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
Jose stores his baseball cards in a box like the one shown.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 130
Use the numbers and symbols on the tiles to write a formula that represents the volume of the box. Symbols may be used more than once or not at all.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 131
What is the volume of the box?
V = ______ cubic inches

Answer:
Volume of the box is l × w × h
V = 8 in × 10 in × 3 in
V = 240 cu. in
Thus the volume of the box is 240 cu. in

Question 3.
Mr. Delgado sees this sign while he is driving. For 3a–3b, choose the values and term that correctly describes the shape Mr. Delgado saw.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 132
3a. The figure has Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 133 sides and Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 134angles.
Type below:
________

Answer: The figure has 3 sides and 3 angles.

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can say that there are three sides and three angles.

Question 3.
3b. All of the sides are congruent, so the figure is Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 135
________

Answer: a regular polygon
If all the sides are congruent then the polygon is a regular polygon.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 706

Question 4.
What is the volume of the composite figure?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 136
______ cubic feet

Answer: 36 cubic feet

Explanation:
Figure 1:
length = 2 ft
width = 3 ft
height = 1 ft
Volume of 1st figure = l × w × h
V = 2 ft × 3 ft × 1 ft = 6 cu. ft
Figure 2:
length = 4 ft
width = 3 ft
height = 1 ft
Volume of 1st figure = l × w × h
V = 4 ft × 3 ft × 1 ft = 12 cu. ft
Figure 3:
length = 6 ft
width = 3 ft
height = 1 ft
Volume of 1st figure = l × w × h
V = 6 ft × 3 ft × 1 ft = 18 cu. ft
Add all the volumes = 6 cu. ft + 12 cu. ft + 18 cu. ft
Volume = 36 cu. ft

Question 5.
Match the figure with the number of unit cubes that would be needed to build each figure. Not every number of unit cubes will be used.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 137

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-137

Explanation:
Count the number of unit cubes in the first figure.
There are 10 unit cubes in figure 1 so match the figure 1 to 10 unit cubes.
Count the number of unit cubes in the second figure.
There are 12 unit cubes in figure 2 so match figure 2 to 12 unit cubes.
Count the number of unit cubes in the third figure.
There are 9 unit cubes in figure 3 so match figure 3 to 9 unit cubes.

Question 6.
Chuck is making a poster about polyhedrons for his math class. He will draw figures and organize them in different sections of the poster.
Part A
Chuck wants to draw three-dimensional figures whose lateral faces are rectangles. He says he can draw prisms and pyramids. Do you agree?
Explain your answer.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
The lateral faces of a pyramid are triangles.
The lateral faces of a prism are rectangles.

Question 6.
Part B
Chuck says that he can draw a cylinder on his polyhedron poster because it has a pair of bases that are congruent. Is Chuck correct?
Explain your reasoning.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
A cylinder does have 2 congruent bases, but a cylinder is not a polyhedron.
A cylinder has 1 curved surface, while a polyhedron has faces that are polygons

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 707

Question 7.
Javier drew the shape shown. For 7a–7b, choose the values and terms that correctly describe the shape Javier drew.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 138
7a. The figure has Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 139 sides and Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 140 angles.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 8, 8
The above figure has 8 sides and 8 angles.

Question 7.
7b. The figure is a Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 141
Type below:
_________

Answer: The polygon with 8 sides is known as the octagon. The above figure is congruent thus it is a regular octagon.

Question 8.
Victoria used 1-inch cubes to build the rectangular prism shown. Find the volume of the rectangular prism Victoria built.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 142
______ cubic inches

Answer: 72

Explanation:
Given,
l = 6 in
w = 3 in
h = 4 in
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 6 in × 3 in × 4in
V = 72 cu in.
Hence, the volume of the rectangular prism Victoria built is 72 cu. in.

Question 9.
Nathan drew a scalene, obtuse triangle. For 9a–9c, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the figure shown could be the triangle that Nathan drew.
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 143
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The above different have different sizes thus the triangle is scalene. The angle for the above triangle is more than 90° thus the angle is an obtuse angle. So, the answer is yes.

Question 9.
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 144
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
The above different have different sizes thus the triangle is scalene. It has one right angle thus the statement is not correct.

Question 9.
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 145

Answer: No

Explanation:
The above different have different sizes thus the triangle is scalene. It has one right angle thus the statement is not correct.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 708

Question 10.
A shipping crate holds 20 shoeboxes. The dimensions of a shoebox are 6 inches by 4 inches by 12 inches. For 10a–10b, select True or False for each statement.
a. Each shoebox has a volume of 22 cubic inches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
Shoebox volume:
V = 6 in × 4 in × 12 in
V = 288 cu. in
Thus the statement is false.

Question 10.
b. Each crate has a volume of about 440 cubic inches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
Crate Volume:
V = 288 cu. in × 20
V = 5760 cu. in
Thus the statement is false.

Question 10.
c. If the crate could hold 27 shoeboxes the volume of the crate would be about 7,776 cubic inches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
Crate Volume:
V = 288 cu. in × 27
V = 7776 cu. in
Thus the statement is true.

Question 11.
Mario is making a diagram that shows the relationship between different kinds of quadrilaterals. In the diagram, each quadrilateral on a lower level can also be described by the quadrilateral(s) above it on higher levels.
Part A
Complete the diagram by writing the name of one figure from the tiles in each box. Not every figure will be used.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 146

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-146

Question 11.
Part B
Mario claims that a rhombus is sometimes a square, but a square is always a rhombus. Is he correct? Explain your answer.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
A square is a quadrilateral with all sides equal in length and all interior angles right angles. A square however is a rhombus since all four of its sides are of the same length.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 709

Question 12.
Write the letter in the box that correctly describes the three-dimensional figure.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 147
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-147

Explanation:
Prism: In geometry, a prism is a polyhedron comprising an n-sided polygonal base, a second base which is a translated copy of the first, and n other faces joining corresponding sides of the two bases.
Figure B and C are prisms
Pyramid: In geometry, a pyramid is a polyhedron formed by connecting a polygonal base and a point, called the apex. Each base edge and apex form a triangle called a lateral face. All the edges meet at the same point in the pyramid. Thus figures A and D are pyramids.

Question 13.
Mark packed 1-inch cubes into a box with a volume of 120 cubic inches. How many layers of 1-inch cubes did Mark pack?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 148
______ layers

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Mark packed 1-inch cubes into a box with a volume of 120 cubic inches.
By seeing the figure we can say that there are 24 unit cubes.
To find the number of layers we need to divide 120 by 24
= 120 ÷ 24 = 5
There are 5 layers of 1-inch cubes.

Question 14.
A composite figure is shown. What is the volume of the composite figure?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 149
Volume = ______ cubic centimeters

Answer: 312

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts.
Figure 1:
h = 3 cm
w = 6 cm
b = 4 cm
V = 4 cm × 6 cm × 3 cm = 72 cu. cm
Figure 2:
b = 10 cm
w = 6 cm
h = 4 cm
V = 10 cm × 6 cm × 4 cm = 240 cu. cm
Now add the volume of 2 figures
72 cu. cm + 240 cu. cm = 312 cu cm
Thus the volume of the composite figure is 312 cu. cm

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 710

Question 15.
For 15a–15c, write the name of one quadrilateral from the tiles to complete a true statement. Use each quadrilateral once only.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 150
a. A Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 151 is always a parallelogram.
_________

Answer: rectangle

Explanation: Parallelograms are quadrilaterals with two sets of parallel sides. Since squares must be quadrilaterals with two sets of parallel sides, then all squares are parallelograms.

Question 15.
b. A Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 152 is always a rhombus.
_________

Answer: square

Explanation: A square is a quadrilateral with all sides equal in length and all interior angles right angles.

Question 15.
c. A Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 153 is sometimes a parallelogram.
_________

Answer: trapezoid

Explanation: A trapezoid has one pair of parallel sides and a parallelogram has two pairs of parallel sides. So a parallelogram is also a trapezoid.

Question 16.
Megan’s aquarium has a volume of 4,320 cubic inches. Which could be the dimensions of the aquarium? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 16 in. by 16 in. by 18 in.
b. 14 in. by 18 in. by 20 in.
c. 12 in. by 15 in. by 24 in.
d. 8 in. by 20 in. by 27 in.

Answer: C, D

Explanation:
The volume of a prism = l × w × h
1. V = 16 in × 16 in × 16 in
V = 4608 cu. in
2. V = 14 in × 18 in × 20 in = 5040 cu. in
3. V = 12 in × 15 in × 24 in = 4320 cu. in
4. V = 8 in × 20 in × 27 in = 4320 cu in
Thus the suitable answers are C and D.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 710 Q17

Question 18.
Monica used 1-inch cubes to make the rectangular prism shown. For 18a–18d, write the value that makes each statement true. Each value can be used more than once or not at all.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 154
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 155
a. Each cube has a volume of ____ cubic inch(es).

Answer: 1

Explanation:
Monica used 1-inch cubes to make the rectangular prism
Volume = 1 in × 1 in × 1 in = 1 cu. in.
Each cube has a volume of 1 cubic inch.

Question 18.
b. Each layer of the prism is made up of ____ cubes.
______ cubes

Answer: 20

Explanation:
We can calculate the layer by calculating the base and width
4 × 5 = 20 cubes
Each layer of the prism is made up of 20 cubes.

Question 18.
c. There are ____ layers of cubes.
______ layers

Answer: 3
By seeing the figure we can say that there are 3 layers of the cube.
You can also find the layers of the cube by calculating the height of the figure.

Question 18.
d. The volume of the prism is ____ cubic inches.
______ cubic inches

Answer: 60

Explanation:
The volume of a prism = l × w × h
V = 4 in × 5 in × 3 in
Volume = 60 cu. inches
Therefore, the volume of the prism is 60 cubic inches.

Chapter Review/Test – Vocabulary – Page No. 4910

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 156

Question 1.
A _____ has two congruent polygons as bases and rectangular lateral faces.
__________

Answer: prism
A prism has two congruent polygons as bases and rectangular lateral faces.

Question 2.
A _____ has only one base and triangular lateral faces.
__________

Answer: pyramid
A pyramid has only one base and triangular lateral faces.

Concepts and Skills

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 157
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. hexagon
ii. regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has six sides and 6 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is hexagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure has same size and angles. Thus it is a regular polygon.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 158
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. pentagon
ii. regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has five sides and 5 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is pentagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure has same size and angles. Thus it is a regular polygon.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 159
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. pentagon
ii. not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has five sides and 5 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is the pentagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure does not have the same size and angles. Thus it is not a regular polygon.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 160
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. octagon
ii. not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has 8 sides and 8 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is octagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure does not have same size and angles. Thus it is not a regular polygon.

Classify each figure in as many ways as possible.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 161
1. __________
2. __________

Answer:
1. quadrilateral
2. trapezoid

Explanation:
1. A general quadrilateral has 4 sides and 4 angles.
2. A trapezoid is a 4-sided flat shape with straight sides that has a pair of opposite sides parallel.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 162
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – scalene
∠ – right

Explanation:
The above triangle has different sides. Thus the triangle is a scalene triangle.
The triangle with one right angle is known as a right angled triangle.

Classify the solid figure. Write prism, pyramid, cone, cylinder, or sphere.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 163
__________

Answer: prism

Explanation:
In geometry, a triangular prism is a three-sided prism; it is a polyhedron made of a triangular base, a translated copy, and 3 faces joining corresponding sides.

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 164
__________

Answer: pyramid

Explanation:
In geometry, a pentagonal pyramid is a pyramid with a pentagonal base upon which are erected five triangular faces that meet at a point (the vertex). Like any pyramid, it is self-dual.

Count the number of cubes used to build each solid figure.

Question 11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 165
_____ unit cubes

Answer: 4

Explanation:
The figure shows that there are 4 unit cubes.

Question 12.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 166
_____ unit cubes

Answer: 7

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are 7 unit cubes.

Question 13.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 167
_____ unit cubes

Answer: 5

Explanation:
The figure above shows that there are 5 unit cubes.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4920

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 14.
What type of triangle is shown below?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 168
Options:
a. acute; isosceles
b. acute; scalene
c. obtuse; scalene
d. obtuse; isosceles

Answer: obtuse; scalene

Explanation:
The sides of the triangle is different. Thus it is a scalene triangle. The angle of the triangle is an obtuse angle.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 15.
Angela buys a paperweight at the local gift shop. The paperweight is in the shape of a hexagonal pyramid.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 169
Which of the following represents the correct number of faces, edges, and vertices in a hexagonal pyramid?
Options:
a. 6 faces, 12 edges, 18 vertices
b. 7 faces, 7 edges, 12 vertices
c. 7 faces, 12 edges, 7 vertices
d. 8 faces, 18 edges, 12 vertices

Answer: 7 faces, 12 edges, 7 vertices

Explanation:
In geometry, a hexagonal pyramid is a pyramid with a hexagonal base upon which are erected six isosceles triangular faces that meet at a point.
The hexagonal pyramid has 7 faces, 12 edges and 7 vertices.
Therefore the correct answer is option C.

Question 16.
A manufacturing company constructs a shipping box to hold its cereal boxes. Each cereal box has a volume of 40 cubic inches. If the shipping box holds 8 layers with 4 cereal boxes in each layer, what is the volume of the shipping box?
Options:
a. 160 cu in.
b. 320 cu in.
c. 480 cu in.
d. 1,280 cu in.

Answer: 1,280 cu in.

Explanation:
A manufacturing company constructs a shipping box to hold its cereal boxes.
Each cereal box has a volume of 40 cubic inches.
If the shipping box holds 8 layers with 4 cereal boxes in each layer
Multiply the number of layers with boxes
= 8 × 4 = 32
The volume of 8 layers is 40 × 32 = 1280 cubic inches
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4930

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Page 4930 Q17

Question 18.
Which quadrilateral is NOT classified as a parallelogram?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 170
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 171
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 172
d. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 173

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 171

Explanation:
The opposite sides of figure b are not parallel. Thus the figure b quadrilateral is NOT classified as a parallelogram.

Question 19.
What is the volume of the composite figure below?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 174
Options:
a. 1,875 cm3
b. 480 cm3
c. 360 cm3
d. 150 cm3

Answer:
Volume of 1st cube is 5 cm × 4 cm × 5 cm = 100 cu. cm
Volume of 2nd cube is 5 cm × 4 cm × 8 cm = 160 cu. cm
Volume of 3rd cube is 5 cm × 4 cm × 5 cm = 100 cu. cm
Add all the volumes to find the volume of the composite figure
That means 100 cu. cm + 160 cu. cm + 100 cu. cm = 360 cu. cm
Therefore the volume of the composite figure is 360 cm3
The correct answer is option C.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4940

Constructed Response

Question 20.
a. A video game store made a display of game console boxes shown at the right. The length, width, and height of each game console box is 2 feet.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 175
What is the volume of the display of game console boxes? Show your work and explain your answer.
_____ cu ft.

Answer: 512 cu. ft

Explanation:
length = 2 ft
width = 2 ft
height = 2 ft
Volume of the display of game console boxes = 2 ft × 2 ft × 2 ft = 8 cu. ft
Number of console boxes = 64
64 × 8 cu. ft = 512 cu ft
The volume of the display of game console boxes = 512 cu ft

Question 20.
b. On a busy Saturday, the video game store sold 22 game consoles.
What is the volume of the game console boxes that are left?
_____ cu ft.

Answer: 336 cu. ft

length = 2 ft
width = 2 ft
height = 2 ft
The volume of the display of game console boxes = 2 ft × 2 ft × 2 ft = 8 cu. ft
Number of console boxes = 22
The volume of the game console boxes that are left
22 × 8 cu. ft = 176 cu. ft
The volume of the game console boxes that are left = 512 – 176 = 336 cu. ft

Performance Task

Question 21.
Look for two pictures of three-dimensional buildings in newspapers and magazines. The buildings should be rectangular prisms.
A. Paste the pictures on a large sheet of paper. Leave room to write information near the picture.
B. Label each building with its name and location.
C. Research the buildings, if the information is available. Find things that are interesting about the buildings or their location. Also find their length, width, and height to the nearest foot. If the information is not available, measure the buildings on the page in inches or centimeters, and make a good estimate of their width (such as 1/2 the height, rounded to the nearest whole number). Find their volumes.
D. Make a class presentation, choosing one of the buildings you found.

Conclusion

Hoping the knowledge shared about Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume has helped you clear your queries to the possible extent. Download the 5th Grade Go Math Ch 11 Geometry and Volume Answer Key free of cost and take your preparation to next level.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure

go-math-grade-5-chapter-10-convert-units-of-measure-answer-key

Students can get Simple and Easy Tricks to Solve the Problems on Convert Units of Measure from Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure. Utilize the Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key to score better grades and stand out from the crowd. Download the Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure free of cost and become a pro in the concepts underlying. Unlike other sources available out there we have mentioned the Solutions for all the Problems related to Converting Units of Measurement.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure

You can use the HMH Go Math Solution Key Grade Chapter 10 to get Answers for all the Problems in Chapter Test, Review Test, Cumulative Practice, etc. Convert Units of Measure has topics related to Customary Length, Weight, Customary Capacity, Metric Measure, etc. Thus Students are Advised to click on the below available links to find solutions along with the step by step explanation for the problems.

Chapter 10 – Lesson 1: Customary Length

Chapter 10 – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity 

Chapter 10 – Lesson 3: Weight

Chapter 10 – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement

Chapter 10 – Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Chapter 10 – Lesson 5: Metric Measures

Chapter 10 – Lesson 6: Problem Solving • Customary and Metric Conversions

Chapter 10 – Lesson 7: Elapsed Time

Chapter 10 – Review/Test

Share and Show – Lesson 1: Customary Length – Page No. 587

Convert.

Question 1.
2 mi = ______ yd

Answer: 3520 yards

Explanation:
Am changing the smaller unit into the larger unit.
We know that,
1 mile = 1760 yards
2 miles = 2 × 1760 yards = 3520 yards
Thus 2 miles = 3520 yards

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 587 Q2

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 587 Q3

On Your Own

Convert.

Question 4.
57 ft = ______ yd

Answer: 19 yard

Explanation:
Convert the smaller unit to the larger unit.
We know that
1 yard = 3 feet
1 foot = 1/3 yard
57 × 1/3 = 19
Thus 57 feet = 19 yards
57 ft = 19 yd

Question 5.
13 ft = ______ in.

Answer: 156 inches

Explanation:
1 feet = 12 inches
13 feet = 13 × 12 inches = 156 inches
13 ft = 156 in.

Question 6.
240 in. = ______ ft

Answer: 20 feet

Explanation:
Convert the smaller unit to the larger unit.
1 feet = 12 inches
1 inch = 1/12 feet
240 inches = 240 × 1/12 feet = 20 feet
240 in. = 20 ft

Question 7.
6 mi = ______ ft

Answer: 31680 feet

Explanation:
1 mile = 5280 feet
6 miles = 6 × 5280 feet = 31680 feet
Thus 6 mi. = 31680 ft.

Question 8.
96 ft = ______ yd

Answer: 32 yard

Explanation:
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 1/3 yard
96 feet = 96 × 1/3 yard = 32 yard
96 feet = 32 yard

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 587 Q9

Practice: Copy and Solve Convert.

Question 10.
60 in. = ■ ft
■ = ______ ft

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:
Convert inches into feet
1 feet = 12 inches
■ be the unknown number.
60 in = ■ ft
60 inches × 1/12 = 5 feet
60 in = 5 feet

Question 11.
■ ft = 7 yd 1 ft
■ = ______ ft

Answer: 22 feet

Explanation:
■ ft = 7 yd 1 ft
1 yard = 3 feet
7 yard = 7 × 3 feet = 21 feet
21 ft + 1 ft = 22ft
■ = 22 feet

Question 12.
4 mi = ■ yd
■ = ______ yd

Answer: 7040 yard

Explanation:
We know that,
1 mile = 1760 yard
4 miles = 4 × 1760 yard = 7040 yard
4 mi. = 7040 yard

Question 13.
125 in. = ■ ft ■ in.
125 in. = ______ ft ______ in.

Answer: 10 ft 5 in.

Explanation:
Convert inches to feet.
12 inches = 1 feet
1 inch = 1/12 feet
120 × 1/12 = 10 feet
125 inches = 10 feet + 5 inches
Thus, 125 in. = 10 ft 5 in.

Question 14.
46 ft = ■ yd ■ ft
46 ft = ______ yd ______ ft

Answer: 15 yd 1 ft

Explanation:
We know that,
Converting the Larger unit into the smaller units
1 yard = 3 feet
1 foot = 1/3 yard
46 feet = 1/3 × 46 = 15 yard + 1 feet
Thus 46 ft = 15 yd 1 ft

Question 15.
42 yd 2 ft = ■ ft
■ = ______ ft

Answer: 128 feet

Explanation:
Converting larger unit into the smaller units
We know that,
1 yard = 3 feet
42 yard = 42 × 3 feet = 126 feet
42 yd 2 ft = 126 + 2 = 128 feet
Thus ■ = 128 ft
42 yd 2 ft = 128 ft

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 587 Q16

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 587 Q17

Question 18.
108 in. ______ 166 in.

Answer: 108 in. < 166 in.

Explanation:
108 is less than 166
Therefore, 108 in. < 166 in.

Problem Solving – Lesson 1: Customary Length – Page No. 588

Question 19.
Javon is helping his dad build a tree house. He has a piece of trim that is 13 feet long. How many pieces can Javon cut that are 1 yard long? How much of a yard will he have left over?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 1: Customary Length img 1
Type below:
__________

Answer: 4 pieces, 4 yard 1 foot long

Explanation:

Javon is helping his dad build a tree house. He has a piece of trim that is 13 feet long.
Converting from feet into yards
We know that,
1 foot = 1/3 yard
13 feet = 12 feet + 1 foot
13 feet = 4 yard 1 foot
Javon can cut into 4 pieces.

Question 20.
Test Prep Katy’s driveway is 120 feet long. How many yards long is Katy’s driveway?
Options:
a. 60 yards
b. 40 yards
c. 20 yards
d. 10 yards

Answer: 40 yards

Explanation:
Katy’s driveway is 120 feet long.
Converting from feet into yards
We know that,
1 yard = 3 feet
1 foot = 1/3 yard
120 feet = 120 × 1/3 yard = 40 yard
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Compare and Contrast

When you compare and contrast, you tell how two or more things are alike and different. You can compare and contrast information in a table. Complete the table below. Use the table to answer the questions.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 1: Customary Length img 2

Question 21.
How are the items in the table alike? How are they different?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The table is the conversion from yards to feet and inches.
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-10-Convert-Units-of-Measure-img-2

Question 22.
What do you notice about the relationship between the number of larger units and the number of smaller units as the length increases?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Converting the larger unit to the smaller unit.
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 12 × 3 = 36 inches
1 yard = 36 inches
The above table shows the conversion from yards to inches.

Share and Show – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity – Page No. 593

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 2: Customary Capacity img 3

Question 1.
Use the picture to complete the statements and convert 3 quarts to pints.
a. 1 quart = ______ pints

Answer: 2 pints

Explanation:
Convert the unit quarts to pints
We know that,
1 quart = 2 pints

Question 1.
b. 1 quart is ______ than 1 pint.

Answer: bigger

Explanation:
Convert the unit quarts to pints
1 quart = 2 pints
The unit quarts is greater than pints
1 quart is bigger than 1 pint.

Question 1.
c. 3 qt __________ pt in 1 qt = ____ pt
Type below:
__________

Answer: 6 pint

Explanation:
Convert the unit quarts to pints
1 quart = 2 pints
3 quarts = 3 × 2 pints = 6 pints
So, 3 qt 6 pt in 1 qt = 2 pt

Convert.

Question 2.
3 gal = ______ pt

Answer: 24 pt

Explanation:

Convert gallons to pints
We know that,
1 gallon = 8 pints
3 gallons = 3 × 8 pints = 24 pints
Thus 3 gal = 24 pt

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 593 Q3

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 593 Q4

On Your Own – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity – Page No. 594

Convert.

Question 5.
38 c = ______ pt

Answer: 19 pt

Explanation:
Convert pints to cups
1 pint = 2 cups
1 cup = 1/2 pint
38 c = 1/2 × 38 = 19 pints
Thus, 38 c = 19 pints

Question 6.
36 qt = ______ gal

Answer: 9 gal

Explanation:
Convert Quarts to Gal
1 gal = 4 quarts
1 quart = 1/4 gallon
36 quarts = 1/4 × 36 = 9 gallons
So, 36 qt = 9 gal

Question 7.
104 fl oz = ______ c

Answer: 13 c

Explanation:
Convert fluid ounces to cups
1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
1 fluid ounces = 1/8 cups
104 fluid ounces = 1/8 × 104 = 13 cups
104 fl oz = 13 c

Question 8.
4 qt = ______ c

Answer: 16 c

Explanation:

Convert quarts to cups
1 quart = 4 cups
4 quarts = 4 × 4 cups
4 quarts = 16 cups
4 qt = 4 c

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 594 Q9

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 594 Q10

Practice: Copy and Solve Convert.

Question 11.
200 c = ______ qt

Answer: 50 qt

Explanation:
Convert cups to quarts
1 quart = 4 cups
1 cup = 1/4 quart
200 cups = 1/4 × 200 = 50 qt
200 c = 50 qt

Question 12.
22 pt = ______ fl oz

Answer: 352 fl oz

Explanation:
Convert pints to fluid ounces
1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
22 pints = 16 × 22 = 352 fluid ounces
So, 22 pt = 352 fl oz

Question 13.
8 gal = ______ qt

Answer: 32 qt

Explanation:
Convert gallon to quarts.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
8 gallons = 8 × 4 quarts = 32 quarts
8 gal = 32 qt

Question 14.
72 fl oz = ______ c

Answer: 9 c

Explanation:
Convert fluid ounces to cups
1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
1 fluid ounce = 1/8 cup
72 fluid ounces = 1/8 cup × 72 = 9 cups
72 fl oz = 9 c

Question 15.
2 gal = ______ pt

Answer: 16 pt

Explanation:
Convert gallon to pints
1 gal = 8 pints
2 gal = 2 × 8 pints = 16 pints
2 gal = 16 pt

Question 16.
48 pt = ______ gal

Answer: 6 gal

Explanation:
Convert pints to gallons
1 gal = 8 pints
1 pint = 1/8 gal
48 pints = 1/8 × 48 pint = 6 gal
48 pint = 6 gal

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 17.
28 c ______ 14 pt

Answer: 28 c = 14 pt

Explanation:
Convert cups to a pint
1 pint = 2 cups
14 pints = 14 × 2 cups = 28 cups
28 cups = 14 pints
Thus, 28 c = 14 pt

Question 18.
25 pt ______ 13 qt

Answer: 25 pt < 13 qt

Explanation:
Convert pints to quarts
1 quart = 2 pints
13 quarts = 13 × 2 pints = 26 pints
25 pints is less than 26 pints
So, 25 pt < 13 qt

Question 19.
20 qt ______ 80 c

Answer: 20 qt = 80 c

Explanation:
1 quart = 4 cups
20 quarts = 20 × 4 cups = 80 cups
20 qt = 80 c

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 594 Q20

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 594 Q21

Question 22.
15 qt ______ 63 c

Answer: 15 qt < 63 c

Explanation:
Convert quarts to cups
1 quart = 4 pints
15 quarts = 4 × 15 = 60 cups
60 cup is less than 63 cups
So, 15 qt < 63 c

Question 23.
Which of exercises 17–22 could you solve mentally? Explain your answer for one exercise.

Problem Solving – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity – Page No. 4120

Show your work. For 24–26, use the table.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 2: Customary Capacity img 4

Question 24.
Complete the table, and make a graph showing the relationship between pints and quarts. Draw a line through the points to make the graph.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 2: Customary Capacity img 5

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-10-Convert-Units-of-Measure-img-5

Question 25.
Describe any pattern you notice in the pairs of numbers you graphed. Write a rule to describe the pattern.
Type below:
__________

Answer: I observed a straight line in the pair of numbers.

Question 26.
Explain how you can use your graph to find the number of quarts equal to 5 pints.
Type below:
__________

Answer: The number of quarts for 5 pints is 3.5
The point lies between 3 and 4.
The X-axis is 5 and Y-axis is 3.5

Question 27.
Test Prep Shelby made 5 quarts of juice for a picnic. How many cups of juice did Shelby make?
Options:
a. 1 cup
b. 5 cups
c. 10 cups
d. 20 cups

Answer: 20 cups

Explanation:
Shelby made 5 quarts of juice for a picnic.
1 quarts = 4 cups
5 quarts = 5 × 4 cups = 20 cups
5 quart = 20 cups
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 3: Weight – Page No. 599

Question 1.
Use the picture to complete each equation.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 3: Weight img 6
a. 1 pound = ______ ounces

Answer: 16 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces

Question 1.
b. 2 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 32 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces
2 pounds = 32 ounces
2 pounds = 32 ounces

Question 1.
c. 3 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 48 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces
So, 3 pounds = 48 ounces

Question 1.
d. 4 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 64 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
4 pounds = 4 × 16 ounces = 64 ounces
4 pounds = 64 ounces

Question 1.
e. 5 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 80 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
5 pounds = 5 × 16 ounces = 80 ounces
5 pounds = 80 ounces

Convert.

Question 2.
15 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 240 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
15 pounds = 15 × 16 ounces = 240 ounces
15 pounds = 240 ounces

Question 3.
3 T = ______ lb

Answer: 6,000 lb

Explanation:
1 ton = 2,000 lb
3 ton = 3 × 2,000 lb = 6,000 lb
3 T = 6000 lb

Question 4.
320 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 20 lb

Explanation:
Convert ounces to lb.
1 lb = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 lb
320 oz = 1/16 × 320 = 20 lb
320 oz = 20 lb

On Your Own – Lesson 3: Weight – Page No. 600

Convert.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 600 Q5

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 600 Q6

Question 7.
16,000 lb = ______ T

Answer: 8 T

Explanation:
Convert Ton to lb
1 T = 2,000 lb
1 lb = 1/2000 T
16000 lb = 16000 × 1/2000 = 8T
16,000 lb = 8T

Question 8.
192 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 12 lb

Explanation:
Convert ouncers to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
192 ounces = 192 × /16 = 12 lb
192 oz = 12 lb

Question 9.
416 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 26 lb

Explanation:
Convert ouncers to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 lb
416 oz = 416 × 1/16 = 26 lb
416 oz = 26 lb

Question 10.
24 lb = ______ oz

Answer: 384 oz

Explanation:
Convert ouncers to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
24 lb = 24 × 16 ounces = 384 oz
24 lb = 384 oz

Practice: Copy and Solve Convert.

Question 11.
23 lb = ______ oz

Answer: 368 oz

Explanation:
Convert lb to ounces
1 lb = 16 oz
23 lb = 23 × 16 oz = 368 ounces
23 lb = 368 oz

Question 12.
6 T = ______ lb

Answer: 12,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert tons to pounds
1 T = 2,000 lb
6 T = 6 × 2,000 lb = 12,000 lb
6 T = 12,000 lb

Question 13.
144 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 9 lb

Explanation:
Convert ounces to pounds
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 oz= 1/16 lb
144 oz = 144 × 1/16 = 9 lb
Thus, 144 oz = 9 lb

Question 14.
15 T = ______ lb

Answer: 30,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert tons to pounds
1 T = 2,000 lb
15 T = 15 × 2,000 lb = 30,000 lb
15 T = 30,000 lb

Question 15.
352 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 22 lb

Explanation:
Convert ounces to the pound
1 lb = 16 oz
1 oz = 1/16 lb
352 oz = 352 × 1/16 = 22 lb
352 oz = 22 lb

Question 16.
18 lb = ______ oz

Answer: 288 oz

Explanation:
1 lb = 16 oz
18 lb = 18 × 16 oz = 288 oz
18 lb = 288 oz

Compare. Write >, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 600 Q17

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 600 Q18

Question 19.
14 lb ______ 229 oz

Answer: 14 lb < 229 oz

Explanation:
First convert lb to ounces
1 lb = 16 oz
14 lb = 14 × 16 oz = 224 oz
14 lb = 224 oz
224 oz is less than 229
So, 14 lb < 229 oz

Question 20.
16 T ______ 32,000 lb

Answer: 16 T = 32,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert ton to pounds
1 Ton = 2,000 lb
16 T = 16 × 2,000 lb = 32,000 lb
16 T = 32,000 lb

Question 21.
5 lb ______ 79 oz

Answer: 5 lb > 79 oz

Explanation:
Convert lb to oz
1 lb = 16 oz
5 lb = 5 × 16 oz = 80 oz
80 is greater than 76
Thus, 5 lb > 79 oz

Question 22.
85,000 lb ______ 40 T

Answer: 85,000 lb > 40 T

Explanation:
Convert ton to pounds
1 Ton = 2,000 lb
40 T = 40 × 2000 = 80,000 lb
80,000 lb is less than 85,000 lb
Thus, 85,000 lb > 40 T

Problem Solving

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 600 Q23

Question 24.
Test Prep Carlos used 32 ounces of walnuts in a muffin recipe. How many pounds of walnuts did Carlos use?
Options:
a. 8 pounds
b. 4 pounds
c. 2 pounds
d. 1 pound

Answer: 2 pounds

Explanation:
Given that, Carlos used 32 ounces of walnuts in a muffin recipe.
1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 oz = 32 ounces
32 oz = 2 pounds
Thus the answer is option C.

Problem Solving – Lesson 3: Weight – Page No. 4160

Pose a Problem
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 3: Weight img 7

Question 25.
Kia wants to have 4 pounds of munchies for her party. She has 36 ounces of popcorn and wants the rest to be pretzel sticks. How many ounces of pretzel sticks
does she need to buy?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 3: Weight img 8
64 – 36 =
So, Kia needs to buy ____ ounces of pretzel sticks.
Write a new problem using different amounts of snacks. Some weights should be in pounds and others in ounces. Make sure the amount of snacks given is less than the total amount of snacks needed.
Pose a Problem                 Draw a bar model for your problem.
Then solve.
• Write an expression you could use to solve your problem.
Explain how the expression represents the problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Kia wants to have 3 pounds of munchies for her party. She has 20 ounces of popcorn and wants the rest to be pretzel sticks. How many ounces of pretzel sticks does she need to buy?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 img-1
48 oz – 20 oz = 28 oz
She needs to buy 28 ounces of pretzel sticks.

Share and Show – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems – Page No. 605

Solve.

Question 1.
After each soccer practice, Scott runs 4 sprints of 20 yards each. If he continues his routine, how many practices will it take for Scott to have sprinted a total of 2 miles combined?
Scott sprints _____ yards each practice. Since there are _____ yards in 2 miles, he will need to continue his routine for _____ practices.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Multiply 20 yard × 4 = 80 yards
Now convert from yards to miles
1 mile = 1760 yard
x = 1760 × 2 = 3520 yards
p = 3520 yards/80 yard = 44
Thus he will need to do 44 practices.

Question 2.
A worker at a mill is loading 5-lb bags of flour into boxes to deliver to a local warehouse. Each box holds 12 bags of flour. If the warehouse orders 3 Tons of flour, how many boxes are needed to fulfill the order?
_____ bags

Answer: 100 bags

Explanation:
A worker at a mill is loading 5-lb bags of flour into boxes to deliver to a local warehouse.
Each box holds 12 bags of flour.
Pounds of flour per box
x = 12 × 5 lb = 60 lb
We need to multiply by the conversion rule
1 T = 2000 lb
Find out how many pounds are in 3 tons. Pounds of flour in the warehouse.
y = 3 T × 2000 lb = 6,000 lb
Divide by the number of pounds per box. 100 boxes are needed.
b = 6000/60 = 100 boxes.

Question 3.
Cory brings five 1-gallon jugs of juice to serve during parent night at his school. If the paper cups he is using for drinks can hold 8 fluid ounces, how many drinks can Cory serve for parent night?
_____ drinks

Answer: 80 drinks

Explanation:
First, convert from gallons to quarts
We are converting larger unit to a smaller unit.
1 gal = 4 qt
We need to multiply by the conversion rule.
x = 5 gal × 4 qt
x = 20 qt
Next, convert from quarts to pints.
2 pt = 1 qt
We need to multiply by the conversion rule.
y = 20 qt × 2 pt = 40 pt
Next, convert from pints to cups.
We are converting from a larger unit to a smaller unit.
1 pt = 2 cups
y = 40 pt × 2 c = 80 c
Now convert from cups to ounces
1 c = 8 oz
y = 80 c × 8 oz = 640 oz
d = 640 oz/ 8 oz = 80 drinks
Cory can serve 80 drinks for parent night.

On Your Own – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems – Page No. 606

Solve.

Question 4.
A science teacher needs to collect lake water for a lab she is teaching. The lab requires each student to use 4 fluid ounces of lake water. If 68 students are participating, how many pints of lake water will the teacher need to collect?
_____ pints

Answer: 1 pint

Explanation:
Find the total number of ounces the students use.
s = 68 × 4 oz = 272 oz
First, convert from ounces to cups.
1 c = 8 oz
Find how many cups are in 272 ounces
y = 272 oz ÷ 8 oz = 34 c
Now from cups to pints
1 pt = 2 c
Find how many pints are in 34 cups
x = 34 c ÷ 2 c = 17 pt
18 pt – 17 pt = 1 pt
This 1 pint is leftover.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 606 Q5

Question 6.
When Jamie’s car moves forward such that each tire makes one full rotation, the car has traveled 72 inches. How many full rotations will the tires need to make for Jamie’s car to travel 10 yards?
_____ rotations

Answer: 5 rotations

Explanation:
When Jamie’s car moves forward such that each tire makes one full rotation, the car has traveled 72 inches.
Convert from a smaller unit to a larger unit.
Convert from inches to yards.
36 in = 1 yard
x = 72 in/ 36 in = 2 yards
Find out how many rotations are needed.
y = 10 yard/ 2 yard = 5 yard
The tired need to make 5 rotations for Jame’s car to travel 10 yards.

Question 7.
A male African elephant weighs 7 Tons. If a male African lion at the local zoo weighs \(\frac{1}{40}\) of the weight of the male African elephant, how many pounds does the lion weigh?
_____ lb

Answer: 350 lb

Explanation:
Convert from Tons to pounds
1 T = 2,000 lb
Find out how many pounds are in 7 Tons.
y = 7 T × 2000 lb = 14,000 lb
The weight of the elephant is 14,000 lb
Find the weight of the lion
l = 14,000 × 1/40 = 350 lb
Therefore the weight of the lion is 350 pounds.

Question 8.
An office supply company is shipping a case of wooden pencils to a store. There are 64 boxes of pencils in the case. If each box of pencils weighs 2.5 ounces, what is the weight, in pounds, of the case of wooden pencils?
_____ pounds

Answer: 10 pounds

Explanation:
First, we need to find the total weight of the case of pencils
w = 64 boxes × 2.5 oz = 160 oz
Now convert from ounces to pounds
We are converting from a smaller unit to a larger unit.
1 lb = 16 oz
y = 160 oz/16 oz = 10 lb
Thus total is 10 pounds.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 606 Q9
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 606 Q9.1

UNLOCK the Problem – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems – Page No. 4200

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems img 9

Question 10.
At a local animal shelter there are 12 small-size dogs and 5 medium-size dogs. Every day, the small-size dogs are each given 12.5 ounces of dry food and the medium-size dogs are each given 18 ounces of the same dry food. How many pounds of dry food does the shelter serve in one day?
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
___________

Answer: We are asked to find how many pounds of dry food does the shelter serves in one day

Question 10.
b. What information will you use?
Type below:
___________

Answer:
I will use the information about the dry food given to the small size dogs and medium size dogs.

Question 10.
c. What conversion will you need to do to solve the problem?
Type below:
___________

Answer: We need to convert from ounces to pounds.

Question 10.
d. Show the steps you use to solve the problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
First, convert from ounces to pounds.
The total amount of food given to the small size and medium size dogs = 12.5 ounces + 18 ounces = 30.5 ounces
1 ounce = 0.625 pounds
32.5 ounces = 30.5 × 0.625 = 1.906 pounds

Question 10.
e. Complete the sentences.
The small-size dogs eat a total of ___ ounces of dry food each day.
The medium-size dogs eat a total of ___ ounces of dry food each day.
The shelter serves ___ ounces, or ___ pounds, of dry food each day.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The small-size dogs eat a total of 12.5 ounces of dry food each day.
The medium-size dogs eat a total of 18 ounces of dry food each day.
The shelter serves 30.5 ounces, or 1.906 pounds, of dry food each day.

Question 11.
Test Prep For a class assignment, students are asked to record the total amount of water they drink in one day. Melinda records that she drank four 8-fluid ounce glasses of water and two 1-pint bottles. How many quarts of water did Melinda drink during the day?
Options:
a. 2 quarts
b. 4 quarts
c. 6 quarts
d. 8 quarts

Answer: 2 quarts

Explanation:
Given that,
Melinda records that she drank four 8-fluid ounce glasses of water and two 1-pint bottles
Convert from fluid ounces to quarts.
1 quart = 32 fluid ounces
2 1-pint bottles = 2 pints
1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
2 pints = 32 fluid ounces
We know that,
32 fluid ounces = 1 quart
1 quart + 1 quart = 2 quarts.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Vocabulary – Page No. 609

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 10

Question 1.
The _______ of an object is how heavy the object is.
___________

Answer: Weight

Question 2.
The _______ of a container is the amount the container can hold.
___________

Answer: Capacity

Concepts and Skills

Convert.

Question 3.
5 mi = _____ yd

Answer: 8800 yd

Explanation:

Convert from miles to yards.
1 mile = 1760 yard
5 miles = 5 × 1760 yard = 8800 yard
5 mi = 8800 yd

Question 4.
48 qt = _____ gal

Answer: 12 gal

Explanation:
Convert from quart to gal
1 gal = 4 quart
1 quart = 1/4
48 qt = 48 × 1/4 = 12 gal
48 qt = 12 gal

Question 5.
9 T = _____ lb

Answer: 18,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert from tons to lb
1 T = 2,000 lb
9 T = 9 × 2,000 lb = 18,000 lb
9  = 18,000 lb

Question 6.
336 oz = _____ lb

Answer: 21 lb

Explanation:
Convert from ounces to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 oz = 1/16 lb
336 oz = 336 × 1/16 lb = 21 lb
336 oz = 21 lb

Question 7.
14 ft = _____ yd _____ ft

Answer: 4 yard 2 ft

Explanation:
Convert from feet to yards.
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 1/3 yard
12 feet = 1/3 × 12 ft = 4 yard
14 ft = 4 yard 2 ft

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 609 Q9

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 609 Q10

Question 11.
8 yd _____ 288 in.

Answer: 8 yd = 288 in.

Explanation:
Convert from yards to inches
1 yard = 36 inches
8 yard = 8 × 36 inches = 288 inches
8 yard = 288 inches

Solve.

Question 12.
A standard coffee mug has a capacity of 16 fluid ounces. If Annie needs to fill 26 mugs with coffee, how many total quarts of coffee does she need?
_____ qt

Answer: 13 qt

Explanation:
Find the number of ounces.
s = 16 oz × 26 = 416 oz
Next, convert from ounces to cups.
1 c = 8 oz
Find how many cups are in 104 ounces.
y = 416 oz ÷ 8 oz = 52 c
Next, convert from cups to pints.
1 pt = 2 c
y = 52 c ÷ 2 c = 26 pt
Convert from pints to quarts
1 qt = 2 pints
y = 26 pint ÷ 2 pint = 13 qt
y = 13 qt
Thus she need 13 quarts of coffee.

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Vocabulary – Page No. 610

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 610 Q13

Question 14.
Charlie’s puppy, Max, weighs 8 pounds. How many ounces does Max weigh?
_____ oz

Answer: 128 ounces

Explanation:
Convert from pounds from ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
8 pounds = 8 × 16 oz = 128 ounces
8 pounds = 128 oz

Question 15.
Milton purchases a 5-gallon aquarium for his bedroom. To fill the aquarium with water, he uses a container with a capacity of 1 quart. How many times will Milton fill and empty the container before the aquarium is full?
_____ times

Answer: 20 times

Explanation:
Convert from gallon to quart
1 gallon = 4 quart
5 gallon = 5 × 4 quart = 20 quart
5 gallon = 20 quart

Question 16.
Sarah uses a recipe to make 2 gallons of her favorite mixed berry juice. Two of the containers she plans to use to store the juice have a capacity of 1 quart. The rest of the containers have a capacity of 1 pint. How many pint-sized containers will Sarah need?
_____ pint-sized container

Answer: 12 pint-sized container

Explanation:
Sarah uses a recipe to make 2 gallons of her favorite mixed berry juice.
Two of the containers she plans to use to store the juice have a capacity of 1 quart.
1 gallon = 4 quart
Find how many quarts are in 2 gals.
y = 8 qt – 2 qt = 6 qt
Next, convert from quarts to pints.
2 pt = 1 qt
y = 6 qt × 2 pt
y = 12 pint
She will need 12 pint sized container.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 610 Q17

Share and Show – Lesson 5: Metric Measures – Page No. 613

Complete the equation to show the conversion.

Question 1.
8.47 L _____ 10 = _____ dL

Answer: 8.47 L × 10 = 84.7 dL

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from liter to deciliter.
84.7 L × 10 = 8.47 dL

Question 1.
8.47 L _____ 100 = _____ cL

Answer: 8.47 L × 100 = 847 cL

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Convert from liter to centiliter.
8.47 L × 100 = 847 centiliter

Question 1.
8.47 L _____ 1,000 = _____ mL

Answer: 8.47 L × 1,000 = 8,470 mL

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Convert the liter to the milliliter.
8.47 L × 1000 = 8470 mL

Question 2.
9,824 dg _____ 10 = _____ g

Answer: 9,824 dg ÷ 10 = 982.4 g

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from decigram to gram
1 gram = 10 decigram
1 decigram = 1/10 gram
To convert 9824 dg to g we have to divide by 10.
9,824 dg ÷ 10 = 9824 × 1/10 = 982.4 grams
Thus, 9,824 dg ÷ 10 = 982.4 g

Question 2.
9,824 dg _____ 100 = _____ dag

Answer: 9,824 dg ÷ 100 = 98.24 dag

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from decigram to dekagrams.
We know that,
1 dg = 0.01 dag
1 dg = 1/100 dag
9824 ÷ 100 = 9824 × 1/00 = 98.24 dag
Thus, 9,824 dg ÷ 100 = 98.24 dag

Question 2.
9,824 dg _____ 1,000 = _____ hg

Answer: 9,824 dg ÷ 1,000 = 9.824 hg

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from decigram to dekagrams.
1 dg = 0.001 hg
1 dg = 1/000 hg
9,824 dg = 9824 × 1/1000 = 9824 ÷ 1000 = 9.824 hg
Thus, 9,824 dg ÷ 1,000 = 9.824 hg

Convert.

Question 3.
4,250 cm = _____ m

Answer: 42.50 m

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from centimeters to meters.
1 cm = 0.01 m
1 cm = 1/100 m
4250 cm = 4250 × 1/100 = 4250/100 = 42.50 meters
So, 4,250 cm = 42.50 m

Question 4.
6,000 mL = _____ L

Answer: 6 L

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from milliliters to liters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
1 milliliter = 1/1000 L
6000 mL = 6000 × 1/1000 L = 6 L
6,000 mL = 6 L

Question 5.
4 dg = _____ cg

Answer: 40 cg

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from decigram to the centigram
We know that,
1 dg = 10 cg
4 dg = 4 × 10 cg = 40 cg
4 dg = 40 cg

On Your Own

Convert.

Question 6.
8 kg = _____ g

Answer: 8000 g

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from kilograms to grams.
1 kg = 1000 grams
8 kg = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
8 kg = 8000 g

Question 7.
5 km = _____ m

Answer: 5000 m

Explanation:

Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from kilometers to meters
1 km = 1000 meters
5 km = 5 × 1000 meters = 5000 meters
5 km = 5000 m

Question 8.
40 mm = _____ cm

Answer: 4 cm

Explanation:
Converting from millimeters to centimeters
1 cm = 10 mm
1 mm = 1/10 cm
40 mm = 40 × 1/10 cm = 4 cm
40 mm = 4 cm

Question 9.
7 g = _____ mg

Answer: 7000 mg

Explanation:
Converting from grams to milligrams
1 gram = 1000 mg
7 g = 7 × 1000 mg = 7000 mg
7 g = 7000 mg

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 613 Q10

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 613 Q11

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 12.
32 hg _____ 3.2 kg

Answer: 32 hg = 3.2 kg

Explanation:
Converting from hectogram to kilogram
1 hg = 0.1 kg
32 hg = 32 × 0.1 kg = 3.2 kg
32 hg = 3.2 kg

Question 13.
6 km _____ 660 m

Answer: 6 km > 660 m

Explanation:
1 kilometer = 1000 meters
6 kilometer = 6 × 1000 meter = 6000 meters
6000 meters is greater than 600 m
6 km > 600 m

Question 14.
525 mL _____ 525 cL

Answer: 525 mL < 525 cL

Explanation:
Converting from milliliters to centiliters.
1 mL = 0.1 cL
525 mL = 525 × 0.1 = 52.5 mL
525 mL is less than 52.5 mL
Thus, 525 mL < 525 cL

Problem Solving – Lesson 5: Metric Measures – Page No. 614

For 15–16, use the table.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 5: Metric Measures img 11

Question 15.
Kelly made one batch of peanut and pretzel snack mix. How many grams does she need to add to the snack mix to make 2 kilograms?
_____ g

Answer: 575 grams

Explanation:
Kelly made one batch of peanut and pretzel snack mix.
From the above figure, we can see that batch of peanut and pretzel snack mix is 1425 grams
To find how many grams she needs to add to the snack mix to make 2 kilograms
We have to subtract 1425 grams from 2 kgs
1 kg = 1000 grams
2 kg = 2000 grams
2000 g – 1425 g = 575 grams
Thus she needs to add 575 grams to make 2 kilograms.

Question 16.
Kelly plans to take juice on her camping trip. Which will hold more juice, 8 cans or 2 bottles? How much more?
__________

Answer: 2 bottles

Explanation:
Kelly plans to take the juice on her camping trip.
The capacity of the bottle is more than a bottle. Thus 2 bottles can hold more juice.

Question 17.
Erin’s water bottle holds 600 milliliters of water. Dylan’s water bottle holds 1 liter of water. Whose water bottle has the greater capacity? How much greater?
__________

Answer: Dylan

Explanation:
Erin’s water bottle holds 600 milliliters of water.
Dylan’s water bottle holds 1 liter of water.
First, convert from liter to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
By this, we can say that Dylan’s water bottle has a greater capacity.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 614 Q18
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 614 Q18.1

Question 19.
Are there less than 1 million, exactly 1 million, or greater than 1 million milligrams in 1 kilogram? Explain how you know.
__________ milligrams

Answer: Exactly 1 million

Explanation:
Convert 1 kilogram to milligrams.
multiply by 6 powers of 10, which equals one million.
Thus 1 kg = 1,000,000 mg
There are exactly 1 million milligrams in 1 kilogram.

Question 20.
Test Prep Monica has 426 millimeters of fabric. How many centimeters of fabric does Monica have?
Options:
a. 4,260 centimeters
b. 42.6 centimeters
c. 4.26 centimeters
d. 0.426 centimeters

Answer: 42.6 centimeters

Explanation:
Converting from millimeters to centimeters.
1 millimeter = 0.1 cm
426 mm = 426 × 0.1 = 42.6 cm
Monica has 42.6 cm of fabric.
Thus the correct answer is option B

Share and Show – Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions – Page No. 619

Question 1.
Edgardo has a drink cooler that holds 10 gallons of water. He is filling the cooler with a 1-quart container. How many times will he have to fill the quart container to fill the cooler?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions img 12
First, make a table to show the relationship between gallons and quarts. You can use a conversion table to find how many quarts are in a gallon.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions img 13
Then, look for a rule to help you complete your table. number of gallons × ____ = number of quarts
Finally, use the table to solve the problem.
Edgardo will need to fill the quart container ____ times.
____ times

Answer:

gal 1 2 3 4 10
qt 4 8 12 16 40

Edgardo will need to fill the quart container 40 times.

Question 2.
What if Edgardo only uses 32 quarts of water to fill the cooler. How can you use your table to find how many gallons that is?
____ gallons

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Convert from quarts to gallons.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
1 quart = 1/4 gal
32 quart = 32 × 1/4 = 8 gallons

Question 3.
If Edgardo uses a 1-cup container to fill the cooler, how will that affect the number of times he has to fill a container to fill the cooler? Explain.
Type below:
__________

Answer: Multiply by 16

gal 1 2 3 4 10
cups 16 32 48 64 160

On Your Own – Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions – Page No. 620

Question 4.
Jeremy made a belt that was 6.4 decimeters long. How many centimeters long is the belt Jeremy made?
____ cm

Answer: 64 cm

Explanation:
Jeremy made a belt that was 6.4 decimeters long.
Converting from decimeters to centimeters.
1 decimeter = 10 centimeter
6.4 decimeter = 6.4 × 10 cm = 64 cm
Jeremy made 64 cm long belt.

Question 5.
Dan owns 9 DVDs. His brother Mark has 3 more DVDs than Dan has. Their sister, Marsha, has more DVDs than either of her brothers. Together, the three have 35 DVDs. How many DVDs does Marsha have?
____ DVDs

Answer: 14 DVDs

Explanation:
Given that,
Dan owns 9 DVDs.
His brother Mark has 3 more DVDs than Dan has.
Their sister, Marsha, has more DVDs than either of her brothers.
Together, the three have 35 DVDs.
His brother Mark has 3 more DVDs than Dan has.
That means Mark has 9 + 3 = 12 DVDs
Total number of DVDs = 35 – 9 – 12 = 14 DVDs
Thus Marsha has 14 DVDs.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 620 Q6

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 620 Q7

Question 8.
Carla uses 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of flour and 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of sugar in her cookie recipe. How many cups does she use in all?
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) cups

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups

Explanation:
Given:
Carla uses 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of flour and 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of sugar in her cookie recipe.
Add 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) and 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
2 + 1 + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)
3 + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)
3 + \(\frac{9}{8}\)
3 + 1\(\frac{1}{8}\)
3 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
4 \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups

Question 9.
Tony needs 16-inch-long pieces of gold chain to make each of 3 necklaces. He has a piece of chain that is 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet long. How much chain will he have left after making the necklaces?
Options:
a. 6 inches
b. 12 inches
c. 18 inches
d. 24 inches

Answer: 6 inches

Explanation:
Given that,
Tony needs 16-inch-long pieces of gold chain to make each of 3 necklaces.
He has a piece of chain that is 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet long.
Converting from feet to inches.
1 foot = 12 inches
4 feet = 12 × 4 = 48 inches
1/2 feet = 6 inches
48 + 6 = 54 inches
Tony needs 16-inch-long pieces of gold chain to make each of 3 necklaces.
16 × 3 = 48
54 inches – 48 inches = 6 inches
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Share and Show – Lesson 7: Elapsed Time – Page No. 625

Convert.

Question 1.
540 min = _____ hr

Answer: 9 hr

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to hours.
1 hour = 60 min
1 min = 1/60 hour
540 min = 540 × 1/60 hour = 9 hour
540 min = 9 hr

Question 2.
8 d = _____ hr

Answer: 192 hr

Explanation:
Convert from days to hours.
1 day = 24 hours
8 days = 8 × 24 hr = 192 hr
8 d = 192 hr

Question 3.
110 hr = _____ d _____ hr

Answer: 4 d 14 hr

Explanation:
Convert from hours to days.
110 hr = 96 hr + 14 hr
1 day = 24 hour
96 hours = 96/24 = 4 days
110 hour = 4 d 14 hr

Find the end time.

Question 4.
Start time: 9:17 A.M.
Elapsed time: 5 hr 18 min
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 7: Elapsed Time img 14
End time: _____ : _____ P.M.

Answer: 2:35 P.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
Add the hours to the start time.
10:17 A.M
11:17 A.M.
12:17 A.M.
1:17 A.M.
2:17 A.M.
Next, add the minutes.
x = 2:17 P.M. + 0:18 min = 2:35 P.M
Thus the end time is 2:35 P.M

On Your Own

Convert.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 625 Q5

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 625 Q6

Question 7.
1 hr = _____ sec

Answer: 3600 sec

Explanation:
1 hour = 60 min
1 min = 60 sec
60 min = 60 × 60 sec = 3600 sec
1 hour = 3600 sec

Question 8.
3 yr = _____ d

Answer: 1095 d

Explanation:
Convert from years to days.
1 year = 365 days
3 years = 3 × 365 = 1095 days
So, 3 yr = 1095 d

Question 9.
208 wk = _____ yr

Answer: 4 yr

Explanation:
Convert weeks to years.
1 year = 52 weeks
1 week = 1/52 yr
208 wk = 208 × 1/52 yr = 4 yr
208 wk = 4 yr

Question 10.
350 min = _____ hr _____ min

Answer: 5 hr 50 min

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to hours.
60 min = 1 hour
1 min = 1/60 hour
Add hours
60 min =1 hr
120 min = 2 hr
180 min = 3 hr
240 min = 4 hr
300 min = 5 hr
360 min = 6 hr
350 min = 300 min + 50 min
350 min = 5 hr 50 min

Find the start, elapsed, or end time.

Question 11.
Start time: 11:38 A.M.
Elapsed time: 3 hr 10 min
End time: _____ : _____ P.M.

Answer: 2:48 P.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
Add the hours to the start time.
12:38 pm
1:38 pm
2:38 pm
Add the minutes next.
x = 2:38 pm + 10 min = 2:48 pm
Thus the end time is 2:48 P.M.

Question 12.
Elapsed time: 2 hr 37 min
End time: 1:15 P.M.
Start time: _____ : _____ A.M.

Answer: 10:38 A.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
x = 0:15 min – 0:37 min
x = -0:22 min
y = 60 min – 22 min = 38 min
time = 12:38 pm
Next subtract the hours from the time.
11:38 am
10:38 am
Thus the start time is 10:38 A.M.

Question 13.
Elapsed time: 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hr
End time: 5:30 P.M.
Start time: _____ : _____ P.M.

Answer: 3:15 P.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
x = 30 min – 15 min = 15 min
time 5:30
subtract the hours
5:30 pm
4:30 pm
3:30 pm
y = 3:30 pm – 15 min = 3:15 P.M
Thus the start time is 3:15 P.M.

Question 14.
Start time: 7:41 P.M.
End time: 8:50 P.M.
Elapsed time: _____ hr _____ min

Answer: 1 hr 9 min

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
x = 50 min – 41 min = 9 min
subtract the hours
8 – 7 = 1 hour
1 hour 9 min
Elapsed time: 1 hour 9 min

Problem Solving – Lesson 7: Elapsed Time – Page No. 626

For 15–17, use the graph.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 7: Elapsed Time img 15

Question 15.
Which Internet services downloaded the podcast in less than 4 minutes?
_________
_________

Answer:
Groove Box
Internet -C

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can observe that the Internet services downloaded the podcast in less than 4 minutes is Groove Box and Internet -C
Groove box took 173 sec and Internet-C took 196 seconds.
Convert from minutes to seconds
1 min = 60 sec
1 sec= 1/60 min
173 sec = 2 min 53 sec
196 sec = 180 sec + 16 sec = 3 min 16 sec

Question 16.
Which service took the longest to download the podcast? How much longer did it take than Red Fox in minutes and seconds?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Top Hat

Explanation:
The figure shows that Top Hat took the longest time to download the podcast.
It took 1050 sec to download the podcast.
Convert from minutes to seconds
1 min = 60 sec
1 sec= 1/60 min
1050 sec = 1020 sec 30 sec
1020 sec = 1020 × 1/60 min = 17 min
1050 sec = 17 min 30 sec.
To find how much time it took than Red Fox, we need to subtract the time from red fox and top hat.
1050 sec – 310 sec = 740 sec
Convert from seconds to minutes.
1 min = 60 sec
1 sec = 1/60 min
740 sec = 720 + 20 sec
720 sec = 720 × 1/60 = 12 min
740 sec = 12 min 20 sec

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 626 Q17

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 626 Q18

Question 19.
Test Prep Samit and his friends went to a movie at 7:30 P.M. The movie ended at 9:55 P.M. How long was the movie?
Options:
a. 2 hours 25 minutes
b. 2 hours 5 minutes
c. 1 hour 25 minutes
d. 1 hour 5 minutes

Answer: 2 hours 25 minutes

Explanation:
Samit and his friends went to a movie at 7:30 P.M. The movie ended at 9:55 P.M.
Subtract the starting time and ending time of the movie.
9 hour 55 min
-7 hour 30 min
2 hour 25 min
Therefore the movie is 2hr 25 min long.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Chapter Review/Test – Vocabulary – Page No. 4350

Choose the best term from the box.

Question 1.
A metric unit of mass that is equal to \(\frac{1}{1,000}\) of a gram is called a ________.
___________

Answer: Milligram
A metric unit of mass that is equal to \(\frac{1}{1,000}\) of a gram is called a Milligram.

Question 2.
A metric unit for measuring length that is equal to 10 meters is called a _________.
___________

Answer: Dekameter
A metric unit for measuring length that is equal to 10 meters is called a Dekameter.

Concepts and Skills

Convert.

Question 3.
96 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 6 lb

Explanation:
Convert from ounces to pounds.
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 pound
96 oz = 96 × 1/16 lb = 6 lb
96 oz = 16 lb

Question 4.
5 kg = ______ g

Answer: 5000 g

Explanation:
Convert from kg to grams.
1 kg = 1000 g
5 kg = 5 × 1000 g = 5000 g
5 kg = 5000 g
Thus 5 kg = 5000 grams

Question 5.
500 min = ______ hr ______ min

Answer: 8 hr 20 min

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to hours.
1 hour = 60 min
1 min = 1/60 hour
500 min = 500 × 1/60
500 min = 480 min + 20 min
That means 480 × 1/60 + 20 min
= 8 hour 20 min
500 min = 8 hour 20 min

Question 6.
65 yd 2 feet = ______ ft

Answer: 197 ft

Explanation:
65 yd 2 feet
Convert from yard to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
65 yard = 65 × 3 feet = 195 feet + 2 feet = 197 feet
65 yd 2 feet = 197 feet

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 7.
7 wk ______ 52 d

Answer: 7 wk < 52 d

Explanation:
First, convert from weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
7 weeks = 7 × 7 = 49 days
49 is less than 52 days
Thus 7 wk < 52 d

Question 8.
4 L ______ 3,000 mL

Answer: 4 L > 3,000 mL

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters.
1 L = 1000 mL
4 L = 4 × 1000 mL = 4000 mL
4000 mL is greater than 3000 mL
Thus, 4 L > 3,000 mL

Question 9.
72 in. ______ 2 yd

Answer: 72 in. = 2 yd

Explanation:
Convert from inches to yards.
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 3 × 12 in. = 36 in.
2 yards = 2 × 36 in. = 72 in.
Thus, 72 in. = 2 yd

Solve.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 4350 Q10

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4360

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 11.
Howard cuts 54 centimeters off a 1-meter board. How much of the board does Howard have left?
Options:
a. 53 centimeters
b. 53 meters
c. 46 meters
d. 46 centimeters

Answer: 46 centimeters

Explanation:
Given that,
Howard cuts 54 centimeters off a 1-meter board.
We know that,
1 meter = 100 cm
100 cm – 54 cm = 46 cm
Therefore, 46 centimeters of the board is left.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 12.
Joe’s dog has a mass of 28,000 grams. What is the mass of Joe’s dog in kilograms?
Options:
a. 2,800 kilograms
b. 280 kilograms
c. 28 kilograms
d. 2.8 kilograms

Answer: 28 kilograms

Explanation:
Joe’s dog has a mass of 28,000 grams.
Convert from grams into the kilograms
1 kg = 1000 g
1 g = 1/1000 kg
28000 g = 28000 × 1/1000 = 28 kg
The mass of Joe’s dog is 28 kg.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 13.
Cathy drank 600 milliliters of water at school and another 400 milliliters at home. How many liters of water did Cathy drink?
Options:
a. 1,000 liters
b. 100 liters
c. 10 liters
d. 1 liter

Answer: 1 liter

Explanation:
Cathy drank 600 milliliters of water at school and another 400 milliliters at home.
600 milliliters + 400 milliliters = 1000 milliliters
We know that,
1 litre = 1000 milliliters
Therefore Cathy drink 1 liter of water.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 14.
Mr. Banks left work at 5:15 P.M. It took him 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours to drive home. At what time did Mr. Banks arrive home?
Options:
a. 6:15 P.M.
b. 6:30 P.M.
c. 6:45 P.M.
d. 7:30 P.M.

Answer: 6:30 P.M.

Explanation:
Mr. Banks left work at 5:15 P.M. It took him 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours to drive home.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours = 1:15 hour
Add 5:15 P.M. with 1:15 hour
5 hour 15 mins
1 hour 15 mins
6 hour 30 mins
Therefore, Mr. Banks arrives home at 6:30 P.M.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4370

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 15.
A turtle walks 12 feet in one hour. How many inches does the turtle walk in one hour?
Options:
a. 12 inches
b. 24 inches
c. 124 inches
d. 144 inches

Answer: 144 inches

Explanation:
Given that, A turtle walks 12 feet in one hour.
Convert from 1 foot to inches.
1 foot = 12 inches
12 feet = 12 × 12 inches = 144 inches
The turtle walks 144 inches in an hour.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 16.
Jason and Doug competed in the long jump at a track meet. Jason’s long jump was 98 inches. Doug’s long jump was 3 yards. How much longer was Doug’s jump than Jason’s jump?
Options:
a. 1 inch
b. 10 inches
c. 12 inches
d. 20 inches

Answer: 10 inches

Explanation:
Jason and Doug competed in the long jump at a track meet.
Jason’s long jump was 98 inches.
Doug’s long jump was 3 yards.
1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 9 feet
9 feet = 9 × 12 = 108 inches
108 inches – 98 inches = 10 inches
Doug’s jump 10 inches longer than Jason’s jump.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 17.
Sarita used 54 ounces of apples to make an apple pie. How many pounds and ounces of apples did Sarita use?
Options:
a. 2 pounds 6 ounces
b. 3 pounds 6 ounces
c. 4 pounds 6 ounces
d. 8 pounds 6 ounces

Answer: 3 pounds 6 ounces

Explanation:
Sarita used 54 ounces of apples to make an apple pie.
Converting from ounces to pounds
We know that,
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 pound
48 ounce + 6 ounce = 56 ounces
48 ounces = 48 × 1/16 pound = 3 pound
3 pound 6 ounces
Sarita uses 3 pounds 6 ounces of apples.
Therefore the correct answer is option B.

Question 18.
Morgan measures the capacity of a juice glass to be 12 fluid ounces. If she uses the glass to drink 4 glasses of water throughout the day, how many pints of water does Morgan drink?
Options:
a. 3 pints
b. 6 pints
c. 24 pints
d. 48 pints

Answer: 3 pints

Explanation:
3 pints because 12× 4 is 48 and 48 divided by 8 is 6 so then there are 6 cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
So, 6 cups = 3 × 2 pints
6 cups make 3 pints.
Thus Morgan drinks 3 pints of water.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4380

Constructed Response

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 4380 Q19

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Page 4380 Q20

Performance Task

Question 21.
The Drama Club is showing a video of their recent play. The first showing began at 2:30 P.M. The second showing was scheduled to start at 5:25 P.M. with a \(\frac{1}{2}\)-hour break between the showings.
A). How long is the video in hours and minutes?
______ hours and ______ minutes

Answer: 2 hour 25 minutes

Explanation:
The Drama Club is showing a video of their recent play.
The first showing began at 2:30 P.M.
The second showing was scheduled to start at 5:25 P.M. with a \(\frac{1}{2}\)-hour break between the showings.
5 hour 25 minutes
2 hour 30 minutes

4 hour 85 minutes
2 hour 30 minutes
2 hour 55 minutes
\(\frac{1}{2}\)-hour break
2 hour 55 minutes
– 0 hour 30 minutes
2 hour 25 minutes

Question 21.
B). Explain how you can use a number line to find the answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Question 21.
C). The second showing started 20 minutes late. Will the second showing be over by 7:45 P.M.? Explain why your answer is reasonable.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:
If the show starts 20 minutes late that means at 5:45 P.M then it will not end at 7:45 P.M.
5:45 P.M + 2:25 = 8:15 P.M.
So, the answer is no.

Conclusion

I wish the knowledge shared in this article on Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 10 Answer Key Convert Units of Measure has helped you a lot. Assess your preparation level by solving problems from Mid Chapter Checkpoint and Review Test. Refer to the Detailed Solutions Provided and understand where you are lagging.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions

go-math-grade-5-chapter-8-divide-fractions-answer-key

Gain Complete Knowledge required on the Concept Divide Fractions by accessing our Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8. You will have Questions belonging to practice problems, mid-chapter, and review tests along with detailed explanations. Those, who are in search of Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key can download them free of cost.

We have compiled HMH 5th Grade Go Math Answer Key Ch 8 Dividing Fractions with Step by Step Solutions making it easy to grab the concepts within easily. Tap on the direct links available for Lessons of Ch 8 Dividing Fractions to get the problems related to them instantly.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions

Score better grades in your exams by practicing from the HMH Go Math 5th Grade Solution Key. Firstly, solve the problems on your own and later cross-check them with the Solutions Provided and improve your Math Skills. You will have topics like Divide Fractions and Whole Numbers, Interpret Division with Fractions and Fraction, Connect Fractions to Division, and Whole-Number Division.

Lesson 1: Investigate • Divide Fractions and Whole Numbers

Lesson 2: Problem Solving • Use Multiplication

Lesson 3: Connect Fractions to Division

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 4: Fraction and Whole-Number Division

Lesson 5: Interpret Division with Fractions

Chapter 8: Review/Test

Share and Show – Page No. 341

Divide and check the quotient.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 1
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = _____ because _____ × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Answer: 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 9 because 9 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{3}\) strip under a three 1 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Step 2: Find 9 fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{3}\) strip.
Each piece is \(\frac{1}{3}\) of the whole.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 9 because 9 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 2
Think: What label should I write for each tick mark?
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\) = _____ because _____ × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 3

Answer: 18, 18

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by sixths from 0 to 3 find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\).
Step 2: There are 18 one-sixths in 3 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Now record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 18 because 18 × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 3

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 3
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip under a 1 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{4}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 2 \(\frac{1}{8}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Divide. Draw a number line or use fraction strips.

Question 4.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = _____

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by thirds from 0 to 1 find 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Step 2: There are 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\) in 1 whole.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Now record and check the quotient.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Question 5.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = _____

Answer: 12

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by fourths from 0 to 3 and find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Step 2: There are 12 one-fourths in 3 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Now record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 12 because 12 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 3

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 341 Q6

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 341 Q7

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip under a 3 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{4}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 3 \(\frac{1}{12}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 9.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = _____

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by halves from 0 to 5 find 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Step 2: There are 10 halves in 5 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 10 because 10 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 5

Question 10.
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = _____

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by halves from 0 to 4 find 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Step 2: There are 8 halves in 4 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 8 because 8 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 4

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 341 Q11

Question 12.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = _____

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by fifths from 0 to 3 find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
Step 2: There are 15 one fifths in 3 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 15 because 15 × \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 3

Problem Solving – Page No. 342

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 13.
Emilio and Julia used different ways to find \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4. Emilio used a model to find the quotient. Julia used a related multiplication equation to find the quotient. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Emilio’s Work
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 4
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4

Julia’s Work
If \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4 = ■, then ■ × 4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
I know that \(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So, \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{8}\) because \(\frac{1}{8}\) × 4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Julia’s Work is sense.
Emilio’s work is nonsense.

Question 13.
• For the answer that is nonsense, describe how to find the correct answer.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Emilio’s work is nonsense becuase she divided \(\frac{1}{2}\) into two parts i.e., \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\).
\(\frac{1}{2}\)/4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Emilio must multiply the whole number with the denominator.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 13.
If you were going to find \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5, explain how you would find the quotient using fraction strips.
Type below:
____________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{2}\) strip under a 5 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{2}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 2 \(\frac{1}{10}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{2}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Share and Show – Page No. 345

Question 1.
A chef has 5 blocks of butter. Each block weighs 1 pound.
She cuts each block into fourths. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound pieces of butter does the chef have?
First, draw rectangles to represent the blocks of butter.
Then, divide each rectangle into fourths.
Finally, multiply the number of fourths in each block by the number of blocks.
So, the chef has ______ one-fourth-pound pieces of butter.
______ one-fourth-pound

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Step 1: First form 5 rectangles to represent the blocks of butter. And then divide each rectangle into fourths.
Step 2: Now we will multiply the number of fourths in each block by the number of blocks.
Multiply the fourths with the whole number.
4 × 5 = 20
Thus the chef has 20 one-fourth-pound pieces of butter.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 345 Q2

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 345 Q3

Question 4.
Thomas makes 5 sandwiches that he cuts into thirds. How many \(\frac{1}{3}\)-size sandwich pieces does he have?
______ \(\frac{1}{3}\)-size sandwich pieces

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Step 1: First, draw 5 rectangles to represent sandwiches. Then divide each rectangle into thirds.
Step 2: Multiply one third with the number of sandwiches.
3 × 5 = 15
Thomas has 15 one-third sandwich pieces.

Question 5.
Holly cuts 3 pans of brownies into eighths. How many \(\frac{1}{8}\)-size brownie pieces does she have?
______ \(\frac{1}{8}\)-size brownie pieces

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Step 1: First draw 3 rectangles to represent the ribbons. Then divide each rectangle into the pieces.
Step 2: Now multiply the Number of eights with the number of ribbons.
8 × 3 = 24
Thus Holy has 24 one eighths pieces of ribbon.

On Your Own – Page No. 346

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 346 Q6

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 346 Q7

Question 8.
Brianna has a sheet of paper that is 6 feet long. She cuts the length of paper into sixths and then cuts the length of each of these \(\frac{1}{6}\) pieces into thirds. How many pieces does she have? How many inches long is each piece?
______ pieces , each ______ inches long

Answer: 18 pieces, each 0.33 inches long

Explanation:
Brianna has a sheet of paper that is 6 feet long.
She cuts the length of paper into sixths and then cuts the length of each of these \(\frac{1}{6}\) pieces into thirds.
Then we will count the one-third pieces to find how many she has.
6 feet ÷18 = 0.33 feet
So, each piece is 0.33 feet long.

Question 9.
Pose a Problem Look back at Problem 8. Write a similar problem by changing the length of the paper and the size of the pieces.
Type below:
____________

Answer:

Explanation:
John has a tree that is 10 feet long. She cuts the length of the tree into tenth and then cuts the length of each of these 1/10 pieces into fourth. How many pieces does he have? How many feet long is each piece?
Answer:
First, draw one rectangle to represent the tree. Then divide this rectangle into tenths, and then we will divide each 1/10 piece into fourths.
Then we will count one-fourth pieces to find how many pieces he has.
1 tree = 10 feet
10 feet ÷ 40 = 0.4 feet
So, each piece is 0.4 feet long.

Question 10.
Test Prep Adrian made 3 carrot cakes. He cut each cake into fourths. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size cake pieces does he have?
Options:
a. 16
b. 12
c. 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
d. 1

Answer: 12

Explanation:
Test Prep Adrian made 3 carrot cakes.
He cut each cake into fourths.
Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions image_1
By seeing the above figure we can say that Adrian has 12 one-quarter-size pieces of a granola bar.

Share and Show – Page No. 349

Draw lines on the model to complete the number sentence.

Question 1.
Six friends share 4 pizzas equally.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 5
4 ÷ 6 =
Each friend’s share is _____ of a pizza.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a pizza.

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Draw lines to divide each pizza into 4 equal pieces.
Each friend gets \(\frac{2}{3}\) of a pizza.
4 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Each friend’s share is \(\frac{2}{3}\) of a pizza.

Question 2.
Four brothers share 5 sandwiches equally.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 6
5 ÷ 4 =
Each brother’s share is ____ sandwiches.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) sandwiches

Answer: \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Explanation:
Draw lines to divide each sandwich into 4 equal pieces.
Divide the number of brothers by the total number of sandwiches.
5 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
Each brother’s share is \(\frac{5}{4}\) sandwiches.

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 349 Q3

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 349 Q4

On Your Own

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Question 5.
Four students share 7 oranges equally. How many oranges does each student get?
7 ÷ 4 =
Each student’s share is _____ oranges.
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) oranges

Answer: 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Four students share 7 oranges equally.
Draw lines to divide each orange into 4 equal pieces.
7 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{7}{4}\)
Convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{7}{4}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Each student’s share is 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) oranges.

Question 6.
Eight girls share 5 fruit bars equally. What fraction of a fruit bar does each girl get?
5 ÷ 8 =
Each girl’s share is _____ of a fruit bar.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a fruit bar

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given that,
Eight girls share 5 fruit bars equally.
5 ÷ 8 = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Thus the fraction of the fruit bar each friend gets is \(\frac{5}{8}\).

Question 7.
Nine friends share 6 pizzas equally. What fraction of a pizza does each friend get?
6 ÷ 9 =
Each friend’s share is _ of a pizza.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a pizza

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Nine friends share 6 pizzas equally.
Draw lines to divide each pizza into 9 pieces.
6 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus each friend’s share is \(\frac{2}{3}\) of a pizza.

Question 8.
Two boys share 9 feet of rope equally. How many feet of rope does each boy get?
9 ÷ 2 =
Each boy’s share is ____ feet of rope.
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) feet of rope

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Two boys share 9 feet of rope equally.
Divide nine into halves.
9 ÷ 2 = \(\frac{9}{2}\)
\(\frac{9}{2}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Problem Solving – Page No. 350

Question 9.
Shawna has 3 adults and 2 children coming over for dessert. She is going to serve 2 small apple pies. If she plans to give each person, including herself, an equal amount of pie, how much pie will each person get?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 7
\(\frac{□}{□}\) pie

Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) pie

Explanation:
To find how much pie each person will get, we will find when 2 small apple pies we will divide by 6 persons.
2 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Therefore each person will get \(\frac{1}{3}\) pie.

Question 10.
There are 36 members in the math club. Addison brought 81 brownies to share with all the members. How many brownies does each member get?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) brownies

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given that, There are 36 members in the math club.
Addison brought 81 brownies to share with all the members.
Dividing the number of brownies by members in the math club.
81 ÷ 36 = \(\frac{81}{36}\) = \(\frac{9}{4}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{9}{4}\) is 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus each member gets 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) brownies.

Question 11.
Eight students share 12 oatmeal muffins equally and 6 students share 15 apple muffins equally. Carmine is in both groups of students. What is the total number of muffins Carmine gets?
______ muffins

Answer: 4 muffins

Explanation:
Since Carmine is in both groups of students, for first we will find out how many each student of each group gets.
Now we will find how many oatmeal muffins each of the 8 students get, we will divide the 12 oatmeal muffins by the 8 students.
12 ÷ 8 = \(\frac{12}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
\(\frac{3}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So, each student shares 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) oatmeal muffins.
To find how many apple muffins each of the 6 students get we will divide the 15 apple muffins by the 6 students.
15 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{15}{6}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
\(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
As Carmine is in both groups we need to add the total number of muffins
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)  + 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 4
Therefore the total number of muffins Carmine gets is 4.

Question 12.
Nine friends order 4 large pizzas. Four of the friends share 2 pizzas equally and the other 5 friends share 2 pizzas equally. In which group does each member get a greater amount of pizza? Explain your reasoning.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
To find in which group each member get a greater amount of pizza, for first, we will find how many each of the friends gets.
Given that 4 friends share 2 pizzas equally, so to find how many pizzas each of the 4 students get, we will find when dividing the 2 pizzas among 4 friends.
2 ÷ 4 = 2/4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
In this group, each student’s share is \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the pizza.
The other 5 friends share 2 pizzas equally, so to find out how many pizzas each of the 5 students get, we will find when we divide the 2 pizza among 5 friends.
2 ÷ 5 = \(\frac{2}{5}\)
In this group, each student’s share is \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the pizza.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{2}{5}\) so as a group with four members get a greater amount of pizza.

Question 13.
Test Prep Jason baked 5 cherry pies. He wants to share them equally among 3 of his neighbors. How many pies will each neighbor get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{5}\)
c. 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
d. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
To find how many pies each neighbor we have to divide number of cherry pies by number of neighbor.
5 ÷ 3 = \(\frac{5}{3}\)
Convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{5}{3}\) = 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 351

Concepts and Skills

Question 1.
Explain how you can tell, without computing, whether the quotient \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 6 is greater than 1 or less than 1.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 6 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)
\(\frac{1}{12}\) is less than 1.

Divide. Draw a number line or use fraction strips.

Question 2.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
______

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 3. Label each half on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by halves from 0 to 3 to find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 6 because 6 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 3

Question 3.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
______

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 1. Label each fourth on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by fourths from 0 to 1 to find 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 4 because 4 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 1

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 351 Q4

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 351 Q5

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 351 Q6

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip under a 3 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{4}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 12 \(\frac{1}{4}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Question 8.
Two students share 3 granola bars equally. How many granola bars does each student get?
3 ÷ 2 = ______
Each student’s share is ______ granola bars.
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) granola bars

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Given that Two students share 3 granola bars equally.
Divide the number of granola bars by 2.
3 ÷ 2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Convert the improper fraction into the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{3}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus each student’s share is 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) granola bars.

Question 9.
Five girls share 4 sandwiches equally. What fraction of a sandwich does each girl get?
4 ÷ 5 = _____
Each girl’s share is ______ of a sandwich.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a sandwich

Answer: \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given that, Five girls share 4 sandwiches equally.
Dividing the number of sandwiches by five girls.
4 ÷ 5 = \(\frac{4}{5}\)
Each girl’s share is \(\frac{4}{5}\) of a sandwich.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 351 Q10
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 351 Q10.1

Question 11.
Four friends share 10 fruit bars equally. How many fruit bars does each friend get?
10 ÷ 4 = _____
Each friend’s share is _____ fruit bars.
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) fruit bars

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Given, Four friends share 10 fruit bars equally.
Dividing the number of fruit bars by the number of friends.
10 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{10}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
Convert the improper fraction into the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 352

Question 12.
Mateo has 8 liters of punch for a party. Each glass holds \(\frac{1}{5}\) liter of punch. How many glasses can Mateo fill with a punch?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 8
______ glasses

Answer: 40

Explanation:
Draw the rectangle that represents the number of liters.
Each rectangle is equal to 1 liter.
Each rectangle contains a one-fifth liter of punch.
Now multiply the fifths with the number of liters.
8 × 5 = 40
40 glasses can Mateo fill with a punch.

Question 13.
Four friends share 3 sheets of construction paper equally. What fraction of a sheet of paper does each friend get?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 9
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
The rectangle represents the sheet of construction paper.
Divide each rectangle into fourths.
3 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Each friend gets \(\frac{3}{4}\) sheet of paper.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 352 Q14

Question 15.
Toni and Makayla are working on a craft project. Makayla has 3 yards of ribbon and Toni has 4 yards of ribbon. They cut all the ribbon into pieces that are \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard long. How many pieces of ribbon do they have?
Makayla: __________ pieces of ribbon
Toni: __________ pieces of ribbon

Answer:
Makayla: 12 pieces of ribbon
Toni: 16 pieces of ribbon

Explanation:
Toni and Makayla are working on a craft project.
Makayla has 3 yards of ribbon and Toni has 4 yards of ribbon.
They cut all the ribbon into pieces that are \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard long.
Now multiply the number of yards of ribbon that Makayla has with \(\frac{1}{4}\)
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 12 pieces of ribbon
Multiply the number of yards of ribbon that Toni has with \(\frac{1}{4}\)
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 16 pieces of ribbon

Share and Show – Page No. 355

Question 1.
Use the model to complete the number sentence.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 10
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 2 × ______ = ______

Answer: 2 × 4 = 8

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles and divide each rectangle into fourths.
  • When you divide 1 rectangle into fourths, you find the number of fourths in 2 rectangles.
  • There are 2 groups of rectangles. There are 8 fourths
  • Complete the number sentence.

Question 2.
Use the model to complete the number sentence.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 11
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2 = _ × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = _
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:

  • Draw the rectangle and divide the rectangle into sixths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 2 equal parts. You can find 12 sixths.
  • In the figure, you can see one shaded part in the rectangle.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Write a related multiplication sentence to solve.

Question 3.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
______

Answer: 12

Explanation:

  • Draw 3 rectangles and divide each rectangle into fourths.
  • When you divide 1 rectangle into fourths, you find the number of fourths in 3 rectangles.
  • There are 3 groups of rectangles. There are 12 fourths
  • Complete the number sentence.

3 × 4 = 12
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 12

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Explanation:

  • Draw the rectangle and divide the rectangle into fifths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts. You can find 20-fifths.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{20}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 355 Q5

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 355 Q6

On Your Own

Write a related multiplication sentence to solve.

Question 7.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
______

Answer: 15

Explanation:

  • Draw 5 rectangles and divide each rectangle into thirds.
  • When you divide 5 rectangles into halves, you find the number of thirds in 5 rectangles.
  • There are 5 groups of rectangles. There are 15-thirds.
  • Complete the number sentence.

5 × 3 = 15
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 15

Question 8.
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
______

Answer: 16

Explanation:

  • Draw 8 rectangles and divide each rectangle into halves.
  • When you divide 8 rectangles into halves, you find the number of thirds in 8 rectangles.
  • There are 8 groups of rectangles. There are 16 halves.
  • Complete the number sentence.

8 × 2 = 16
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 16

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{28}\)

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4

  • Draw 4 rectangles and divide the rectangle into sevenths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts. You can find 28 sevenths.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{7}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{28}\)
Thus, \(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{28}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9

  • Draw 9 rectangles and divide the rectangle into halves.
  • The rectangle is divided into 9 equal parts. You can find 18 halves.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{9}\) = \(\frac{1}{18}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4

  • Draw 4 rectangles and divide the rectangle into thirds.
  • The rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts. You can find 12 thirds.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 12
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{48}\)

Explanation:

  • Draw 12 rectangles and divide the rectangle into fourths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 12 equal parts. You can find 48 thirds.
  • Complete the number sentence.
    \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 12 = \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{1}{48}\)

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 355 Q13

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 355 Q14

UNLOCK the Problem – Page No. 356

Question 15.
The slowest mammal is the three-toed sloth. The top speed of a three-toed sloth on the ground is about \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot per second. The top speed of a giant tortoise on the ground is about \(\frac{1}{3}\) foot per second. How much longer would it take a three-toed sloth than a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet on the ground?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 12
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
__________

Answer: We Need to find How much longer would it take a three-toed sloth than a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet on the ground.

Question 15.
b. What operations will you use to solve the problem?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The operations which we will use is:
Multiplication to find how many seconds three-toed sloth tortoise need to travel 10 feet.
Subtraction to finds how second longer need three-toed to travel 10 feet.

Question 15.
c. Show the steps you used to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To find how much longer would it take a three-toed sloth than a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet on the ground, for first we will find how much seconds a three-toed sloth and giant tortoise need to travel 10 feet.
The top speed of a three-toed sloth on the ground is about 1/4 foot per second, so to find how much seconds need a three-toed sloth to travel 10 feet we will find as:
10 feet ÷ 1/4 foot per second = 10 × 4 = 40 seconds
The top speed of a giant tortoise on the ground is about 1/3 foot per second, so to find how much seconds need a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet we will find as:
10 feet ÷ 1/3 foot per second = 10 × 3 = 30 seconds

Question 15.
d. Complete the sentences.
A three-toed sloth would travel 10 feet in _____ seconds.
A giant tortoise would travel 10 feet in _____ seconds.
Since _____ – _____ = _____, it would take a three-toed sloth _____ seconds longer to travel 10 feet.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
A three-toed sloth would travel 10 feet in 40 seconds.
A giant tortoise would travel 10 feet in 30 seconds.
Since 4030 = 10, it would take a three-toed sloth 10 seconds longer to travel 10 feet.

Question 15.
e. Fill in the bubble for the correct answer choice.
Options:
a. 10 seconds
b. 30 seconds
c. 40 seconds
d. 70 seconds

Answer: 10 seconds

Explanation:
A three-toed sloth would travel 10 feet in 40 seconds.
A giant tortoise would travel 10 feet in 30 seconds.
Since 40 – 30 = 10, it would take a three-toed sloth 10 seconds longer to travel 10 feet.
The correct answer is option A.

Question 16.
Robert divides 8 cups of almonds into \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup servings. How many servings does he have?
Options:
a. 1
b. 16
c. 8
d. 64

Answer: 64

Explanation:
Robert divides 8 cups of almonds into \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup servings.
8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\)
8 × 8 = 64
Thus robert has 64 servings.
The correct answer is option D.

Question 17.
Tina cuts \(\frac{1}{3}\) yard of fabric into 4 equal parts. What is the length of each part?
Options:
a. 12 yards
b. 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\) yards
d. \(\frac{1}{12}\) yards

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\) yards

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\) yards
The correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Page No. 359

Question 1.
Complete the story problem to represent 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Carmen has a roll of paper that is ______ feet long. She cuts the paper into pieces that are each ______ foot long. How many pieces of paper does Carmen have?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
3 × 4 = 12
Carmen has a roll of paper that is 3 feet long.
She cuts the paper into pieces that are each \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot long.

Question 2.
Draw a diagram to represent the problem. Then solve. April has 6 fruit bars. She cuts the bars into halves. How many \(\frac{1}{2}\)-size bar pieces does she have?
_____ \(\frac{1}{2}\)-size bar pieces

Answer:
First, draw 6 rectangles that represent fruit bars.
Now divide each fruit bar into halves.
Dividing 6 fruit bards by halves.
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 12
Thus she has 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\)-size bar pieces

Question 3.
Write an equation to represent the problem. Then solve. Two friends share \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a large peach pie. What fraction of the whole pie does each friend get?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given that, Two friends share \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a large peach pie.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Thus the fraction of the whole pie each friend gets is \(\frac{1}{8}\).

On Your Own

Question 4.
Write an equation to represent the problem. Then solve.
Benito has \(\frac{1}{3}\) -kilogram of grapes. He divides the grapes equally into 3 bags. What fraction of a kilogram of grapes is in each bag?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Explanation:
Given:
Benito has \(\frac{1}{3}\) -kilogram of grapes. He divides the grapes equally into 3 bags.
The equation for the division is,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{9}\)
\(\frac{1}{9}\) of a kilogram of grapes is in each bag.

Question 5.
Draw a diagram to represent the problem. Then solve.
Sonya has 5 sandwiches. She cuts each sandwich into fourths. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size sandwich pieces does she have?
_____ \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size sandwich pieces

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Given,
Sonya has 5 sandwiches. She cuts each sandwich into fourths.
Dividing the number of sandwiches by fourths.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 5 × 4 = 20
Thus she has 20 \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size sandwich pieces.

Question 6.
Write a story problem to represent 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{8}\). Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Erica makes 2 sandwiches and cuts each sandwich into eighths. How many \(\frac{1}{8}\) size sandwich pieces does she have?
Answer: 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{8}\)
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 16 because 16 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 2

Problem Solving – Page No. 360

Pose a Problem

Question 7.
Amy wrote the following problem to represent 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\) .
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 13
Jacob has a board that is 4 feet long. He cuts the board into pieces that are each \(\frac{1}{6}\) foot long. How many pieces does Jacob have now?
Then Amy drew this diagram to solve her problem.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 14
So, Jacob has 24 pieces.
Write a new problem using a different item to be divided and different fractional pieces. Then draw a diagram to solve your problem.
Pose a problem.                           Draw a diagram to solve your problem.
Type below:
__________

Question 8.
Test Prep Melvin has \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a gallon of fruit punch. He shares the punch equally with each of 2 friends and himself. Which equation represents the fraction of a gallon of punch that each of the friends get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = n
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = n
c. 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = n
d. 3 ÷ 4 = n

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = n

Explanation:
Melvin has \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a gallon of fruit punch.
He shares the punch equally with each of 2 friends and himself.
The expressions which represents this are \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 or \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\).
So, the correct answers \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = n i.e., option B.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 361

Concepts and Skills

Divide. Draw a number line or use fraction strips.

Question 1.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = ______

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 2. Divide the number line into thirds. Label each third on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by thirds from 0 to 2 to find 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\).
There are 6 thirds in 2 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 6 because 6 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 2

Question 2.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = ______

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 1. Divide the number line into fifths. Label each fifth on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by fifths from 0 to 1 to find 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 5 because 5 × \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 1

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 3. Divide the number line into fourths. Label each fourth on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by fourth from 0 to 3 to find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Thus \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 361 Q4

Question 5.
Six girls share 5 pints of milk equally. What fraction of a pint of milk does each girl get?
5 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
Given that, Six girls share 5 pints of milk equally.
To find the fraction of a pint of milk each girl gets, we have to divide the pints of milk by the number of girls.
5 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus each girl get \(\frac{5}{6}\) pint of milk.

Write a related multiplication sentence to solve.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 361 Q6

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 9
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{27}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 9
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{9}\) = \(\frac{1}{27}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{27}\)

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 361 Q8

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Page 361 Q9

Question 10.
Write a story problem to represent \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3. Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 11.
Write a story problem to represent 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\). Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer: 6

Explanation:
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
3 × 2 = 6

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 362

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 12.
Michelle cuts \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard of ribbon into 4 equal pieces. What is the length of each piece?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{16}\) yard
b. \(\frac{1}{8}\) yard
c. 1 yard
d. 16 yard

Answer: \(\frac{1}{16}\) yard

Explanation:
Michelle cuts \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard of ribbon into 4 equal pieces.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{16}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 13.
Ashton picked 6 pounds of pecans. He wants to share the pecans equally among 5 of his neighbors. How many pounds of pecans will each neighbor get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{11}\) pound
b. \(\frac{5}{6}\) pound
c. 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds
d. 2 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds

Explanation:
Ashton picked 6 pounds of pecans.
He wants to share the pecans equally among 5 of his neighbors.
Divide the number of pounds by the number of neighbors.
= \(\frac{6}{5}\)
Now convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{6}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 14.
Isabella has 5 pounds of trail mix. She divides the mix into \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings does she have?
Options:
a. 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. 9
c. 16
d. 20

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Isabella has 5 pounds of trail mix.
She divides the mix into \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings.
5 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
Now convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{5}{4}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 15.
Melvin has \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a cake. He shares the cake equally with each of 2 friends and himself. Which equation represents the fraction of the whole cake that each of the friends get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = n
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3 = n
c. 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = n
d. 2 ÷ 3 = n

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3 = n

Explanation:
Melvin has \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a cake.
He shares the cake equally with each of 2 friends and himself.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) divided by 3.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3 = n
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 363

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 16.
Camille has 8 feet of rope. She cuts the rope into \(\frac{1}{3}\)-foot pieces for a science project. How many \(\frac{1}{3}\)-foot pieces of rope does she have?
Options:
a. 24
b. 8
c. 3
d. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Given,
Camille has 8 feet of rope.
She cuts the rope into \(\frac{1}{3}\)-foot pieces for a science project.
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 8 × 3 = 24
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 17.
Awan makes 3 sandwiches and cuts each sandwich into sixths. How many \(\frac{1}{6}\)-size sandwich pieces does he have?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b. 2
c. 9
d. 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Given that, Awan makes 3 sandwiches and cuts each sandwich into sixths.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\)
3/ \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 3 × 6 = 18
The correct answer is option D.

Question 18.
Eight students share 5 blocks of modeling clay equally. What fraction of one block of modeling clay does each student get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{40}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{8}\)
d. 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
Eight students share 5 blocks of modeling clay equally.
Divide number of students by the number of blocks.
8 ÷ 5 = \(\frac{8}{5}\)
Convert the fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{8}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
So, the correct answer is option D.

Question 19.
The diagram below represents which division problem?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions hapter Review/Test img 15
Options:
a. 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 5
c. 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5

Answer: 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
The figure above shows that there are 5 rectangles. Each rectangle is divided into three parts.
So, the fraction is one third.
Divide number of blocks by the number of thirds.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 364

Constructed Response

Question 20.
Dora buys one package each of the 1-pound, 2-pound, and 4-pound packages of ground beef to make hamburgers. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound hamburgers can she make? Show your work using words, pictures, or numbers.
Explain how you found your answer.
______ hamburgers

Answer: 28 hamburgers

Explanation:
Given:
Dora buys one package each of the 1-pound, 2-pound, and 4-pound packages of ground beef to make hamburgers.
Total number of pounds = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 pounds
Now divide number of pounds by \(\frac{1}{4}\)
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 28
Thus Dora can make 28 Hamburgers.

Performance Task

Question 21.
Suppose your teacher gives you the division problem 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
A). In the space below, draw a diagram to represent 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Draw 6 rectangles and divide each whole by one-fifths fractions.

Question 21.
B). Write a story problem to represent 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Kyra has 6 feet of rope. If she cuts the rope into \(\frac{1}{5}\) foot pieces for a project. How many \(\frac{1}{5}\)-foot pieces of rope does she have?

Question 21.
C). Use a related multiplication expression to solve your story problem.
Show your work.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The multiplication expression to solve the above problem is
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 6/\(\frac{1}{5}\) = 6 × 5 = 30

Question 21.
D). Write a division problem that shows a unit fraction divided by a whole number. Write a story problem to represent your division problem. Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Isabella has 7 pounds of trail mix. She divides the mix into \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings does she have?

Conclusion

Hoping that Go Math Grade 5 Answer Chapter 8 Divide Fractions has helped you to resolve your queries on time. Get a good hold of the concepts and attempt the final exams with confidence. To know more about such related concepts stay connected to our site on a regular basis.